NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS &

TECHNOLOGY

Research Information Center

Gaithersburg, MD 20898

A11102 71SAT7

NBSIR 87-3602

Hazard I.

Volume 1:

Method

Fire Hazard Assessment

R. W. Bukowski, W. W. Jones. 8. fvl Levin, C. L. Forney, S. W. Sti ere I,

'/. Babrauskas, E. Braun, and A J. Powell

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

Nationai Bureau of Standards

National Engineering Laboratory

Center for Fire Research

Gaithersbu r g. MD 2C8S9

July 193/

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

MA-nnwAi nnoEAU 0F STANDARDS

-QC

100

. U56

87-3602

1987

C .2

Research Information Center

National .bureau of Standards

Gaithersburg, Maryland 20899

NBSIR 87-3602 A)BSc

GlCIDO

HAZARD I. „ (JLgU

VOLUME 1: FIRE HAZARD ASSESSMENT

METHOD

yio*

C-7-

R. W. Bukowski, W. W. Jones, B. M. Levin, C. L. Forney, S. W. Stiefel, V. Babrauskas, E. Braun, and A. J. Fowell

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

National Bureau of Standards

National Engineering Laboratory

Center for Fire Research

Gaithersburg, MD 20899

July 1987

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE, Malcolm Baldrige, Secretary

NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS, Ernest Ambler, Director

INTENT AND USE

The algorithms, procedures, and computer programs described in this

report constitute a first, prototype version of a methodology for predicting

the consequences to the occupants of a building resulting from the involvement

of particular product(s) in a specified fire. They have been compiled from

the best knowledge and understanding currently available, but have important

limitations which must be understood and considered by the user. This

computer executed hazard analysis is intended for use by persons competent in

the field of fire safety, and with some familiarity with personal computers.

It is intended as a decision making tool, but the scope of its use is

exploratory. The primary reason for its release at this stage is to gain the

input of the fire community in identifying needed improvements to its

completeness, practicability, and usefulness in addressing current questions

of fire safety. Any conclusions drawn, from analyses using this hazard

analysis methodology are solely the responsibility of the user. Written or verbal feedback on successes or failures with this product

are encouraged. They should be directed to:

Richard W. Bukowski , P.E., Head

Hazard Analysis

Center for Fire Research

National Bureau of Standards

Room B356, Building 224

Gaithersburg,’ HD 20899

(301) 975-6881

INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE

The HAZARD I software will operate only on systems configured as described in section 1.3 of this report. To install the software, simply

insert disk#l into the "A" drive and type A: INSTALL. You will be asked to

select the type of graphics card/monitor used on the computer (only the

drivers for that display will be installed) and to confirm whether DBASE III+

is installed on the hard disk (and the name of the directory containing the'

DBASE III+ files) . If it is not, the data base files will not be installed

since they cannot be used without DBASE III+. The installation program will

prompt the user to insert each of the remaining disks in sequence and verifies

that the proper disk has been inserted. It will place all of the software

into a directory called HAZARD I . Once the software has been successfully

installed, all programs are run from a menu obtained by typing HAZARD while in

the HAZARDI directory. NOTE: It is strongly suggested that the user read

completely through this report first, and then become familiar with the

software by running through the example problem discussed in Chapter 3
PREFACE

What Hazard I is

HAZARD I is a prototype method to assess the relative contribution of specific

products to the overall hazards of fire and smoke in buildings. The method

has currently been developed for scenarios in single family residences. The

user must compose the scenario and interpret the solution so he must be astute

and knowledgeable in fire safety applications. Many of the computational

steps have been translated into user-friendly computer codes. We anticipate

that the experience gained from the use of HAZARD I will establish a basis for

future improvements and additions to its scope.

What it consists of

HAZARD I provides statistical information on fires in the United States to

assist the user in selecting fire scenarios appropriate for the context of use

of the product. It also provides a database containing thermophysical

information on common building materials, some representative house designs,

and fire data on some furnishings. This computerized database is provided to

simplify the hazard computations.

The computations consist of three main elements: (1) a fire and smoke

transport model; (2) a people response and egress model; and (3) tenability

criteria for evaluating the impact of the various fire hazard parameters on

human death and injury.

The fire and smoke transport model requires the input of data on generation

rates of energy and combustion products. Currently, these data are prescribed

from burn experiments or estimated from small scale results. -'The temperature

and various combustion product concentrations are then computed in the upper

smoke layer of each room. The model for people response and egress is the first attempt to

systematically predict how people will behave in fire. It is based on human

factors data and traffic flow analysis applied to fire situations.

The tenability criteria referenced in this study are based on the best

available information in the literature for work performed largely with

rodents. While reference values are given, the user must decide on the"

specific criteria to be applied to the analysis being conducted. The computer

output is designed to facilitate an understanding of the sensitivity of the

results to the criteria selected.

You can help

We need your input on the use and needs for future improvements or additions

to the scope of HAZARD I. We believe the concept of developing a complete

systems analysis of the hazards of fire and their impact on people is sound

and necessary. To be widely applicable, a hazard method must meet the needs

of its various users. Therefore, we solicit your comments and suggestions.

li
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

CHAPTER 1 . INTRODUCTION

(Authors: Bukowski, R.W. and Fowell, A.J.) 1

1.1 The Need For Quantitative Hazard Analysis 1

1.2 Overall Approach 3 1 . 3 Overview 4

1.4 Assumptions and Limitations 6 CHAPTER 2 . BACKGROUND

(Author: Bukowski, R.W.) 15

2.1 Summary of Developments to Date 15

2.1.1 Hand Calculations 15

2.1.2 Computer Models 16

2.1.3 Measurement Systems 16

2 . 1 . 3 .

Cone Calorimeter ..................... 16

2. 1.3.OSU Calorimeter ........ 17

2 . 1 . 3 .

Factory Mutual Apparatus 17

2. 1.3.

Lateral Ignition and Flamespread Test. 17

2. 1.3.

Large-Scale Calorimeters 17

2. 1.3.Standard Room : 18

2.1.4 Applications to Date 18

CHAPTER 3. A SIMPLE HAZARD ANALYSIS EXAMPLE

(Authors: Bukowski, R.W. and Fowell, A.J.) 21

3.1 Introduction to Overall Logic Diagram 21

3.2 Example Problem ' 24

3.2.1 Defining the Context of Use 24f

' 3.2.2 Defining the Scenario 24

3.2.3 Calculating the Hazard 25

3.2.4 Evaluating the Consequences 26

CHAPTER 4. STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE FOR CONDUCTING A HAZARD ANALYSIS

(Author: Bukowski, R.W.) 54

4.1 The Logic of the Procedure 54

4.2 Defining the Context 57

4.3 Defining the Scenario 57

4.3.1 Building Description 57

iii
4.3.2 Fire Description 59

4.3.3 Occupant Description 61

4.4 Calculate the Hazard 61

4.4.1 Input Program 61

4.4.2 FAST Model and its Output 62

4.4.3 Decision/Behavior Evacuation Model 62

4.4.4 Tenability Program 63

4.5 Evaluate the Consequences 64

CHAPTER 5. MATRIX OF EXAMPLE CASES

(Authors: Bukowski, R.W. and Shibe, A.J.) 65

5.1 Purpose 65

5.2 Development of the Examples 65

5.3 Other Occupancies to be Added 67

5.4 Additional Fire Scenarios 67

5.5 Applicability of the Examples 67

5.6 Impact on Occupants 68

CHAPTER 6. • DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS 84

6.1 System Logic (Author: Fowell, A.J.) 84

6.2 Scenario Selection/Data (Author: Stiefel, S.W.) 87

6.2.1 United States Fire Statistics 87

6.2.2 Relation of Flame and Smoke Spread to Other

Data Elements Useful in Scenario Development . 94

6.2.3 Scenario Development 97

6.2.4 Product Specific Scenario Data 97

6.3 FIREDATA and the Data Base (Author: Braun, E.) 110

6.3.1 Introduction 110

6.3.2 Database Structure 110

6.3.3 Program Structure 116

6.3.4 User Information * 116

6. 3. 4.1 Adding Data 117

6. 3. 4.Editing Data 118

6. 3. 4.Deleting Records 11?''

6. 3. 4.Retrieving Data 119

6. 3. 4.

Utilities 120

6.4 Determining the Rate of Heat Release

(Author: Babrauskas , V.) 122

6.4.1 Introduction 122

6.4.2 Data Obtained by Full-Scale Measurements 122

6.4.3 Methods for Estimating Full-Scale Rates

of Heat Release 123

iv
6. 4. 3.1 Estimating Method for Upholstered

Furniture 123

6. 4. 3.

Estimates for Mattresses 127

6. 4. 3.

Estimating Method for Wall Lining

Materials 127

6. 4. 3.

Estimating Method for General

Combustibles 129

6.5 Ignition of the Second Item

(Author: Bukowski, R.W.) 133

6.6 Program MLTFUEL

(Author: Bukowski, R.W.) 137

» 6.6.1 Purpose 137

6.6.2 Theory 137

6.6.3 Running the Program 138

6.6.4 Limitations 139

6.6.5 Example of Constructing a Time Line for

Multiple Burning Items 139

6. 6. 5.1 Scenario of the Fire 139

6. 6. 5.

Search the Data Base . 139

6. 6. 5.

Construct the Mass Loss Curves 140

6. 6. 5.Establishing the Intervals 140

6.7 Instructions for FINPUT

(Authors: Bukowski, R.W. and Jones, W.W.) 143

6.7.1 Introduction 143

6.7.2 Title and Times tep -. s ........ . 144

6. 7. 2.1 Version 144

6. 7. 2.Title 144

6. 7. 2.Simulation Time Period 144

6. 7. 2.

Print Interval 144

6. 7. 2.Dump Interval 145

6.7.3 Ambient Conditions 145

6. 7. 3.1 Ambient Temperature 145'

6. 7. 3.Ambient Pressure 145

6. 7. 3.Station Elevation 145

6.7.4 Floor Plan Data 145

6. 7. 4.1 Number of Rooms 146

6 . 7 . 4 .

Room Number 146

6. 7. 4.Width 146

6. 7. 4.Room Depth 146

6. 7. 4.

Room Height 146

6. 7. 4.

Floor Height 147

v
6.7.5 Connections 147

6 . 7 . 5 .

Compartment Numbers 147

6. 7. 5.

Vent Width and Height 147

6. 7. 5.

Sill Height 147

6.7.6 Thermophysical Properties of Enclosing Surfaces . 147

6 . 7 . 6 .Room Number 148

6. 7. 6.Ceiling Conductivity 148

6. 7. 6.Ceiling Specific Heat 148

1 6. 7. 6.

Ceiling Density 148

6. 7. 6.Ceiling Thickness 148

6. 7. 6.Ceiling Emissivity 148

6. 7. 6.Walls 148

6. 7. 6.Floor 148

6.7.7 Fire Specification 149

.. 6. 7. 7.1 Room of Fire Origin 149

6. 7. 7.Fire Position 149

6. 7. 7.

Heat of Combustion 149

6. 7. 7.Number of Intervals of Fire Growth .... 149

6. 7. 7.Interval 150

6. 7. 7.Mass Loss Rate 150

6. 7. 7.

Fuel Height 150

6.7.8 Species Production 150

6. 7. 8.1 Nitrogen 151

6. 7. 8.

Oxygen 151

6. 7. 8.

Carbon Dioxide 152

6. 7. 8.

Carbon Monoxide 152

6. 7. 8.Hydrogen Chloride 152

6. 7. 8.Hydrogen Cyanide 152

6. 7. 8.Total Unburned Hydrocarbons 153

6.718.8 Water Production 153

6. 7. 8.

Optical Density 153

6.7.8.10 Concentration-Time Product 153“'

6.7.9 Output File 154

6.7.10 Functions 154

6.7.10.1 Save 154

6.7.10.2 End 154

6.7.10.3 Set Units 154

6.7.10.4 Change 155

6.7.10.5 Copy 155

vi
6.8 FAST User Information (Author: Walton, W.D.) 155

6.8.1 Introduction 155

6.8.2 Program Files 156

6.8.3 Program Use 156

6.8.4 Sample Input Data File 157

6.8.5 Correction to User's Guide for

FAST, NBSIR 85-3284 157

6.8.6 Limitations 157

6 . 9 Instructions for FASTPLOT

(Author: Jones, W.W.) 159

6.9.1 (DE) FAULT 160

6.9.2 (VA)RIABLES 161

6.9.3 (AD) D 161

6.9.4 (DEL) ETE 161

6.9.5 (HE)LP 161

6.9.6 (RE) VIEW . 162

6.9.7 (LI) ST 162

6.9.8 (PL) OT 162

6.9.9 (SA)VE 163

6.9.10 (CL) EAR 163

6.9.11 (CH)ANGE 163

6.9.12 (EN) D 163

6.10 Instructions for DETACT -QS

(Author: Bukowski, R.W.) " 164

6.10.1 Introduction 164

6.11 Simulation of Occupant Decisions and Actions

(Author: Levin, B.M.) 166

6.11.1 Introduction 166

6.11.2 General Nature of the Model 166

6.11.3 Current Status of the Model 167

6.11.4 User Options 168

6.11.5 Fire Inputs 168

6.11.6 Model Outputs 169“'

6.12 Tenability Limits

(Authors: Bukowski, R.W. and Babrauskas , V.) 170

6.12.1 Introduction 170

6.12.2 Flashover 170

6.12.3 Temperature 171

6.12.4 Heat Flux 172

6.12.5 Smoke Obscuration 174

6.12.6 Toxic Gases 175

vii
6.12.6.1 Fractional Effective Dose 177

6.12.6.2 Species Ct 185

6.12.6.3 Incapacitation 186

6.12.7

Program TENAB

(Author: Forney, C.L.) . .. 193

6.12.7.1 Introduction 193

6.12.7.2 Logic 193

6.12.7.3 Computation of FED, Ct, Flux and

Temperature 194

6.12.7.4 Input from FAST 196

• 6.12.7.5 Input from EXITT 196

6.12.7.6 Format for an EXITT Data File 196

6.12.7.7 Entering EXITT Data from the

Terminal 198

6.12.7.8 Output from TENAB 199

CHAPTER 7. CONCLUDING REMARKS

(Author: Bukowski , R.W.) 201

CHAPTER 8. GLOSSARY

(Authors: Jason, N. and Bukowski, R.W.) 203

CHAPTER 9 . APPENDICES

A. FAST Users Guide and Technical Report . B. Behavior/Evacuation Model Users Guide . C. DETACT -t^S Report

D_. Source Report on Example Case Buildings
CHAPTER 1 . INTRODUCTION

This report describes a prototype method to assess the relative

contribution of specific products to the overall hazards of fire and smoke in

buildings. Although this initial version is focused on single family

residential occupancies, it is potentially of use for other occupancies. It is

intended that this prototype method will be used by those with experience in

the field of fire 1 safety to enable it to be tested widely. Constructive

feedback from its initial use will better define its usefulness and limitations

and will help to foster needed improvements. Users should exercise sound

technical judgment in applying the algorithms and computer programs described

herein.

1.1 The Need For Quantitative Hazard Analysis

Public fire safety is provided through a system of fire and building

codes which are based on the judgement of experts in the field, and which

incorporate test methods to measure the fire properties or performance of

materials and products. These codes generally prescribe the construction

methods and materials considered acceptable in various classes of occupancy,

which are defined on the basis of use and the assumed capabilities of the

users. They rely heavily on the concepts of compartmentation and the provision

of duplicate, protected paths of egress. A number of active fire protection

systems are also required, including various combinations of detection/alarm,

suppression, and smoke control/management systems. These systems work together

with the passive measures to provide additional time for safe evacuation of the

affected area and reduction of the fire impact on the structure and its

occupants

These methods work to provide a reasonable level of safety to the public.

However, existing codes need continual revision as new materials or design and

construction techniques are introduced. Quantitative tools for fire hazard

analyses can provide the code official with ways of addressing such

developments consistent with the intent of the code. This can help to ensure

the safe and rapid introduction of new technology by providing information oti the likely impact on fire safety before a performance record is established

through use. Similarly, these methods can be of value to product manufacturers

in identifying the potential fire safety benefits of proposed design changes.

Figure 1-1 illustrates the elements and interactions which need to be

considered in performing a quantitative fire hazard analysis. Experimental

measurements of the burning behavior of materials of interest and details of

the building in which they burn are needed to define the fire in terms of its

release' of energy and mass over time. The transport of this energy and mass

through the building is influenced by its geometry, the construction materials

used, and the fire protection systems employed. The response of occupants and

the consequences of the fire depend on when the occupants are notified, their

1
FIG.

1-1

INTERRELATIONSHIPS

of

major

components

of

a

fire

hazard

model
physical capabilities, the decisions they make, and their susceptibility to the

hazards to which they are exposed.

These tools make it possible to evaluate product fire performance against

a fire safety goal. For example, a goal of fire safety has always been to

"keep the fire contained until the people can get out" . The problem is that it

is very difficult to keep the "smoke" contained. Quantitative hazard analysis

allows the determination of the impacts of smoke, such as toxicity, relative to

the impact of other hazards of fire for a prescribed building and set of

occupants. It determines if the time available for egress is greater than the

time required; and if not, why not. Time is the critical factor. Having three

minutes for safe escape when ten minutes are needed results in human disaster.

But providing thirty minutes of protection when ten are needed can lead to high

costs. A hazard analysis method can help prevent both types of problem from

occurring.

Quantitative hazard analysis techniques have the potential of providing

significant cost- savings . Alternative protection strategies can be studied

within the hazard analysis framework to give the benefit-cost relation for

each. In addition, measures are evaluated as a system with their many

interactions, including the impact of both structure and contents. This

promotes the design flexibility which reduces redundancies and cost without

sacrificing safety. New technology can be evaluated before it is brought into

practice, thus reducing the time lag currently required for code acceptance.

Thus, quantitative hazard analysis is a powerful complement to existing codes

and standards and a useful tool in evaluating improvements to them.

1.2 Overall Approach

The heart of HAZARD I is a sequence of procedures -to calculate the

development of hazardous conditions over time, calculate the time needed by

building occupants to escape under those conditions, and estimate the resulting

loss of life based on assumed occupant behavior and tenability criteria. These

calculations are performed for a specified building and set of fire scenarios

of concern.

The buildings and scenarios of interest to the user of a fire hazard

assessment will depend on the purpose of the assessment. For example, product

manufacturers will generally not be concerned with a particular building but

rather with any scenarios significantly involving their products in all tfrfe building types they may be used. The interest of fire investigators will be

with specific fires in specific buildings, since they are reconstructing

incidents which have occurred.

A set of reference examples has been compiled to assist the user through

the process, and to demonstrate the capabilities of the procedure. These

include sets of prototypical residential buildings and common fire scenarios.

The method described in this report allows the user to substitute his product

for that in one of the examples using one of the prototypical buildings or scenarios, or perform an analysis on a different building or scenario, provided

of course, that the phenomena involved are not beyond the technical

capabilities of the models.

3
Not every situation merits a complete or new set of hazard calculations.

For example, the user may find that his questions can be answered simply by

estimating or inferring the expected performance of his product from review of

the provided matrix of preworked examples. Obviously, over time as the number

of preworked examples increases, many users will find the results they need

simply by looking up estimated performance from such files. Alternatively, the

potential user of HAZARD I may find that his concern involves situations beyond

the current capabilities of the system, in which case he must revert to

traditional approaches, i.e. some combination of experience, judgement and/or

small- or full-scale fire tests. The third alternative is that the user

chooses to run through a complete set of new calculations for his problem

situation. The flow chart, figure 1-2 illustrates these three alternatives for

the potential user df HAZARD I.

1 . 3 Overview

The material contained herein encompasses the first version of the Fire

Hazard Assessment Method - HAZARD I. This consists of a three volume report

and a set of 5 1/4 in. disks containing the software necessary to conduct

hazard analyses of products used in residential occupancies. All of the

software provided will operate on any IBM1 PC (XT or AT) or compatible MS-DOS

computer with the following minimum hardware configuration:

• 512k MEMORY

• GRAPHICS CARD (IBM CGA OR EGA, OR HERCULES COMPATIBLE)

• HARD DISK DRIVE

• MATH CO-PROCESSOR (8087 OR 80287)

• PRINTER

• DBAS El 11+ (REQUIRED ONLY FOR THE DATA BASE PROGRAM)

•'The use of company names or trade names within this report is made only

for the purpose of identifying those computer hardware or software products

with which the compatibility of the programs of HAZARD I has been tested. Such

use does not constitute any endorsement of those products by the National

Bureau of Standards.

4
DEFINE PRODUCT AND

CONTEXT OF USE

CHECK SYSTEM LIMITS

MEASURE PRODUCT

PROPERTIES

Cone calorimeter

Furniture calorimeter

Full room burn

CHECK IF SCENARIOSEXAMPLE

APPLICABLE DEFINE SCENARIO

. SUBSTITUTE PRODUCT

FOR THAT IN EXAMPLE

INPUT DATA

FROM DATA BASE

RUN PROGRAMS

Transport, detection,

decision and action

USE JUDGEMENT EVALUATE EVALUATE

BASED ON TEST DATA, CONSEQUENCES CONSEQUENCES

EXPERIENCE AND COMPARED WITH (adequate time to

CURRENT USE EXAMPLES escape)

TM

12 THE OVERALL METHOD
The organization of the HAZARD I software package is shown in figure 1-3.

It includes a utility program which provides guidance in developing scenarios

(PRODUCT . ONE) ; an interactive program for inputing data to the fire model

(FINPUT) ; a data base program (FIREDATA) including files of thermophysical,

thermochemical, and reference toxicity data; the FAST model for multicompartment energy and mass transport; a graphics utility for plotting data

(FASTPLOT) ; a detector/sprinkler activation model (DETACT) ; an evacuation model

which includes human decision/behavior (EXITT) ; and a tenability model (TENAB)

which evaluates the impact of the predicted exposure of the occupants in terms

of incapacitation- or lethality from temperature or toxic gases or incapacitation by second degree burns from radiant flux exposure. A step-bystep procedure for performing a hazard analysis using this software package is

presented in chapter 4, and user guides for each of these programs are contained in chapter 6

.

Also included in the report is the set of eight representative example

cases of typical residential fires which were established by two panels of

outside experts. These examples consist of fire scenarios, selected by a panel

composed of representatives of the major fire services organizations, in each

of three single- family residences which were considered to represent typical

homes by a panel from the model code and architectural communities. . A

description of the process of developing these cases and the results obtained

for each is included in chapter 5, and the complete documentation (input data

file listings, program outputs and graphs of selected variables) is in Volume

2 . While the scope of this first hazard assessment method is limited to

residential occupancies, our goal is to extend it to other occupancy classes.

Such extension would be made in parallel with the improvements identified

through user feedback.

1.4 Assumptions and Limitations

GENERAL: HAZARD I consists of a collection of data, procedures, and computer

programs which are used to simulate the important time - dependant phenomena,

generally as depicted in figure 1-1 (although this first version does not

account for all of the phenomena listed). The major functions provided include

calculation of:

1. the production of energy and mass (smoke and gases) by one or more

burning objects in one room, based on small- or large-scale measurements,

2. the buoyancy -driven transport of this energy and mass through a series of user- specified rooms and connections (doors, windows, cracks,

etc. )

,

3. the resulting temperatures, smoke optical densities, and gas

concentrations after accounting for heat transfer to surfaces and

dilution by mixing with clean air,

6
fig. 1-3 HAZARD I SOFTWARE
4. the evacuation process of a user- specified set of occupants

accounting for delays in notification, decision making, behavioral

interactions, and inherent capabilities,

5. and the impact of the exposure of these occupants to the predicted

room environments as they move through the building, in terms of the

expected fatalities, and the time, location, and cause of each.

As can be seen from this list, the hazard analysis involves an

interdisciplinary consideration of physics, chemistry, fluid mechanics, heat

transfer, biology, toxicology, and human behavior. In some areas, fundamental

laws (conservation of mass, energy, and momentum) can be used, whereas in

others empirical correlations or even "educated guesses" must be employed to

bridge gaps in existing knowledge. The necessary approximations required by

considerations of operational practicality result in the introduction of

uncertainties in the results. The user should understand the inherent

assumptions and limitations of the procedures and programs, and use them

judiciously - including sensitivity analyses for the ranges of values for key

parameters - in order to make estimates of these uncertainties

.

SCOPE

:

The scope of HAZARD I has been limited to one- • and two -family

residential structures. Models of the complex flows of heat and smoke through

the HVAC systems and up the tall stairwells found in other occupancies are not

yet sufficiently refined to include them in HAZARD I. Similarly, the focus has

been on the inclusion of "rules" for the behavioral interactions of people

within family units in the EXITT model. Large -building evacuation models,

which include phenonema such as congestion in and around stairwells add

behaviors typical of people in other occupancies which have not yet been

incorporated into HAZARD I

.

Since the majority of US fire losses are in one- and two-family

residential structures, this occupancy was selected for the first hazard

system. The scope will be broadened in subsequent versions of the system.

PROGRAMS AND PROCEDURES

:

Figure 1-3 presents the HAZARD I software package

developed to implement the assessment of hazard as shown in figure 1-1. Of the.

nine programs shown, four (PRODUCT . ONE , FIREDATA, FINPUT , and FASTPLOT) perform

utility and user interface functions only.

PRODUCT. ONE is designed to assist the user to get started with the

system. The principal limitation of FIREDATA is that data is provided for only

a small set of example products. Data provided in the cone and furniture

calorimeter files are measured values from individual samples tested in these

devices under a specified set of conditions. While the materials are identified generically, it should be understood that such data are not

necessarily representative of the behavior of that generic material. Some

variation would be expected, even on a set of samples from the same lot; and no attempt was made to obtain representative samples for test. Also, data in the

thermophysical properties file were taken either from manufacturer's data or from literature sources with no attempt to verify values or to determine their

representativeness. Finally, the data in the toxicity file are published

values from the sources indicated. Only some of the sources provide confidence

8
intervals for these data. The material identifications are those provided in

the sources.

SPECIFIED FIRE: An important limitation of HAZARD I is the absence of a fire

growth model. It was not practical to adapt currently available fire growth

models for direct inclusion in HAZARD I. Therefore, the system utilizes a user

specified fire, expressed in terms of time specified rates of energy and mass

released by the burning item(s) . Such data can be obtained by measurements

taken in large- and. small-scale calorimeters, or from room burns. Their

associated limitations are as follows:

1. For the Furniture Calorimeter, a product (chair, table, bookcase,

etc.) is placed under a large collection hood and ignited by a 50 kW gas

burner (simulating a wastebasket) placed adjacent to the item for 120

sec. The combustion process then proceeds under assumed "free-burning"

conditions, and the release rate data are measured. Potential sources of

uncertainty here include measurement errors related to the

instrumentation, and the degree to which "free -burning" conditions are not achieved (e.g,, radiation from the gases under the hood or from the

hood itself, and restrictions in the air entrained by the object causing

locally reduced oxygen concentrations affecting the combustion

chemistry) . There are limited experimental data for upholstered

furniture which suggest that prior to the onset of flashover, the

influence of the compartment on the burning behavior of the item is

small. The differences obtained from the use of different ignition

sources or locations of application have not been explored. These

factors are discussed in reference [1]

2. Where small-scale calorimeter data are used, procedures are provided

to extrapolate to the behavior of a full size item. These procedures are based on empirical correlations of data which exhibit significant

scatter, thus limiting their accuracy. For example, the peak heat

release rate estimated by the "triangular approximation" method for

upholstered furniture averages 91% (range 46% to 103%) of the measured

value for a group of 26 chairs with non-combustible frames, but only 63%

(range 46% to 83%) for 11 chairs with combustible frames [2]. Also, the

triangle neglects the "tails" of the curve: these are the initial time

from ignition to significant burning of the item, and the region of

burning of the combustible frame, after the fabric and filler are consumed.

3. The data and procedures provided relate directly only to burning of

contents items initiated by relatively large flaming sources . Almost no data are currently available for release rates under smoldering

combustion, or for the high external flux and low oxygen conditions

characteristic of post- flashover burning. While the program MLTFUEL

allows multiple items burning simultaneously to be converted to a single

"equivalent" specified fire, it does not account for the energy

interchange of such items. Thus, for other ignition scenarios, multiple

items burning simultaneously (which exchange energy by radiation and

convection), combustible interior finish, and post- flashover conditions,

the procedures provided give estimates which are often non- conservative

9
(the actual release rates would be greater than estimated). At present,

the only sure way to account for all of these complex phenonema is to

conduct a full-scale room burn and input the release rates to the

transport model. Subsequent versions of the hazard system will include

detailed combustion models such as HARVARD V [3] or FIRST [4] which can

be used as the source fire.

TRANSPORT

:

The distribution of energy and mass throughout the rooms included

in the simulation is done in the model FAST, which is a zone (or control,

volume) model. The basic assumption of such models is that each room can be

divided into two or more zones each of which is internally uniform in

temperature and composition. In FAST, all rooms have two zones except the fire

room, which has an additional zone for the fire plume. The boundary between

the two layers in a room is called the interface.

It has generally been observed that in the spaces close to the .fire,

buoyantly.- stratified layers form. While in an experiment the temperature can

be seen to vary within a given layer, these variations are small compared to

the temperature difference between the layers.

Beyond the basic zone assumptions, the model typically involves a mixture

of established theory (e.g., conservation equations), empirical correlations

where there are data but no theory (e.g., flow and entrainment coefficients),

and approximations where there are neither (e.g., post- flashover combustion

chemistry) or where their effect is considered secondary compared to the "cost"

of inclusion. An example of a widely-used approximation is to ignore the

variation of the thermal properties of structural materials with temperature.

While this would be fairly simple to add to the computer code', data are scarce

over a broad range of temperature even for the most common materials, and the

estimated error from this assumption is small. -

.

With a highly complex model such as FAST, the only reasonable’ method of

assessing impacts of assumptions and limitations is through the verification

and validation process, which is ongoing at CFR. Until the results of this

process are available, the user should be aware of the following:

1. The "specified fire" input by the user is not subject to the

influences of the room as discussed previously. If a large mass loss

rate is entered, the model will proceed, even if there is insufficient

oxygen available for that quantity of fuel to burn in the room. In this

case, the model releases all of the energy in the room which will result'

in extremely high predicted temperatures (sometimes exceeding the

adiabatic flame temperature) within the room of origin. (A message will

be printed when this "ventilation limit" is reached.) Predicted

temperatures for rooms away from the fire would be influenced less once

this condition exists. Thereafter the input fire should be adjusted or

the subsequent results carefully interpreted. No change in the fire

input energy leads to a conservative result for temperature hazard.

Also, if temperatures have approached 500 C in the room of origin,

flashover is likely and the input fire would have to be adjusted to

account for more burning items

.

10
2. Similarly, user- specified species yields are used by the model,

regardless of the predicted oxygen concentration within the room. It is

known that low oxygen changes the combustion chemistry, with an attendant

increase in the yields of products of incomplete combustion such as CO.

However, not enough is known about these chemical processes to predict

reliably such yields at the present time. Some room fire test data show

that under post-flashover conditions, the production (yield) of CO

increases (and C02 decreases) in the room. Subsequently, some of the

excess CO may burn (to C02

) in the door flame if it can entrain oxygen

from the next room [5]. In such cases, the resulting concentrations may

not differ substantially from the pre-flashover condition. If sufficient

oxygen is not available, the high CO concentrations will remain in the

doorway effluent. There are many complexities in the ways that a fire

can be ventilated which will influence the production and fate of the

gases of interest which need to be carefully interpreted.

3. The entrainment coefficients are empirically-determined values.

Small errors in these values will have a small effect on the fire plume

or the flow in the plume of gases exiting the door of that room. In a multi -compartment model such as FAST however, small errors in each door

plume are multiplicative as the flow proceeds through many compartments,

possibly resulting in a significant error in the furthest rooms. The

data available from validation experiments [6] indicate that the values

for entrainment coefficients currently used in most zone models produce

good agreement for a three compartment configuration. More data are needed for larger numbers of rooms to study this further.

4. In real fires, some smoke and gases are introduced into the lower

layer of each room primarily due to mixing at connections between rooms

and from the downward flows along walls (where contact with the wall

cools the gas and reduces its buoyancy) . Neither of these phenonema are included in FAST, since for the former an appropriately-documented mixing

coefficient is not known, and for the latter the associated theory is

only now being developed. Thus, the lower layer is always free of smoke

and gases, and can heat only by radiation from the upper part of the room

heating the lower walls and floor, which then convect to the lower layer.

This produces consistent underestimates of the lower layer temperatures

and overestimates of the upper layer temperatures, the magnitudes of

which will decrease with distance from the fire room. Thus, the

resulting errors would tend to be conservative since the primary threat

to occupants is from upper layer conditions

11
I

5. The only mechanisms provided in zone models to move energy and mass

into the upper layer of a room are two types of plumes; those formed by

the burning item(s) in the fire room, and those formed by the jet of

upper layer gases flowing through an opening. Thus, when the model

calculates the flow of warm, lower layer gases through a low opening

(e.g. the undercut of a door) by expansion, they are assigned to the

lower layer of the room into which they flowed where they remain until

the upper layer in the source room drops to the level of the undercut and

the door jet forms. Thus, for a time the receiving room will show a lower layer temperature which exceeds that in the upper layer (a

physically- impossible condition). However no hazard will exist during

this time as the temperatures are low, and no species produced by the

fire are carried through the opening until the upper layer drops to the

height of the undercut.

OCCUPANT BEHAVIOR AND EVACUATION: The EXITT model is a fairly- straightforward

"node and arc" evacuation model to which an extensive series of behavioral

rules has been added. The assumptions of interest are thus inherent in these

rules, and the limitations are associated mostly with behavior not yet

included. For example, the model does not have people re-entering the

building, as they sometimes do. In addition, the current model is completely

deterministic - a specific set of circumstances always results in a specific

action. The data on which the rules were based sometimes identifies several

potential actions (e.g., under this condition, 60% of the time they do A and

40% of the time they do B) . To model such behavior properly, the program would

have to employ probabilistic branching.

Within the current model, some of the rules are qualitative (e.g. a man's

first action is to investigate) and some are quantitative (e.g. a woman between

the ages of x and y walks at z meters per minute) . The as.sumed values in

quantitative rules are called parameter values , and the documentation for the

model identifies each, the reason for assigning that value, and how the user

can change it (allowing a sensitivity analysis to be performed on those

parameters for which the user might feel that the supporting data are weak)

.

ACTIVATION OF THERMAL DEVICES

:

The activation of heat detectors or sprinklers

is handled in the program DETACT. The report (included as an appendix to this

report) describes the underlying theory and assumptions used. The basic

assumption is one of quasi-steady ceiling layer gas flow under an unconfined

ceiling (no walls). It is based on the experimental study [7,8] done by

Factory Mutual Research Corp . for the Fire Detection Institute and on which the

NFPA 72E [9], Appendix C methods were developed. As such, the assumptions

employed in this program are those in common use by the engineering and code

communities and represent the current state-of-the-art.

12
TENABILITY CRITERIA: The impact of exposure to the occupants is evaluated in

the program TENAB. Individual determinations are made for both incapacitation

and lethality from temperature and toxicity, along with potential

incapacitation from burns due to flux exposure. No interactions are currently

included (e.g., temperature exposure does not change rate of uptake of. toxic

species) . The basis for the threshold values used and the derivation of the

equations on which the toxicity calculation is based are provided in the

chapter on Tenability Limits, which contains an extensive list of references.

For all cases except flux exposure, the user can easily change the limit values

used (and is encouraged to do so as a sensitivity test). Also, the method of

presentation of the output of TENAB facilitates the observation of the

sensitivity of the result to the limiting value selected.

The limiting values of temperature exposure are based on the general

literature, which includes some human data. The flux criterion comes from work

done with pig skin, which is generally considered to be very similar to human

skin. (It is used for temporary grafts for burn patients.) The toxicity data

however, are from the combustion toxicology literature which is based entirely

on animal exposures (primarily rodents). Thus, it is assumed that humans will

exhibit a physiological response similar to rodents. The limiting values used

are from experiments where lethality is the end point, and values for

incapacitation are assumed to be half of the lethal level (see sect. 6.12).

A toxicity parameter, Ct - concentration multiplied by exposure time; which is

often referred to as "exposure dose" - is used to indicate the toxic impact of

the smoke without differentiating the constituent gases nor the possibility of

diminished oxygen. This is a broad assumption. Another toxicity parameter,

FED (the fractional effective dose) is also introduced. This represents the

fraction of the lethal dose th^t has been accumulated by an individual over

time. The FED parameter combines the effects and interactions- of the gases CO,

C02 , and HCN. Again, the effect of diminished oxygen is not included at this

time. The model on which the FED calculation is based, referred to as the NGas model [10], is under continuing development, and additional gases will be

added as the data are obtained. It is expected that reduced oxygen and the

first irritant gas (HC2) will be included in the next version.

13
References

1. Babrauskas , V. , Lawson, J.R., Walton, W.D., and Twilley, W.H.,

Upholstered Furniture Heat Release Rates Measured with a Furniture

Calorimeter (NBSIR 82-2604). [U.S.] Nat. Bur. Stand. (1982).

2. Babrauskas, V. and Krasny, J.F., Fire Behavior of Upholstered Furniture

(NBS Monograph 173). [U.S.] Nat. Bur. Stand. (1985).

3. Mi tier, H.E. and Emmons, H.W.

,

Documentation for CFC V, the Fifth Harvard

Fire Code, (NBSGCR 81-344). [U.S.] Nat. Bur. Stand. (1981).

4. Mitler, H.E. .and Rockett, J.A., Users' Guide to FIRST, a Prototype

Benchmark Single -Room Fire Model, to appear as an NBSIR.

5. Lee, B.T., Effect of Ventilation on the Rates of Heat, Smoke, and Garbon

Monoxide Production in a Typical Jail Cell Fire (NBSIR 82-2469). [U.S.]

Nat. Bur. Stand. (1982).

6. Peacock, R.D., Davis, S., and Lee, B.T., An Experimental Data Set for

Verification of Fire Models, NBSIR in preparation, (1987).

7. Heskestad, G. and Delichatsios , M.A.

,

Environments of Fire DetectorsPhase 1: Effect of Fire Size, Ceiling Height, and Material, Volume 1-

Measurements , (NBSGCR 77-86). [U.S.] Nat. Bur. Stand. (1977).

8. ibid. Volume 2 - Analysis (NBSGCR 77-95). [U.S.] Nat Bur. Stand. (1977).

9 . anon

.

Standard for the Installation, Maintenance and Use of Automatic

Fire Detectors, National Fire Protection Assn Standard 72E, NFPA, Quincy,

MA. (1975).

10. Babrauskas, V., Levin, B.C., and Gann, R.G., A New Approach to Fire

Toxicity Data for Hazard Evaluation, ASTM S tandardation News . Sept.,

(1986).

14
CHAPTER 2 . BACKGROUND

2.1 Summary of Developments to Date

The Center for Fire Research (CFR) project to develop a quantitative

hazard assessment method was initiated following the NBS Workshop on Combustion

Product Toxicology held in 1982 [1]. In this workshop, papers were presented,

in which some of the initial concepts of hazard analysis were discussed. The

general approach for the hazard analysis capability was discussed in Fire

Science early in 1983 [2]. Later that year, NBS made a commitment to produce a practical hazard assessment method in three to five years [3]. The HAZARD I report and software is a prototype of this method.

In February 1984, the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

sponsored a two-day workshop on "Practical Approaches for Smoke Toxicity Hazard

Assessment" [4] involving groups of leading toxicologists, fire protection

engineers, fire scientists, fire modelers, and code and fire service

representatives. Later in 1984 the Toxicity Advisory Committee of NFPA

proposed a simple four- step procedure [5] derived from the workshop-' s efforts.

As the project progressed, papers were published which discussed the evolving

philosophy and structure of the hazard assessment methodology (e.g., [6,7]).

These papers, and the growing questions regarding combustion product toxicity,

stimulated some early hazard analyses using both hand calculated estimates and

some of the available fire models. None of these analyses involved explicit

predictions of the impact of the calculated occupant exposures in terms of

incapacitation or lethality as is done in HAZARD I. 2.1.1 Hand Calculations

In May of 1984, the Toxicity Advisory Committee of the National Fire

Protection Association published a procedure for providing "order of magnitude

estimates" of the toxic hazards of smoke for specified situations [8]. In this

report, Bukowski based the estimating procedure on a series of algebraic

equations, which could be solved on a hand calculator. Individual equations

were provided to estimate steady-state values for such parameters as upper

layer temperature, smoke density, and toxicity; and graphical solutions were

provided for room filling time. This work was followed by the more extensive

compilation of such equations for use by the U.S. Navy for use in assessing

fire hazards on ships [9],

Subsequently, the Toxicity Advisory Committee was asked by the National

Electrical Code Committee for assistance in addressing a toxicity hazard

question regarding PTFE plenum cables. In providing that help, a hand

calculated analysis was performed [10]. This paper concluded for a single,

specified scenario, that the size of room fire needed to cause the

decomposition of the cable insulation would itself cause a toxicity hazard in an adjacent space before the cable would become involved.

15
It should be noted that, while suitable for estimating, algebraic

equations are limited to steady-state analyses, and cannot deal consistently

with the transient aspects of fire behavior. To obtain a complete answer then,

requires a computer to solve the differential equations which describe these

transient phenonema. This is the role of computer fire models.

2.1.2 Computer Models

The computer models currently available vary considerably in scope,

complexity, and purpose. Simple "room filling" models such as the Available

Safe Egress Time (ASET) model [11] run quickly on almost any computer, and

provide good estimates of a limited number of parameters of interest for a fire

in a single compartment. A special purpose model can provide a single

function, e.g., C0MPF2 [12] calculates post- flashover room temperatures. And,

very detailed models like the HARVARD 5 code [13] predict the burning behavior

of multiple items in a room, along with the time -dependent conditions therein.

In addition to the single-room models mentioned above, there are a smaller number of multi- room models which have been developed. These include

the BRI (or Tanaka) transport model [14] which is similar to the FAST model,

and the HARVARD 6 code [15]; a multi-room version of HARVARD 5. All of these

models are of the zone (or control volume) type. They assume that the buoyancy

of the hot gases causes them to stratify into two layers; a hot, smokey upper

layer and a cooler lower layer. Experiments have shown this to be a relatively

good approximation.

While none of these models were written specifically for the purpose of

hazard analysis, any of them could be used within the haz'ard framework to

provide required predictions. Their applicability depends upon the problem and

the degree of detail needed in the result, as will be shown later in this

chapter

.

2.1.3 Measurement Systems

The development of predictive methods, from algebraic equations to

computer models, has created a need for data. Traditional test methods were

generally designed as pass/fail or ranking category systems which do not yield

quantitative information or if they do, it is not usually in a form which is

usable in calculations. To fill this gap, a number of new measurement methods

have been developed which are specifically intended to produce such data.

2. 1.3.1 Cone Calorimeter

The Cone Calorimeter [16] is one of a number of devices which measure

rate of heat release using the oxygen consumption technique. This refers to

the indirect measurement of energy release by measuring the mass of oxygen

consumed as a material burns. Huggett reported that the ratio of oxygen

consumed to energy released is almost constant for nearly all materials [17].

This fact makes the oxygen consumption calorimeter significantly less

complicated and more accurate than traditional calorimeters measuring sensible

heat. In addition, the burning material need not be encumbered by an enclosure

which affects its burning. Combined with the instrumented exhaust system, the

16
apparatus easily lends itself to the measurement of other needed parameters

such as sample mass loss rate, effective heat of combustion, and yields of

various chemical species of interest.

2. 1.3.

OSU Calorimeter

The Ohio State University (OSU) Calorimeter (ASTM E906) was originally a sensible heat calorimeter which was later modified to include an oxygen

consumption operating mode. Of particular interest to this discussion is the

fact that its developer, Prof. E. Smith, has developed a fire growth model

specifically for use with the data produced by this device. This model [18] is

then used to extrapolate the test data to the predicted results of a room fire

involving that material.

2. 1.3.

Factory Mutual Flammability Apparatus

Dr. A. Tewarson of Factory Mutual Research Corp . (FMRC) has been a prolific producer of mat-erial property data for use in predictive methods.

These data are produced in calorimeters of several sizes, some capable of

evaluating materials under controlled, vitiated burning conditions [19]. In

addition, work on scaling effects on the measured properties have been

published [20]Finally, a new approach to predicting the required combustion

properties for families of polymeric materials based on a soot point apparatus

has recently been developed [21]. Time and resource constraints prevented the

inclusion of much of this data into the prototype data base supplied with this

report. Ultimately, all such data needs to be accessible to users of fire

models

2. 1.3.Lateral Ignition and Flamespread Test (LIFT)

Another source of data for predictive methods is the Lateral Ignition and

Flamespread Test developed at NBS by Quintiere and Harkleroad [22]. It

developed from an analysis of the flame spread results from a potential test

method apparatus currently under consideration by the International Maritime

Organization (IMO) [23]. This device measures lateral flame spread velocity

and ignition time as a function of irradiance, and critical (minimum) flux

values for ignition and for spread. In addition, effective values for thermal

inertia (kpc) at elevated temperature, ignition temperature, and a parameter

related to flame temperature are derived from the measured data.

2. 1.3.Large-Scale Calorimeters

There are a number of large-scale calorimeters using the oxygen

consumption technique. By large-scale is meant that they are large enough to

burn complete items (e.g., sofas, bookcases, or desks)

At CFR, the furniture

calorimeter has a maximum energy release rate of about 0.7 Mw. The "Large

Combustion Products Collector" at Factory Mutual Research Corp. is rated about

ten times higher. Other than size, their function is similar to the Cone

Calorimeter

17
2. 1.3. 6 Standard Room

The ASTM is developing a test method for conducting room fire tests

called the "Standard Room" [24]. This uses an 8 x 12 x 8 foot room with a single door opening, which is directly below a large hood. This hood is

equipped for oxygen consumption and chemical analyses. The room test is

particularly suited to evaluating (and producing data on) interior finish

materials in their normal configuration. Since mass loss data are important

for predictive methods, the ASTM room at CFR has been suspended on load cells

so that the entire room can be weighed throughout the experiment.

Beyond these test methods, which focus on burning rate and combustion

product release data, there are a number of other "new generation" test methods

under development. The models and other predictive techniques are identifying

data needs, and measurement methods are being produced to fill those needs.

2.1.4 Applications to Date

Over the past few years, models began to be used within a hazard analysis

framework to address questions of interest. In 1984, Nelson published a "hazard analysis" of a US Park Service facility which used a combination of

models (including ASET) and hand calculations [25]. The calculations were used

to determine the impact of various, proposed fire protection additions (smoke

detectors, sprinklers, lighting, and smoke removal) on the number of occupants

who could safely exit the building during a specified fire incident.

In 1985, Bukowski conducted a parametric study of the hazard of

upholstered furniture using the FAST model [26]. Here, the model was used to

explore the impact of changes in the burning properties of furniture items

(burning rate, smoke production, heat of combustion, and toxicity) on occupant

hazard relative to the random variations of the different houses in which the

item might be placed. These latter variables were room dimensions, wall

materials, and the effect of closed doors. The conclusion was that reducing

the burning rate by a factor of two produced a significantly greater increase

in time to hazard than any other variable examined. So much so that the

benefit would be seen regardless of any other parameter variation. Results

such as this can show a manufacturer where the greatest safety benefit can be

achieved for a given investment in re-design of his product.

A more recent example of a hazard analysis application is the elegant

work of Emmons on the MGM Grand Hotel fire of 1980. This work, conducted

during the litigation of this fire was only recently published [27]. Using the

HARVARD 5 model, Prof. Emmons analyzed the relative contributions of the booth

seating, ceiling tiles and decorative beams, and the HVAC system, all in the

room of origin, on the outcome of the fire.

Another recent example is the report of the National Academy of Sciences

[28] which contains two hazard analysis case studies; one making use of the

HARVARD 5 model and the other using experimental data. The cases deal with

upholstered furniture and a combustible pipe within a wall, respectively.

18
References

1. Snell, J.E., Levin, B.C., and Fowell, A.J., Workshop on Combustion

Product Toxicology, Summary of Presentations, September 10, 1982. NBSIR

82-2634, National Bureau of Standards, Gaithersburg, MD , 20899 (1982).

2. Snell, J.E., Hazard Assessment - Challenge to Fire Science, The Forum,

Fire Science . 4-8, Jan/Feb, (1983).

3. Lyons, J.W., Statement of Dr. John W. Lyons before the Senate Committee

on Labor and Human Resources, Hearing on Fire Safety Issues, July 19,

1983.

4. Anon. , Proceedings of NFPA Toxicity Advisory Committee Workshop on

Practical Approaches for Smoke Toxicity Hazard Assessment, NFPA, Quincy,

MA., Feb. 22-23 (1984).

5. Snell, J.E. et al , Summary Preliminary Report of the Advisory Committee

on the Toxicity of the Products of Combustion, NFPA, Quincy, MA. , (1984).

6. Bukowski, R.W. and Jones, W.W.

,

The Development of a Method for Assessing

Toxic Hazard, Fire Journal . 79 . No . 2 , 24-26, 28-29, 82, March 1985.

7. Bukowski, R.W.

,

Quantitative Determination of Smoke Toxicity Hazard - A

Practical Approach for Current Use, in Fire Safety Science - Proceedings

of the First International Symposium, Grant, C.E. and Pagni , P.J. eds .

,

Hemisphere Publishing Corp., N.Y.

,

1089-1100, (1986).

8. Bukowski, R.W.

,

Strawman Procedure for Assessing Toxic- Hazard, in ref. 5.

9. Lawson, J.R. and Quintiere, J.G., Slide-Rule Estimates of Fire Growth,

NBSIR 85-3196, (US) Nat. Bur. Stand., (1985).

10. Bukowski, R.W.

,

Toxic Hazard Evaluation of Plenum Cables, Fire

Technology . 21, No. 4, 252-266, (1985).

11. Cooper, L.Y.

,

A Mathematical Model for Estimating Available Safe Egress

Time in Fires, Fire and Materials . 6 , Nos. 3 and 4, 135-144, (1983).

12. Babrauskas , V., C0MPF2 - A Program for Calculating Pos t - Flashover Fire ^ Temperatures, NBS TN 991, (US) Nat. Bur. Stand., (1979).

13. Mitler, H.E. and Emmons, H.W., Documentation • for CFC V, the Fifth Harvard

Computer Fire Code, NBSGCR 81-344, (US) Nat. Bur. Stand., (1981).

14. Tanaka, T. , A Model of Multiroom Fire Spread, NBSIR 83-2718, (US) Nat.

Bur. Stand., (1983).

15. Gahm, J.B., Computer Fire Code VI, NBSGCR 83-451, (US) Nat. Bur. Stand.,

(1983).

19
16. Babrauskas , V. , Development of the Cone Calorimeter - A Bench Scale Heat

Release Apparatus Based on Oxygen Consumption, Fire and Materials . 8., 81-

95, (1984)

.

17. Huggett, C., Estimation of Rate of Heat Release by Means of Oxygen

Consumption Measurements, Fire and Materials . 4, No. 2, 61-65, (1980).

18. Smith E.E. and Satija, S., Release Rate Model for Developing Fires,

presented at the 20th Joint ASME/AIC National Heat Transfer Conference,

(1981).

19. Tewarson, A., Lee, J. L. , and Pion, R. F. , The Influence of Oxygen

Concentration on Fuel Parameters for Fire Modeling, Eighteenth Symposium

(International) on Combustion, The Combustion Institute (1980)

.

20. Tewarson, A. and Newman, J. S., Scale Effects on Fire Properties of*

Materials, Proceedings of the First International Symposium on Fire

Safety Science, Grant, C. E. and Pagni , P. J. eds . , Hemisphere Publishing

Corp., N. Y. , 451-462 (1986).

21. Tewarson, A., .Prediction of Fire Properties of Materials, Part 1.

Aliphatic and Aromatic Hydrocarbons and Related Polymers, NBSGCR 86-521,

Mat. Bur. Stand. (1986)

.

22. Quintiere, J. G. and Harkleroad, M. , New Concepts for Measuring Flame

Spread Properties, ASTM STP 882, Fire Safety Science and Engineering,

239-267 (1985) .

23. Robertson, A.F., A Flammability Test BAsed on Proposed ISO Spread of

Flame Test, Third progress report, Intergovernmental Maritime

Consultative Organization, IMCO (now called IMO) , FP/215 (1979)

.

24. Anon., Proposed Method for Room Fire Test of Wall and Ceiling Materials

and Assemblies, 1982 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 18, 1618-1638.

25. Nelson, H.E., Jefferson National Memorial Historical Site Analysis of

Impact of Fire Safety Features, NBSIR 84-2897, (US) Nat. Bur. Stand.

(1985).

26. Bukowski, R.W.

,

Evaluation of Furniture Fire Hazard Using a HazardAssessment Computer Model, Fire and Materials . 9, No. 4, (1985).

27. Emmons, H.W., Why Fire Model? The MGM Fire and Toxicity Testing, The

(1985) SFPE Guise Award Lecture, Harvard/FMRC Home Fire Project Technical

Report No. 73, (1985).

28. Anon., FIRE 6c SMOKE: Understanding the Hazards, Committee on Fire

Toxicology, National Research Council, National Academy of Sciences,

National Academy Press, Washington D.C., 105-130, (1986).

20
CHAPTER 3. A SIMPLE EXAMPLE

3.1 Introduction to Overall Logic Diagram

Fire hazard analysis involves four main steps: defining the context,

defining the scenario, calculating the hazard, and evaluating the consequences.

The context involves the use, the building occupancy class, and the usual

location of the product. The scenario defines the source of ignition, the

items involved, whether doors are open, and the location and mobility of

building occupants. Calculating hazard involves a comparison of the timing of

the growth and spread of the fire, the involvement of fire protection devices,

and the actions and response of people. Evaluation of the consequences requires

an evaluation of the predicted exposure of the occupants against a set of

tenability criteria for thermal hazards, toxic potency, and smoke obscuration.

Evaluating the relative contribution of a specific product to the overall

hazard of smoke in a fire involves the completion of this analysis process for

all the fire scenarios of concern. Not all users will want to specify complete

details of the building(s) or fire scenarios used in each calculation, so a set

of reference examples and a set of prototypical buildings and fire scenarios

has been compiled. To assist the user through the overall analytical process,

and make efficient use of the programs, documentation and procedures,

particularly the identification of scenarios of concern, an overall logic

diagram shown in figure 3-1 has been developed. This diagram has been

translated into an interactive computer program (PRODUCT . ONE) , which is

described in more detail in section 6.1. Although the approach- is conceptually

applicable to many occupancy classes the reference examples are limited to

commonly occurring scenarios in three prototypical residences, a ranch, a town

house and a two story detached house.

The first step in the process is defining the context, which includes

describing the product itself, and defining where, when, in what way and by

whom the product is normally used. Because this initial version of the hazard

analysis procedure is directed primarily at in-room, residential fires, it is

first necessary to determine if the product is used in residential occupancies

and if the example cases include a similar product. If this is the case, the

analyst has the option of 1) estimating the hazard based on a comparison of the

fire properties of the product of concern with those of the product used in the

example or 2) proceeding with a hazard calculation. The hazard calculation can

be based on a scenario used in the examples or on a newly created scenario

To assist the analyst in selecting an appropriate fire scenario the

program provides statistical information on residential fires, and asks a series of questions relating to the ignition source, possible other items

involved, and important details of the building and its occupants. The

statistical information is contained in section 6.2 of this report.

21
FIG.

3-1

LOGIC

DIAGRAM

FOR

HAZARD

ANALYSIS
I
The program now directs the user to perform the hazard calculation using

the detailed step by step procedure described in section 4.2 of this report.

This procedure asks the user to provide a detailed description of the building,

the fire, and the occupants. The procedure specifies the input data required

to run the hazard calculation. If these data are not available in the data

base the user must perform the necessary laboratory measurements. The

procedure also instructs the user on running three computer programs, a fire

and smoke transport program, a detector program, and a decision and action

program. Instructions are also given on evaluating the consequences by defining

a set of tenability criteria, and determining when the hazardous conditions

reach them.

Once a hazard, calculation has been completed, the overall logic program

asks a series of questions to check if all desired scenarios have been run. If

not, the program leads the analyst back to the appropriate stage.

3.2 Example Problem

The following is intended to demonstrate how a user might work through a relatively simple problem involving upholstered furniture in a residence, using

the HAZARD I software. The perspective for the example is that of the

manufacturer of a specific chair, who wishes- to estimate the potential hazard

from this chair when it is involved in a specific fire incident.

3.2.1 Defining the Context of Use

For this example, the context of use of this product is straightforward.

The user has 'a specific chair and residence in mind. Thus, the layout of the

residence is known. If the user were interested in the performance of his

product in residences in general, then he would need to specify the layout for

a set of typical or representative houses of the sort in which his product is

likely to be found. (The pre -worked examples in chapter 5 include three

different residences.) In this example, the ranch house will be used.

The user must also specify the location of the chair (e.g, in the living

room) and its placement relative to the room walls, other furniture, etc. For

this example, it is assumed that the chair is placed away from the walls and

not in direct contact with other furniture.

3.2.2 Defining the Scenario

The scenario selection involves describing the fire to be simulated. The

chair manufacturer wants to examine the performance of his chair for a fire of

interest in the, now specified, physical setting. Assuming that this involves

a flaming ignition (perhaps since the chair is designed to resist cigarette

ignition), a wastebasket ignition adjacent to the chair will be used. To have

a scenario which is not totally dependent on "his" chair, he assumes that the

burning chair causes the ignition of a loveseat which is close enough so as to

ignite by radiant energy. The methods for obtaining the required inputs for

the model for this fire specification are presented in chapter 6, in the

section on Multiple Burning Items.

24
The next step in the scenario selection is to specify the occupant

characteristics. The number of persons, their sex, age, and other attributes

(heavy sleepers, drunk/drugged, handicapped, etc.) are selected and taken into

account within the evacuation/behavior simulation EXITT. For the sake of

simplicity in this example, it will be assumed that there is one person in each

room of the house and that they do not evacuate. This precludes the need to

run the evacuation model, and is a helpful technique when one desires to obtain

"quick" results on the development of hazard in the building regardless of the

occupant actions

3.2.3 Calculating the Hazard

Following the Step -by Step Procedure in chapter 4, the FIREDATA is used

to search the data bases for the appropriate data. The items and materials are selected as appropriate to the example case cited above, and the program

MLTFUEL is used to produce the specified fire to be input to the model (the

data for this case is presented in the Multiple Items Burning section of

chapter 6)

Next, the program FINPUT is used interactively to produce the input data

file. Since we are using the ranch house from the example cases, we can edit

one of the data files for an example case in the ranch house provided on the

disks to avoid having to re-enter the building data. (The procedure for doing

this is explained in the section on FINPUT.) After entering the specified fire

data, the file (Table 3-1)* is produced.

The program FAST is now executed with this file, producing the printer

output shown in Table 3-2* , and a "dump" file to be used with subsequent

programs. This dump file contains detailed data on the environmental

conditions in each room over the simulated fire time (e.g., temperatures, smoke

densities, gas concentrations, etc.) for use in subsequent programs.

The graphing program FASTPLOT is used next to produce the data plots of

selected variables as shown in figures 3-2 to 3-10. (The curve numbers on the

figures refer to the room numbers as shown on figure 5-1.) This allows the

user to examine the results of the fire simulation in an easily understandable

format

For an explanation of the FAST input and output: format, see the User's Guide

for FAST in Appendix A of this report.

25
The next step of doing the evacuation simulation is not required in this

example since we assumed that the occupants did not try to escape. If this

were not the case, the smoke data from the FAST dump file would be listed to

the printer with FASTPLOT, and input (from the keyboard) into the EXITT model

using the procedures described in chapter 6. If the scenario involved heat

detectors or sprinklers, the program DETACT would be used prior to the EXITT

run to provide the detector/sprinkler activation time.

Lastly, the program TENAB is used to determine the consequences of the

exposure of the occupants to the predicted environment produced by FAST. The

results of this run for this example case are presented in Tab-le 3-3. These

consequences, in terms of lethality or incapacitation, represent the hazard of

this specific scenario . Any change in any parameter can potentially change the

outcome. Subsequently, the user will want to evaluate all additional scenarios

of concern and, from the total results, decide on the hazard which might or might not exist with respect to the product in question; in this case-, his

chair

.

In this example scenario, conditions deteriorate significantly throughout

the house beginning around 9 minutes , about a minute prior to the peak burning

rate (Figure 3 . 2A) for the specified fire. Note from Figure 3-3 that the upper

layer temperatures in all of the rooms climb together (all of the interior

doors are open) while only the lower layer temperature (Figure 3-4) in the fire

room increases significantly (due to radiant heating of the floor) . Also of

importance is the position of the interface (between the layers as shown in

Figure 3-5) which determines to which layer the occupants are exposed. Figure'

3-6 gives the upper layer smoke density in each room and Figures 3-7 through 3-

9 shows the presentation of CO and C02 data both as concentration and dose.

While these are not all of the parameters which can be obtained, they (along

with oxygen) represent the most important to examine for most- cases. Finally,

note that the fatal insult is from temperature for all occupants (Table 3. 2D)

whereas lethal Ct does not accumulate during the simulation. Figure 3 . 2C shows

incapacitating Ct (450 g-min/m3 from Table 3. 2D) occurring around 16 minutes.

3.2.4 Evaluating the Consequences

Once the consequences of the specified scenario have been calculated, the

user must interpret the results. This is the last step in the overall process.

Depending on the application, the user typically will run additional

cases/scenarios and compare results. For example, calculated consequences may

be compared with previously worked or representative cases. Alternatively, the

user may run scenarios with and without the product in question to quantify the

difference in consequences/loss. Finally, variations in product properties may

be assessed in successive calculations.

NOTE: After reading the remainder of this volume, the user should try to apply

the procedures and programs provided to this example problem before attempting

a problem of his or her own. The output of each of the programs used are provided in the following tables and graphs or elsewhere in this document as described, so that direct comparisons of results can easily be made.

26
TABLE 3-1 FAST INPUT FILE

VERSN 17 SIMPLE EXAMPLE IN RANCH HOUSE

TIMES 1200 100 10

NROOM 7 NMXOP 1

TAMB 300

HI/F 0.0 0. 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0. 0

WIDTH 3 . 6 3. 6 3.4 4.5 2.7 2.7 0. 9

DEPTH 3.8 3. 0 3.0 8.1 3.8 3.8 7. 6

HEIGH 2.3 2. 3 2.3 2.3 2.3 CM CO CM 3

HVENT 1 7 1.1 2. 1 0.0

HVENT 1 8 1.1 0. 2 0.0

HVENT 2 7 1.1 2. 1 0.0

HVENT 3 7 1.1 2. 1 0.0

HVENT 4 5 1.1 2. 1 0.0

HVENT 4 7 1.1 2. 1 0.0

HVENT 5 7 1.1 2. 1 0.0

HVENT

CEILI

6 7 1.1 2. H* O O

COND 0.00018 0.00018 0.00018 0.00018 0 .00018 0.00018 0.00018

SPHT 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90

DNSTY 790 4 0 790.0 790.0 790.0 790.0 790.0 790.0

THICK 0.0160 0.0160 0.0160 0.0160 0.0160 0.0160 0.0160

EMISS 0.90000 0.90000 0.90000 0.90000 0 .90000 0.90000 0.90000

WALLS

COND 0.00012 0.00012 0.00012 0.00012 0 .00012 0.00012 0.00012

SPHT 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50

DNSTY 540.0 540.0 540.0 540.0 540.0 540.0 540.0

THICK 0.0160 0.0160 0.0160 0.0160 0.0160 0.0160 0.0160

EMISS 0.80000 0.80000 0.80000 0.80000 0 .80000 0.80000 0.80000

FLOOR

COND 0.00012 0.00012 0.00012 0.00012 0 .00012 0.00012 0.00012

SPHT 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50

DNSTY 540.0 540.0 540.0 540.0 540.0 540.0 540 .

THICK 0.0160 0.0160 0.0160 0.0160 0.0160 0.0160 0.0160

EMISS 0.80000 0.80000 0.80000 0.80000 0 .80000 0.80000 0.80000

CHEMI 1.0 0.0 Ci.O 0.0 C1.0 17933 . 300.

LFBO 4

LFBT 1

LFPOS 1

LFMAX 10

FMASS 0.0000 0.0001 0.0008 0.0058 0.0280 0.1456 0.0792 0.0887 0.0208 0.0051 0.0000

FHIGH 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50

FTIME 240.0 110.0 100.0 50.0 60.0 65.0 125.0 270.0 49.0 131.0

02 -1.37 -1.37 -1.37 -1.37 -1.37 -1.37 -1.37 -1.37 -1.37 -1.37 -1.37

C02 0.00 0.05 0.05 0.59 0.75 1.10 1.43 1.85 1.23 0.74 0.00

CO 0.00 0.01 0.01 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.00

0D 0.00 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.00 0.00

CT 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00

DUMPR C : S IMEXAM . DMP

27
TABLE 3-2 PRINTER OUTPUT FROM FAST

FAST 17 REVISION 2P

SIMPLE EXAMPLE IN RANCH HOUSE

TOTAL COMPARTMENTS - 7

MAXIMUM OPENINGS PER PAIR - 1

FLOOR PLAN

WIDTH 3.6 3..6 3.4 4.,5 2.7 2.,7 0.9

DEPTH 3.8 3,.0 3.0 8.,1 3.8 3..8 7.6

HEIGHT 2.3 2,.3 2.3 2..3 2.3 2..3 2.3

AREA 13.7 10.,8 10.2 36.,4 10.3 10..3 6.8

VOLUME 31.-5 24,.8 23.5 83..8 23.6 23..6 15.7

CEILING 2.3 2..3 2.3 2..3 2.3 2..3 2.3

FLOOR 0.0 0..0 0.0 0 ..0 0.0 0 ..0 0.0

CONNECTIONS •

1 ( 1) BW= 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.1 1.1

HH= 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.1 0.2

HL= 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

HHP= 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.1 0.2

HLP= 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

2 ( 1) BW= 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.1 0.0

HH= 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.1 0.0

HL=* 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

HHP=» 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0:0 2.1 0.0

HLP= 0.0 o'.o 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

3 ( 1) BW= 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 l.'l 0.0

HH=» 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.1 0 . 0

- HL=* 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0,0- 0.0

HHP= 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.1 0.0

HLP= 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

4 ( 1) BW= 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.1 0.0 1.1 0.0

HH= 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.1 0.0 2.1 0.0

HL= 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

HHP= 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.1 0.0 2.1 0.0

HLP= 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

•5 ( 1) BW= 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.1 0.0 0.0 1.1 0.0

HH= 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.1 0.0 0.0 2.1 0.0

HL= 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

HHP= 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.1 0.0 0.0 2.1 0.0

HLP= 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

6 ( 1) BW= 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.1 0.0

HH= 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.1 0.0

HL= 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

HHP= 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.1 0.0

HLP=- 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

7 ( 1) BW= 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 0.0 0.0

HH= 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 0.0 0.0

HL= 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

HHP= 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 0.0 0.0

HLP= 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

28
CEILING

COND

=

1

.

800 E

-04

1

.

800 E

-04

1

. 80

QE

-04

1

.

800 E

-04

1

.

800 E

-04

1

.

800 E

-04

1

.

800 E

-04

0 0-5*0 0 0 0

00 I 000

o o -a* -a- o o o

«-i (N (N H 5 O N cvj H -a= O CM CM J O CM CM h OOOOO 1 4“ 4- l 1 W W W W W W W W W W W U3 W W W U W U ^ OOOO OOOOO OOOOO

OOOO

OOOO

OOOO I 4* I I W Cd W U OOOO OOOO O 05 CD O

05 h O)

OOOOO OOOOO CM v/3 -y CD O

0

1 4» 4- I I WOOOOO U W W W

CM ^ C (fl O

H CM H ©

OOOOO

CM ^ Ifl O

OOOOO

CM o -T CD O

H CM ^5 H © H CM H ©

O CM CM H < O CM CM H O CM CM H OOOOO l 4- 4- l l UOOOOO U U1 u u

CM vD -3* CO O

h cm h co

00000

OOOOO OOOOO

CM «1 >T cfl O

H CM ^1 H CO

=0 O -S’ CM O O O

^ O -5* 05 O O O

w

CM O

05 vn

-3

* -5* O O O

H CM CM H O CM CM H -f O N CM H <f O CM CM h OOOO

OOOO OOOO

O h* H 05

00000 1 +*+* I 0 0 0.0 0

OOOOO OOOOO

H CM ^ ^ CO

OOOOO

U U U U U U U U U W W Cd CD M UOOOOO U U U U

O 05 CD OOOOO O CM 0 'T CO O CMvn-3*CDO CM O < (O O

H CM m H CO H CM /l H CO

3 ^3

*

OOOO 14-11

u w a u OOOO OOOO O 05 CD O

O) N H 05 OOOO

OOOO

-TOOOOO O CM CM <—* O (M CM H -X O CM CM OOOOO OOOOO

Cs] vn -3* CD o

-X O CM CM 1-4 OOOOO «+ 4- I I a a a a a OOOOO

O 05 CO O CM vn <r O O

OOOOO

OOOOO

H CM Vfl H CO

-X O CM CM ^ OOOOO

OOOOO

cm vn <x D o

OOOOO

aOOOOO a a a a

cm vn -x co o

<r 0 CM cN •—

OOOOO 1 4- 4- 1 I a a a a a OOOOO

CM vn 3 CD o

O O CO CO 00 -CO n co h 05

o o -r ^n o o o

o o

co «n

in o

o o

aj id

-3-0000

O) N H 05 h cm vn h co OOOO — I I a a a a OOOO OOOO

OOOO

OOOO OOOO O 05 O O

3 O CM CM H OOOOO 1 -r -r I 1 a a a a a OOOOO OOOOO- CM >x 'O O

H CM >n H CO

-T O CM CM ^ OOOOO I +• -f I I aj a a a a OOOOO OOOOO

CM in 3 CD o

h cm h co

o CM CN t-H OOOOO I t I a a a a a OOOOO

CM vn -x CD o

-X O CM CM —V OOOOO

a a a a a 00000 OOOOO CM vn -x cD o

-X O CM CM <—* OOOOO

a a a a a OOOOO OOOOO CM vn 3 ID o

CD 73 il O

o a-. o z a cd cm

il £2 aj ~ <-3 ^ 00o un © u:

Z* 30 o

-X O CM CM ^ OOOOO

a a a a a 00000 OOOOO CM 3 CD O

H CM H CO 2

53 3

§

'tl

11 >

as a a —

>->

11 11 11 11 > a tn H H U ai 2 z a 2

CO a i- a

=S 11 11 11 _ > ^ M

5 2 r- r- O M J 2 2 M H M

i. O 2 2 = S U VI 2 H Id

II as II II a* s =- e- CU Z 3 CO a O — z

cj so a

<

2

11 as 11 11 11 2 SJ X IS 2 M 2 Q H H U M

S 3 ! a 2 = I

a u w 2 H a

O a > o

C s- a

1 a a a

a Z ra

as a

a a

a a

a < r- a a 2

h a a

aanaa 2: 73 , r*

il 3 Z a a <

pH ^ H

HH 3

^3 r- —• -z i

a — <

a O a u

—1 o 1 n —

os 00 s

II II I I

l l :! I CO a cm zJ O a r- 2 O C O U O U

£ = u

I

I

FTI

ME2.40EI02

1.10EI02

1

00EUJ2

bO.

CO.

6b.

1.25E+02

2.70E^2

49

1.31EI02
CO U0 O o o o o o o O o o o o o o 4* 4- 4° + 4- 4- 4- cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o O O o o o o o o o o o o o O' o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

CO CO CO CO CO CO o o o o o o o o o o o o o o 4- 4" 4* 4* 4- 4- 4- Cd cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd o o o o o o o o o o o o o o O O o o o o o O o o o o o o o o O o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

CO CO CO CO CO CO c o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o •r4 + 4- 4* 4* 4* 4* 4- 4J Cd cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd 03 o o o O o o o u o o o O o o o d) O O o o o o O O o o o O o o o c

<y O O o o o o o O o o o o o o o a O o o o o O c

CO CO CO CO CO CO 0 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o + + 4“ 4- 4- + Jfm 03 Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd <D o o O o o o o •r4 o o -O o o o o o o O r-J o o © O O o o o o o o o 03a, O O o o o o O O o o o o o o o 03 O O o o O O co CO CO CO CO CO u o o o o o o o 03 o o o o o o o >v

4* + 4* 4“ 4° 4- 4- 03 Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd r—i o o o o o o o o o o o o o o C4 o O o o o o O O o o o o o o o 03a. o O o o o o O O o o o o o o o a- o o o o o O o

CO CO CO CO CO CO o o o o o o o o o o o o o o 4" -L 4* 4- 4- -L -f- Cd Id Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o O o o o o o o o o o o o o o o O o o o o o O o o o o o o o o o o o o o

CO CO CO CO CO CO o 9

Cd Cdo o o o o ©

<r o o o o o o o © o CO o o o o o o o

CM o o o o • o o o

CO

m o o1 4- Cd Cd m o o o o o o o Q

vo o o o o o o o o

Cv CO o o o o o o o

vo CM • o o o o o o o

CO in o o . 1 4* Cd Cd uo o o o • o o O' o ©

VO o o o o o o ©

03V CO o o o o _o o o

VO ON o o o o o o o

ON in o o r 1 4* Cd Cd in o o o o o o o o 0- o o o o o o o o

CO o o o o o o o

CM CM o o o o o o o

CO n o o1 4* Cd Cd

in o o o o o o o o

CM o o o o o o o o

ov CO o o o o o o o

VO CM o o o o o o o’

CO in o o 1 4* Cd Cd CM o o o o ©

©

CO o o o o © o o ©

CO CO o o o © o o ©

CM o o o o o o o o o 0 0 0 0 0 o o 0 0 0 0 0 CO uo 4“ 4* 4* 4- 4- 4- 4. 0 0

Cd Cd Cd III Cd CxJ Cd 1 -r o o 0 0 0 0 0 Cd cn o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 © 0 0 0 0 © a o o o o o o o o o o 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 © 0 © z CM CO 0 0 0 0 © 0 © o o o o o o o o o o o 0 0 0 0 0

CJ o o o o o o av CM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Cd CO cn CO CO

m CO

ono — o - a C/3 on cn C/3 — Q C/3 2 C/3 2 C/3 2 C/3 2 • 2 © 04 04 04 04 II II II II II 04 < O, < n < 2-t < \ II O4 04 e-H 2 2 2 2 X—s

W' 2 £-4 2 2 2 —

— 2 2 © £-i Cd Cd CxJ Cd 1-4 44 44 44 44 cn Cd Cd Cd o cd H H E-t fd s-/ 'w' 03 CM CM c © 2 H H > C/3 04 CI4 o£ CJ 0 c © ©

!—H

Cd s’ s’ J 2 2 O' O' O' ©1 2 H o 4-4 o o CJ o Uh Cd Cd o

CO
TIME =

100.0

SECONDS. II O o o CM CM pH O O o o o o o O 4= 4s 4= 1 1 4° 4= 2 2 2 Cd Cd Cd Cd O O O rx. ON VO CO o o O CM 00 <f <f pH fH O o 00 vO pH f*H o o O ON <f o rx

CM o O o o o x

x o o O pH CM pH pH O m o o O O 1 i i co CO co CO CO co o o o oo 00 rH pH o o o o O o o + 4s 4° 1 1 l l 2 2 :

Cd Cd Cd Cd O o o o CM vO CM O o o o 00 rx ON O CO o o o o O O O o o 03 xf CM CO O rH o o o o O o o o o pH pH pH pH O o o o O o i i i 1 CO CO CO a CO m C o o o co CM pH pH 0 o o o O O o o ®H + + 4* 1 1 i i 4J

CsJ

w Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd 0 o o O co c\ pH VO Co o o O CO o oo O 4J 03 CO 00 o o o pH pH o o o <r CM rx CM C<

o CO o o o o o o o o o On CM CM CM o o O o o o o I 1 1 1 c

CO CO CO CO co co o

pH 00 r-H CM pH CM CM o o o o o o O o 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 cn 2 2 Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd <u 00 Ox CM CM CO <r CM •H CM M3 X O O o CM o

<r CM ON 00 o o O o on pH <f pH O CM VO OJa

pH O X o o o o o pH <f rx rx CM rH <f

w o o pH o o o o 1 1 l 1 CO CO CO m CO CO u o o o 00 00 pH pH a> o o o O o o o >N 4s 4° 4* 1 1 i i 03 2 2 Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd pH o o o CO CO oO rx o o o xf 00 CO O Sd o CO o o o o O o o o o O pH CM <1° 0)cd O p~

o o o o o o o o o pH rH rH rH Cd o o o o o o i i i l 3

CO CO CO CO CO CO o o o UO 00 rH pH o o o O o o o 4- 4" 4° 1 1 l I 2 2 Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd O o o 1

pH OO rx O o o pH CO rx rH o X o o o o O O o o o 00 o pH CO o pH o o o o O O o O o CM pH pH rH o o o o o o 1 i i i m CO CO CO CO co o o o oo 00 CM CM o o o O o o o *4 4“ *4 1 1 1 1 2 2 Cd Cd a Cd Cd o O o <r <00 co <f o O o o cn oo <f o CM o o O O O O o O o <r CO co <f o r-l O O O O O OOOOx-O’OOOn o o O O O O iiii cO CO CO CO CO CO

CO oo pH CO CM xf CM vO oo O o rH o <—4 O r—l o o i + I 1 1 i 1 1 1 Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd O ON <f VO 00 xf CO <f CM

OO 00 00 ON O xf o ON VO

vO O co o IX xf rx <f VO xf CM CO <—

V© CO vo f—

CM

CO 00 O Oi +

Cd Cd oo O O o o o o o o

vO rx O o o o o o o

On O O o o o o o o

VO CM O o o o o o o

CM oo rx 00 CM CO xf CM o o O O O o O O 1 4* i i 1 i i Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd rx ON xf 00 00 IX CO rx ON xf CO CO f—

vo 00 vo O O

xf CM 00 co v0 ac vo CO -co oo i—

CM o O0 ON oo <f xf

OO O0 vO vO cl CM o O O O o o 4- i i i 1 1 Cd Cd Cd Cd a Cd <f ON ON oo , oo CM 00 pH OO 00 O o CO 1—

vO 1—

CO • ON ON CO 00 CM 03 pH ON xf

r-“

CM o oo O OO pH ON

CO UO o o1 4* Cd Cd - . oo o o o o o o o o

CM rx o o o o o o o

ON O o o o o o o o

VO CM o o o o o o o

CO uO o O1 -u Cd Cd CM O o o o o o o o

CO rx o o o o o o o CO O o o o o o o o

rx CM o o o o o o o

CO oo o o1 4* Cd Cd X O O o o o o o o

00 X o o o o o o o

CM O o o o o o o o

ON CM o o o o o o o\ C3 CO CO CO CO

PN . CO 2 CO 2 CO CO 2 1 2 2 Cd Cd Cd Cd II II II II II < p 1 < o < < \ Cd Cd 2 P-l 2 2 2 2 'W' 2 2 2^ 2 2 ~ 2 2 2 Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd i—

h-i h-h 1—

1—

Cd Cd O Cd H H H H x^ X*- CD CM CM Q H E-> > Q 00 Cd 2 2 CJ u O Q CJ O CJ

Cd 3 3 2 2 2 O' O' O' r, CJ 3 J 2 2 O 2 2 2 2 2 II
TIME =

200.0

SECONDS.

VO p» p^ CO CM O+

Ci] O o o O o w Cx] Ci] Ci] Ci] o On ON O 00 rH OO <r P-» O o o rH rH o rH r«. rH ON ON ON CM rH O o o o o o o rH VO p^ • n >0 n 00 rH + + 4- l i 4- i • • • rH • • w w Ci] W Cl] Ci] Cx] o 00 co o p»« rH p^ o o O CO m p^ On * o o O o m vO rH

m co

m CM p-» r—4 m in o o O ON CM

CM P-* p» CO CM

vo t-H o CM CM vO vO o o O rH com co O o o O O O o

rH CO o O o o i 1 1 1 1 4" 1 1 1 1 1 co CO CO CO CO CO Ci] Ci] Ci] Ci] Ci] Ci] Ci] o o O CM rH rH rH CM P*. CM CO rH CO i

o o o O o o o vO rH o O CM O CO CM + 4- + 1 l l I p~. CO o vO CO vO CO o w Cl] Ci] Ci] Cl] Ci] Ci] rH • o o O rH in CO CM <t 00 CO rH o rH r-4 CO , o o o CM m ON o p- vO o CM CM o O o o o vO vO o <r

oo r—i O o o O o O o o o rH rH rH <f n vO vO CO O o o o o o 1 i 1 l O O o o o

ro CO CO CO CO CO e 4- 1 1 1 1 o o o CM rH rH rH o Ci] Ci] Ci] Ci] Ci] o o o o o o o *iH co ON 00 p^ VO On vO oo vO

4" + 4" 1 l l i 4J cn

m rH rH cn vO

m ON <T

w Cl] Ci] Ci] Ci] Cl] Ci] a]

m o o CO o n rH o o O CO o ON in 5-1 • rH o o O ON CO <r ON •U O 00 rH CM O CM rH o

Onm Mt r—1rH rH rH o o O rH ON CM G

<o cm CM o o o o o o o O <f rH rH CM o O o o o o o i i 1 1 G in <r n in CO co CO co co co co o o o O o O

rH in O rH rH CM CM o 4- I 1 I 1 o o O o o o o Cx] Ci] Ci] Ci] Ci] 1 1 + i l 1 1 V) vO CM o o O ON o vO CM w Ci] Cl] Ci] Ci] Ci] Ci] CO oo o vO oo CM rH CM vO rH ON CO ON CM p^ m •H • ON rH • CO CO rH vy m CO ON vO in <r CO o CO rH

on CM co OO CM r—4 o o CO CO <rm

m o CM CO rH CM vr n o a • CM O ON o o o o o rH CO rH rH m rH CO cn O O CM o o o o i 1 I 1 CO CO CO co CO CO 54 CM <r P«» p^ P- m CM o o o CM rH rH rH co O o o O o o o t o o o O o o o cn 1 + 1 1 1 1 i 4s + 4- 1 I l 1 ca Ci] Ci] Ci] Ci] ca Ci] Ci] w Ci] Ci] Ci] Ci] Ci] Ci] rH n* ON CM CM CM rH CM in ON o o o O CO rH uo CO rH O o CM O co CM o o o rH in ON rH 54 p~» CO o vO m vO on o p«* VO o CM CM O O o o o vO vO o <r a> rH

cl >0 co oo rH r rH rH

m

CO rH o o O o O O o o o <r rH rH rH a. O o o o o o 1 I 1 i on CO CO CO CO CO o o o CM rH rH rH CM <r p**

m CM o o o o o o o o o o o o o o 4- -r + 1 I l l 1 4- 1 l 1 i 1 Ci] Ci] Ci] Ci] Ci] Ci] Cs] Cl] Ci] Ci] 'O Ci] U o o O in CO rH o VO p- ON CM o o r-H n o o o rH p'. CM CM rH p^ <r O rH CM rH 00 o

vo in <r o CM CM o O o o o vO o on oo on o rHvO

m vOm

—

co rH o o o O o O o o o <r rH rH rH <r oo oo rH o rH rH

m o o O o o O 1 l l I co CO co CO CO CO o o o CM rH CM CM o o o O o O O CM <r P*-* CO CM + + 4* 1 I 1 1 o o O o o o

Ci] Ci] Ci] Ci] Ci] Ci] i + i 1 i 1 1 o o O <r oo OO rH Ci] Ci] Ci] Ci] Ci] Ci] Ci] o o O CM CO on oo rH o o o CM n CM CM P^

rH rH <r o CM rH O O o o O rH p- 00 ON p^ rH o CM rH CM vO O' o in rH vO m vO m 00 CO rH o o O o o o o o O in rH r*. CO rH O o o o o o 1 i 1 1 m oo oo rH o rH rH CM

CO CO CO CO CO CO

CT3 00 OO 00 cn E

CL 00 £ 00 £ 00 £ cn £ i £ £ CU CL, CL CL II II II II II £ CL < < Cm < \ Cu CL, £ H £ £ £ £ y CL £ ^4 £ Q, £ —. E £ £ H CL Ci] Ci] Ci] Ci] M H H H H

Ci] Ci] O Ci] H H H H M-/ 'w' M-/ > <0 OJ CM O rs H

E-* H > a 00 a, Cl ac u u O o CJ CJ

Ci] 3 3 J £ £ O' O' r\ O

CD J CD CD CJ £ £ £ Ci] Ci]
.I

uo M3 NO CO o o o o o

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd

m NO <r in ON ON NO in o o o r—4 o O i-4 CO CO 00 ON m3 CM NO NO CO o o o o o o o r—

O' Oil • inm a CM

4° 4= 4° 1 4" 4“ i • • • CO • r—

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd o in i—4 CM CM

m o O o O f—

<r i—4 in o o O r*' CM ON in co ON 03 CO UO o O o o o ON CM 00 O

'O UO NO NO co

r—=J CM r-4 o co r-« r-* o o o r-4 i—4 Mf ON o o o O a

CM CO o O O O i i 1 1 4° 1 1 1 i co CO CO co co co Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd o o o r—

i—4 CM r-4

m O CM CO o O 00 o o o o o o o o CM CO CM CO NO ON

-f= 4s 4= i i 1 l CO NO 00 O' oo o r-4 Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd CM O O o CO P" m O NO i-4 CM o CM CO o o o o ON in CM NO co CO 03 NO O O o o o t—

>0 r-4 00 i—

CO o o o o O o o o i-4 UO ON i-4m UO UOm co o o O o o o i 1 1 i o O o o O

co CO CO CO co co C 4* 1 1 l 1 o o o i—4 i-4 r-4 r-4 0 Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd o o o o o o o •H co O CO CM oo o 00 <r CM + 4° + i f l i 4J <r oo O' O' 03 O' o CM

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd r—4 CO ON ON O' O O o <f CM n* 00 SU i-4 • uo i—4 • o O o O CO ON o U r-4 CN t—4 t-4 o

ON ON O ON in <r r-4 r—

o O o p—4 O r-4 P m CM ON o O o o o o O o r-4 m i—

CM o o O O o o o 1 1 i 1 P UO CO CM co co co co CO co 0 o o o o o

r—

<r o i-4 o co CM o -4 1 1 l 1 o o o o o O o Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd l l 4° i 1 1 CO CM CM 'U0 co O r-4 O uO r'' Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd G) r—

CM t-4 CO oo CO <r o o 00 O CM NO CO ON •rH O' t—4 uo CM CM o

CM r—4 <r CO ONm CM o ON r—4 <T r—4 CM CM o NO o o CM 00 NO ON CO in CO 0) i—4 t-4 CM CM CM 0 • a, 03 O GO p—4 O o o o r-4 <f 03 CM NO NO w o o CO O o o o 1 1 1 i co CO co CO CO CO u m M3 NO CO o o o i—4 p—4 CM r-4 <3 o * O O o o o o o o o o o 4° 1 1 1 1 4= 4= 4° ) i 1 i o Cd Cd Cd .Cd. Cd

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd p-4 UO O t-4 ON CO o co O 00 O O O os CO CM O' O O' <r CM 03 CM oo NO ON o o O CO in O'. in u CO NO 00 I''' 00 O t—4 CM NO CO CO co NO o O o o o i—4 CM r—4 <D • CM

a, O NO r—4 CM o CM CO o

03 t—4 CO o O o o O o o o r—

in ON r-4 a. O o O o o o i 1 1 1 co CO CO CO CO CO o o o i—4 r-4 CM r—

<f in NO NO CO o o o o o O o o O O O O 4* 4* 4" i i 1 i 4- 1 1 1 1 Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd cd Cd Cd Cd o O O ON NO O' ON O' CM CO ON NO ON NO O o o O i—4 UO CM O' O PH <r CM ON p—4 ON NO ON o m CO CO CO NO O o o <D O CM in 00 O CO NO 00 O' CO O r-4 • CM

03 1-4 CO o O o O o o O o i—4 in CO i-4 o NO r-4 CM O CM CO o O O o o o o i 1 1 l co CO CO co CO co o O o r-4 t-4 CM CM o o o o o O o <T in M3 NO CO

4° -4 4° i i 1 1 O Q o o o

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd 1 1 i 1 o O o oo O CM -U 20 Cd Cd Cd

CO o o o m 00 ON O i—4 co oo 00 CO O' ON n Q t-4 CO CM m O O o o o co ON i—4 CM r—

c\ uo CM r-4 p—t r-4 UO ON 2 CO NO ON <^V o r-H O PH. r-4 CO o O o o o o o o i-4 in O' O' CM o O o O o o o i 1 1 1 O NO r—4 CM o CM co o Cd co CO CO co CO CO

COo

CO 0 CO CO CO CO

—

a. CO 2 CO s 30 CO 2 1 2 cu Cu CU cu II II !l 11 II < cu < 2-i < 2-i < \ 2£)

II a. r\ H 2 2 2 2 _—

,—

> ' 2 cu 2 2U 2 2-i 2 r-4 2 2 J CU Cd Cd Cd Cd l-H HU H4 HH H4 w

Cd Cd 0 Cd J—

Uu e-u C-H ' ' N^ <u CM CM P J-4 2 E-* > a 00 CU ta -v*' O !u 0 0 O

1—

Cd 2 3 _d 2 2 O' O' or Cu 0 H 3 hi D 2 O 3 uu Cd Cd II
TIME=

400.0

SECONDS.

MT

m in CM o4- Cd O O o O

Cd Cd Cd Cd

O'M MO O' inm H O' MO rH O o o rH O O rH o MO m • O' rH H CM O' O o o o o o o m o <3- OM co • H 00 O'

•f + 4- 1 + 4" l • • co mO • w w Ed Cd Cd Cd Cd o m m m <r rH O o o O CTN rH O' <r o o O O o m o

CO ON MO rH 00 CO OM CM o o O MO o m

m CM co O' rH in MO MO o o O CO CM CM m o c o o o

CM CN O o o o 1 1 1 1 + 1 1 I 1 CO CO CO CO CO CO Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd o o o rH o CM CO MO m CM MO CM CM <r in CO o o o o o O O CO oo CM • MO OM co m rH + 4- 4* I 4- 1 1 OM O'- H CM m O in

Cd cd cd Cd Cd Cd Cd • H CM • o o o O'- ON in O o <r <r in <r H O o o o O O CM H

00 MO CM

m CM O' rH rH o o o O' CM MO CM

UO rHm rH CM rH o o o o o co CM CO mO CO <r CM rH o H o o o o 1 1 1 1 o O o o o

CO CO CO CO CO cn C + 1 l l 1 o o o rH o CM tH O Cd Cd Cd Cd o o o o o O o •H H CM CO CM MO M0 <r O CO 4" 4- + I 4* 1 l 4-1 rH H CO OM rH CM CO

Cd cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd CT5 CO 00 CM OM o mO in o o O mO CO CO CM >4 CM • MO H r“^ o o o CM in H O' 4-1 OM rH rH rH CO <r 00 o MO CM CM CM o o o 00 O H rH c

aio • CT\ CM MO rH CM rH o o o o o <r co O' rH

rH o H o o O o I 1 1 i c m CM CO CO CM CO CO co co CO co o O o o O o

rH co rH o H co CM o 4- 1 1 1 1 o o o o o O o Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd 1 1 4" + 4- 1 1 Cfl CM CO i

<r rH o CM

Cd

w Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd CU O CM o CO CM CO

<r o oo O' CO O mO •H <7 rH <r O' CM CM mO

O' o rH co MO O <r o o-m • CM CO CO

in CM <f <r

m CO CO MO CO OM in 00 O' <u H CM H H 00

CL <f o OM rH CO o o rH CO in CM H O' MO 0! • co c <r O O O O 1 i 1 cn CO co CO co CO Li <5- in

m CM o o O rH o CM co 01 O o o O o o o O o o o o >M 4* 1 1 1 1 + + + I 4" 1 1 05 Cd Cd -Cd- Cd

cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd H rH mO CO MO CM CM mO mO CO o o O OM H m oo CO 00 O 'd- C7\ mO in rH o o O p'- OM CO MO L CM O- H CM in O in ON mo H m CM O' rH rH o o O MO H MO in 01 • rH CM

CL o 'd- <r

m H o m H m rH CM rH o o o o O cn CM CO i

CL H o H O o o o i 1 1 1 3

co CO CO CO CO CO o o O H o CM CO <r <r

m

m CM o o o o o o O o o o O o 4- 4- + i 4“ 1 1 4- l 1 1 1 cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd o O O CO m CO O CO H CM CO MO co in m CM o o O oo <r O' OM o 00 on CM oo co <r rH

m OMm CM r^. rH rH o o O O' CM <r CO O' CM <r <r O' o m

rH rH CM

m H UO rH CM rH o o o o O CO CM CO in <r in rH O rH1 o rH o o o o 1 1 1 CO CO CO CO CO CO o o o rH O CM CM o o o o o o o <r <r in m CM 4- 4- 4- i 4" 1 1 o o o o o

cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd H i 1 1 1 o o o O <r CM <r Cd a uZj Cd o o o O CM rH m <r mO <r in mO 30 co CM CM CM <r O mO rH rH o o o CO o o CM <r <T OM O' CM Q

O' oo on CM JO o UO

m r-l OM rH CM rH o o o o o <r CM CO <r rH rH CM

rH O T—< o o o o 1 1 1 <f mO UO rH O CO CO co co CO CO 1

T/

aj 00 CO CO CO s a 00 Z CO z CO z CO z 1 Z in 04 04 24 04 II II II II II < 04 < 24 < 2u < \ 30

cu a, Z H z Z z Z z 'O4 z z r t z rH 2 z Z h4 24 cd Cd Cd cd i—t

44 t—t M 1—1

cn Cd Cd O Cd H H H H 'w' v-/ 'w' ai CM CM O H H > Q on 04 2d O S-i O O O O o

Cd 3 S J Z z O' O' O' Cu CJ 3 J 3 Z O Z Cd cd
TIME =

500.0

SECONDS.

CM on on O o o O o 4* 1 4° 1 1 Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd an un co co • un un o o o o pH pH o on on on VO vo Mf vO o o o o o o o • 00 CM r-> n- pH no pH + + + 4s + i + pH • • • • pH • Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd r-*= -4” pH tH r>» o O O o rH un on on O O o o vO CM On

V© O on CM CM CM On On O O o an 00 VO

v? CM on <f o O un CM r-t on vO vO O O o CM pH CM 00 O O o O

r-*. pH pH O O O 1 1 1 + 1 1 1 on on on on on on Cd Cd Cd Cd o o o o rH CM O un 00 vO pH 00 un CM , o o o o o O O CM CM nO pH CO • CM fH

4* *T 4* 4“ -U ci 1 + CO un o nO vO <f rH

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd CM an vQ O O o rH VO CO r-. on rH o O O o On VO on rH pH rH on rH On r**. O o o o r". an <r 00 on CM vO <f O O O o o rH rH on 00 <f CM on on cn <r o CM o O o O i I 1 O o O o o

on on on on on on c 4= 1 4* I 1 o o o o pH CM o O Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd o o

-r o o o o o H r—

an an O • an + + + 4s 1 4* ±j CM O un on an fH <r rH

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd ca vO CM on on un <3= CM O O o <T 00 on vO U) CM • tH o o o eo vO CO co 4J 00 00 CM on pH o

CN v© o CM pH rH on on o o o cn an On c

on 00 on CM pH On t-f pH o o o’ on CM on I"** o

CO o CM rH O O o 1 1 1 c Mt on CM on on on cn on on on o o O o O

CM CM CM pH CM pH O O 4s 4* 1 1 o o o o o o O Cd Cd Cd Cd 1 1 + + + i 4* cn un <f pH <f CM * vo

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd 0) rH pH cn r-'v VT CM o O pH vO un CM •H un un un un on o O CM un rH O pH o un • CM a

un O o CM rH 00 00 00 00 O CM rH rH vO 0) r-» O pH vO O • 0 « «• * a

un 'sO on CM Mt o CM CM CM CM un CM T“i pH r". 01 un o r-» CM CM O o 1 1 i on on on on on U -a CM on . Mt a O o o pH CM O ai o O O o o o o a o o O >n 4° 1 1 1 + + 4° 4= 4= 1 4s Cd Cd Cd Cd

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd pH CM un O rv on O O O On vO CM on CM on un Ml" an rH O o O n- un O <f u CO un o M3 on pH CM pH O on tH on n- O'. O o O O I-"- an a CM crn M3

CU p>* cn rH r-- o

<r 00 co CM n© O o O o o pH pH on oo a- o CM o O O o i i 1 on cn on on on on O o o o rH CM o CM cn ^4 o o o o o o o O o o O

4° 4- 4s + 4" 1 4* 4* 1 i 1 Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd o o O CM CM o vO an tH cn O o o o O rH r-. r>» n- cn an un oo m vO fH

un o on on O oo i-" o o o un O CO an vO r-~ un vO rH

CM co M3 on co CM vO <r O O o o o rH rH on oo r-» cn H o o CM o o O O i » 1 on on on on on on o o o o pH CM O o o o o o o o <r CM on <r + + + 4- 4* 1 4- o o O O

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd H 1 1 1 O o o O cn CM Cd Cd Cd Cd O o o pH CO 00 pH pH an co rH rH <r 03

un O Mf on oo r". r-- r^. o o o 00 CM an vO o CO ''4 un an o O

vO vO vO rH <r rH

on vo pH CM un O O o o o rH rH rH CO on CO vo <r o on O o O O I l 1 <r CM an o

on on CO on on on ^—

a on on on on cu on 2 on 2 on 2 on 2 2 S CU CU CU CU II II II II II -U CU < Cu cu <

a* CU 3 H 2 2 2 2 X—

X—

cu 2 CU s 2 pH s 2 J CU Cd Cd cd Cd 1—

HU HU HU HU cn Cd Cd O Cd H H H H ^ 

a; CM CM o H H > Q on CU Cu CJ U) o O a o

Cd S J 2 2 O' O' O' cu o 2 J D 2 O 2 h-J CU Cd Cd II

CT

mg- in/ 1j

2.41

2.53

2.58

11.3

5.83

2.57

4.05
TIME =

600.0

SECONDS.

Mf Mf CM CO CM o o O O o 4- 1 — 1 Cd Cd Cd Cd ' Cd n O0 O NO NO pm n o o o o rH rH rH rH CO ON Mf Mf o Mf fM» n o o o o o o o CM CM NO n CM CO o rH + 4“ 4- + 4* l + • CM

cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd o CM o Mf rH rH rH o o o MO o CM ON o o o co ON rH rH CM CM pm CM <f CM M0 MO o o o Mf rH o rMf Mf CM CO CM

in CO <f CM MO n rH rH o o o co ON Mf Mf O O o O o

rH <f rH r-» MO CM CM 1 1 1 + 4" 1 4- 1 no CO CO CO CO CO Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd o o o rH rH CM rH ON co rH O CO o CO ON o o o o o O o MO n Mf on oo rH ON CO + + 4- + 4- 1 4- MO Mf ON n CO rH n on

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd CM CO o o o 00 ON Mf Mf o CO o CO rH rH rH o o o o I"-* ON ON o pm <f CO ON ON pm O'- o o o NO CM O NO NO MO CO CM n 00 CO CO o o o rH MO p^ <f Mf Mf CM CO CM

rH o CM <f CO o O 1 1 o O o O o n CO CO CO CO CO £ 4- 4- 1 + 1 o o o rH CM rH rH O Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd o o o o O o o •r^ rH O NO rH 00 co n NO n + + 4- 4- 4- l 4- u NO PM o 00 CO n i

ON

cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd £ rH CM o ON p- rM 00 o o o CO CM NO O U • rH • • CM o o o CM Mf 00 NO u o rH NO rH rH rH n ON O o rH MO MO o o o o O Mf NO £

on CM rH CM MO rH 00 00 o o o MO rH co Mf o o CM CM O ON CM CM 1 i £ CM CO Mf CM on CM

p*. CO CO CO CO O o O o o o O

rH rH CO CM CM rH rH o 1 4- 4* 1 4* 1 o o o o O o o Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd 1 I 4“ 4- 4- 4- 4* cn rH ON Mf rH rH CO ON rM rM

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd <u 00 rH rH rH Mf n Pm

ON pm oo CO oo oo CO •rH Mf NO rM Mf CO r-H n

MO mT O'. CO CM Mf n o , CO CM n

00 CO CM 00 MO co pm 00 O. 00 00 n OO NO a; ON CO 00 n CM n a

<f rH n r—i

CO CO n n CM rH rH pm co CM Mf

w • pm MO CO Mf co co 1 1 o CO n n Ml- MT U Mf Mf CM CO CM

rH1 o o o rH rH CM rH <u O O o o o o o o o o o o >N 4" 4* 1 4* 1 + + 4d 4- 4* 1 4“ £ Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd- Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd rH CO n NO NO CM CM Mf ON o O O O rH rH CO NO Mf co on rM rH 00 CO o O O O CM MO ON u NO Mf ON n oo rH n on MO pm CM CO rH O rM pm o O o MO CM rH MO <D • CM CO a O CO o co rH rH rH

MO M0 CO CM MO ON co co o O o rH MO r-» Mf ar—i O CM MT CO O O I 1 £3 n on CO CO co CO o O o rH rH CM rH Mf Mf CM on CM o o o o o O o o o o o o + 4- 4* 4* 4- 1 4" 4- 4- i 4* 1 Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Uj Cd Cd o O o NO O rH rM. CO PM o MT NO n ON NO CM o O o CM ON CM ON CM CM 00 |M. NO ON n CO

p-- M0 M0 CO CO <f n n o O o MO on o MO r>. n ON Mf ON o NO on CM on

on MO <f CM n 00 co co o O o rH NO |m» Mf O on o CO rH rH rH

r—< o CM CO O O l 1 n CO CO CO CO CO o o o rH rH CM rH o o o o o O o Mf CM on CM

4* 4* 4* 4- 4* 1 4- o O o o o

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd 4“ -r 1 4* 1 o o o CM n o MO Cd W Cd Cd Cz3 o o o 00 (M CO PM rH O o PM n ON CN NO n

CM M0 CO CO Mf M0 rH rH o o o CO CO CO n O on ON NO PM ON <7 rM rH 1— n rH r-H <T

CO CO rH CM rH CO o o o o o CM oo MO Mf rH CM CO CO o CO n 'O rH rH 1 1 O CO CO CM rH CM n CO CO CO CO co

nOco \ £ CJl CJl cji CJl ~ a CJ1 2 CJl 2 cn 2 CJl 2 1 2 *f a, Cd 0-i cu II II II II II dC <* CU <* CU < | <* \ kQ

Cd CL, £i H 2 2 2 2 2* Cu 2 04 2 04 5 r-H s 2 2 CU Cd Cd Cd Cd UU HU HU 1—1 1—l £

Cd Cd O Cd H H H H M^ '— M4" M-' 'w' a) CM CM O C£

— H H > Q 00 Cd Cd cd CJ d o O O o

Cd 3 S J 2 2 O' O' O' 04 o D J D 3 CJ £> hJ Id Cd Cd
TIME =

700.0

SECONDS. Il

CM cn <r CM co CM © © © © © © 1 4 H 1 4. 1 Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd pH <T av •<r av av in ^4 o o o rH rH pH pH av co so pH VC av av CM o o o o © © © 1— *4 av so in vO CO • 4 4 4 4s 4s 1 4 • • co

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd vO vO

© V© pH P*^ pH a O o co pH in © o O o CM CO © <7

r*» SO O CM CM 'd' o o o CM avm pH co *4 CM CO CM

Ov VO

m CM iH 00 CO CO o o o eO r^« CM CO

©

©©

©

© O in pH o CO CO co 1 1 1 4 + 1 4= 1 VO m <r CO CO CO Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd o o o rH pH CM r—4 vo SO in © in © r-> CM © o o o © © © 00 VO 0 <r VO SO pH VO 4 f 4 4* 1 4 pH vO CM vO in <r

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd rH CO O o O cn CO so in © av vO CM pH CM o o o vO un in 00 Ov 00 <r co CM CO pH pH o o o m <r © 1—4 CO m CO CM vO r- n*. r**» o o O pH in *4 CO CM cn ^4 CM CO CM

pH pH CM VO

m pH pH 1 1 ©

©©©©©

in co CO CO CO CO 2 1 4 4» 1 4 1 o o o rH pH rH 1—4 0 . Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd o o o o © © © •pH <r m CM VO O' © ^4 4 4 4 4° 1 4 u‘ av av <7 av av CO CM CM

Cd cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd 03 in cn 00 CM av

© O o O VO CM CO r>. u pH • «> CO o o O CO CO <7 © u <r CO CM f-4 CM cm cn SO P=H m CM CM o o o CM VO pH £ O r*=

CM vO co o o o m 00 vO CO 0

ov cn CM CO pH >0 1 1 C <r CM co CM

vo co <f <r CO co 0 ©©©©

rH CM CO CM CM H pH 0 4 1 + 1 © o o © © © © Cd Cd Cd l 1 4- 4° 4- 4° 4 S3 © © av CM so © ©

cd Cd £z3 Cd Cd Cd Cd <V

©

©

m r-* l

av vO

CM o CO <7

m av CO •pH

©

© r«. 00 co av

Ov Ov CM

© an <r 00 0 cn CM

in ov <T o© Ov oo av av <r -a in in VO <r

© 0)©© av n CM <r

CL. in in r—4 CO OV i

H 00 rH m CM r—4 CO S3 CO <f vO o VO 00 co 1 1 Cv <3= vo m <T ^4 5-1 co CM CO CM o O o rH pH CM rH a © © © © O o o o © © © © >n 4 4 1 4 1 4 4 4= 4. 4= 1 4 03 Cd Cd Cd Cd .Cd. Cd Cd Cd uz3 Cd Cd Cd pH m in - <7 <7 f—

1—4 CM O O O <7 © vo <7 so <7 vo ^4 ^4 SO © VO © O O un © av 00 u pH VO CM VO un ^4

in Ov CM CO V?m CM CM o O o m <r

© rH a; • pH CO 0- © av vO CM pH CM

ov in CO CM VO r-'. o O o r—4

m <r CO CL

pH rH CM VO

m rH pH 1 1 ©

m <o CO CO CO CO o o o rH pH CM rH fO <r CM CO CM o © o 0 © © © © © © © © + a. — H 1 4 4. 1 4*. 1 Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd o O o 1^ CO CM pH vO vO <r ^4 ^4 CM o O CO VO 00 so © 30 © O vC CM r^- vO CO vO r>. Ov OV o o © in in © 1—4 CM 00 • CM so an in

rH ro

r^» in >4 CM in vo VO VO o o o pH

m CO

© av sO CM pH CM

rH pH CM vo

m pH pH l 1 in CO cn CO CO CO o o o rH rH CM pH o o o 0 © © © >4 CM

m CM

-t- 4 4» 4- 1 4 © O © Q ©

Id Cd Cz2 Cd £z* Cd Cd 4. 4= 1 4o 1 o o o co co CM r- Cd r-n Cd Cd Trl o o o O CO VO so CM co av CM H m

vO <r *4 CO co O pH rH o o CM

© O © CM

m rH in 0 rv. n

CM so ro in vO rH

in CV rH CM CM CO o o o o o CM I1"* CM co CM 4") m pH CO VO CM CM 1 1 © oc O m pH CO in CO m CO CO CO ^—\ a cn on on on © C/3 © on © 03 on z: —1* 0 p . n t O

II II II II H v < £-4 < -H < 0 . < \ Cd H z: © s S /“M x—

v ' © 2-* z © © rH S © _! 5-i Cd Cd Cd Cd 1—

hH H hH H S3 Cd Cd O w 0-1 E-1 c-t C-i ' ^ a CM CM

© H C-t > C/3 Cz-i V CJ S-l O O ©

Cd

©

©

©

© s /—v cr v» w

©

©

© 1—

© 3 0 © hd Cd Cd

w

CT

mg- /111 1|

lib.

114.

lib.

121.

126.

11b.

116
TIME =

800.0

SECONDS.

CM CO CM CO CM O O o o O o 1 + 4- 1 4" 1 Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd O co CM <r co ON o o o tH tH tH rH m On co M3 o o Ox m o o o o o o o CO CM • tH rH co m • + + + + + i + • • tH • • • CO

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd tH rH as CM CM rH o o O CM CO I'-'. co o o o o CM <f r-» o CO CO CM rH rH m in o o o M3 in CM

CM co <f CM CO CM

CO

© in CM ON co CO o o o CO fv rH CM o o o o O o

CM p** rH CM o 1 1 I 1 4" 4* 1 4* 1 M3 CO <r Mt CO CO Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd o o o rH rH CM rH in <r CM O M3 in rH o o o o o O o as CM CM 00 OO m rH + 4- + + 4* 1 4- m oo • r-» m rH • Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd CM <r O o O CM CO CO M3 CO rH 00 co CM CM O o o CO in CO

M3 rH in CO M3 CM CM CM O o o r-« o CO

M3 in co CM CM CM M3 M3 o O o rH in CO CM co in CM CO CM

CO CM CM 00 CM CM I 1 o O o o o

in co co co CO CO C i 4* 1 + 1 o o o rH rH rH rH O Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd o o o o o o o •rH CO O tH oo ON rH + + 4- + + I 4- 4J as o as tH <r <r CM <r

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd 03 CM OO o o uo CM O o O CM M3 00 m *H M3 tH CO O o O as 00 M3 CM L> ON rH CO CM CM

r-. M3 CM M3 M3 M) O o O M3 rH n* CM a

m3 co CM CM Mt T—1

rH O o O m 00 Mf CM o O M3 CM M3 <r I"- !"•» 1 1 c in CM CO CM

r-» CO <f co CO o o O O O

CM CM co CM CM rH rH o + 1 4- 1 O o O O o o o Cd Cd Cd Cd 1 1 + + 4° 4* 4- 03 o O co rH CM rH <r co

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd <u o o <r CO O M3 M3 M3

co com CM M3 <r rH •H o o rH CM 00 o

rH rH M3 oo r-^ CM o o <± CM O CO CM 03 in •o 00 CO M3 M3 co tH CM rH CM 03 o o rH CM in a

in M3 M3 rH CO CM on CO p*» rH

m CM rH CM 03 • 00 rH M3 in rH m m 1 1 c:n m M3 M3 in m U CM CO <r CM on CM O O o rH r-4 CM rH a o o o O o O O O o o o o o 1 4- -4 1 4“ 1 + + + + 4- 1 4- 03 Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd- Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd rH CO O CO m M3 O'. M3 o O O o CM o <r in rH as CM CM in 00 on rH O O o M3 OO 00 CO u m 00 • i

in rH p»*

m CM CO co ON in CO CO O O o P-. CO o CO (1) CM a CO rH oo CO CM CM

in CO CM CM CM M3 M3 O O o rH

m CO CM a- CO CM CM oo P". CM CM l 1 =3 in CO CO CO CO CO O O o rH rH CM rH CM CO Mf CM CO CM O O o o o o o o O o o O o + + + + -4 1 4- 1 4- + 1 4- 1 Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd O O o rH M3 co rH co M3 o r*«. 00 <r rH o O o o <r O co <r <r CO ON M3 o tH

ON =00 f"- CO C3N M3 CO 00 o o O 00

m rH co CO as M3 p*. rH CON CM <r CM tH f—1

in

m o o O rH in CO CM CO rH CO co CM CM

CO CM CM CO CM CM i 1 in CO CO on CO CO o o o rH rH CM rH o o o o o O o CM CO CM on CM + + + + 4" 1 4- o o o o o o

Cd Cd Cd cd Cd CjJ Cd 1 + H 1 H 1 o o O H CM o r^« III Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd o o o m oo o in oo CO in ON M3 C\ co CM CO M3 <r CO on CM CM o o o <r 00 in CM M3 in ON O o O o o

CM co CM M3 rH ON tH CM on co o o o o o CM M3 rH CM CM MX

in CM CO co p-* CO CO 1 1 rH oo <r CM CO m CO CO co CO CO

03 00 00 00 00 CL oo 2 oo 2 00 2 oo 2 2 OP Q-, Oi a, Cl II II II II II ML < CL < < 2_i < \ CL, CL, 2 E-t 2 2 2 2 •w s CL 2 CL 2 CL y rH 2 2 j CL, cd cd Cd Cd LL 1—1 i—i i—i i—i

CO Cd Cd o Cd C-t E-t H H V ' V ^ S ^ 03 CM CM o

E-» H > Q C/3 CL Cl QC CJ

U O o O O

Cd 3 3: J 2 2 O' O' O' CL O © J © © O © 1 Cl Cd Cd

CT

mg111 /1|

209.

210.

211.

18

7.

209.

211.

201.
TIME =

900.0

SECONDS. |l

CO xtf CM CO CM © © © © © 1 4" 1 4 1 Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd 00 © M3 03 © V© xd" o o o p—

pH CM

© xtf O' Mt xd” x0 ON xd" xd" O o © © © © © CM 00 © CM CM in 4 4 Oo + + 1 4 • CM t=H • • • o CO

Cd Ed Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd CO ON CM CM pH O O o rH pH pH co l « O O o CM rx CM M3 o vO px co CO O'. o O O O o 00 CM rH OO

co O’ CM CO CM

ON px un CM r—

px rH 1*4 O O o CM VO rH rH

©©

©

©© ON M3 r-

CO rH VO M3 1 1 i 1 4 1 4 1 un CO -d" CO CO Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd o O o f“H pH CO © rH rH M3 rH M3 un o O o © © © © pH un CO CM CM © O' co 4 4 + 4= 4 1 4 m3 ON rx px CM un

Cd

w Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd CO CM • CO O o o <r CM © un Px 00 CO CM CM o o o rH CO px oo M3 CM M3 co O o xd" xd" o o o un un Px un co co cO CM O o CO co o o o rH x0 rH CM CO xj" CM CO CM

CM CO CM O'* 00 CO on l ! ©

©

©

©

© un CO CO CO CO CO C 1 4 1 4 1 o o o p—4 CO © O Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd © o o © © © © •r4 rH un px rH 00 rx M3 4 4 4 4 4 1 4 u Px M3 ON <f vO CM rH

cdw Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd 03 co un CO rH CO rH o o o Px un ON in U • rH rH CO o o o un M3 CM ON U CM ON CO CM CM <? v© M3 CO CM M3 o O o o o CM un r-H © C

un ON CO CM O CM O O o o o xO vO 00 rH o

M3 00 CM r'x un CO ON 1 1 c m CM CO CM

vo CO co CO 0 ©

©

©

©

CM CM CM CM CM o CM o 4 1 4 1 o o o © © © © Cd Cd Cd Cd 1 1 4 4° 4 4 1 V) © © CM x0 rH 00 un CO

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd a>

©© xf©

m <r ON un

OO oo CM CM un ON xcr *iH

©©© Px un rx

ON ON x0 CO M3 rH un o un CM

© CM co CM CM M3 00 00 o o rH f—14 px rx

m a)

©© rH co CM un

0-

un O O CM xd" CM o o un un ON CO rH rH vO C/1 rx. M3 OO CO O rx 1 1 CO un VO VO m un M CO CM CO CM O o o rH r—

co

© <y©©©©© O o © © © © © >N 1 4 1 4 1 + 4 4 4* + 1 4 cO Cd Cd Cd Cd

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd rH CM • © CO M3 Px px un O o © un M3 vO Px x0 co CM ON © rx co O o © © CO © Px u un ON rx vO CM in CM <f m CO CO CO un un o o © un un CO un <u CO CM CO a rx co co CM CM

co CO CM O O co co o o © p—4 -O r-H CM

©

CM CO CM CO 00 co co i 1 © m co CO co CO co o o © rH rH CO © co <r CM CO CM o o © © © © © © © © © © 4 4- 4 4- -r 1 -L. i + 1 4 1 Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd o o © t*4 © M3 ON 00 00 © CM M3 M3 o o © xO CO <r © © CO <r © CM © CO CO o co oo CO CM CO ON O' o o © un M3 CO M3 CM © rx ON CM rx. xT CM CO

CM CM CM CO ON CM CM o o © pH xf rH CM CO co CO CM CM CM CO CM 00 Ox CO CO i 1 m CO co CO CO CO o o © pH pH x0 © o o © © © © © CM <r CM CO CM + 4 4 4* 4 i 4 © © © © ©

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd 1 4 1 + 1 O o © CO CM i

CM Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd O o © co © xO <r rx M3 ON xT un • xT CM

CM CM 1/0 CO vd" o CO CO o o © CO <T vO CO

© un© rH CM© CO 00

© ON px ON CM <r px px T—

CM in 1/0 px |Xx o o © rH un CO CM CO CO • CO

CM CO CO ON 00 CO CO 1 1 rH CO <f CM CO

un co co CO CO CO o C/3 CO CO CO a. CO 2 CO 2 CO 2 © 2 © CU 04 04 04 II II ii ii ii < Cd < O4 < o <

£-< a.

© c-t© 2 2 2 2 O4 2

ON 2 Oh 2 2 Cu Cd Cd Cd Cd PH HH p-1 i—i i—

w

Cd o Cd H H H H '—

>w' -w- X_x 0 CM CM 0 H H > © CO Oi c=4 cd © d O O © O

Cd 3: 3 J 2 s O' O' O' O4 ©

ZD 1—4

©

© CJ© i—

Cl4 Cd U2

CT

mg-in/1 |

307.

310.

311.

253.

292.

311.

290.
TIME=

1000.0

SECONDS.

CO n CM CO CM O o o O o 1 4" 1 4- 1 CO CO CO CO CO n ON r-4 r—4 On CO p" o O o o r-4 i—i

t—4 o o • iCM n 00 i—4 i—4 ro o o o o o o o CM CO • O P" n 00 ON + + 4* 4- + i 4° • ON r—4 • • <T CO

CO CO CO CO CO CO CO 1—4 r—4 CM CM f-H o o o p* r—4 p*. o o o o NO CO n <r

r-H CO in CO ON n O' O' o o o NO CM O p*

co n CM CO CM <r O' n CM CM co co co o o o r-4 r—4 r—4 O o o o o

00 r—4 CM r—4 NO NO 1 1 l i 1 4- 1 4* 1 in co O' o- co CO CO CO CO CO CO o o o r—4

r—4 co o o r-H r-H 00 OO NO p^ o o o o o o o p- r-4 oo o CM CO o CO

4* 4° + 4“ 4- 1 4- NO CO o n n o CM

CO CO CO CO CO CO CO r-H CM o o o CO r—4 CO ON CM r—4 <0 CM CO o o o 00 NO CO r—4 o r n CO o CO CO oo o o o o O' o CO

NO co CM 00 o NO NO o o o r—4 CO r—4 r—4 •O' n CM co CM

on CO CM 00 CO CO co 1 1 i o o O O o

co co CO CO CO a 1 4.

CaJ 1 4- 1 o o o r—4 r—4 o o CO CO CO CO o o o o o o o •r4 CO CO P- n O’ oo n O

4° 4- 4“ 4- 4" I 4- 4J CO O' i

ON CM O ON r-4 CO CO CO CO CO CO CO n3 n p- O ON P~ NO ON o o o NO <r CN ON U n CM CO ro o o o O' O' n CM U ON r—4 CO CM CM o p* O' CO 00 O CM CM o o o O' O' <r NO C

a> 00 co CO CM p* NO CO co o o o CM O' p* CM a

ON ON CM n O' ON On 1 I 1 1 c n CO CM m CO o- O' CO CO o O O o

CM CM CM CM CM r—4 o o 4- 4- 1 o o o o O o o CO CO CO e 1 1 4- 4° 4* i + 03 o o NO <r ON ON nO P»

CO CO CO CO CO CO CO <u o o CO CO r—4 p- CO CM CO CO CO CN O' CM «—4 rH •r4 o o t—4 r—4 00 NO m

co oo CO <r CO CO r—4 o P^ • CO

m

r—4 ON p* CM CM NO ON ON n n NO CO o n oo <u o o r—4 o CM P^

Cl

t—< n r-H CM cH o- CM CM CM CM rO r—4 r—4 r—4 co 03 • • NO CO On p» n n 1 l i 1 p^ LO n n n n U CO n CM CO CM o o o t—4

r-l CO o <v O O O o o o o o o O O o >N 1 4* 1 4- 1 4“ + 4- 4- + 1 4- 03 CO CO CO CO to

CO co CO CO CO CO CO r—4 P" • ON r—4 . oo ON NO P^ o o o n O' NO NO <r r—4 P" o ON CO CO CM o o o p* CM CM CM u NO CO o <r n ON CM

ON O' co CO NO O o o o o o O' o CO 03 r—4 CM <r

CL CM r-4 o- CM CM

NO CO CM 00 o p- p^ o o o rH CO r—4 r—4 CL On CO CM CO oo CO CO 1 1 1 2

O'

m CO CO CO cn o o o rH r—4 CO o CO O' CM cn

CM o o o o o O o o o o o O 4* 4- 4- 4* 4“ 1 4- 1 -r l 4- 1 CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO o o o p- n n <r n NO co co <r 1

o o o o O' CO o NO m ON ON NO CO NO CM O CO CO CO O' p. <1" <f o o o r—4 n r-H CO oo CO ON p- n r-4 CM

r—4 CM

co NO O' CM p^ ON NO NO o o o rH co r—4 r—4 CM ON O' CMm

On CO CM 00 p" CO CO I 1 i <r CO CO CO CO CO o o o rH r—4 r—4 o o o o o o o CO O' CM CO CM + 4- 4- 4* J- i I O o o o O

CO CO CO CO CO CO CO 1 4- 1 4. 1 o o o ON oo ON NO CO CO CO CO o o o p» NO r—4 00 NO CO p^ ON ON NO i

m CM p* CM CO ON cO CO o o o rH NO p» CM NO <3- n n ON ON ON <r co p» <r 00 NO p. r—i

p» 00 ON CM ON r—4 00 oo o o o r—4 CO ON p- r—4 co c

CO CO CM co CO CO CO l 1 1 CO ON n CM

m

<r CO CO CO CO

m \ C3 CO co C/3 C/3 5

CL CO 2 co 2 00 2 CO 2 • 2 2 a- 0-, a- 0-1 II II II ii II os 2 < 2 < < \ 20

cu CO 2 H 2 2 2 2 y o_ 2 2-4 2 2-t 2 EE 2 2 2 CL, co CO CO 1—1

1—1

h-t i—i l—i cn CO CO o CO H H H H 'w' 'w' <u CM CM C E—i H H > Q CO CL, to CO O u O O CJ o u

CO 2 s’ _i 2 2 O' O' O' CL, u 2 J 3 2 O 3 1 CO CO CO
TIME =

1100.0

SECONDS.

xf CM co CM

©©©©

© 1 4- 1 4- 1 cza cza cza cza Cz3 NO n 00 co © © X pH o o o o rH rH © X X © © © n CO O o o o © © © H X • <f ON xf 03

4* 4= 4° 4= + l + « co pH • • xf w © © cza cza cza cza n ON CM CM pH o o O 00 pH n ON o o O co n <f © o co pH CM CO pH rH o o O co co Mf

<» co xf CM CO CM

x co tn CM to O ON Ov o o O NO pH CM CO

©©©©©

no 00 r-$ o o in n 1 i 1 1 1 4* 1 4° 1 'd- co xf <f CO CO cza cza cza Cz3 Cz3 o o O O rH co © H © eo n CO CM CO CO >o o O o © © © CM O' NO CM NO H NO

4* 4= 4° 4= 4° 1 4- H © NO CO xf H © © © cza Cz3 Cza Cza n CM xf O O 'O CO CO X rH H ON xf CM ro o o O n CO rH co CM ro co m X o n n o o O n ON NO CO

xf

x co CMx xf NO NO o o O n rH pH CO xf xf CM CO CM

<r co CM rx px CO CO 1 i i 1 ©

©

©©©

<f co CO eO CO CO c 1 4" 1 4s • 1 o o O o rH CM © o cza cza cza cza cza o o C o © © © •H 00 © CM NO <f CO CO CO + 4“ 4- 4s 4° 1 4° 4J NO NO CM X NO H pH © © Cz3 Cz3 cza Cza Cs3 cfl .n co • NO CM xf X o o O 00 CM n vO 5-4 • CM CM • • xf o o O Px CO NO rH U xf Ov CM CM

NO at O CMx rx O o o o O 00 X NO CM c n o CO CM ON NO n n o o O rx fH CM <f o a

ON CM CM CM 00 CO 1 t 1 1 c 'd" CO CM

on <f <f CO CO 0 ©

©©

CO CO rH rH rH rH

© o 41 + 1 o o o © © © © Cz3 Cz3 Cz3 1 1 4= 4= 4= l 4= 01 © © NO CM © co O' CM © © © cza Cx3 cza Cza 0) © © ON NO CO CO >4 NO CO CO CM px pH CO © »H © © • xf H >4 pH

O' O' CO O' n 00 rH o X • CO <f co ON CM NO CO pH rH CO CO ON CO rH n H <u © © ON © CM oo © H CM 00 CM CM m ON Ov ro CO NO pH pH so n 01 9 n x CM CM o O i i 1 1 n m m tn n n 5-1 CO CM CO CM O o O © pH co © aa © © © © © O o o © © © © >N 1 4= 1 4* 1 + 4“ 4° + + 1 4° cd cza cza Cz3 cza .tel w © w Cza Cz3 cza cza rH H ON NO xf n CM H 33 o o o n CM n NO rH ON NO ON NO ON NO o o o rH pH © CO 5-i H ON NO X xf © n in pH CO O CM rx rx o o o n Ov NO CO a> xf CM <4 © H ON xf CM CO

<f

x CO CM CO <r vO NO o o o n rH pH CO

©

<r co CM X rx CO CO 1 i l 1 ©

<r co CO CO CO CO o o o © rH CO

© CO <f CM CO CM o o o © © © © © © © © © 4* 4" X 4" 4s 1 4* 1 4* 1 4- 1 © © cza cza cza cza cza cza cza cza CzJ cza o o o <T CO <r <r xf ON *4 rH n CO ON o o o H OO © CM © rH X O' 'mC 3C NO

x O' inm cn tn H rH o o o IX ON NO CO CM

© vO

© NT CM n CO <T

co VO <r CM

x CO vO NO o o o n rH pH CO rH ON n CM CO

<r

m CM

x rx CO CO 1 I I 1 <f co CO CO CO CO o o o © H co © o o o © © © © CO >4 CM CO CM

4" 4- 4° H H 1 4°

©©

©

©

©

© cza cza cza Zz2 cza cza I 4» 1 H 1 o o o X cn X ON cza cza cza © © o o o © n 00 ON X ^4 ON CM n X CM

m o H o tn <f rH rH o o o ON ON

© CO oo xf CM n xf n X

xf NO NO NO <r NO ON X x CM X xf NO NO o o o n rH ON CM n CO "4

co CO CM rx px CO CO 1 l 1 1 fH ON n CM co

<r co to cn CO CO

xX

cd CO C/3 C/3 C/3 © CO 2 C/3 2 C/3 2 C/3 2 2 © © © © II II II II II © <5 © < < © < \ © a* © H 2 2 2 2 ^x x^x x”X x-X > x © 2 2 © 2 r—i 2 2 © © cza cza cza © 1—

t—

l—l 1—1 l—l c/i cza cza o Cz3 H H H H 'w- x_x -—

—X x^- <u CVJ CM

©

© H H > © cn © © © o s-i Q O © O

Cza

©© |

•} 2 2 O' O' o n o © J © © o © © © © I

CT

ing-m/1 j

552.

556.

556.

644.

511.

556.

517.
TIME =

1200.0

SECONDS.

<r <r CN CO CN o o O o O l 4“ 1 + 1 Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd oo rH CP O CO P^ O oo o o o o o rH O P • Ov CO rH ON m CN p^ o o o o o o O m • in rH 00 <r + + 4- 4“ 4* i 4- • rH rH • • <r M3

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd CN co CN CN rH O O o CO O P 00 o O o O O rH CO

rH M3 rH CN co 00 in

m o O o oo CO CP

<3- <r CN co CN

p^ CO

m CN r*. CO co o O o co p CN rH O o o O o

CN p-» rH CO 00mm 1 1 * i 1 4- 1 4* 1 co co co co co Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd o O o O rH CN o P o CN CN in CP p*. . o o o o o o o M3 P m m3- M3 rH in

m + + + + 4- 1 4* CN CN • 00 CN o p

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd CN CN M3 O O O O co CO O UO CO CN CO O O O rH rH CP CN

CN CO rH co 00 co CN CN o O o <t CN O rH CO P" CO CN m M0 <f o O o CO f"H rH CN <r CN CO CN

rH co CN MO MO CO CO 1 1 i 1 o o O O o

co co CO CO co C 1 -4 1 + 1 o O o o o CN o 0 Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd o o o o o O o •H CO CO in in <T 00 CN <T

-r 4- 4- 4* 4* 1 -4 4U rH M3 rH rH o CO rH P^

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd 03

m rH • M3 co CN p" CO o O O <3- 00 O M3 Su • rH CN M3 o O O p-» Mt CP O 4J CN 00 CN CN P m r-l co MO CO rH rH o o O M3 P <3- 00 C

03 CN <3- CO CN CO p m in o o O co p^ <3- CN O

<r co CN o o p*- 1 1 1 1 C <r <3- CO CN

co Mfr 'O’ co co 0 o O O o m o rH rH o rH o o i 4* -r 1 o o o o o o o Cd Cd Cd Cd 1 4° l l -4 l 4- 03 CN rH CO rH <r <r Q <r

Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd <U p- CN CN CO CO CP p^ M3

CO O CN O 00 p^ in •H M3 on rH rH in

CP O CO p>» 00N in o co co

m in

r-*- in CN <r MO co co CO O CP co rH r"» <r 03 CN 00 o CN oo CU

CN CM CP CN CN CN Mf m3- CO O M3 rH p CO 03 rH O' p p» r*. 1 1 in <r <r Mf U <3" <r CN CO CN O O O o rH CN o 03 O o • o O o O O o o o o o 3o 1 4* 1 + 1 + 4- 4* 4- 4- 1 + 03 Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd- Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd rH CO O o rH in in CP M3 O O O O O' O <r CN CP m rH M3 CP m <r O o O 00 CP CN CN u CN CN co CN CP p

<r

m o CO p m <3- o o O CO rH rH rH 03 • CN CN <r M3

CU in oo <r CN CN

cO p» CO CN

m MO Mt o o O CO rH rH CN arH co CN MO MO co CO 1 1 I l 1 2 co CO CO CO CO o o O o rH CN o <r CN CO CN o o o O o o o O o o o O 4“ -4 4. -h 4- 1 + 1 4* 1 H 1 Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd cd Cd cd Cd O o O CN O o CN O <f oo in rH CO 30 oo O o o rH m ON rH in o M3 rH M3 00 in <T

ON ON <t CO ON ON ON o o o in CN o rH M3 CN CO o CN rH p

CN co M3 CN M3 Mf CN m in CO CO o o o co rH rH CN in 00 m CN CO

rH co CN MO MO CO CO 1 i i 1 <r CO CO CO CO CO o o o o rH CN o o o o o o o o <r <4 CN CO CN

4- 4" 4- 4- -4 \ 4" o o o O O Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd I — 1 — 1 o O O P M3 O o Cd Cd Cd Cd Cd o o o CP <r rH co CN o M3 CO ON rH in in

M3 CN M3 o O <r <r <r o o o M3 CNm <r CO <r CN CN CO 30 in O

ON <r 1

M3 CN in p o- p>» CN in MO CO CO o o o CO rH in rH CN co <r M3 o CO <PJ M0 MO CO CO 1 I 1 i M3 co in CN m

<j" CO CO CO CO CO

rH

03 C/3 00 CO CO 5 a co 2 CO 2 CO 2 CO 2 • 2 —

Q_ CU cu cu II II II II ll uc <1 cu < £-4 <J < \ 30

CU 0-i 2 H-» 2 2 2 2 y—1\ /—V

/*—s. 'w' cu 2 r . 2 r^

— 2 2 -1 0-1 Cd Cd Cd Cd PH PH 04 PH PH C/3 Cd CaJ o Cd H H H H 'w' 'w' 'W' 0) CN CN rs rp H H > Q 00 CU Cd cd CJ u O O CJ O

Cd s’ S J 2 2 O' O' O' CU CJ P J 2 3 CJ 2 hJ Cu Cd uz]
TABLE 3-3 PRINTER OUTOUT FROM TENAB

INPUT FAST FILE

INPUT EXITT FILE

TENAB S OUTPUT FILE

C : S IMEXAM . BMP

C : S IMEXAM . EVA

C : S IMEXAM. TEN

OCCUPANT 1 ROOM NUMBER

1

ENTER

0

TIME (S)

OCCUPANT 2 ROOM NUMBER

2

ENTER

0

TIME (S)

OCCUPANT 3 ROOM NUMBER

3

ENTER

0

TIME (S)

OCCUPANT 4 ROOM NUMBER

4

ENTER

0

TIME (S)

OCCUPANT 5 ROOM NUMBER

5

ENTER

0

TIME (S)

OCCUPANT 6 ROOM NUMBER

6

ENTER

0

TIME (S)

OCCUPANT 7 ROOM NUMBER

7 ENTER0

TIME (S)

•

FACTORS

FED

CT (G-MIN/M3)

TEMP (C)

INCAPACITATION : 0.5

450.0

65.0

LEVEL LETHAL LEVEL

1.0

900.0

100.0

-

PERSON

TIME

1

ROOM CONDITION CAUSE TEMP FLUX FED CT

(MIN)

9. 1 INCAPACITATED TEMP

(C)

69.4

(KW-MIN/M2)

0.0 0.00

(G-MIN/M3

)

3.

10. 1 DEAD TEMP 121.2 0.1 0.00 7.

18. 1 INCAPACITATED CT 199.7 1.9 0.08 483.

21. 1 FINAL TIME 144.4 1.9 0.12 690.

PERSON

TIME

2 ROOM CONDITION CAUSE

(MIN)

9. 2 INCAPACITATED TEMP

o

!i 2 DEAD TEMP

l-1

oo 2 INCAPACITATED CT

21. 2 FINAL TIME

TEMP FLUX FED CT

(C) (KW-MIN/M2) (G-MIN/M3

)

69.4 0.0 0.00 3.

115.5 0.1 0.00 7.

204.9 1.7 0.08 487 . 147.9 1.8 0.12 694.

43
PERSON 3

TIME ROOM CONDITION CAUSE TEMP FLUX FED CT

(MIN) (C) (KW-MIN/M2) (G-MIN/M3)

9. 3 INCAPACITATED TEMP 70.0 0.0 0.00 3.

10. 3 DEAD TEMP 117.0 0.1 0.00 7.

18. 3 INCAPACITATED CT 206.1 1.8 0.08 487.

21. 3 FINAL TIME 148.6 1.9 0.12 694.

PERSON 4

TIME ROOM CONDITION CAUSE TEMP FLUX FED CT

(MIN) (C) (KW-MIN/M2) (G-MIN/M3

)

8. 4 INCAPACITATED TEMP 75.9 0.0 0.00 5.

9. 4 DEAD . TEMP 106.2 0.1 0.00 7.

19. 4 INCAPACITATED CT 286.2 23.2 0.20 454.

21. 4 FINAL TIME 220.6 23.2 0.22 555.

PERSON 5

* TIME ROOM CONDITION CAUSE TEMP FLUX FED - CT

(MIN) (C) (KW-MIN/M2) (G-MIN/M3

)

9. 5 INCAPACITATED TEMP 69.4 0.0 0.00 4.

9. 5 DEAD TEMP 108.3 0.1 0.00 7.

19. 5 INCAPACITATED CT 258.5 6.3 0.13 486.

21. 5 FINAL TIME 183.8 6.4 0.16 637.

PERSON 6

TIME ROOM CONDITION CAUSE TEMP * FLUX FED CT

(MIN) (C) (KW-MIN/M2) (G-MIN/M3

)

9. 6 INCAPACITATED TEMP 69.9 0.0 0.00- 3.

10 . 6 DEAD TEMP 116.8 0.1 0.00 7.

18. 6 INCAPACITATED CT 205.7 1.8 0.08. . 487.

21. 6 FINAL TIME 148.3 1.9 0.12 694.

PERSON 7

TIME ROOM CONDITION CAUSE TEMP FLUX FED CT

(MIN) (C) (KW-MIN/M2) (G-MIN/M3)

2. 7 INCAPACITATED TEMP 94. 3 0.0 0.00 0 . 10. 7 DEAD TEMP 182.5 0.3 0.00 10.

18. 7 INCAPACITATED CT 246.3 4.3 0.09 453 . 21. 7 FINAL TIME 164.5 4.4 0.13 646 .

44
3000

I

I

I

O

o

o o

CN

LU

(h) 3ZIS 38IJ

I

I

FIG.

3-2

COMPOSITE

RATE

OF

HEAT

RELEASE

OF

SPECIFIED

FIRE
1000

O

m cm

(o 0 ) 3anm3dW]i mil a3ddn

FIG.

3-3

UPPER

LAYER

TEMPERATURES

FOR

EACH

ROOM
o

o

LO

(Oo) 3amva3dM3i uiki i H3*oi

o O o o

o o

rO CN

FIG.

3-4

LOWER

LAYER

TEMPERATURES

FOR

EACH

ROOM
o

o

m cn

(<“) Hld30 MAY!

o

FIG.

3-5

INTERFACE

HEIGHT

FOR

EACH

ROOM
CD

^

CM O

([_«) A1ISN30 lVDIidO

FIG.

3-6

SMOKE

OPTICAL

DENSITY

FOR

EACH

ROOM
3000

O

o

CN

(uidd) N0llViJiN30N00 00

FIG.

3-7

CARBON

MONOXIDE

CONCENTRATION

FOR

EACH

ROOM
150000

O

o

m

©

o o

o o

o o

o o

o m

(uidd) N0llVaiN]0N03 z 00

I

l

FIG.

3-8

CARBON

DIOXIDE

CONCENTRATION

FOR

EACH

ROOM
30000

O

o

o o

o o

CN rUJ

(ui ui-iudd) 3soa 00

1-IC.

3-9

CARBON

MONOXIDE

EXPOSURE-DOSE

FOR

EACH

ROOM
800

O

o o o o

o o o

CSI

( jW/ujiu-6) is

I

I

FIG..

3-10

SPECIES

Ct

(CONCENTRATION-TIME

PRODUCT)
CHAPTER 4. STEP-BY-STEP PROCEDURE FOR CONDUCTING A HAZARD ANALYSIS

4.1 The Logic of the Procedure

Initially, the context of use and scenario(s) of concern (steps one and

two of the hazard analysis process) for the product in question are established, and compared against the matrix of example cases provided. If it

is determined that the application falls within the scope and capabilities of

HAZARD I but the examples are insufficient to answer the questions of the

relative hazard posed by the product, then a new hazard analysis calculation

(step three of the process) is needed. The purpose of this chapter is to guide

the user through the process of using the models, supporting programs and data

that constitute HAZARD I. Figure 4-1 outlines the four steps in the hazard analysis procedure.

These steps will be discussed in detail in the remainder of this chapter. The

relationship of these steps to the package of software provided is shown in

figure 4-2, with the names of the programs associated with the steps given in

parentheses within the appropriate blocks.

The user is strongly cautioned to keep the limitations of the system in

mind when conducting and analyzing the results of this procedure. While some

studies to validate the models and procedures have been conducted, and the

system has been tested both internally by GFR and by selected groups outside of

CFR, this system should be considered experimental until it has been

successfully applied to a broad range of problems by a number of users . As

such experience is gained and flaws are identified and corrected, the level of

confidence in the system will be enhanced. This requires that users feed their

experiences, both good and bad, back to CFR to enable corrections and

improvements to be made

.

When proceeding with a hazard analysis, the user should try to understand

the process and the reasons for each step. The representative examples should

be referred to as a guide to the process and as a data base where appropriate.

Since the system is considered experimental, the results of any analysis should

be challenged by the user's common sense and experience; with any results that

violate these, questioned and re-examined.

Throughout the problem definition stage, the user may find it helpful to

refer to the representative example case studies and to the section (6.2) of

this report on scenario data from the NFIRS system. In this section, the NFIRS

data base information is presented, arranged by product identified as first

item ignited. That is, for example, the section on upholstered furniture lists

the major data elements (form of heat of combustion, equipment involved,

material, and area of origin, as well as extent of flame and smoke spread,

etc.) by frequency for residential fires, deaths, injuries, and dollar loss.

These data can help in establishing frequent scenarios or details to include in

one's own scenarios of concern.

54
FIGURE 4-1 HAZARD ANALYSIS PROCEDURE

1. DEFINE THE CONTEXT

• DESCRIBE THE PRODUCT.

• DEFINE WHERE, WHEN, HOW,

AND BY WHOM THE PRODUCT MAY BE USED.

• EXECUTE PRODUCT. ONE.

2. DEFINE THE SCENARIO

• BUILDING DESCRIPTION, CONDITIONS, STATUS.

• FIRE DESCRIPTION (FIREDATA, MLTFUEL)

« OCCUPANT DESCRIPTION.

• INPUT DATA (FINPUT)

3. CALCULATE THE HAZARD

• PREDICT CONDITIONS OVER TIME IN EACH ROOM (FAST)

• PLOT/LIST VALUES OF INTEREST (FASTPLOT)

® INPUT OCCUPANT DESCRIPTION AND SMOKE DATA (EXITT)

« SPECIFY DETECTOR(S) /SPRINKLERS (DETACT).

• SELECT CRITERIA AND OBTAIN CONSEQUENCES (TENAB)

4. EVALUATE THE CONSEQUENCES

• COMPARE AGAINST EXAMPLE CASES.

• COMPARE WITH AND WITHOUT PRODUCT.

• COMPARE WITH MODIFIED PRODUCT PROPERTIES.

55
FIG. 4-2 HAZARD I software

Define Product

and Context,

Check System

Limits

(PRODUCT. ONE) ^

Obtain Property

Data

Convert Multiple

Burning Items To

Specified Fire

^

Input Building

and Fire Data

(FIREDATA) y y For Model

or Test

' (MLTFUEL) (FINPUT)

(W) Run Transport

Model

(FAST)

-*

i f

^ ( CASE.DAT ~)

c

CASE.DMP

(pmy

>

r Run Graphics

Program

(FASTPLOT)

r+

Run Decision &

^ Action/Evacuation

S' Model

(EX ITT)

Obtain Sprinkler/

Thermal Detector

Activation Time

(DETACT)

LEGEND

^ Automatic Data

Transfer

Manual Data

Transfer

CZD Data File

Evaluate Results and

Recycle To Next Scenario

(PRN) Printer Output
4.2 Defining the Context

Defining the context requires that a description of the product and the

details of its use within the occupancy of interest be developed. This initial

step should include running the program PRODUCT. ONE (written in BASIC). This

is an interactive program which asks a series of multiple choice questions

regarding the product in question and its context of use. The responses to

these questions will result in references to various sections of the report

where further information (e.g,, descriptions of any example case involving

that product, statistical data, building floorplans) can be found. Certain

responses may result in a message that the problem is outside the scope of the

HAZARD I system. (In addition, the program will ask the user if all of the

scenarios of concern have been analyzed and, if not, will re-cycle.)

4.3 Defining the Scenario

The next step is developing the detailed scenario to be analyzed. An

outline of the items which need to be specified is given in figure 4-3.

Detailed discussion of the inputs required is contained in Chapter 6. The

entire scenario should be developed before data input is begun. If there is

more than one scenario of concern, they can all be developed initially, or taken one at a time. Studies of the sensitivity of the results to variations

in one or more parameters of the scenario specification are recommended, but

these should be decided upon after seeing the results of the first analysis for

the baseline scenario.

4.3.1 Building Description

Drawings of the building to be specified should be obtained. Where a

" typical" building will suffice, the buildings provided for the examples can be

used as representative. The easiest way to use one of the example buildings is

to read one of the example case files into FINPUT and change the non-building

inputs. In any case, a complete set of floor plan drawings for the building

used in the analysis should be made. These drawings will be used extensively

throughout the process to locate doors and windows, contents, people,

dimensions and distances, etc. For multi-story buildings, a sectioned

elevation drawing should also be prepared to locate the elevation of building

elements above some reference elevation. These drawings should be dimensioned

and to scale to avoid confusion. All details of construction required as input:

should be shown on the drawings

57
FIGURE 4-3

SCENARIO DESCRIPTION

FOR A

HAZARD ANALYSIS

BUILDING DESCRIPTION

1. NUMBER OF ROOMS

2. DIMENSIONS OF ROOMS

3. DIMENSIONS OF OPENINGS BETWEEN ROOMS (DOORS, WINDOWS, PENETRATIONS)

4. CEILING, WALL, AND FLOOR CONSTRUCTION (UP TO THREE LAYERS)

5. PRESENCE AND LOCATION OF DETECTORS OR SPRINKLERS

FIRE DESCRIPTION

1. DESCRIPTION OF ALL COMBUSTIBLE ITEMS IN THE ROOM OF ORIGIN

MATERIALS AND WEIGHTS OF EACH

DIMENSIONS AND CONSTRUCTION OF EACH ITEM

LOCATION OF EACH ITEM WITHIN THE ROOM (ADJUST FOR DESIRED SPREAD*

)

2 . IGNITION SOURCE

DESCRIPTION (MATERIAL AND QUANTITY)

LOCATION WITH RESPECT TO THE FIRST ITEM IGNITED

3. EXTENT OF FIRE SPREAD

SINGLE ITEM

PART OF ROOM

FULL ROOM

OCCUPANT DESCRIPTION

1. NUMBER OF OCCUPANTS

2. AGE AND SEX

3. PHYSICAL/MENTAL LIMITATIONS

4. LOCATION AND CONDITION AT TIME OF FIRE

* CURRENT VERSION REQUIRES THAT PRE- FLASHOVER FIRE SPREAD BE SPECIFIED 3Y

THE USER. NFIRS DATA ON EXTENT OF FIRE SPREAD BY MATERIAL AND PRODUCT

ARE PROVIDED FOR GUIDANCE. TIME TO FLASHOVER IS SCENARIO DEPENDENT AND

WILL BE INDICATED BY THE MODEL SO THAT THE REQUIRED ADJUSTMENTS CAN BE

MADE. FUTURE VERSIONS WILL INCLUDE BOTH PRE- AND POST- FLASHOVER FIR-5

DEVELOPMENT PREDICTIONS.

58
In addition to dimensions, the thermophysical properties of the materials

of construction are required. These include the density, thermal conductivity,

heat capacity, and surface emissivity. Data for many common materials are included in the data base section of this report. Where data on the desired

materials are not provided (such as for proprietary products) , they are often

available from the manufacturer. The user is cautioned to be careful to use

the required units for these , and all input values

4.3.2 Fire Description

The fire description begins with the ignition source (known in NFIRS as the "form of heat of combustion") and first item ignited. Once these have been

decided upon, the arrangement and characteristics of the other items in the

room of fire origin define the extent and time of fire spread up to the point

of flashover. Thus, the user should decide on the desired (pre- flashover) fire

spread based on the NFIRS data or other considerations and adjust the

arrangement of the other items in the room to obtain this condition.

In future versions of this system, a fire growth model will be included

to predict this spread based on the arrangement specified. If the user has

access to a copy of the Harvard fire model, this can be used to predict the

fire spread for up to five items and the result entered into the FAST model as the specified fire. Also, the data obtained from room fire tests has been used

as the specified fire input to FAST by some researchers. This is the best way

to include the burning behavior of rooms and contents since models are all

limited in the physics and combustion chemistry to some extent. The

application of either of these techniques requires familiarity with the models

which is beyond the scope of this report.

The fire is specified in terms of heat of combustion, mass loss rate and

the yields of major species over time. The yield of a species is the mass of

that species produced per mass of fuel lost. The heat of combustion is a single value for the entire fire but the mass loss and species yields can vary

over user-defined time intervals. The data base section (6.2) of this report

contains furniture calorimeter data on the burning of specific full-scale items

by CFR. If an item in this section is acceptable for the scenario being

studied (i.e., similar to the item of interest), the data required is provided

in a form directly ready for inclusion.

If none of the items are acceptable or the item needed is not provided*;

the data base section of cone calorimeter data should be consulted for data on

the materials of construction of the item needed. These data are on component

materials, so the rate of fire development of the entire item must be

calculated. The techniques for doing this are discussed in section 6.4 of this

report titled "Determining The Rate Of Heat Release".

If the required data are not provided, it may be necessary to have the

item or material tested. This would particularly be the case if one is

analyzing the performance of a specific item. Large scale oxygen consumption

calorimeters are available at many fire research and testing laboratories.

Cone calorimeters are being produced commercially and will soon be operating in

59
many testing laboratories in a number of countries, initially as an ASTM draft

procedure and eventually as a standard test method.

Spread to the next item occurs when there is contact by the flame from

the first item or by radiant ignition. (Note: Data on radiant ignition of

materials is often given for piloted and non-piloted conditions. The piloted

case would yield the more conservative result.) This latter case is discussed

in section 6.5. Ignition of a second item depends on the radiative power

output of the first item, the separation distance, and an appropriate ease-ofignition criterion. Once the ignition time is determined, the fire development

of the second item is assumed to take place as if it were burning alone except

that the time is shifted by the ignition time. This process is repeated with

each item until all are burning or until flashover occurs , at which time all

combustibles in the room ignite.

The suggested procedure is to decide on the ignition source and. first

item ignited. Input these into the FAST and run the case. If flashover does

not occur, upper layer temperature in the room of origin does not exceed 500 C,

go back and see if any second items would ignite from the first item. If none

do, the case is over. If one or more do, include these and run the case again.

When enough- items are burning to produce flashover, assume all items in the

room ignite at that point and run the case with these data. At this point it

would be likely that the fire is ventilation limited, and the burning rate will

depend on the available air flow rate. The pyrolysis or mass loss rate will

depend on the associated heat transfer to all fuel surfaces

.

At this .time, the user must make adjustments in the input data to allow

for changes in the burning which result from the restricted ventilation. There

are three possible ways to proceed:

1. Continuing with the specified free-burning fire will likely result in

an over-estimate of the pyrolysis rate (and resulting fire room

temperatures) and an under- estimate of the CO yield. Since this approach

accounts for all of the energy which potentially can be released, it

represents the most conservative of the three.

2. Holding the mass loss rate constant at the value which just causes

the ventilation limit to be reached should reduce the over estimates of

pyrolysis rate and temperature in the fire room. But this may result in

underestimates of the temperatures in other rooms, because it does not

account for the potential energy released by fuel due to excess

pyrolyzate caused by high heat transfer conditions.

3 . Limiting the fuel that burns to that which can burn with the oxygen

flowing into the room is a third choice. The mass flow rate of oxygen is

23% of the mass flow rate of air into the room through the vent (obtained

with FASTPLOT in the variable VENT) . The maximum energy release is

13,100 kW times the mass flow rate of oxygen (in kg/sec). Dividing this

by the heat of combustion for the specified fuel gives the associated

maximum mass loss rate. This method also does not account for energy

release from fuel which burns beyond the fire room.

60
Regardless of which method is used, subsequent results must be

interpreted accordingly; and it should be noted that no general theory exists

to deal precisely with the ventilation limited or post- flashover condition.

However, all of this may not be necessary for every case. If the occupants all

escape or the lethality criterion is exceeded in all rooms before the fire

spreads from the first item, the rest of the fire need not be calculated since

the hazard to the occupants will not be affected. This may often be the case

for smaller residences.

As was stated earlier, the model requires a single heat of combustion and

one series of mass loss rates and species yields. Where there are multiple

items burning simultaneously or a single item made up of multiple materials, a composite set of values is needed. These can be obtained by using the program

MLTFUEL . This is an interactive program which asks for the data from the

individual fuels and provides the composite values needed. Tne only work

necessary before running it is to construct a time line for the fuels and

establish the time intervals for the composite fire (see section 6.6). The

program asks for the number of fuel items and the number of intervals and then

the data for each fuel and interval are entered in order. Where yields of more

than one species are to be used, the effective yield of the. first species is

calculated in the initial sequence of questions and additional species are calculated one at a time without the need to re-enter the mass loss data.

4.3.3 Occupant Description

The data required for the occupant description are used in the

evacuation/behavior model and not in the fire model. Thus a detailed

discussion of the data inputs will be made later in this section. The general

detail as shown in figure 4=3 should be decided at this point, however, since

the location and activity of the occupants may affect the -'rooms for which

calculations are made or whether internal doors are open or closed, which will

influence the results of the fire model.

4.4 Calculate the Hazard

4.4.1 Input Program

Once the detailed problem has been defined, the interactive input program

(FINPUT) is run. This program creates the input file necessary to run the

transport model, FAST. It can be used to read in an existing file, which can

then be modified in sections to create a new file, or it can create a file from

"scratch". It allows the user to work in either English or metric units,

converting to the metric (SI) units required by FAST. The results of FAST are output only in metric units, however.

The program does error checking on the consistency of the data input and

advises the user if a problem is discovered. Help screens are provided if the

user is unsure of what to enter. These are accessed by typing HELP (or simply

?) or HELP <keyword>. This <keyword> is a specific item for which help is

desired (e.g., HELP THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY will bring up a brief description of

thermal conductivity) . Additional details on the input program operation are provided in section 6.7.

61
4.4.2 FAST Model and its Output

The transport model (FAST Version 17.5) is run as a "batch" program

rather than interactively as are the other programs in HAZARD I. The program

will prompt for the name of an input file which is usually the name of the

input program created in the previous step. Contrary to its name, the model

takes a significant time to execute. The more complex the case, the longer it

takes; so be patient.

The model produces a printed output summary (as shown in table 3-2) at

time intervals selected by the user in the input program. These tabulated data

can be directed to. the screen, to a printer (this is preferred in order to

provide a permanent record), or to a file for later printing. A more detailed

(frequent) output is sent to a plot file (called a dump file) , also at

intervals specified by the user in the input program. It should be noted that

this is a very large file; 20.5k per time interval, so it should be verified

that there is sufficient disk space available for the dump file before a run is

started. A plotting package (FASTPLOT) is provided to produce graphs and

tabular listings of the data. The <save> feature in FASTPLOT will write the

data into an ASCII file which can be used with commercia.1 plotting software for

fancier graphs. The possible graphs which the user should find the most useful

include upper and lower layer temperature (C)

,

interface position (the boundary

between the layers) , smoke optical density (1/m) , concentration (ppm) and dose

(the time integral of concentration in ppm-min) of any species computed, and Ct

(the concentration time product as described in Chapter 6, in g-min/m3

) , for

each room. 4.4.3 Decision/Behavior Evacuation Model

After obtaining the results of the FAST calculation, the evacuation model

EXITT is run. This is a BASIC program which must be run with BASICA on a PC.

On other machines, it should run under GW BASIC, although the graphics output

is specific to the PC.

The detailed inputs are discussed in# section 6.11. They are entered

interactively in response to questions. The physical dimensions are taken from

the drawings and the occupant descriptions from the data decided upon in the

first step. In addition, the model asks for data from FAST on the interface

position and smoke density in the upper layer of each room at each timestepr

This is currently entered manually, but in the next version will be

automatically read from the FAST dump file. For convenience, it is helpful if

the dump interval specified for FAST (in the input program) is the same as the

times tep interval to be used in the evacuation program. Then, the data

required will be available without the need to interpolate.

The evacuation model will calculate the activation time of any smoke

detectors specified from the smoke data (smoke density and layer thickness)

entered. For heat detector or sprinkler head activation times the model

DETACT-QS is provided. The instructions for running it are provided in section

6.10. When the activation time is obtained, this time can be specified as an input to the evacuation model and it will be used as the notification time for

62
the occupants. While the DETACT-QS model can be used to calculate the

activation time of sprinklers, if such are present in the scenario, the current

hazard analysis system cannot predict the extinguishment process nor the impact

of the spray on the transport or cooling of the gases in the layers. These

impacts are thus left to the judgement of the user.

4.4.4 Tenability Program

The results of all of the preceding calculations are now used to evaluate

whether or not the occupants successfully escape. If they do not, the user

will know whether the limiting condition was heat, smoke, or toxicity, and when

this condition occurred.

This is done by executing the program TENAB, which compares the

conditions in the building over time predicted by the FAST model and the

location of the occupants over time predicted by the evacuation model to the

tenability criteria discussed in the section of this report titled TENABILITY

LIMITS. If at any time step the interface position in the occupied room is

above 1.5 meters, the occupant is assumed to be exposed to the conditions in

the lower layer. If the interface is below 1.0 meters, they are assumed to be

exposed to the conditions in the upper layer. Between 1.0 and 1.5 meters,

TENAB checks the upper layer temperature and selects the upper layer if its

temperature is below 50 C or the lower layer if the upper layer temperature is

above 50 C, assuming that the occupant is bent over or crawling.

Temperature and heat flux are considered limiting conditions and are assumed to have no impact on the occupant until the limit occurs. While this

is not explicitly true, the state-of-the-art of toxicity evaluation does not

currently account for such interactions

Smoke obscuration and its effect of the ability to escape is accounted

for within the evacuation model in that people move faster when exposed to

light smoke and slower when exposed to moderate smoke. At a high smoke level,

people will not enter the room (route is blocked) and they will find another

route or be trapped. Thus, no further accounting for the effect of smoke is

necessary

Toxicity is considered in two ways (in TENAB) : (1) using the

concentration- time product parameter (Ct) , and (2) by the FED method which

considers the exposure to hydrogen cyanide and carbon monoxide, accounting for

the impact of the simultaneous exposure to carbon- dioxide. (Note: For a thorough discussion of Ct and FED, and response to other fire products, see section 6.12 on tenability limits.) These gas concentration data are produced

by the FAST model when yields of these species are specified by the user. For

Ct, reference values of 900 g-min/m3 for lethality and 450 g-min/m3 for

incapacitation may be used where the materials burning are of "ordinary"

toxicity. This means that, when tested using an appropriate combustion

toxicity screening test, the materials show neither "extreme toxic potency

(ETP)" nor an "unusual toxicological response (UTR) " . These terms are defined

in the glossary of this report. Since this is an approximation of toxicity, it

is desirable to determine the sensitivity of the result to the reference value

of Ct used. This does not require any additional runs of models, but only the

63
determination of the cumulative value of Ct for each occupant at the time that

they exit the building. The reference value given above divided by the maximum

accumulated value represents a "safety factor" for the estimate.

The evaluation of the impact of carbon monoxide, hydrogen cyanide, and

carbon dioxide represents the first version of a toxicity evaluation technique

referred to as the "N-Gas Model" (see section 6.12). The equations used by

TENAB to make this evaluation are discussed in the section on Tenability

Limits. When the computed value for FED reaches 1, lethality is assumed to

occur; at a value of 0.5, incapacitation is assumed.

For both the Ct and FED approach, the data values used are exposure doses

(time integral of concentration) and are thus additive over time. Therefore,

the changing exposure of an occupant moving through the building or overtaken

by the descending layer are accounted for by adding (integrating) these doses

over time in TENAB. For example, an occupant is initially exposed to the. lower

layer until the interface reaches head height. The time that this occurs is

obtained from the interface position data for that room. -Thus, the exposure at

any time equals the accumulated Ct value up to that time. When moving from

room to room, the accumulated dose for each room is computed. The total

exposure is the sum of the doses accumulated in each room until the occupant

exits the building. The same technique is used for the FED data.

As a quick, initial check, the impact of the fire can be evaluated and a critical time obtained for each room without running the evacuation model.

This would be done by running TENAB with an "occupant" placed in each room (by

keyboard entry) at time—0 and never moved. This would represent an occupant of

the room who makes no attempt to (or cannot) escape. When run with the dump

file from FAST, this gives a -set of critical times for each room.

4.5 Evaluate the Consequences

While the results of the calculations are in absolute terms , the

occupant (s) lived or died, they should only be interpreted in a relative way.

That is, since the hazard analysis system is still considered experimental, the

impact of methodological errors which may effect the validity of the result can

be minimized by evaluating the relative difference of two calculations . Thus

,

the system should only be used to examine the difference in the result with and

without the product in question or where the product is replaced by the

traditional alternative. The representative examples provided can be used a

s

baseline cases if appropriate.

In addition, the user should recognize that many of the inputs specified

are assumptions and the sensitivity of the results to these assumptions should

be examined. If the result is very sensitive to a given input, further study

may be necessary to refine the estimate or value used in order to have more

confidence in the predicted result.

Finally, as was stated in the introduction to this' section, the results

of any analysis should be challenged by the user's common sense and experience.

Results that violate these should be questioned and resolved.

64
CHAPTER 5. MATRIX OF EXAMPLE CASES

5.1 Purpose

The example cases provided within HAZARD I serve multiple purposes.

First, they represent realistic cases of interest which demonstrate the use of

the system. Second, as common scenarios, they provide a baseline against which

to compare the relative change in hazard produced by modifications in products

or materials. And third, they define typical buildings and fires for a given

occupancy which can be used as representative of that occupancy for other types

of analyses and purposes such as education, firefighter training, evaluating

the potential impact of code changes, etc.

5.2 Development of the Examples

Since one of the primary purposes of the hazard method is to address

product hazard questions, it is critical that the context of -the analyses be

considered meaningful to the various enforcement authorities responsible for

acceptance of the material or product in question. Within the US, this

responsibility is shared by the Fire Services and Building Code Officials

through the fire and building codes, respectively.

Two groups were empaneled to develop example case descriptions for

inclusion in the matrix of example cases. One, the Fire Service Panel was

organized with the cooperation of the Joint Council of Fire Services

Organizations, and staffed by representatives of their members. They were

assigned the task of developing a set of fire scenario descriptions. The

other, the Building Configuration Panel representing the four Model Building

Code groups and the architectural community, was asked to produce a set of

building descriptions. For each panel, a chairman was obtained from the

respective area who helped identify appropriate participants and chaired the

working group at the meetings. The CFR role was only as facilitator, providing

administrative support and background guidance. No CFR staff were assigned to

either panel so that the results of the panel deliberations represented the

work of the group and were not biased by CFR influence.

Tables 5-1 and 5-2 list the panel participants and the organizations

represented for the first set of meetings. Their first exercise was limited to

the development of cases for residential (one- and two-family) occupancies.

Table 5-3 gives the detail to which the panels were asked to describe the cases. The Building Configuration Panel supplied the items under building

description and the Fire Services Panel covered the items under both fire

description and occupant description. The furnishings selected for the three

houses are tabulated in Tables 5-4 to 5-6, and the floorplans are shown in

Figures 5-1 to 5-4. The results of the calculations, in terms of the predicted

impact on the occupants are summarized in Tables 5-7 to 5-14. And the complete

documentation of the calculations is included in Volume 2 of this report.

65
One of the most important questions which was addressed by the panels

dealt with the philosophy of the representativeness of the example cases. This

was addressed by posing the set of questions listed below:

QUESTIONS TO BE RESOLVED

THE PURPOSE OF THE GENERIC FIRES AND BUILDING DESCRIPTIONS IS TO PROVIDE A

BASELINE AGAINST WHICH TO COMPARE THE CHANGE IN HAZARD TO -THE BUILDING

OCCUPANTS RESULTING FROM THE USE OF NEW OR MODIFIED PRODUCTS. SINCE NEITHER

THE MANUFACTURERS OF SUCH PRODUCTS NOR THE CODE AUTHORITIES ASKED TO RULE ON

THE PRODUCT ACCEPTABILITY KNOW THE SPECIFIC CHARACTERISTICS OF THE BUILDING

INTO WHICH THE PRODUCT WILL BE PLACED, THESE GENERIC SCENARIOS ARE NEEDED TO

PERFORM AN ANALYSIS OF THE POTENTIAL BENEFITS OF NEW TECHNOLOGY.

WITH THIS IN MIND, THERE ARE SOME QUESTIONS WHICH NEED TO BE RESOLVED:

1. SHOULD THE BUILDING DESCRIBED REPRESENT THE TYPICAL HOME OR THE

TYPICAL HOME WHICH WILL EXPERIENCE A (REPORTED) FIRE?

2. SHOULD EITHER OF THE ABOVE BE TYPICAL AT ALL, OR RATHER BE

"MARGINALLY" CODE COMPLIANT?

3. SHOULD THE FIRES REPRESENT THE MOST COMMON FIRES (REPORTED OR

UNREPORTED) , OR MOST COMMON FATAL FIRES? SHOULD THEY BE MATCHED

TO THE MATERIAL OR PRODUCT?

4. SHOULD THE FIRES COME ONLY FROM FREQUENCY OF OCCURRENCE OR

6 SHOULD THEY ATTEMPT TO INCLUDE LOW FREQUENCY, HIGH RISK CASES?

5. SHOULD THE OCCUPANTS REPRESENT THE TYPICAL FAMILY, TYPICAL

FAMILY WHO WILL HAVE A (REPORTED) FIRE, OR INCLUDE PERSONS

KNOWN TO BE AT HIGHER RISK, SUCH AS THE VERY YOUNG AND OLD?

ALL OF THESE QUESTIONS ARE REALLY THE SAME. NO ONE EXPECTS TO ELIMINATE FIRE

LOSSES. THE OBJECT IS TO IMPROVE SAFETY OR AT LEAST MAINTAIN THE STATUS QUO AT

REDUCED COST. THUS, WHEN ATTEMPTING TO MEASURE THE LEVEL OF SAFETY PROVIDED,

IS IT BETTER TO DO SO FOR A TYPICAL CASE OR A MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE CASE?

While initially unsure of a response, in their work the groups settled on

typical homes and occupants with some emphasis on homes that have reported

fires. For example, they did include some very young or old people in some

scenarios and tried to cover a range of slow, medium, and fast fires which were

realistic in their own experience. But they included typical furnishings in

typical buildings, all equipped with a working smoke detector.

66
5.3

Other Occupancies to be Added

As new versions of the method are produced, examples for additional

occupancies will be developed. These will probably follow as:

1. Other Residential (Apartment, Hotel/Motel)

2 . Health Care

3 . Assembly and Educational

4. Business and Mercantile

In each case, one or more representative building descriptions will be

developed by the Building Configuration Panel. These will probably include the

minimum number necessary to represent major types of configurations seen in

practice. For example in the Hotel/Motel area, we might expect to see a traditional hotel with guest rooms on a double loaded corridor, an atrium

design, and an exterior balcony arrangement.

5.4

Additional Fire Scenarios

As the Building Configuration Panel develops additional building

descriptions, the Fire Services Panel will provide associated fire scenarios.

While the exact scenarios that develop cannot be predicted, the procedure

followed in the first exercise indicates that they will probably focus on the

types of fires where most of the losses have occurred. In the Hotel/Motel area

for example, these may include the smoking related guest room" fire and a fastdeveloping fire originating In corridcfrs or common spaces which impacts the

exit access. They may also choose to Include a scenario which- represents a low

frequency of occurrence, but has severe consequences in terms of hazard to

occupants or firefighters, or which presents unusual suppression difficulties.

This is the main reason for using an expert panel approach rather than simply

relying on statistical data.

5.5

Applicability of the Examples

While the examples are intended to be representative cases for the given

occupancy, they should not be considered a universal set of all conditions

which define the hazard of products In that occupancy. That is, the fact that

a product does not represent an unacceptable hazard in these cases does not

mean that a hazardous condition cannot exist. It is important that each

product application be analyzed for the scenarios of concern as they relate to

the context of use of that product. The examples may be useful directly, only

where the scenarios of concern match. Otherwise, the specific, identified

scenarios must be analyzed using the procedure provided.

67
5 . 6 Impact on Occupants

The eight fire scenarios were analyzed by the HAZARD I programs to

establish the impact of fire on the occupants. The model provided the time to

flashover as well as the time to reach maximum temperature. The smoke density

and interface position predictions provided by the FAST model were used with

EXITT to establish the time needed for the occupants to evacuate. The

tenability program, TENAB used the data from FAST and EXITT with its default

tenability limits (temperature, heat flux and toxicity) for each occupant in

the eight scenarios.

Of the eight fire scenarios, five experienced ventilation controlled

burning conditions (fires #1, 2, 6, 7 and 8). As a result, the free burn data

from the data base for the sofa in scenarios 1, 6, and 7 was used without

modification, only up to the point of ventilation-controlled burning. In cases

2 and 8, some of the required data were not directly available in the' data

base, so estimated values were used. For fire #2, data for the kitchen

cabinets were estimated from data from the wardrobe cabinet, and in fire #8 the

data from a TV cabinet was used to estimate the burning rate of the desk; in

each case adjusting for estimated total mass. In cases 1,’ 2, and 8, the data

were adjusted, beginning at the point of ventilation control, by holding the

mass loss rate constant at that which will just burn with the oxygen available.

Such adjustments were not made in scenarios 6 and 7 to illustrate the excessive

predicted temperatures which result.

Two scenarios (fires #3 and 4) we're ventilation controlled because the

door to the fire room was closed. Here, the input data was adjusted to account

for the severely limited oxygen availability by stopping the fire when the

oxygen in the room fell to zero. There was an insufficient oxygen inflow

through the undercut of the door to continue burning. (See discussion of these

procedures in section 4.3.2.)

One scenario (fire #5) contained insufficient fuel to reach ventilation

control for the specified room and door opening. Here, the data for the

Christmas tree and beanbag chair could be used directly as presented in the

data base.

Tables 5-7 through 5-14 summarize the predicted impact on the occupants

in the eight fire scenarios. With the exception of scenario #1, all occupants

safely exited the buildings. This can be attributed to the fact that a LI

scenarios were specified with working smoke detectors which provided timely

warning before conditions reached dangerous levels. This, coupled with the

fact that all of the occupants were physically capable of escaping (except for

the intoxicated person in scenario #1) , led to the results obtained. The

result obtained for the single fatality would change as a function of the

assumed degree of intoxication.

68
TABLE 5-1

BUILDING CONFIGURATION PANEL

Mr. Glenn A. Erickson (Chairman)*

1917 Ridge Lane

Hasting, MN 55033

Mr. J. Vicars*

American Institute of Architects

1735 New York Av. N.W.

Washington, DC 20004

Mr. Richard M. O'Kawa*

International Conference of Building Officials

5360 South Workman Mill Road

Whittier, California 90601

Mr. C. McGarity JR (AIA/NFPA)*

Box 2685

173 N. Converse Street

Spartanburg, S.C. 129304

Mr. Jim Dowling

National Association of Hoome Builders

15 & M Street, N.W.

Washington, DC 20705

* I Mr. Paul K. Heilstedt

BOCA

17926 Heilstedt Road

Homewood, 111. 60430

Mr. Richard Vognelt

SBCC1

900 Montclair Road

Birmingham, Ala. 35213

Mr . Frank Drake

International Conference of Building Officials

5360 South Workman Mill Road

Whittier, California 90601

* indicates attendees at first meeting

69
TABLE 5-2

FIRE SERVICE PANEL

Mr. Howard Boyd, (Chairman)*

4018 Lealand Lane

Nashville, Tenn 37204

Mr . Bob McCarthy*

USFA/FEMA

Chief Ken Henry (ISFSI)*

315 East Windhorst Road

Brandon, Florida 33511

Mr. R.B. "Skip" Smith (FMANA)*

National Fire Protection Association

1110 Vermont Ave . NW Suite 1210

Washington, DC 20005

Mr. Clyde Mariotti (IFSTA)*

Tristate Fire Protection District

419 Plainfield Road

Darien, ILL 60559

Chief Bill Roberts*

Austin Fire Department

1621 Festive Beach

Austin, Texas 78702

Mr. Dave McCormack (IAFF)*

Fire Safety Systems Inc.

2100 M Street NW. Suite 305

Washington, DC 20037

Mr. Richard Duffy*

IAFF

1750 New York- Avenue

Washington, D.C.

Roger Lanahan*

USFA/FEMA

* indicates attendees at first meeting

70
TABLE 5-3

SCENARIO DESCRIPTION

FOR A

HAZARD ANALYSIS

BUILDING DESCRIPTION

1. NUMBER OF ROOMS

2. DIMENSIONS OF ROOMS

3. DIMENSIONS OF OPENINGS BETWEEN ROOMS (DOORS, WINDOWS, PENETRATIONS)

4. CEILING, WALL, AND FLOOR CONSTRUCTION (UP TO THREE LAYERS)

5. PRESENCE AND LOCATION OF DETECTORS OR SPRINKLERS

I FIRE DESCRIPTION

1. DESCRIPTION OF ALL COMBUSTIBLE ITEMS IN THE ROOM OF ORIGIN

MATERIALS AND WEIGHTS OF EACH

DIMENSIONS AND CONSTRUCTION OF EACH ITEM

LOCATION OF EACH ITEM WITHIN THE ROOM (ADJUST FOR DESIRED SPREAD*

)

2. IGNITION SOURCE

DESCRIPTION (MATERIAL AND QUANTITY)

LOCATION WITH RESPECT TO THE FIRST ITEM IGNITED

3. EXTENT OF FIRE SPREAD

SINGLE ITEM

PART OF ROOM

FULL ROOM

OCCUPANT DESCRIPTION .

*

'

1 . NUMBER OF OCCUPANTS

2. AGE AND SEX

3. PHYSICAL/MENTAL LIMITATIONS

4. LOCATION AND CONDITION AT TIME OF FIRE

* CURRENT VERSION REQUIRES THAT PRE - FLASHOVER FIRE SPREAD BE SPECIFIED BY

THE USER. NFIRS DATA ON EXTENT OF FIRE SPREAD BY MATERIAL AND PRODUCT

WILL BE PROVIDED FOR GUIDANCE. TIME TO FLASHOVER IS SCENARIO DEPENDANT

AND WILL BE INDICATED BY THE MODEL SO THAT THE REQUIRED ADJUSTMENTS CAN

BE MADE. FUTURE VERSIONS WILL INCLUDE BOTH PRE- AND POST- FLASHOVER FIRE

DEVELOPMENT PREDICTIONS

71
TABLE 5-4

CONSENSUS ON RANCH HOUSE FURNISHING

RANCH HOUSE:

Living Room: 1 club chair

3 seat sofa - foam synthetic untreated cover

ottoman - foam synthetic - untreated cover

19 inch TV

stereo (wood) with 4 speakers

coffee table (glass)

Master Bedroom: double bed - foam synthetic

dresser - formica top

chest of drawers - formica top

wooden chair - upholstered (neoprene) pad

Small Bedroom: bunk beds - wood (maple) - 2 cotton mattresses

chair & desk

dresser - wood

2nd Bedroom:

Dining Area:

double bed on wood frame with polyurethane/innerspring

mattress and vinyl sheet for bedwetting

2 wood end tables

small desk (laminate formica) 6c wood

chair

dresser (laminate formica)

wooden dining table with laminated top (formica)

6 wooden chairs with cushions

sideboard - wood

Kitchen:

Bathroom:

Closets

:

laminated table & 2 wood chairs

cabinets (not wood)

1 pot grease (teflon coated pot)

aluminum pot

fiberglass sink

plastic waste pipe

fiberglass tub

cotton towels

vinyl shower curtains

mixed natural & synthetics

Smoke detector in hallway - 85 decibels in hallway - run model with and without

(consensus)

.

Synthetic drapes throughout, throwrugs throughout (consensus)

72
TABLE 5-5

CONSENSUS ON TOWNHOUSE FURNISHINGS

Living Room: sofa

chairs - 2

coffee table - wood

stereo - large and 21” TV

end table - wood

buffet - wood

large bookcase with books - wood

large bean bag chair

Family Area: dinette table - chrome and vinyl

chairs - 4 - chrome and vinyl

high chair - chrome and vinyl

side board - wood

Kitchen: laminated pressed board cabinets

formica counter tops

Master Bedroom: queen waterbed

dresser

chest of drawers

chairs

13” TV

Bedroom #2: single bed

chest of drawers

toy box - wood

Bedroom #3

crib - wood

changing table

chest of drawers - wood

Smoke detectors - not connected - photo electric 85 decibels

downstairs - middle of hall between door to

toilet and door to laundry

upstairs - between top of stairs and door

to bathroom

Closet under stairs: hot water heater

household cleaning materials - broom

plastic bucket, paper, rags, etc.

74
'

(12.8m)

420- " „0-,83 (uig*8) i mdi—i

fa

FLOOR

PLAN

OFA

TYPICAL

RANCH

HOUSE

TABLE 5-6

CONSENSUS ON 2 -STORY HOUSE FURNISHING

Family Room: wood panel over drywall - 1/8" luan

couch 90 inch - velour cover, urethane interior

coffee table - 24 lbs wood, 29 lbs books and

magazines on lower shelf, 2 five lb

> glass inserts in top • end table - 49 lbs including books and magazines

lamp on end table

recliner - 85 lbs, corduroy

entertainment center - 188 lbs

19" TV - 51 lbs

* VCR - 16 lbs

tape deck - 7 lbs

records - 30 lbs

tapes - 10 lbs

speakers - 2, 22 lbs

bookcases - 2, wood, 190 lbs, filled with 180 lbs books

liquor cabinet - 11 750 ml bottles

Living Room: couch - 180 lbs, fabric with urethane interior

end tables - 2, wood, 124 lbs

chair - fabric with urethane interior, 38 lbs

chair - fabric with Kapok interior

curio cabinet

TV and TV stand - chrome

Dining Room: table - wood, 104 lbs

chairs - 15 lbs each

buffet

breakfront

Breakfast Room: wicker table - 20 lbs plus glass top

wicker chairs - 14 lbs each

Kitchen:

• cabinets - ash

liquor - 24 750 ml bottles and 5 1750 ml bottles

usual appliances

formica counter tops

Utility Room: washer and dryer

Master Bedroom: king size bed - wood headboard

nightstands - 2 table - antique wood

chair - 30 lbs

dresser

highboy

TV - 13"

closet - contains 267 lbs clothes

76
Bedroom #2

trundle bed with bedspread

dresser

bureau

desk

end table

stereo receiver - 12 lbs

speakers - 12 lbs total

bookcase

books - 108 lbs

chair - 10 lbs

records - 30 lbs

clothes in closet - 136 lbs

Bedroom #3

double bed

wicker basket

cedar chest

dresser

Bedroom #4: office

dask - wood

chair - 40 lbs - executive type

typewriter table

typewriter

bookcases - 3 five shelf units, 258 lbs

stereo receiver - small

TV - 13" portable

Did not furnish basement

Smoke Detectors • not connected - ionization - 85 decibels

opposite front door, left of door to passageway

middle of hall, near door to bedroom #4

77
2846

TW

2234

TW

6068

SL

GL

DR O

LOWER

FLOOR

PLAN

OFA

TYPICAL 2

STORY

HOUSE
(10,4m)

340- " £ 4

..o*.oe W6)

fig.

5-4

UPPER

FLOOR

PLAN

OFA

TYPICAL

2-STORY

HOUSE
TABLE 5-7

IMPACT ON OCCUPANTS FOR FIRE #1

Fire #1 - Smoldering Sofa in Living Room of the Ranch house

Assumed properties of product: Material code UPS001 (sofa)

Flashover time: 50 minutes

Maximum temperature: 1 720°

C

Evacuation

Occupant Time

1 Incapacitated - 45 min

Dead - 48 min

TABLE 5-8

IMPACT ON OCCUPANTS FOR FIRE #2

Fire #2 - Grease Fire in Kitchen of the Ranch house

Assumed properties of product: Material code CKG001 (cooking oil) and

CLT001 (wardrobe) used for cabinets

Flashover time: 12 min

Maximum temperature: 800°

C

Evacuation

Occupant Evacuation Time

1

2

3

4

5

= 1 min

1 min

= 1 min

~ 1 min

~ 1 min

80
TABLE 5-9

IMPACT ON OCCUPANTS FOR FIRE #3

Fire #3 - Mattress and Bed Linen

in bedroom 2 of the Ranch house

Assumed properties of product: Material code BED002

Mass loss rate was reduced due to limited

availability of oxygen within a closed room. Flashover time: did not flashover

Maximum temperature: 260°

Evacuation

Occupant Evacuation Time

1

2

3

4

5

TABLE 5-10

IMPACT ON OCCUPANTS FOR FIRE #4

Fire #4 - Trash and Cleaning Materials

in a closet in the Townhouse

Assumed properties of product: Material code TRB001 (bag of paper trash)

Mass loss rate was reduced due to limited

availability of oxygen in a closed room. Flashover time: did not flashover

Maximum temperature: 260°

Evacuation

Occupant Evacuation Time

~ 2 min

~ 2 min

~ 2 min

ss 1 min

~ 1 min

~ 1 min

~ 1 min

~ 1 min

1

2

3

81
TABLE 5-11

IMPACT ON OCCUPANTS FOR FIRE #5

Fire #5 - Christmas Tree and Bean Bag chair

in the Living room of the Townhouse

Assumed properties of product: Material code CTR001 (xmas tree) and

CHR001 (beanbag chair)

Flashover time: did not flashover

Maximum temperature: 270°C

Evacuation

Occupant Evacuation Time

1

2

34

= 4 min

~ 4 min

= 4 min

= 4 min

TABLE 5-12

IMPACT ON OCCUPANTS FOR FIRE #6

Fire #6 - Couch and Paneling in the

family room of the Two -story

Assumed properties of product: Material code UPS001 (sofa)

Flashover time: 4 min

Maximum temperature: 2000° C (This is recognized as an unachievable

temperature due to vitiation which is not

currently included in the model)

Evacuation

Occupant

1

2

34

Time

~ 3 min

~ 3 min

~ 3 min

= 3 min

82
TABLE 5-13

IMPACT ON OCCUPANTS FOR FIRE #7

Fire #7 - repeat of Fire #6 with

different room doors closed

Assumed properties of product: Material code UPS001 (sofa)

Flashover time: 4 min

Maximum temperature: 2000° C (see comment on fire #6)

Evacuation

Occupant Time

1

2

3

4

~ 3 min

~ 3 min

« 3 min

~ 3 min

TABLE 5-14

IMPACT ON OCCUPANTS FOR FIRE #8

Fire #8 - Trash, Drapes and Desk in the

upstairs office/bedroom of the Two- story

Assumed properties of product: Material code WPB001 (wastebasket)

,

CTN001 (drapes), and TLV001 (TV set)

Flashover time : 12 min

Maximum temperature: 700°

Evacuation

Occupant

1

2

34

Time

~ 4 min

~ 4 min

= 4 min

~ 4 min

83
CHAPTER 6. DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS

6.1 System Logic

To assist the user through the overall analytical process, and to make

efficient use of the programs, documentation, and procedures, particularly the

identification of scenarios of concern, an overall logic diagram, shown in

detail in figure 6-1 has been developed. The process has also been translated

into a short, interactive BASIC computer program named PRODUCT. ONE.

The program asks a series of multiple choice questions, and depending on

the answers, guides the user to the specific parts of this report containing

information on fire statistics, the reference examples, or the step by step

procedure used for the computation process. (In future versions of this

program some of this information will be contained in the program.) After

returning from the step by step procedure the program asks further questions to

check if additional scenarios need to be run.

The first two questions in the program "What is your product?" and "Where

is the product to be used?" are to determine (a) if the product of concern is

one that is used in one of the example cases, and (b) if it is a product for

which fire statistics are available. The next questions check if the user

wants to see fire statistics on residences in general or on the product, and if so directs the user to this information in the next section (6.2) of this

report

.

If the product is used in one or more of the examples, the user is asked

if he would like to see the schematic layout of the prototypical house(s) . If

so, the user is directed to the appropriate page and to section 6.4 for a description of the procedure to be used in the determination of the fire

properties of the test product. The user is then asked to check if all listed

fire properties are equal to or better than those of the reference product. If

so, the product is likely to be less hazardous than the reference product. If

not, the user is directed to section 4.2 of this report for the step by step

procedure for the hazard computation process. After the computation the user

is given the option of modifying the scenario by changing the key parameter

values and rerunning the case for both the reference product and the test

product. If another example case includes the product the user is then given

the option of repeating the process for the other case(s) until all important

cases have been run.

If the product is not used in any of the example cases, or the user

wishes to define a specific fire scenario, it is necessary to stipulate the

specific conditions for each fire. Included in the specification are the

layout of the building, the condition and location of the occupants, the output

of the fire generated by the product of concern and other products expected to

be involved. The following questions are displayed to assist the user to

better define the scenario(s) for analysis:

84

STEP

BY

STEP

PROCEDURE*

C/3 LU

C

I >0
• Where is the product located within the facility?

• How can the product contribute to a fire (ignition source,

fuel source)?

• What are the characteristics of ignition and burning

(smoldering, low or high energy flaming)?

• Is this the first item ignited?

« What other items could be involved once the fire spreads?

• What other items may spread the fire to the product of concern?

• Where are the occupants, and what is their mental and physical

condition?

• What are the important building features that will influence

the fire spread?

The program then directs the user to the step by step procedure for the

computation process.

6,2 Scenario Selection/Data

The fire hazard modeling system described in the step by step procedure

is deterministic. This means that results obtained are uniquely, related to the

specific set of conditions provided as input to the analysis. Figure 4-1

provides the information needed to initiate a hazard analysis. This

information can be based in part upon a fire scenario. Each "scenario provides

a description of the chain of events leading from the time, place, and

environment of the ignition through to the consequences (loss of life, injury

or property damage) [1] . The scenario description also includes the influence

of the ignition source, the characteristics of the product or products, the

agents contributing to (or inhibiting) fire growth, the actions of human

occupants and automatic protective devices . Selecting the relevant or important conditions which prevail most frequently in fires, particularly fatal

fires, can be aided by analysis of the fire loss statistics . Often analysis of

the statistics may indicate that there are a few predominant scenarios which

occur more frequently than all the others

6.2.1 United States Fire Statistics

To provide a perspective on the overall fire problem and the residential

fire problem in particular, selected information follows, taken from several

significant studies which have made use of fire statistics collected over the

past several years. If more in-depth information or a fuller understanding is

required the user is encouraged to refer to the original works. There are two

main sources of fire statistics, the National Fire Protection Association

(NFPA) and the United States Fire Administration (USFA) . NFPA's fire loss

statistics have been developed using a stratified weighting by community size

through fire departments responding to an annual survey conducted by the

87
National Fire Protection Association. These statistics provide a measure of

the size of the problem but lack the detail needed to relate cause. Table 6-1

shows the distribution of fires, civilian deaths and injuries by occupancy for

1984 [2]. As Table 6-1 indicates, residential fires in 1984 only represented

about 25 percent of the total fires contributed to over 80 percent of the

civilian deaths. One- and two-family dwelling fires alone accounted for over

60 percent of the total. This proportion has remained fairly constant over the

past several years [3].

The U.S. Fire Administration has initiated the National Fire Incident

Reporting System (NFIRS) for collecting causal information. Fire statistics

providing information on individual fires which have led to loss of life,

injury and property damage have been collected and provided to USFA by

responding fire departments over a period of several years . This information

has been tabulated from reports using the Uniform Coding for Fire Protection

format (NFPA 901) and computer tapes are available for statistical analysis.

In addition to losses, data collected include: building occupancy, age and

condition of victims, area of origin, first material ignited, ignition source,

time of day, etc.

Table 6-2 relates the causes for fires and losses in one- and .two -family

dwellings. Obviously, some fires result in worse consequences than others.

Smoking, while only involved in 4.6 percent of the fires, causes 18.9 percent

of the deaths; whereas heating which has contributed to over one -third of the

total fires has a proportionately lower death rate, but still is attributed

with a very significant 15 percent of the deaths in one- and two -family

dwellings.

Clearly the fire risk is not equally divided among all persons. An

analysis of the NFIRS data from 1978-1982, shown in table 6-3, indicates the

very young (5 and under) and the elderly (75 and over) have death rates of

about three and four times, respectively, greater than the rate experienced by

young and middle aged adults. Children under' the age of 10 and adults 65 and

over account for 47 percent of all fire deaths in residences but represent only

26 percent of the nation's population [3]. From the standpoint of the fire

victim, table 6-3 presents by age group the cause of fire, the location at

ignition and the condition before injury [4], Figures 6-2 and 6-3

differentiate the location at ignition and the physical conditions expected for

victims of different age groups. Such information is of direct use in locating

the occupants relative to the fire and establishing their capabilities fdfc

escape and rescue.

A study which analyzed the leading causes for fire fatalities among the

young and elderly summarized the important ignition factors based upon the 1982

NFIRS [3]. For children under 10 in fatal fires, the leading forms of heat of

ignition are:

• Electrical (malfunctions, overload, etc.) 24%

• Open Flame (match, lighter, candle, etc.) 25%

• Heating/Cooking 30%

88
Estimates

of

Reported

Fires,

Civilian

Fire

Deaths

and

Injuries

by

Occupancy,

1984 c

<4-1 3 o H CO3

CO PI H H to r*. o o 00 CO CO 3 3 > p • c e c • • e c c •H 3 3 00 00 co «=“$ o CO «**$ <=5 m CO P o u •r-) sO m 1—

CO 3 P 3 o

•tm a H M H C & w <; oe c

CC3

A

•H 4=4 H 3 in O o o m o o o o m H H PI r*. O m o CM m m m o CM 3 > «0 CM sO co CM p>. CM co m

•H a M «> *>

A «*> J3 H O'* co <T) 00 CO U CM •H

co =3 H .O

-Iu

T3e3 3

IW co J3 0 •H CO H CO 3 u H J3 0>< O co in o> lO P

CO 3 > 4=) • • c e • • • • e pO 2 3 •H CO O CM m CM o m O —

«=* 4J 3 o 3 00 sO p=j s 3 p a H 3 0) fH Q H CO < 3 3 p 3 H H <H H «) o o m o m in o o m O erH 4J •43" 00 CM '3 00 CO o 00 •<r •o > CO CM CM p-^ CM in CM 3 H a A A 3 H <r CO m

4=) *3

CO ° 0)

Cs3 * >

f—

Oc

4-» c pH 03 vO V© CM <r <r r-*=4 3 pH 3 • € » • • « • • * 3 < p i© ^=J o o <3> 00 O p3

Of o H

fe CM CM «=J vr 3 O O o o o o O O O o pi o o o o o o o o o o

co o o m o m o o mm o a A AS *> m M a « H CO 40 <3» 00 m r». r^. o CO

pi CM o o> CM co p-4 <r

CO vO

m CM <T o CO

Ed * A

CM

0)3

*H3>

J=u

•H333p3

•u3pp

co 33P3

4=4 3 H 3 H 3 H P H e H 3 4=4 3 3 3 H 3

p> <4-1 p> 4=1 3

Oo O 1 Q

<—

pH 3 U Pi o a 3 3 H 3 3 3 3 -n •H O 3 3 pj 00 3 o 4J H H a H 3 Pi r; 3 3 2 3 * 3 3 33 H 3 3 3 3 3 H 3 a •H 3 H 3 P T3 > 2 P o Pi 3 H a 3 H 3 3 o 3 3 pi H P 3 >4 > .3 3 ! 3 p 3 3 3 3 4P -o 3 -a 3 Pi i— P 3 P o H 3 2U O PI 1 j3 3 W O < O 3 2 H 3 O H 4-1 fP

oO 2 2 o <

<3 “O

CO -3 3 3 T3 > 3 H H O 3 > C 3

0)ap3O

CO

NFPA

Survey

of

Fire

Departments

[2J
TABLE 6-2

Cause Analysis

One- and Two-Family Dwellings

(mobile homes not included)

Fatalities Injuries Property Damage Fires

Smoking 18.9% 12.8% 4.7% 4.6%

Heating 15.0 16.0 18.1 34.4

Incendiary/ Suspicious 10.2 7.0 16.1 8.5

Electrical Distribution 6.2 6.0 10.5 7.2

Children Playing 5.2 8.2 3.4 3.9

Cooking 5.2 20.1 6.4 13.6

Other Equipment 4.1 6.2 5.9 5.7

Open Flame 3.3 5.2 3.7 4.7

Appliances, Air Conditioning 2.4 5.6 5.0 5.8

Other Heat 1.4 1.6 1.3 1.0

Exposure 0.3 0.8 2.5 2.2

Natural 0.0 0.7 2.1 1.5

Unknown 27.8 9.8 20.4 7.1

Source: 1983 NFIRS
Cause

and

Fatality

Rate

by

Age

in

Residences

U pi o '© CN -4* pi CN <r

a) c c • c • • • • • • LO c > <r so m © OS =) CN n CN =0* Pi to o CN CN v© m n Os n Os Pi s© CN OS

in o -crl e e e e c © • • e e i© pl| OS m »=4 s© © CN t—

1©

i=) <r CO

39 p=4 as n ->0“ so Pi O 0-4*1 • e e 0 © © © • a e in U \©| CM CN v© n p* © NT cn <*

**=*3 1—4 CN —4

—

iH ==4

©

© <m <r

© »—4 © o o as • 0 c • e e c • • • CO u <r| ©> •i© CO <r o H cn -cr n •<T

0=^ CN

OS CO 39 cn 00 n © o o a>i • e a • • • • • • • CN u cn| ON CN pi 00 CO CN i© p- © 00

I**} cn—

**4

0© pi (=4 CN -4° s©©© >a O o as • • « e e e © • © c •U —

Pi v©

m 3© n CN >3= CN as pi CN CN —-4 —

—

co CO V© <r • • -a • • • • a © o *4 © * n © cn pi e • i© AJ OS 0BB^ CN *—< as cn CN ^© V©

OS s© Nf n s© c p- pi • © • © 00 CN o e a© » • 00 V© n • - © CO u m c© v© v© =—

CN n as ua

m 00 m —

© <r CN n

33

® • • • * • • « • ©

U C o pi <r pi n pi pi

—

a <*

CM 0 ©

— cn —4 n

cna © V© CN 30

©

©

©©

i—

V 3 • • • • • c • • • • fH bO O CN v© pi pi © © V© cn © © < < u cn »—

CN

©

©

©

Cfl 3O

•H G O o

•H bfl i-4 a a u

CO •H cO 3 >i p-4 d

Cfl CO 3 o

f—

a a as •H

0) So r—

&4 o co 33 AJ

CO i-l CO a, 1=4 AJ CO 3 CO O S-j Cfl —-4 CO CO •H bO bO i-4 bo 5 <u c a) i-t 0 3 O -d C d i-i c S-i a o co > © a c •H i-t U i-4 "3 i-l i-4 3 i-4 o

<0

U CJ —4 a) Cfl iH CO O d aCJ tO O a) O i-l ,-g -3 t—

a S-l d <u 0 i-H 0 -d u •U 1-1 U-4 i-4 CM M 33 u Ci3 c/5 © O 3 a —

O CS4 o

a; rH

S'? 3N S'? 3-5 3-S S'? a <: Si? 3i?

Source:

1978-1982

NFIRS,

U.S.

Bureau

of

Census

|4|
AGE GROUP AGE GROUP

2 or 3 to 6 to 10 to 20 to Other

Awake

Unimpaired

Under 5 9

Other

19 29

7.2%

3.3% 4.7%

12.3% 12.7% Awake

12.2% Unimpaired 15.0%

Impaired

by Drugs,

6.4% 5.1%

Too Young

to Act

44.0% 27.8% Alcohol

16.4%

79.4% Asleep 79.4%

58.8%

63.9%

Asleep 48.0%

• 30 to 50 to 49 64

Other 4.1^0 5.3%

Awake

Unimpaired 16.0%

17.6%

Impaired

by Drugs,

Alcohol

Bedridden,

Other

20.8%

22.2%

4.1%

Physical

Handicap

8.5%

Asleep 55.0%

46.4%

65 to 74

75 and

’Over

Other 3. 1 %_ —2.3%-

Awake

Unimpaired 18.6% 20.1%

Mental

Handicap -3.1%- “

2.6%-

Too Old _3.4%_

Impaired

by Drugs,

10.9% 14.8%

Alcohol ""2.6%“

Bedridden,

Other

10.9%

18.1% Physical

Handicap

Asleep

50.0%

39.8%

FIG. 6-2 CIVILIAN FIRE DEATHS IN RESIDENCES BY CONDITION BEFORE

INJURY AND AGE OF VICTIM, 1978-82, SOURCE: NFIRS [4]
CLZ>o

CLCD

LUCD<

in s > « o

ifl o ^

CD N= O O ^

LO CD O o® CO +* ^ O Q os

eg *- cm O O 05

CD 05

CO ° ^

eg 0 5 ?D _ 0 < 0a < ©

i_ 0 o -S

O)

03 *Z o C

m- 03 O 'Z

u=0

JZ

.£ O 1 0 w .£ O 03 s ° O 0 O o .h

CD LL o w

LL O o .h

DC LL >0 co 0 0 > E o d 5 > £ c = £ % B

S5

eg*

CO

35

05

35

CD

35O

35

CDo

35

COo*

CO

35 35 35 35

co r-° o h* d co 05 N.' T— eg CO

35 35 35 35 aR m T~ CD

T” CD cd o cd

CM CM co 0

-CO

35

05

CM

05

id

CM

35

00

id

in

35

ino

35

CO

05

eg

'o -S

05

03 'Z .£ O

.? 

3 .±

CD LL

35

eg

co

eg

35o

05

35

CO

35

eg

co

CM

c5q

od

35d

CM

35 35 35 r CM N= cd N»‘ d CM CM CO eg T*

35 35 35 35

CM 05 05

CM CD cd id

in CM T* - _ 35q

co

CM

35

COco

35

CO

CO

35

CO

CO

35

CM

05

35

CM

CO

35

CD

CD

35q

CD

35 35 35 35 CO CM 1^ o

id ‘ 1^ CM CM CO CM r35

05 o

W4 O 'Z ^ "O ~ 0 c

»_ c a O 0 > o O 03 cO 0 £ o jz !t

O m z O w d: > .tr c

ll O DC 'll c c 5 » c<<zrJZ <j sjZ C/2 ^ 3S Q TM — c^, c/2 z z

h—

0sI

N0I1IN0I IV N0I1VG01

VICTIM

1978-82,

SOURCE:
For adults 65 and over, the leading forms of heat of ignition are:

• Smoking 37%

• Heating/Cooking 20%

• Electrical (malfunctions, overload, etc.) 14%

An analysis of the condition of the young and elderly victims prior to fatal

injury showed:

Condition at Ignition

Percent

Under 10 65 and over

Asleep when fire started 62.8

Unable to act because of age or bed ridden 22.7

Awake, but unable to escape 13.2

45.1

23.8

20.2

Additional studies on fatalities have been published which provide

contrasts between the causes in rural, high fatality areas and non-rural areas

including the influence of sex, race, and age [5,6].

An analysis of civilian injuries indicates that unlike fatalities, adults

aged 20-39 have the highest risk of injury from fire in residences. The fifth

edition of Fire in the United States provides information about the nature and

cause of injury, which prevented the victim from escaping, and activity at the

time of injury [3].

The distribution of fatalities for one- -and two-family dwellings (table

6-4) indicates that the majority of fatal fires involve one . or two deaths.

While the occurrence of multiple death fires (defined as 3 or more) in

residences represents a small fraction of the total; 87.3 percent of the

multiple death fires reported in 1985 occurred in residential properties

resulting in 79.7 percent of the total multiple deaths [7].

One of the major fire safety devices introduced into residences in the

past ten years has been the smoke detector. It has been estimated, based upon

a 1985 Louis Harris poll, that three-fourths of U.S. households now have

detectors. Unfortunately, evidence also suggests that the households that do

not have detectors are those which have the highest risk of having a fire [8}*-.

As Table 6-5 shows, of the fires reported to NFIRS in 1981, 1982 and 1983 where

detector status was known, over 75 percent of the fires occurred in one- and

two -family dwellings without detectors.

6.2.2 Relation of Flame and Smoke Spread to Other

Data Elements Useful in Scenario Development

Information relating to the extent of flame and smoke damage at

extinguishment to level of loss, cause of fire, influence of detectors,

condition of victim (awake, age, asleep, handicapped), time of day, victim

activity (escaping, rescue or fire control, sleeping, irrational or unable to

act)

,

and material ignited assist in developing the hazard model inputs and the

94
TABLE 6-4

Distribution of Deaths in Fatal Fires:

One-” and Two-Family Dwellings, 1981

Deaths Per

Fire

1

2

3

4

10 *

Percent of

Total Fires

81

13

4

2

100

Percent of

Total Deaths

64

20

9

7

100

*A single fire was reported involving ten deaths in 1981.

Source: 1981 NFIRS Data Base®
TABLE 6-5

Fires and Loss per Fire by Detector Status for

One- and Two-Family Dwellings (mobile homes not included)

Based upon Average of 1981, 1982 and 1983 National Estimates

Detector Status Fires

With detectors

» 78,190

Without detectors 279,765

Detector status unknown 160,760

Fatality Inj uries $ Loss

100 fires 100 fires fire

0.43 2.95 4009

0.85 3.00 4342

0.50 1.84 5551

Source 1981, 1982, and 1983 NFIRS
dominant scenarios. Tables 6-6 through 6-9 provide an analysis of the 1982

NFIRS data [9]. Flame and smoke spread relate directly to the physics of fire

development in buildings which are directly usable in the fire models.

6.2.3 Scenario Development

A study in 1976 by Clarke and Ottoson looked at fire death scenarios

defined by occupancy, ignition agent and ignition source [10]

Their analysis

indicated that about two -thirds of the fatalities could be accounted for by

fourteen general scenarios. Residential furnishings alone accounted for 36

percent of the total deaths for all occupancies

A study, based upon the 1982 NFIRS data, used this same approach to

examine the leading ignition scenarios in residential structure fires [3],

Because of the potential influence of climatic and construction differences an analysis was performed for the north east, north central, southern and western

regions of the United States (see table 6-10 to 6-13). Smoking materials

dominated all four regions as the leading ignition source for civilian fire

deaths (23.2 to 40.5 percent) for a small portion of the fires (3.6 to 5.1

percent) . In the colder regions (north east and north central) the use of

auxiliary heating devices (fireplaces and woodstoves) caused chimney fires to

be the most common cause of fire. In the south and west, cooking fires using

gas or electric stoves constituted the most common scenario.

6.2.4 Product-Specific Scenario Data

The same source of data (NFIRS) which provided the causal factors for

residential fires and fatalities can also be queried from the viewpoint of a particular product. This is, however, significantly limited to the cases where

the product is either the first material ignited or the product is equipment

involved in ignition. Therefore, for fires where a product's main contribution

is as an additional fuel source, the best source of data for hazard analysis is

the list of general residential scenarios shown in tables 6-10 to 6-13.

Tables 6-14 through 6-17 contain analyses of fires involving contents and

furnishings which were performed by the NFPA Fire Analysis Division for use by

one of the NFPA Committees [11]. The 1980, 1981 and 1982 NFIRS data were used

in the process of selecting the major contributors (upholstered furniture;

mattresses and pillows; bedding, blankets, sheets and comforters; and curtains,

blinds, draperies and tapestries). The information contained in tables 6-14 to

6-17 can be used as a resource in generating the product specific scenarios

needed to perform relevant hazard analysis in one- and two-family dwellings.

Three data elements are presented for each category of contents and

furnishings. These elements were form of heat of ignition, equipment involved

in ignition, and area of fire origin.

97
TABLE 6-6

Extent of Flame and Smoke Damage at Extinguishment

Percent of Cases

Extent of Damage

Flame

Fires

Damage

Deaths

Smoke

Fires • DamageDeaths

Confined to object or area 59 10 28 3

Confined to room

i 15 7 14 2

Confined to compartment

or floor 5 14 10 7 Extended beyond floor 21 69 48 88

Source: 1982 NFIRS [9J.

TABLE 6-7

Extent of Flame versus Detector Status

Percentage of Fires Deaths per 100 Fires

Extent of Flame

With

Detectors

No

Detectors

With

Detectors

No

Detectors

Confined to object

or area 71 62 0.1 0.2

Confined to room 13 9 0.3 0.9

Confined to compartment

or floor 4 5 1.6 2.7

Extended beyond floor 12 23 2.2 3.2

All fires with known

extent 100 100 0.5 1.1

Source: 1982 NFIRS [9]
Extent

of

Flame.

Versus

Victim

Condition

and

Activity

Death

(Percentage)

fH

cde u o o

•H <C

4_! CO o u 4J uM 0) « js

510 CO S

«“• •H 3 a

<ya 0

fH

C/3

fHO w 4=1 0 S0

as cj 3a a)

CO S-i <3 iH

Oi Esd

ON

as o

r^.

CN

>o

tcc

c.

COCJ

CO Ed

en \Q <r)

oc

pvs

on

m

—< un

CN 4© 3

-X

CO3<

00 On <r os

—* l/S

COu

00

CO CJ O r"* -o as

f—

4-1 i=—

c On

a; s-l

—

s o

4J o C/3 ai 4-1 S-l fH s a CO <4-1 4—4 CO a s a. E54

•»-> o s -a ~Z

Et, J3 o o r“ O S-l CJ o CNi

'4-1 oo 0 O o Q Os u u 4J S-l .3 <“=$ u c0 o 3 -a as T3 "3 o "3

0/ 0)

U as as

••

4-1 c CO c C <4-1 a 3 X •H •H •H o CJ

<4-1 S-l <4-1 <4-1 S-l <u S-i c o e c o 4-1 3 c o o X O

cj CJ CJ Cd C/3
Extent

of

Flame

Versus

Time

of

Day

per

res

05 ft CO CM X to • • • • • u

CT3 o 0) o Q -4 O <r

m

CO 44 <U s u V ft O to

&C|

U

<U 44

to O o CTn co s

per

ires- •—H

>0- o

62 fa • • • • u o o CM CM

C0 o 0) o Q -< a

04 m

oo b0| +j 0) G M

<U ft

CJ to

$-1 0) 44

to o

43

m sO

m

per

res

C0 ft i—4 CO —4 CM X • • • • •u

c0 O

0) Q -• o o CM CM

CO 44 <u 0 u .-H

m oo

0) ft VO o 64

S4

CU 44

to o

44 —4 C o> 0) u —d a o

44 o co u >4 rH 0) o cO 44 h4 a cu a Cu to

cO •ro o a tJ 2

ft 66 o o d

to O u u o CM

03 44 O 0 o CU O' o 44 4-1 44 <4 62 -4

cO o

44 T3 0) TJ "d o -o G <U i4 <D cu ft 0) • • 0) c c0 G d 44 T3 S3 44 ft ft •H d CJ X 44 u 44 44 S4 (U >4 65 c o d d o 44 3 o o o X 0

CJ CJ CJ 63 CO
TABLE 6-10

Leading Accidental Ignition Scenarios in

Residential Structure Fires in the Northeast, 1982

Form of Heat

of Ignition

Form of

Material

Ignited

Area of

Origin

% of

Incidents

% of

Civilian

Deaths

Solid Fueled Equipment Residue, Soot Chimney 16.8 .9

Properly Operating

Electrical Equipment Cooking Material Kitchen 3.6 0

Gas Fueled Equipment Cooking Material Kitchen 3.0 0

Solid Fueled Equipment Special Form Chimney 2.9 0

Smoking Material Bedding - Bedroom 2.2 6.3

Solid Fueled Equipment Structural

Component

,

Finish

Wall Assembly 1.9 0

Solid Fueled Equipment Other Chimney . 1.9 0

Solid Fueled Equipment Trash, Waste Chimney 1.8 ' 0

Solid Fueled Equipment Structural

Component

,

Finish

Chimney 1.6 0

Smoking Material Upholstered

Furniture

Living Room 1.4 16.9

Source: NFIRS data from four states (Connecticut, New Jersey, New York, and Rhode Island)

with 17,949 accidental residential structure fires and 117 civilian deaths in

accidental residential fires with form of heat of ignition, form of material

ignited, and area of origin reported [3].
TABLE 6-11

Leading Accidental Ignition Scenarios in

Residential Structure Fires in the Northcentral , 1982

Form of Heat

of Ignition

Form of

Material

Ignited

Solid Fueled Equipment Trash, Waste

J Properly Operating

Electrical Equipment ; Cooking Material

Gas Fueled Equipment Cooking Material

Solid Fueled Equipment Other

Smoking Material Bedding

Smoking Material Upholstered

Furniture

Solid Fueled Equipment Structural

Component

,

Finish

Electrical Equipment

Arcing, Overloaded Cable Insulation

Solid Fueled Equipment Structural

Component

,

Finish

Area of

Origin

% of

Incidents

% of

Civilian

Deaths

Chimney 10.7 0

Kitchen 6.3 1.1

Kitchen 4.5 1.1

Chimney 3.8 0

Bedroom 3.1 10.3

Living Room 2.2 20.9

Living Room 1.6 1.5

Kitchen 1.5 .4

Chimney 1.3 1.5

Source: NFIRS data from 8 states (Iowa, Illinois, Kansas, Michigan, Minnesota, Ohio,

South Dakota, and Wisconsin) with 47,677 accidental residential structure fires

and 283 civilian deaths in accidental residential fires with form of heat of

ignition, form of material ignited, and area of origin reported [3].
TABLE 6-12

Leading Accidental Ignition Scenarios in

Residential Structure Fires in the South, 1982

Form of Heat

of Ignition

Form of

Material

Ignited

Area of % of

Incidents

% of

Civilian

Deaths

Properly Operating

Electrical Equipment Cooking Material Kitchen 10.2 0

Gas Fueled Equipment Cooking Material Kitchen 4.1 0

ISolid Fueled Equipment Trash, Waste Chimney 3.5 0

Smoking Materials Bedding Bedroom 3.2 11.5

Solid Fueled Equipment Other Chimney 2.1 0

Electrical Equipment,

Arcing, Overloaded Cable Insulation Kitchen 2.0 .6

Smoking Materials .Upholstered

Furniture

Living Room 1.9 15.9

Match/Lighter Bedding Bedroom 1.7 1.3

Electrical Equipment,

Arcing, Overloaded Cable Insulation Bedroom 1.2 1.3

Solid Fueled Equipment Structural

Component,

Finish

Living Room 1.1 . 6

NFIRS data from 8 states (Arkansas, Florida, Louisiana, Maryland, Tennessee,

Texas, Virginia, and West Virginia) and Washington, DC with 22,561 accidental

residential structural fires, and 162 civilian deaths in accidental residential

fires with form of heat of ignition, form of material ignited, and area of origin

reported [3].

'Source:
TABLE 6-13

Leading Accidental Ignition Scenarios in

Residential Structure Fires in the West, 1982

Form of Heat

of Ignition

Form of

Material

Ignited

Area of

Origin

% of

Incidents

% of

Civilian

Deaths

Properly Operating

Electrical Equipment Cooking Material Kitchen 8.6 1.2

Solid Fueled Equipment Trash, Waste Chimney 6.2 0

Solid Fueled Equipment Fuel Chimney 4.9 0

Gas Fueled Equipment Cooking Material Kitchen 4.1 .9

Smoking Materials Bedding Bedroom 2.8 14.2

Smoking Materials Upholstered

Furniture

Living Room 2.2 26.3

Electrical Equipment,

Arcing, Overloaded Cable Insulation Kitchen ' 1.7

© 0

Match/Lighter Bedding Bedroom - -1.1 2.6

Solid Fueled Equipment Structural Living Room 1.0 3.0

Component,

Finish

Source: NFIRS data from 10 states (Alaska, Arizona, California, Hawaii, Idaho, Montana,

Oregon, Utah, Washington, and Wyoming) with 45,472 accidental residential

structure fires and 242 civilian deaths in accidental residential fires with form

of heat of ignition, form of material ignited, and area of origin reported [3]-.
TABLE 6-14

Upholstered Furniture Fires in One- and Two-Family Dwellings

with Unknowns Distributed

Form of Heat Incidents Deaths Injuries Loss

Smoking Materials 60% 82% 66% 65%

Cigarettes (55) (70) (57) (60)

Open Flame 20 10 20 14

Matches and Lighters

1 Electrical Equipment

(14) (7) (16) (9)

Arcing 7 2 6 8

Hot Objects 7 . 4 6 6

Fuel-Fires Objects 5 2 3 5 Other Known 2 1 0 2

Equipment Involved

None 83% 94% 87% 83%

Heating Systems

Electrical Distribution

7 2 6

* 8

Equipment 6 1 5

* ' 7 Other Known 4 2 2 3

Area of Origin

Living Room 71% 90% 85% 83%

Bedroom 9 4 5 5 Structural Areas 6 1 2 3

Storage Areas 3 0 1 1 Other Known

i 10 5 7 8

Numbers in ( ) are percent of the total for a subclass . For example, cigarettes

contributed to 55 percent of the upholstered furniture fires . May not add to 100% due

! rounding errors.

Sources 1980, 1981, and 1982 NFIRS [11]
TABLE 6-15

Mattress and Pillow Fires in One- and Two-Family Dwellings

with Unknowns Distributed

Mattresses and Pillows

Form of Heat Incidents Deaths Injuries Loss

Smoking Materials , 43% 65% 53% 43%

Cigarettes (40) (61) (51) (38)

Open Flame 34 21 28 32

Matches and Lighters (30) (18) (24) (27)

Hot Object 10 7 7 9

Properly operating

electrical equipment (3) (2) (2) . (4)

Electrical Equipment

Arcing 8 4 7 9

Fuel-Fired Objects 3 4 3 4

Other Known 2 0 2 3

Equipment Involved

None 78% 89% 83% 78%

Electrical Distribution • . Equipment 8 3 5 7 Heating Systems ,5 7 7 - . 8

Stationary local unit (3) (3) (2) (3)

Portable local unit (1) (3) (4) (3)

Appliances 5 1 * 4 5

Other Known 3 0 1 1 Area of Origin

Bedroom 82% 80% 89% 79%

Living Room 5 15 5 7 Structural Areas 4 2 2 i| Storage Areas 4 0 1 4

Other Known 5 3 3 5

May not add to 100% due to rounding errors.

Source: 1980, 1981 and 1982 NFIRS [11]
TABLE 6-16

Bedding Fires in One- and Two-Family Dwellings

with Unknowns Distributed

Bedding

Form of Heat Incidents Deaths Injuries Loss . Open Flame , 33% 21% 33% 32%

Matches and Lighters (27) (16) (28) (25)

Candle (2) (1) (3) (3)

Smoking Materials 26 61 31 25

Cigarettes (24) (54) (29) (23)

Electrical Equipment

Arcing 19 3 16 20

Hot Object 18 12 14 19

Properly operating

electrical equipment (9) (8) (9) (10)

Electric lamp (4) (1) (2) (3)

Fuel-Fired Objects 3 1 3 2

Other Known 2 0 3 2

Equipment Involved

None 57% ; 84% 65% 60%

Appliances 21 2 15 ^ - 20

Electric Blanket (16) (2) (12) (18)

Electrical Distribution

Equipment 11 2 7 10

Heating Systems 9 9 11 9

Fixed local heating

unit (4) (2) (4) (4)

Portable local

heating unit (4) (8) (6) (4)

\ Other Known 2 2 2 1

jArea of Origin

Bedroom 85% 88% 90% 86%

Living Room 4 10 6 5

Storage Areas 3 0 1 3

Other Known 8 2 3 6

iay not add to

Source: 1980,

100% due to rounding errors.

1981 and 1982 NFIRS [11].
TABLE 6-17

Curtain and Drapery Fires in One- and Two-Family Dwellings

with Unknowns Distributed

Curtains and Drapes

Form of Heat Incidents Deaths Injuries Loss

Open Flame 39% 41% 50% 28%

Matches and Lighters (24) (5) (25) (17)

Candle (10) (23) (17) (8)

Electrical Equipment

Arcing 24 32 21 34

Hot Objects 17 9 15 15

Properly operating

electrical equipment (8) (9) (9) (8)-

Electric Lamp (3) (0) (3) (3)

Fuel-Fired Objects 9 9 9 13

Gas-fueled equipment (4) (9) (6) (5)

Smoking Materials 6 9 4 5

Cigarettes (4) (9) (2) (4)

Other Known 7 0 2 4

Equipment Involved

None 50% 50% 50%

'

' 39%

Electrical Distribution

Equipment 17 8 17 - 22

Cooking Equipment 13 14 14 7 Stove (7) (14) (10) (4)

Portable cooking unit (3) (0) (2) (1)

Heating Systems 9 14 7 16

Portable local unit (3) (8) (5) (4)

Stationary local unit (3) (8) (2) (5)

Appliances 8 14 9 12

Other Known 3 0 2 5 Area of Origin

Bedroom 33% 24% 30% 31%

Living Room 26 48 38 40

Kitchen 20 15 21 11

Bathroom 5 0 3 5

Dining Room 4 5 1 3

Structural Areas 3 0 2 3

Other Known 9 7 5 7

May not add to 100% due to rounding errors

Source: 1980, 1982 and 1982 NFIRS [11].
References

1. Gross, D, , The Use of Fire Statistics in Assessing the Fire Risk of

Products, Interflame 1985 Conference Workbook, March 26-28, 1985.

2. Karter, M.J.,Jr., Fire Loss in the United States During 1984,

Fire Journal . 79 . 14-25 (Sept. 1985).

3. U.S. Fire Administration, Fire In The United States (1982) . 5th

Edition, Executive Summary.

4. Karter, M.J.,Jr., Patterns of Fire Deaths Among the Elderly and

Children in the Home, Fire Journal . 80, 19-22 (March 1986)

5. Gomberg, A., and Clark, L.P., Rural and Non-Rural Civilian

Residential Fire Fatalities in Twelve States (NBSIR 82-2519)

[U.S.] Nat. Bur. Stand. (1982).

6. Hall, J.R.,Jr., and Helzer, S.G., Civilian Residential Fire Fatality

Rates: Six High-Rate States Vesus Six Low-Rate States (NBSIR 83-2754)

[U.S.] Nat. Bur. Stand. (1983).

7. Curtis, M.H. and LeBlanc , P.R. , Analysis of Multiple-Death Fires in

the United States During 1985, Fire Journal . 80 . 18-30 (July 1986).

8. Hall, J.R. ,Jr. A Decade of Detectors: Measuring the Effect, Fire Journal

79, p37

(Sept. 1985).

9. Unpublished National Fire Protection Association Analysis of 1982 NFIRS

Incidents, August 1984.

10. Clarke, F.B.,III and Ottoson, J., Fire Death Scenarios and Firesafety

Planning, Fire Journal . 70 . p20, (May 1976).

11. Fahy, R. and Hall, J.R., Jr., Memorandum from Fire Analysis Division,

NFPA to Staff Liason Ad Hoc Committee on Contents and Furnishings ASTM

Committee, Jan. 16, 1985.

- <*«

109
6 . 3 FIREDATA and the Data Base

6.3.1 Introduction

The material properties data base for the Hazard Assessment Method

(HAZARD I) was created using Dbaselll Plus. (Dbaselll Plus will hereafter be

referred to simply as Dbase.) To facilitate the use of the data base, a set

of procedures was written to enter, edit, and retrieve data for use as input

to HAZARD I. The procedures were written to give the casual Dbase user access

to the information contained within the data bases as well as update them

without understanding the data bases, their structure, or their relationship

to each other.

It will be assumed that the user has successfully installed Dbaselll

Plus on his PC (following the instructions which come with Dbase) . It will

also be assumed that the FIREDATA program and data base files are resident in

the HAZARDI directory and Dbase is in a different directory (the HAZARD I installation program will ask for the name of this directory.) This is the

way that the install program will place the files automatically.

6.3.2 Data Base Structure

The material properties data base is composed of five interlocked (not

indexed) data bases. This was done to reduce the search time for specific

pieces of information. The five data bases are:

• Material Directory (MATDIR. DBF)

;

• • Material Property (PHYSICAL. DBF)

;

• Cone Calorimeter (DECOMCC . DBF)

;

• Furniture Calorimeter (DECOMFC . DBF)

;

• Toxicity (TOXICITY . DBF)

.

The data bases have two fields in common; the material code (Mcode) and

the material identification or description (Mid). The data bases , however,

are not indexed. For special applications, this will allow one or several of

the data bases to be accessed by a user written retrieval program outside of

the Dbase environment.

The material directory (MATDIR. DBF) contains information about the

presence of data in the other four data bases for a given material code on- material description. For example, if toxicity data is necessary, the

procedures will first check the material directory data base to ascertain if

the material of interest has been entered into the data bases and, in

particular, if data exists in the toxicity data base. When data are entered

into the data bases , a record for each material code is added to the material

directory indicating the material code, material description and four

TRUE/FALSE fields showing where data has been placed in the other four data

bases

.

110
The material property data base (PHYSICAL. DBF) contains information on

the thermo -physical properties of a material. It is composed of a single

input form, figure 6-4, that provides conductivity, specific heat, and

emissivity values for a given material as a function of temperature. Up to

six temperatures can be entered or retrieved. These values relate to a specific form and density of material. For other densities or forms,

additional records must be entered. This data base contains records relating

to combustible and noncombustible materials which serve as interior finish

(walls, floor, ceiling) or as furnishings. For example, the thermo -physical

properties of firebrick as well as carpeting will be found in the data base.

Three data bases exist that contain fire response or fire property data.

Small-scale heat release and species yield data (grams of the species produced

by each gram of fuel lost) are contained in the cone calorimeter data base

(DECOMCC . DBF) , while medium- and large-scale heat release and species yield

data are contained in the furniture calorimeter data base (DECOMFC . DBF)

Toxic potency data can be found in the toxicity data base (TOXICITY. DBF)

The cone calorimeter data base (DECOMCC . DBF) consists of a two screen

forms, figures 6-5a and 6-5b. The first screen contains basic information

about the test sample and exposure conditions (i.e. initial and final sample

weight, orientation, ignition mode, incident energy, time to ignition). A

summary of the test results, where available, can also be found on this

screen. This is presented in the form of averagee and maximum values and the

time for the maximum value (from either ignition or start of exposure for nonflaming exposures) . The second screen contains time dependent data for heat

release rate, mass loss rate, CO yield and C02 yield. Two additional time

dependent fields are provided for user defined yields of3 other combustion

products (e. g. soot, HCN, etc.).

The furniture calorimeter data base (DECOMFC . DBF) is similar to the cone

calorimeter data base. It is also divided into two screens, figures 6 -6a and

6 -6b. The first presents test sample and exposure information as well as average and maximum values. The second screen represents time dependent

information for the same properties as described for the second screen of the

cone calorimeter data base. Data from furniture items tested in large scale

compartments are also included in this data base.

The toxicity data base (TOXICITY. DBF) is composed of two screens of LC 50

data. The first screen, figure 6 -7a, provides data from the cup furnace"

toxicity screening protocol (NBS), while the second, figure 6 -7b, provides

data on material tests performed according to the University of Pittsburgh

Protocol. For the NBS Toxicity Protocol, auto- ignition temperatures are listed. Provisions for several different LC 50 endpoint times are made. This

is intended to accommodate the input of pure gas data as well as possible

future alterations in the protocol. The University of Pittsburgh screen also

allows for variations in data reported by small alterations in the protocol.

Here provisions are made for different heating rates of the sample and

different endpoint times for the determination of LC 50 values (in grams).
Thermophysical Data

Material Code:

Material ID:

Form: Volume Density: . kg/m3

Areal Density: . kg/m2

Temperature Conductivity Specific Heat

(C) (kW/ (m*K) ) (kJ/ (kg • K)

)

Emissivity

FIG. 6-4 INPUT FORM FOR MATERIALS PROPERTIES DATA BASE
Decomposition4 Data from Cone Calorimeter

Material Code:

Material ID:

Form:

Density: kg/m3 Thickness: . m

Orientation(V/H)Ignition Mode(P/N): Incident Energy: kW/m2

Initial Mass: g Final Mass: g

Ignition Time: s

Heat of Combustion

CO Yield

C02 Yield

HC Yield

HC1 Yield

HCN Yield

H20 Yield

SOOT Yield

Extinction Area

Units Average

kJ/kg

kgAg

kg/kg

kg/kg

kg/kg

kg/kg

kg/kg

kg/kg

m2/kg

Time Dependent Data

Heat Mass CO C02

Time Release Loss Yield Yield Yield Yield

(s) (kW/m2) (kg/s ) (kg/kg) (kgAg) (kg/kg) (kg/kg)

FIG. 6-5 INPUT FORM FOR CONE CALORIMETER DATA BASE
Decomposition Data from Furniture Calorimeter

Material Code:

Material ID:

Config

Ignition Source:

Initial Mass: . kg

Ignition Time: . s

Heat of Combustion

Units

kJ/kg

CO Yield kg/kg

C02 Yield kg/kg

HC Yield kg/kg

HC1 Yield kg/kg

HCN Yield kg/kg

H20 Yield kg/kg

SOOT Yield kg/kg

Extinction Area m2/kg

Final Mass

:

Average

kg

Heat

Time Release

(s) (kW)

Time Dependent Data

Mass CO C02

Loss Yield Yield

(kg/s) (kg/kg) (kg/kg)

Yield

(kg/kg)

FIG. 6-6 INPUT FORM FOR FURNITURE CALORIMETER DATA BASE

Yield

(kg/kg)
Toxicity Data

National Bureau of Standards Protocol

Material Code:

Material ID:

Form:

Auto -Ignition Temperature: C

Material Concentration

Time Flaming Non- Flaming

(m) (mg/1) (mg/1)

University of Pittsburg Protocol

Material Loading

Heating Rate lOmin-post 14days-post

(C/min) (g) (g)

FIG. 6-7 INPUT FORM FOR TOXICITY DATA BASE
6.3.3 Program Structure

FIREDATA is a program that operates in the Dbase environment. It is

actually the main program of a series of programs that give the user the

capabilities to add, edit, and retrieve data from a collection of data bases

with only a casual familiarity with Dbase. Since Dbase is an interpretive

data base system, all of the programs can be viewed and altered by the user

using a text editor or the MODIFY command within Dbase. This allows a knowledgeable user to tailor the existing programs to a specific application.

There are two levels to FIREDATA. The first level is FIREDATA . PRG . At this

level the user is able to move to the second command level by selecting a specific operation (i.e., appending, editing, searching). The first command

level is composed, of the program FIREDATA. PRG and two menu programs - FPMENU.PRG AND SELECT. PRG.

The second command level is composed of a group of programs that; are

dedicated to perform a specific operation on a specific data base. There are

four programs for adding data, one for each data base, and four programs for

editing data, one for each data base. Associated with each data base, there

is a format file that contains the input form that is used to enter data into

each data base. These format files are shared by the ADD and EDIT options.

They have files names of TOXFORM . FMT , 'CONFORM. FMT , FURNFORM . FMT , and

PHYFORM . FMT

.

Data can be recalled in one of two ways. One approach is to search for

a specific data record. The other approach is to list blocks of data records.

The FIND and LIST options implement these two approaches. Both options share

the same print programs. These appear as TOXFMT.PRG, CONEFMT.PRG, PHYFMT.PRG,

or FURNFMT . PRG

.

Figure 6-8 is an overview of the FIREDATA program structure showing the

relationship between the various parts. As can be seen, it is not possible to

move between second level commands without first returning to the first level

commands. This is done to ensure that data bases are properly closed before

moving on to the next operation.

6.3.4 User Information

Dbase is started by typing DBASE at the DOS prompt. Dbase begins either

in the ASSIST mode or at the "DOT" command mode. If the program begins in the^

ASSIST mode, depress the "Esc" key. This will place the program in the "DOT"

command mode. In this mode, user written programs can be executed. Assuming

the programs and data bases have been copied to a subdirectory called

"XDBASEIII" on the "C:" drive (i.e., hard disk), the fire properties data base

program is initiated by typing DO FIREDATA .

If the programs and data bases are not stored in a subdirectory called

"XDBASEIII", one line of FIREDATA. PRG must be altered. Using the MODIFY

COMMAND processor within Dbaselll Plus, the user should change the "SET PATH

TO C:\DBASEIII" to reflect the correct location for the data bases and the

programs

.

116
A main menu screen is presented to the user that requests a character be

entered from the list of six possible choices.

A)dd E)dit D)elete

F)ind L)ist

Q)uit

Any other entry will be ignored. If the user depresses the Q key, the program

will close all files, reset screen parameters, and return to the "DOT" command

mode

6.3.4. 1 Adding Data

If the user selects A, a secondary menu is placed on the screen. This

menu requires that the user select the data base to which the data will be

appended. There are six selections at this point as well.

M)aterial property C)one calorimeter

T) oxicity F)urniture calorimeter

A) 11 E)xit

If the user selects E, the program returns to the previous menu. If the

user selects A, the program will sequentially request Information for each

data base beginning with material property (i.e„, thermo “physical properties),

cone calorimeter, furniture calorimeter, and, finally, toxicity. Any other

selection, moves the user directly to entering data for that-- particular data

base

The selection of a particular data base for data addition results in one

of four forms being presented to the user. These forms are: figure 6-4 for

material property data; figures 6 -5a and 6 -5b for cone calorimeter data;

figures 6 -6a and 6 -6b for furniture calorimeter data; and figures 6 -7a and 6-

7b for toxicity data. Each form is to be completed by the user in as complete

a fashion as possible. Errors on a given field can be corrected by

backspacing and typing over the incorrect information. If one has left the

field, the cursor control keys (i.e., arrow keys) can be used to return to a‘- previous field and type over the error. On a multi -screen form, either screen

can be reviewed by using the "Page Down" key to move forward or the "Page Up"

key to move backward. At the completion of each form, the user is required to

depress the "End" key while holding down the "Ctrl" key. This ensures that

the data are properly appended to the data base. The program prompts the user

to determine if another record will be appended to the same data base.

"Do you want to exit this operation? (Y/N)

If the user responds "Y" , then the program returns to the previous menu. If

the user responds "N" , then the program presents the user with a blank form.

117
This enables the user to append information to a given data base on several

materials without returning to the selection menu.

For the A) 11 option, the forms that are presented to the user are those

shown in: figure 6-4 for material property data; figures 6 -5a and 6 -5b for

cone calorimeter data; figures 6 -6a and 6 -6b for furniture calorimeter data;

and figures 6 -7a and 6 -7b for toxicity data. As each screen of a multi -screen

form is completed, the program automatically presents the user with the second

screen. Prior to completing the second screen the user may use the cursor

control keys (i.e., arrow keys) to move about each screen and move from screen

to screen with the "Page Up" and "Page Down" keys. The "Enter" key may be

used to leave every field except the last field on the entire form. (That is,

for multi-screen forms the last entry on the last screen.) It is preferable

to use the cursor keys to leave each field. In order to actually append the

data to the end of a data base, the user must depress the "End" key while

holding down the "Ctrl" key. Once data has been appended to a data base,

changes in a field must be accomplished by using the Edit option in the main

menu

.

6. 3. 4. 2 Editing Data

If the user selects E , a secondary menu is displayed on the screen.

-This secondary menu is identical to that used in adding data to a data base.

M)aterial property C)one calorimeter

T)oxicity F)urniture calorimeter

A) 11 E)xit

However, the All option is not functional under this selection choice. If the

us*er selects E , the program returns to the previous menu. Upon selecting a data base, the program requests that you

"Enter MATERIAL CODE o-f record to be edited: " .

« This is the Mcode previously discussed. For the selected data base, the

program searches for a match between the Mcode entered by the user and the

Mcodes stored in the data base. If a match is not found, the program informs

the user of that fact. The program responds in one of two ways. It eitheif

says

or "Not found in (name of} data base

"NO data in (name of} data base",

where (name of} is the name of one of the four data bases. The first response

indicates that the data base may have been corrupted. This problem may be

beyond the capabilities of the casual user to correct, because it indicates

that the data should be present in the data base but is not. (The only

protection from a corrupted data base is to keep regular back-up copies of the

files and go back to the last good copy if a corruption occurs.) The second

118
response simply means that the data has never been entered for this Mcode into

this particular data base.

If a match is found, the program presents the information in the

selected record using the original screen forms. Thus, for material property

data, figure 6-4 is used; for cone calorimeter data, figures 6 -5a and 6 -5b are

used; for furniture calorimeter data, figures 6 = 6a and 6 -6b are used; for

toxicity data, figures 6 -7a and 6 -7b are used. Corrections and additions on a given field can be accomplished by using the cursor control keys (i.e. arrow)

to position the cursor in the desired field and type over existing data or type in missing data. Corrections within a field are done by backspacing and

typing over the incorrect information. If one has left the field, the cursor

control keys can be- used to return to the offending field and type over the

error. On a multi- screen form, either screen can be reviewed by using the

"Page Down" key to move forward or the "Page Up" key to move backward. At the

completion of each form, the user is required to depress the "End" key while

holding down the "Ctrl" key. This ensures that the data are properly replaced

in the data base. The program prompts the user to determine if another record

with the same Mcode and data base will be edited. A response of "N" to the

question,

"Search for next record? (Y/N)

will return the program to the secondary menu, while a response of "Y" will

continue searching the data base for additional records with matching Mcodes

If any are found the appropriate screen forms are used and the user is

permitted to alter the data in these records as well.

6. 3. 4.Deleting Records

This option has not been implemented as of this date.

6. 3.4.4 Retrieving Data

Data can be retrieved from specific data bases in two ways. Specific

records can be found and displayed or groups of records can be automatically

found and displayed. In either case the data can be displayed on the screen

or printed on a printer. The output format is similar to the forms used for

entering data.

If the user selects F, the program clears the screen and presents a short description of the procedure used for finding and displaying a specific

record. Data are retrieved from the various data bases by an interactive

procedure that utilizes the user's requirements to define the specific record

of interest. Since the exact name of a material may not be known or may be

ambiguously entered into the data bases, the program requests that the user

enter a keyword(s) {At this point, the user can enter the word EXIT to return

to the main menu screen. } and select the data base to be searched. For

example, gvnsum . an acceptable keyword, can modify many words such as gypsum

wallboard or gypsum walls . Another example would be polyurethane which could

be entered as polyurethane foam seat cushions or polyurethane foam

insulation . This information is used to display MATERIAL CODE and MATERIAL

119
IDENTIFICATION fields containing the specified keyword(s) for the selected

data base. Then, the user is required to enter the MATERIAL CODE (letters

must be all caps.) so that a listing of records with the selected MATERIAL

CODE can be displayed. This latter display presents the information contained

in each record as it was entered into the data base. The user can print each

screen of information to a printer for later use.

If the user selects L, he will be presented with a short description of

the listing process. This option has been implemented to provide the user

with a rapid means for determining the contents of the various data bases

composing FIREDATA. [A word of warning. This procedure does not search each

data base but instead searches the master directory. The programs provided

automatically update the master directory when new entries are made to a file.

If other means are used to add data, this will not be the case.] The listing

procedure provides the user with the material code and material identification

fields in addition to showing which of the four data bases contain entries for

the listed materials. The listing can be performed based on record numbers or material codes. One leaves the listing program by selecting the E)xit option.

This returns the user to the main menu.

The listing by record number requires that the user provide the numbers

of the first record to be printed and of the last record to be printed. If

the user leaves out the number of the first record, the system assumes that

the first record in the data base is intended. Similarly, for the last record

to be printed, the system assumes that if one is not entered the listing

process continues to the end of the file. If a printer is connected to the

system, the listing process can be directed to the printer instead of the

screen.

Listing by material codes is primarily intended for the -development of

tables of materials. It functions in an analogous manner as the listing by

record numbers. The absence of an entry implies that the listing is to

proceed to the extremes of the data base.

6. 3. 4.

5

Utilities

• Utilities are a group of programs that work independent of FIREDATA.

These programs are also written in DBASE and manipulate the FIREDATA data

bases. Currently, there is only one utility program. This program is called

DUMP

.

Dump

This program prints data base records only on a printer, not on the

computer's display device. From the "DOT” command mode, the program is

initiated by typing DO DUMP . A selection menu is shown that allows you to

choose which data base will be printed. An additional option exists to print

all of the data bases . The program assumes that the printer is ready and on- line when the selection is made. No warning is given prior to printing. Make

sure sufficient paper is available to print the selected data base. When the

printing has been completed, an exit option exists to return you to the "DOT"

command mode. DUMP uses one of four subprocedures to format the output to

120
match the input forms used for each data base. Two screen input forms are printed on one page, with one record per page. The print forms are CONEFORM . PRG , PHYS FORM . PRG , FURNFORM . PRG , and TOXFORM . PRG

Exit

When this command is selected, the user is returned to the "DOT Level"

commands. To return to DOS, type "QUIT".

Figure 6-8

Overview of FXR£DATA

121
6.4 Determining the Rate of Heat Release

6.4.1 Introduction

The rate of heat release of the burning objects in a room is the primary

driving force which governs the intensity of the fire. Thus, its determination

is essential to any of the ensuing hazard computations. Until a few years ago,

it was not possible to determine adequately the full-scale heat release rates

of most articles. In a few cases, room fire tests had been performed and mass

loss rate data were . available [e.g., 1,2]. Since the actual heat of combustion

is generally not known, these mass loss measurements are not readily translated

into heat release rate values. When oxygen consumption calorimetry came into

use [3], however, it became possible to design a new generation of full-scale

calorimeters for measuring the heat release rate accurately. An apparatus,

termed the Furniture Calorimeter [4] was developed at NBS , and a device on

similar principles for industrial commodities was constructed at the Factory

Mutual Research Corporation [5] . Several other units have recently been

installed at laboratories in the U.S. and in Europe.

6.4.2 Data Obtained by Full-Scale Measurements

A compilation was recently made of data reported by various sources on

full-scale measurements of rate of heat release [6]. Published data can be

used by the designer if it can be determined that the articles being considered

for the potential fire are similar to the items on which data have been reported. The data tabulated in Ref. 6 include the following categories:

• pools, liquid or plastic

• cribs (regular arrays of sticks)

• wood pallets -- - • upholstered furniture

• mattresses

• pillows

• wardrobes

• television sets

• Christmas trees

• curtains

• electric cable trays

• trash bags and containers

• industrial rack- stored commodities

Some examples of full-scale data relevant to the residential fire problem

are tabulated in the database described in the previous section. An earlier

compilation by Gross [7] is also available. The tabulated test data can be

very useful as generic representatives of items constructed of these materials,

and with this general geometry. Where the analysis is intended to evaluate a specific product, that product should be tested in a suitable calorimeter and

the data then used in the analysis. If the generic items of concern are not

similar to the test articles in the furniture calorimeter data base, it will be

necessary to estimate the full-scale heat release rates from bench-scale test

data or from other measurements of material properties

.

122
6-.4.3 Methods for Estimating Full-Scale Rates of Heat Release

In a few cases, detailed studies are available giving an engineering

method for the estimation of full-scale rates of heat release from bench- scale

data. Such methods have been published for:

• upholstered furniture

• mattresses

• wall lining materials

• electric cable trays

The last category is probably not useful for residential application; a summary is given in '[6], and more details have been published by Lee [8]. Note

that the methods and procedures given below are examples and do not represent

the only methods- (nor necessarily the most accurate) available, but rather that

they are compatible with the input requirements of the HAZARD I software.

6. 4. 3.1 Estimating Method for Upholstered Furniture

The method for determining the full-scale heat release rates of

upholstered furniture is an example [9,10]. The method was based on

experimental studies in the Furniture Calorimeter of a large number of

commercial upholstered furniture items, and also of full-scale mockups . The

studies showed that most of the furniture had rate of heat release curves which

could be approximated as triangles (Figure 6-9). Two methods were then

developed for estimating this full-scale rate of heat release: (a) a method

based on actual bench-scale measurements on fabric/padding composites, tested

in the Cone Calorimeter, and (b) a more approximate method, based solely on the

identification of the specimen weight and composition. The Cone Calorimeter is

an apparatus for making a number of bench- scale measurements-- on a specimen,

including heat release rate (also based on oxygen consumption) , ignitability

smoke and soot production, and gas species production [11,12].

To determine the triangular shape of the heat release rate curve, it is

necessary to find the peak height, which is the maximum heat release rate, and

the triangle base width, which may be considered an effective burning time. In

principle, it would also be necessary to determine the offset time, from

ignition to start of triangle base. Unlike the triangular shape of the heat

release rate curve itself, however, this offset time is not a valid property of

the specimen, and is rather, primarily, a function of the ignition source arid

sequence. Thus, in the absence of detailed ignition source studies, it is

conservative to set the offset time to zero. The procedures, then are as follows

Peak heights based on bench- scale measurements . Whenever possible, benchscale measurements should be made on the specific fabric/padding used. The

estimate for the peak height qfs (kW) is:

q fs

0.63 ^bsl

mass

factor

frame . .style . factor J L factor J ( 1 )

123
2000

O

O

CM

O

O

O

o

o

00

o

O

CD

CO

UJ

H

O

O

IT~ CO

.12 o

5

CM

C o CO O o

ills i J 0)3

IZ Q-— O’ r“ flj _ ^ o O O O

o O O o

CD CM 00

O

(M>l) 3SV313U 1V3H 30 31VH

FIG.

6-9

APPROXIMATION

OF

THE

RATE

OF

HEAT

RELEASE

FOR

AN

UPHOLSTERED

CHAIR

BYA

TRIANGULAR

SHAPE
where

t^bs!

mass

factor ]

rate of heat release (kW/m2

) in the bench- scale test,

- combustible mass, in kg

frame . factor

1.66 for non- combustible

0.58 for melting plastic

‘ 0.30 for wood

0 . 18 for charring plastic

. , f 1.0 for plain, primarily rectilinear construction

[ fa^tor^ * I ^ ‘ ^ f°r ornate > convolute shapes

' J ” [ and intermediate values for intermediate shapes

The constant 0.63 has units m

2 /kg. The bench- scale data are obtained from the

Cone Calorimeter with radiant heating at 25 kW/m2 and a 180 s averaging period

(as this gave the best correlation to full-scale data) . Further details on

test conditions have been given in [10]

Peak heights based on generic materials identification . For rough estimation

based only on generic materials identification, the expression for the peak

height is:

qfs

9in . fabric, .padding,

factor * ^factor

mass

factor ] [ frame . factor

style . factor ( 2 )

where

fabric

factor

padding

factor

1.0

for thermoplastic fabrics (fabrics such as polyolefin,

which melt prior to burning)

< 0.4 for cellulosic fabrics (cotton, rayon, etc.)

_ 0.25 for PVC or polyurethane film type coverings

1.0

for polyurethane foam or latex foam

0.4 for cotton batting

1.0

for mixed materials (i.e., both polyurethane or latex

foam and cotton batting)

0.4 for neoprene foam

and the constant 210 has units kW/kg.

Triangle base width . The triangle base width (fire duration time)t

b , is

determined as follows:

CL mAh

3 c (s) (3)

125
where C - 1.3 for wood frames a — 1.8 for metal frames and plastic frames

m - combustible mass of item (kg)

Ahc — effective heat of combustion (kJ/kg)

and qfs is as given from Eq. 1 or Eq. 2 above.

If more specific measurements are not available, average effective heats of

combustion may be obtained from tables given in [10]

.

Limitations . Estimates for the peak heat release rate do not hold when both

the fabric and the padding are highly fire resistive (e.g., wool and neoprene

foam) . In these cases full involvement of the furniture item does not take

place. Estimates of the peak heat release rate using bench scale data should

not be made for measured heat release rates below 75 kW/m2. Estimates of peak

heat release rate based on generic materials identification should not be made

for those cases where the product of the [fabric factor] times the [padding

factor] is less than 0.225. In such low-burning cases, it can be assumed that

the burning rate hazard is much lower than in actively flaming fires, however,

a specific method for estimating this low rate is not available at present.

Table 12 in reference 10 compares estimates of the total heat released made by

the triangle method to the measured (full-scale) values for a series of

upholstered chairs. For 11 chairs with combustible frames the triangle method

averages 63% (range 46% to 83%) of the measured value for total heat content.

For 26 chairs with non -combustible frames the triangle method averages 91%

(range 46% to 103%) of the measured value.

Examples

Example 1 . A wood-framed chair is to be evaluated. Its padding is a polyurethane foam and the fabric is a polyolefin. A foam/fabric combination specimen

has been tested in the Cone Calorimeter, where it has been determined that

under the specified conditions of horizontal orientation, spark ignition, and

25 kW/m2 irradiance , the 180 s average rate of heat release was qb

' s - 200

kW/m2

. The chair mass is 20 kg, thus the mass factor = 20. Since the frame

was wood, the frame factor =» 0.30. The chair is of modern, rectilinear

construction, therefore, the style factor - 1.0. The estimate of the peak

full-scale heat release rate is then q fs - 0.63 (200) (20) (0 . 30) (1 . 0) - 756 kW.

The heat of combustion was measured to be 18.0 MJ/kg. Since Eq . 1 requires Atta- in units of kJ/kg, this is expressed as 18,000 kJ/kg. For a wood frame, C 3 is

1.3. A computation of t

b can then be obtained as tb = 1 . 3 (20) (18 , 000)/756 =* 619 s. Example 2 . A more fire resistive construction is considered, involving also a wood frame, but using neoprene foam and cotton upholstery fabric. The chair

mass is 28 kg. Bench- scale test data are not available, and so the method

based on generic materials identification is used. The fabric factor for

cotton is 0.4. The padding factor of neoprene foam is 0.4. Multiplied

together, this gives 0.16. The restriction above, however, tells us that if

this product is less than 0.225, then sustained flaming fire propagation will

126
probably not occur, and that the rate of heat release will be small. Thus,

further computation is not done

6. 4. 3.

Estimates for Mattresses

Some years ago several studies were done at NBS on institutional

mattresses and residential mattresses, all of "twin- size'" (approximately 0.9 m

by 2.0 m) and without combustible boxsprings . The data for the peak heat

release rate have recently been correlated [10] and are shown in Figure 6-10.

There are a number limitations to this correlation. No data on other mattress

sizes are available; it is not known why the correlation is a curve and not a straight line; the bench- scale measurements are from an older apparatus

(although it is expected that measurements in the Cone Calorimeter would not be

greatly different) ; .and, a complete representation of the rate of heat release

curve, as a function of time, is not available. Nonetheless, with these

limitations in mind, it is still possible to make useful engineering estimates.

As for upholstered furniture, bench- scale data can be obtained from the Cone

Calorimeter at a 25 kW/m2 irradiance, and averaged over a 180 s period. The

peak heat release rate can then be predicted directly, since, unlike for

upholstered furniture, no additional multiplying factors enter into the

correlation. As a first estimate, assuming a triangular shape for the heat

release rate is appropriate. The triangle base width (burning time) could then

be estimated by using equation 3 developed for upholstered furniture, and

setting C3 * 1.8, since a wood frame is not involved in mattress construction.

6. 4. 3.

Estimating Method for Wall Lining Materials

Combustible interior finish materials are substantially more difficult to

treat than free-standing combustibles. They cannot be measured in a device

such as the Furniture Calorimeter, and require any full-scale study to be a room fire. The materials cover a large area, but the area of active flame

involvement is generally not predictable, except after flashover, when in many

cases it can be assumed that all surfaces are involved. Recently, however, a series of wall materials was studied at NBS in full-scale room fires, and also

in bench-scale, with the Cone Calorimeter [13]. These show the first promising

correlation between bench scale and full scale for wall lining materials. For

several materials in this test series, which included both cellulosics and

plastics, it was found that the per-unit-area full scale heat release rates,

qfs , could, after flashover, be related directly to values obtained from the

Cone Calorimeter. The Cone Calorimeter data were the average values determined

from the ignition time to a time 60 s later. The results showed that when the

bench- scale data were taken under a 75 kW/m2 irradiance, the bench- scale values

q£ a were directly comparable to the full-scale values q fs . Prior to flashover,

the results were more uncertain, because of the difficulty of estimating the

area involved, however, full-scale to bench-scale correlation could again be

seen if the bench-scale data considered were ones obtained at a lower irradiance, taken as 25 kW/m2

.

127
FULL-SCALE

PEAK

HEAT

RELEASE

RATE

(kW)

FIG. 6—10 CORRELATION BETWEEN BENCH-SCALE RATE OF HEAT RELEASE MEASUREMENTS

FOR MATTRESSES AND PEAK FULL-SCALE RATES OF HEAT RELEASE
Thus, it can be recommended that the rate of heat release for walls be

approximated as

Sf* = <lb' S

• Af w

where q£ s is the bench-scale rate of heat release ( kW/m2

) , averaged over a 60 s time period, starting with ignition, and Af is the area of material burning

(which must be estimated by the user) . The pertinent test irradiance selected

to be representative of full-scale conditions is 25 kW/m2 prior to flashover,

and 75 kW/m2 after flashover. This simple prediction method assumes that the

full-scale heat release rate value is constant, not varying with time. The

heat release rate goes to zero when the fuel is exhausted, i.e., when

f qfs dt - Ahc

• M (5)

where M is the total specimen mass (kg) , and Ahc is the heat of combustion

(kJ/kg)

These findings are certainly exploratory and not conclusive, however, a preliminary method for determining the rates of heat release of wall materials

is seen. Magnusson and Sundstrom [14] have recently proposed a more detailed,

but still largely empirical, model for describing the initial rising portion of

the heat release rate curve; their method is pertinent primarily to cellulosic

type wall materials. Further general improvements await the ability of models

to track the area of flame involvement and of the heat fluxes being imposed on

wall surfaces by other objects and other wall elements.

6. 4. 3.Estimating Method for General Combustibles

o For most combustibles, neither estimating rules, such as^ developed above,

nor detailed full-scale test results [6] are available. Since this, is an area

which represents one of the most serious limitations to the current modeling

capabilities, it is hoped that significant progress will be made in future

years. For the present, however, building design or evaluation efforts will

require that some estimate be made, even if it is not highly refined.

In principle, the rate of heat release of full-scale combustibles can be

directly evaluated from bench- scale data. To make this possible, it is

necessary to know the rate of heat release per unit area, q£ s , as measured in

bench scale for various irradiances , and also as a function of time. If the

model can treat the full-scale surfaces as a number of elemental areas, each of'

which can be subjected to its specific heat flux and ignited at its appropriate

time, it can be possible to estimate the full-scale overall heat release rate,

qf S * as •

q£s (t) - S (6)

i

where the summation is to be taken over all the area elements Ai

. The timedependence inherent in the heat release computation complicates analysis

considerably, since the summation for each element has to be started from the

time of its own ignition, t ig i , and not from the start of the fire. Such

129
detailed capability may be available in the near future; for the moment,

however, empirical correlations, such as those indicated for upholstered

furniture above, take the place of that capability.

The reasonable success by Lee [13] in fitting * full-scale , per-unit-area

values, q fs , by bench-scale q£ s measurements suggest that for a rough analysis

the problems introduced by time -dependence can be sidestepped. Data are also

available from the studies of upholstered furniture burning on a per-unit-area

basis [15] . The rules given above treat the rate of heat production by

upholstered furniture on a per-unit-mass basis, since with practical residential furniture the determination of the actual surface area may be very

difficult if the shape is complex; however, the per-unit-area analysis, done

in the original study on simplified chair shapes, can help suggest an analysis

for general combustibles. A special complication with upholstered furniture is

the presence of a frame which, even if non- combustible , influences the burning

behavior of the assembly. For simplest analysis, however, the experimental

data [15] were seen to be correlated as

where Aa is the exposed surface area of the item; in the case of chairs this

was taken to exclude the reverse side of the back cushion and the underneath of

the seat cushion. Since these two ''shielded’' surfaces represent nearly as large an area as the exposed one, a general-purpose rule, applicable to all

not-otherwise-characterized combustibles could be:

The bench- scale test conditions for determining q^'

s should be the

following. An irradiance of 25 kW/m2 is appropriate prior to room flashover.

After flashover, 75 kW/m2 can represent the post-flashover regime. The

averaging period has also to be determined. The comparison for the wall data

was to a bench-scale averaging of 60 seconds (after ignition) . For upholstered

chairs, the data best correlated when a 180 s period was used. Until more

refined data are available, it should be adequate to select 120 s for other

categories of combustibles.

The time -dependence of the behavior of q fs also has to be specified. For

upholstered furniture it was shown above that a triangular relationship best

represents the data. For wall fires, a steady-state response was suitable. In

the absence of more detailed studies for a class of combustibles, it is

suggested that a steady-state response be used, with the end of rate of heat

release corresponding to the exhaustion of the fuel available.

(7)

( 8 ) where C4 - 1.-0 if all surfaces are exposed to fire — 0.5 if items are complex and only partly exposed to^ fire

and At — the total surface area of the specimen (m2

)

.

130
References

1. Babrauskas, V. , Combustion of Mattresses Exposed to Flaming Ignition

Sources, Part I. Full-Scale Tests and Hazard Analysis (NBSIR 77-1290)

[U.S.] Nat. Bur. Stand. (1977).

2. Quintiere, J.G., and McCaffrey, B.J., The Burning of Wood and Plastic

Cribs in an Enclosure, 2 vols. (NBSIR 80-2054) Nat. Bur. Stand. (1980).

3. Huggett, C. , Estimation of Rate of Heat Release by Means of Oxygen

Consumption Measurements. Fire and Materials . 4, 61-65 (1980).

4. Babrauskas, Vj , Lawson, J.R.

Walton, W.D., and Twilley, W.H., Upholstered Furniture Heat Release Rates Measured with a Furniture Calorimeter

(NBSIR 82-2604) . [U.S.] Nat. Bur. Stand. (1982).

5. Heskestad, G., A Fire Products Collector for Calorimetry into the MW

Range (FMRC J.I. 0C2E1.RA), Factory Mutual Research Corp., Norwood, MA

(1981).

6. Babrauskas, V., Free Burning Fires, to be published in Fire Safety J.

7. Gross, D. , Data Sources for Parameters Used in Predictive Modeling of

Fire Growth and Smoke Spread (NBSIR 85=3223). [U.S.] Nat. Bur. Stand.

(1985).

8. Lee, B.T., Heat Release Rate Characteristics of Some Combustible Fuel

Sources in Nuclear Power Plants (NBSIR 85-3195). [U.S.j’Nat. Bur. Stand?

(1985).

9. Babrauskas, V., and Walton, W.D., A Simplified Characterization for

Upholstered Furniture Heat Release Rates, to be published in J. of Fire

Sciences .

10. Babrauskas, V., and Krasny, J.F., Fire Behavior of Upholstered Furniture

(NBS Monograph 173). [U.S.] Nat. Bur. Stand. (1985).

11. Babrauskas, V., Development of the Cone Calorimeter- -A Bench Scale Heat

Release Rate Apparatus Based on Oxygen Consumption, Fire and Materials . 8, 81-95 (1984).

12. Proposed Test Method for Heat and Visible Smoke Release Rates for

Materials and Products using an Oxygen Consumption Calorimeter. American

Society for Testing and Materials (1986).

13. Lee, B.T., and Steel, J.S., Standard Room Fire Test Development at the

National Bureau of Standards {title will change!!!} (NBSIR 86- ).

[U.S.] Nat. Bur. Stand. (1986). NOT the ASTM STP

131
14. Magnusson, S.E., and Sundstrom, B. , Combustible Linings and Room Fire

Growth- -A First Analysis, pp . 45-69 in Fire Safety: Science and

Engineering (ASTM STP 882), T.Z. Harmathy, ed. American Society for

Testing and Materials, Philadelphia (1985).

15. Babrauskas , V. , and Krasny, J.F., Prediction of Upholstered Chair Heat

Release Rates from Bench- Scale Measurements, pp. 268-284 in Fire Safety

Science and Engineering (ASTM STP 882), T.Z. Harmathy, ed. , Amer. Soc.

for Testing and Materials (1985)

.

132
6.5 Ignition of the Second Item

The ignition of a second (or subsequent) item from a burnir

room can occur from direct flame contact or by sufficient r reaching its surface to heat that surface to its ignition tempers

former case, the objects need to be spaced close enough together i contact to occur (essentially touching). In the latter case,

comes from the flame above the burning object, the hot upper layei

and from the bounding surfaces of the room (ceiling and walls) . piloted and non=piloted ignition are available, always use the fc

more conservative

For the case -of direct flame contact, the ignition time < item can be assumed to be the time at which contact occurs . (Tb

is conservative since time is required to pyrolyze fuel and h«

produced to their ignition temperature.) For radiant ignit

assumption is that prior to flashover, the radiation from the up

the room surfaces are negligible. Thus, the radiant energy tr. surface of the second item all comes from the flame above the

Based on this crude assumption, Babrauskas [1] has developed a estimating the ignition of the second item.

In this procedure, the radiant flux necessary to ignite

assumed to be 10 kW/m2 for easily ignited items such as thin curt

newsprint, 20 kW/m2 for '’normal'* items such as upholstered fur

kW/m2 for difficult to ignite items such as wood of 1/2 inc

thickness. The mass loss rate of the burning item necessary to

ignition flux at various separation distances between the items if

figure 6-11. Thus, the time to ignition of the second item if which the mass loss rate of the burning object first reach

necessary to produce the required flux at the distance between the

To make a better estimate, using FAST and FASTPLOT, the

upper layer and room surfaces can be included. That is, an initic

with only the first item burning will give the time - dependent flu>

in the lower layer in the variable RAD. This variable can be

plotted with FASTPLOT (see the instructions on running these pros

this chapter) . When the predicted total flux (RAD plus the flux i estimated from Fig. 6-11) reaches the estimated ignition flux f

item, ignition can be assumed. The second item is then added tc

described in the next section of this chapter, and FAST is re-rui

fire

133
IGNITION

DISTANCE

(m)

FIG. 6-11 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN PEAK MASS LOSS RATE AND IGNITION DISTANCE

FOR VARIOUS IGNITABILITY LEVELS.

Source: NBSIR 81-2271
The method of estimating the flux from the flame presented in figure 6-11

is based on a correlation to experimental data for upholstered furniture.

Thus, the range of materials on which this correlation is based is limited to

those materials used in furniture. But the radiative output of a flame varies

with the chemical composition of the burning material, limiting the

applicability of this estimation technique. A more general (and more complex)

method for estimating ignition time of a second item can be derived using data

from the Lateral Ignition and Flamespread Test (LIFT) apparatus under

development at CFR [2]. For materials tested in this apparatus, the parameters - q"o £

, tm , and b are tabulated for use in the following relation:

q" - b Ji, t < t

m

v; 1, t > t

m

( 1 )

( 2 )

where: q" . is the minimum flux required for ignition

q'*°’i§ the incident flux imposed on the sample

b is a constant derived from the test data appropriate to natural

convection conditions

t is the time of ignition

t is a characteristic time for the sample to reach thermal equilibrium

The total flux to the surface of an object (q" e

) is the sum of the flux

from the flame of the burning object (q" r ^) and the flux from the upper layer

and room surfaces (q"^ w

) . As in the previous method, the flux- from the upper

layer and room surface’s (q"^ w

) is obtained from a run of FAST with only the

first item burning, from the Variable RAD (note that RAD is in kW/m2 and so the

value must be divided by 10 to convert to W/cm2

)

Next, the flux from the flame above the burning item to the target item

is computed. From Drysdale [3], the following equations for incident heat flux

from a flame to a target (q"

r

£) > flame power output (E)

and flame length (2)

are obtained: ’

q

s, r>f - (W/cm2

) (3)

E - 1/2 (O Q/iD (W/cm2

)

2 - 0.23 Q

2/5

- 1.02 D (cm) (5)

where: Q is the rate of heat release of the burning item (W)

D is the flame diameter (cm)

is the configuration factor between the flame and target

| is the radiative fraction (assume . 3 if a value is not available for

the fuel involved)

135
Combining equations (3) and (4) , and substituting the configuration

factor for a general case of a flame radiating to the horizontal surface of a target object located at the same elevation and d (cm) from the flame axis of

the burning item, we obtain:

^ " r , f - 0.3 Q id/47r(d2 + i

2 /4) 2 (6)

Rearranging equation (1) (for t < tn ) , we obtain an expression for the ignition

time of the target item:

t - (q"

o i yb (RAD/10 + q" r f

))

2 (7)

And from equation (2), the target object will not ignite when:

q" 0>i < (RAD/10) +q" r>f • (8)

Note that tm as tabulated from the LIFT apparatus data is the time to reach

thermal equilibrium for the sample (thickness) tested. This time will increase

with thickness, so equation (7) should be used for thick objects. • Also, both

RAD and q"^ ^ vary over time. As a rough estimate, equations (1) and (2) can

be evaluated at each interval of fire growth specified until ignition of the

second item occurs. More correctly, the second item's ignition temperature and

thermal properties, also available from ref. [2], should be used to compute the

time of ignition for time-varying heating. At that point, the procedure

described in the next section is used to obtain the combined rates of energy

and mass release.

One of these methods is used to estimate the ignition of additional

objects in the room up to the point of flashover. Once flashover occurs, all

combustible items in the room can be considered to pyrolyze or ignite

simultaneously.

References

1. Babrauskas , V. , Will The Second Item Ignite?, Fire Safety Journal . 4,

281-292, 1981/1982.

2. Quintiere, J.G. and Harkleroad, M.T., New Concepts for Measuring Flame

Spread Properties, Special Technical Testing Publication 882, ASTM„

Philadelphia, PA, 239-267, 1985.

3. Drysdale, D. , An Introduction to Fire Dynamics, John Wiley & Sons

Publishers, First Edition, 67, 143-145, 1985.

136
6.6 Program MLTFUEL

6.6.1 Purpose

The fire model FAST requires that the fire be input as a single heat of

combustion, and a time series of mass loss rates and yields of species of

interest. When there are multiple items burning simultaneously, this input

requires that a composite of all of the items be used, where each separate

burning item will generally have a different set of values for each of these

parameters . The purpose of the program MLTFUEL is to convert these values for

each burning item into the required composite fire.

• 6.6.2 Theory

The calculations performed by the program are based on conservation of

energy and mass. That is the energy, or the mass of any specie, released by

the composite fire at any time, equals the sum of the energies, or the speciesmasses, released by each item at that time. Specifically, the values for the

composite fire are obtained as follows:

1. The heat of combustion of the composite fire is the

arithmetic average of the heats of combustion of the

individual items

© 2. Energy is a conserved quantity. Since the energy released is

the heat of combustion times the mass loss rate, the mass

loss rate of the composite fire at any time becomes the sum

of the mass ' loss rates of each item, each multiplied by the

ratio of its own heat of combustion to the average value.

3. Mass is also a conserved quantity. The mass of any species

produced at any time is the mass lost by the fuel at that

time times the yield of that species at that time. Thus, the

effective yield of a given species for the composite fire at

any time is obtained by multiplying the mass loss rate of

each item at any time by its yield at that time (which gives

the mass of the specie), summing these masses over all items,

and dividing by the mass loss rate of the composite fire for

that time.

137
Yield of species i ( fL

) is defined as the mass of species i produced per

generation of gaseous fuel. By conservation of species i produced in the fire:

dm.

+ 2 Y. .m. = f.m- . dt j i,j j 1 fuel generated

net , out

Rate of mass Net rate of Rate of

of species i

changing in

a volume

+ flow of species i

out of the volume

species i

produced in

a fire

where: is the mass of species i in the layer volume,

ihj is the net mass flow rate of gas through

surface j (+out, -in).

Yi j is the mass fraction of species i in the stream flowing in or out of -surface j

. For oxygen, which is consumed in the fire, fi is negative.

A knowledge of the allows one to compute the concentrations in a fire

Yi mass fraction or Xi mole fractions. It is likely that fi will be constant

for a given fuel if sufficient air is available for combustion, but will change

as the air is limited. If rox is the stoichiometric mass oxygen to fuel ratio

for complete combustion of a hydrocarbon fuel to H2 0 and C02

, then we expect fi for each species (production reactant) to depend on the equivalence ratio <j> where

^fuel generated^ox supplied

(1/r ) ox

or for a given fuel fi depends on 0. fco is expected to increase sharply as <p approaches unity.

The data presented in the cone and furniture calorimeters generally have

<j> < 1, although a precise determination is impossible without knowing rox for

the furniture array. For further information on yields as a function of

equivalence ratio, see papers by Tewarson [1,2] and Beyler [3].

6.6.3 Running the Program

The program MLTFUEL is written in FORTRAN 77 and will run on any MS-DOS

machine. Since it is interactive, no operating instructions are necessary.

While the units of the results will be the same as the units input (everything

is multiplied by dimensionless parameters) , the program asks for the inputs in

the SI units in which FAST works. It is suggested that these units be used to

avoid confusion later.

138
The first two questions asked by the program are the number of items

burning together and the number of time intervals over which the items burn.

The number of intervals is one less than the number of times for which data

will be entered.

The first time through, the program computes the heat of combustion, mass

loss rates, and the yields of one specie. If species yield is not desired, any

value (including zero) may be entered at the species prompt. If the yields of

more than one species are desired, the first is computed on the first time

through and, after the initial results are presented, the user will be asked if

another species is desired. The program will ask for only the yields of the

next species (it saves the other data) and again presents the results with the

values for the new specie. This may be repeated as many times as necessary.

6.6.4 Limitations

The program assumes that the burning characteristics of multiple items

burning together are the same as those measured for each item burning

individually - that is, that there are no interactions. This is obviously not

the case. Each item will be affected by the. radiation and convection from the

others, increasing the burning (mass loss) rates; thus making this assumption

non- conservative . These interactions are, however, beyond the scope of the

present model, but will be included in future versions. For the present, the

user should keep this limitation in mind and may choose to make an arbitrary

adjustment in mass loss rates as a safety factor.

6.6.5 Example of Constructing a Time Line

for Multiple Burning Items

6. 6. 5.1 Scenario of the Fire

For this example, we will consider that the first item ignited is a wastebasket,- ignited by a match. The wastebasket is directly adjacent to an upholstered chair, which ignites by direct flame contact. A loveseat is

located 0.5 meters (1.6 feet) from the chair, and ignites from the radiant

energy released by the burning chair.

6. 6. 5.Search the Data Base

In looking through the data base, we find furniture calorimeter data on a wastebasket (material code WPB001) and a chair (material code UPC001) which

match the items which we have in mind. There is, however, no appropriate

loveseat. Thus, for this item we go to the cone calorimeter data and select a polyolefin covered, polyurethane foam. This is the same data used in example 1

of the section "Determining The Rate Of Heat Release", except the total

combustible mass is 40 kg.

139
6. 6. 5.

3

Construct the Mass Loss Curves

The mass loss data for the first item (wastebasket) are transferred from

the data base listing to a graph (figure 6-12a). Since the chair will not

ignite instantly, we arbitrarily decide that ignition will occur at a heat

release rate of about half the wastebasket peak value (8 kW, 0.5 g/s). The

mass loss data for the chair are then transferred from the data base listing to a graph, with the ignition time shifted to 300 seconds (the time that the

wastebasket reaches 8 kW * see figure 6-12b).

Using the procedure discussed in example 1 of the section on "Determining

The Rate Of Heat Release" but substituting 40 kg for the mass, we determine

that the triangular 'approximation for the loveseat has a peak heat release rate

of 1512 kW (with a resulting peak mass loss rate of 0.084 kg/s), and a base

width of 619 seconds. Using the procedure discussed in "Will The Second Item

Ignite?" and assuming a "normal" ignition flux of 20 kW/m2

, we find that the

loveseat will ignite when the mass loss rate of the chair is 20 g/s (0.02

kg/s). This occurs at 450 seconds (from figure 6-12b). The triangular curve

for the loveseat is then drawn starting at 450 sec, as shown in figure 6 -12c.

6. 6. 5.

4

Establishing the Intervals

With these three curves drawn, time intervals are drawn such that the

defined data points on any single curve are at an interval boundary, as shown

in the figure. ^ These data are then tabulated as in table 6-18a-c. In some

instances, interpolation of a curve will be needed. The data in table 6-18 are used with the program MLTFUEL to obtain the composite, heat of combustion and

mass loss rate to use in the FAST model (see table 6-18d)

.

i References

1 . Tewarson, A. , Quantification of Fire Properties of Fuels and Interaction

with Fire Environments, NBSGCR 82-395, Nat. Bur. Stand. (1982).

2. Tewarson, A. and Steciak, J., Fire Ventilation, NBSGCR- 83 -423

,

Nat. Bur.

Stand. (1983).

3. Beyler, C.L., Major Species Production by Solid Fuels in a Two Layer

Compartment Fire Environment, pp 431-440, in Proc . of the First Inti

.

Svmp . on Fire Safety Science . P.J. Pagni and C.E. Grant, eds .

,

Hemisphere

Publishing Corp., New York (1986).

140
Table 6-18

A. DATA ON WASTEBASKET (WPB001)

Time M Lfco -*-0 f

0 2 f*"0 D 0 0.0 0.01 0.05 0.01

240 0.0001 0.01 0.05 0.01

350 0.00085 0.01 0.05 0.01

450 0.00075 0.01 0.05 0.01

500 0.00072 0.01 0.05 0.01

560 0.00068 0.01 0.05 0.01

625 0.00055 0.01 0.05 0.01

750 0.00014 0.01 0.05 0.01

1020 0.00011 0.01 0.05 0.01

1025 0.0 0.01 0.05 0.01

1200 0.0 0.01 0.05 0.01

B. DATA ON CHAIR F21 (UPC001)

0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

240 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

350 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

450 0.005 0.03 0.67 0.008

500 0.025 0.024 0.76 0.015

560 0.116 0.016 1.07 0.02

625 0.033 0.016 0.71 0.022

750 0.008 0.016 0.59 0.001

1020 0.0055 0.016 0.54 0.0

1069 . 0.005 0.016 0.75 0.0

1200 0.0 0.0 0.0 . .

• 0.0

C. DATA FOR APPROXIMATED LOVES EAT

0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

240 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

350 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

450 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

500 0.002 0.01 1.0 0.008

560 0.0275 0.03 1.3 0.02

625 0.045 0.03 2.0 0.02

750 0.08 0.03 2.0 0.02

1020 0.015 0.02 1.5 0.02

1069 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

1200 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

D. RESULTS FROM MLTFUEL

Average Heat of Combustion = 17,933

0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

240 0.000098 0.0102 0.0510 0.0102

350 0.00083 0.0102 0.0510 0.0102

450 0.0058 0.0272 0.5858 0.00082

500 0.0280 0.0224 0.7524 0.0140

560 0.1456 0.0185 1.0990 0.0197

625 0.0792 0.0238 1.4310 0.0206

750 0.0887 0.0284 1.8520 0.0181

1020 0.0208 0.0190 1.2250 0.0145

1069 0.0051 0.0159 0.7431 0.0

1200 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

141
n

(kg/s)

m

(kg/s)

m

(kg/s)

FIG. 6-12 CONSTRUCTING THE TIME LINE FOR MULTIPLE FUELS BURNING

Q

!

{kW)

Q

(kW)


6.7 Instructions for FINPUT

6.7.1 Introduction

FINPUT is an interactive utility program which is used to create or edit

an input file to be executed by the FAST model(see the FAST User's Guide in the

appendix). As such, it makes no predictions and contains no assumptions. The

only calculations done in FINPUT are units conversions and error checking. The

data requested by FINPUT are divided into 8 sections. These are:

1. Title and Timestep

2. Ambient Conditions

3 . Floor Plan Data

4. Connections

5. Thermophysical Properties of the Enclosing Surfaces

6. Fire Specification

7. Species Production

8 . Output Files

Each of these sections starts with a major prompt located at the left margin.

In addition, there are several miscellaneous commands which provide functions

such as SAVE, CHANGE, SET UNITS, END, COPY, and HELP.

When the program is started, the user is prompted for the name of an

existing FAST input file with the prompt DEFAULT FILE>. If a new file is to be

created, press <RETURN>; otherwise, enter the name of the file to be changed.

If the user has entered the name of an existing file to be edited, the data in

the named file will exist as default values and will be printed to the screen

as each section is reached. If the user has indicated that this is a new file

no values will appear.

When an existing file is being changed the user will have three options

as follows

a. Leave the data unchanged exactly as shown on the screen. To

do this enter the word "NO" or press <RETURN>.

b. Change the entire entry; to do this the user must enter every

data value required in the section being revised for his

problem.

Example - 1 2. 3. 2. 0,

c. Review and enter each data item one by one, to do this the

user enters "Y" or "YES." The program will then call up each

element of the section, individually presenting the user with

the value in the existing file. If this value is

satisfactory then press <RETURN>. If this is not correct

enter the correct value.

If the user has previously indicated that this is a new file, the

procedure will be the same as the second and third options for revising the

143
existing file except that no data will be shown and the user must either enter

all of the data as a single entry or enter "YES" and provide an entry for every

prompt that follows

.

6.7.2

Title and Timestep

In this section, the program asks for a version number and title for

identification of the run, and for the times associated with the simulation;

total time and the frequency at which predicted data is recorded.

6. 7. 2.1 Version

Enter a three digit number giving the version of FAST to be run. The

version currently available for micro computers is version 17. If this is the

version to be used enter 017, or press <RETURN>.

6. 7. 2.

2

Title

Although this is an optional heading, use of a title is strongly

encouraged. The title may be up to 50 characters. A suggested title might be

a short identification of the building or portion of building involved, the

initials of the person executing the run, or the date and the run number if

multiple runs are being made. Example: CITY POWER PLANT JKJ 030186 RUN05

.

6. 7. 2.

3

Simulation Time Period

Enter the length of time in seconds over which the simulation takes

place. Simulation time is the only method of controlling the length of time of

the simulation. The maximum time value currently allowed is 86400 seconds (1

day) .

6. 7. 2.

4

Print Interval

Enter the time interval between each printing of the output value

summary. Approximately one page of computer printout is generated for each

such interval. The user should specify intervals that are close enough

together to give the needed resolution. A very short interval will produce

massive amounts of output, causing some difficulties in interpretation. If

graphics capabilities are available, specify relatively long intervals and use

graphic presentations to obtain the data or interpolate between the values

shown in the printout. Ten print summaries per simulation (or a print interval

of one tenth of the total simulation time) is usually sufficient when a dump

file is being used.

144
6 . 7 . 2 . 5 Dump Interval

This is the time interval between the points to be written to a special

file (DUMP file) used for graphics and tabular listings from FASTPLOT. If the

user does not have plotting capability ENTER 0. Where plotting is available, a value of (Simulation Time/25) will give 25 data points for the graph, enough

for good resolution (more than 25 dump intervals will result in a warning

message when the program starts). CAUTION: The dump file requires 20.5 k of

disk space per dump interval, and the number of such intervals is (SIMULATION

TIME/DUMP INTERVAL +1) . The user must make sure that enough free space is

available on the disk before the run is started. Otherwise, when the available

space is full, the run will stop, and the data produced may not be usable.

6.7.3 Ambient Conditions

In this section, the initial conditions within the building are specified.

6. 7. 3.1 Ambient Temperature

Initial interior building temperature is in degrees. Default units are degrees Kelvin (degrees Celsius plus 273). To use other units see "SET UNITS."

6. 7. 3.

Ambient Pressure

Initial interior building (absolute) pressure at the reference height in

the building used to specify the floor height for the rooms. The default units

are pascals. To use other units see "SET UNITS".

6. 7. 3.

Station Elevation

The vertical elevation above mean sea level (which allows the program to

account for the variation in density of ambient air with altitude) of the

reference height is entered in the default units (meters)To use other units

see "SET UNITS".

6.7.4 Floor Plan Data

In this section a number is assigned to each room and the width, height,

and depth of each room and the height of the floor of each room above a reference point is entered. Each room is entered separately, but compartment

dimensions can be duplicated using "COPY."

145
6. 7.

4.1

Number of Rooms

Enter the number of rooms (compartments) inside the structure to be

analyzed. A room is a compartment bounded by walls or partitions, a floor, and

a ceiling. The PC version of FAST V17 can accommodate up to 5 rooms. However,

the execution time for the program increases approximately by the square of the

number of rooms being evaluated. That is, the run time for a 5 room facility

will be of the order of 25 times as long as that for a one room analysis. In

addition to the number of rooms entered, the program automatically adds one

more room for the outside atmosphere (if the number of rooms is entered as 3 the room number assigned to the exterior is 4) . Normally this is the exterior

of the building.

Any stairwells or other shafts that are to be part of the analysis are also entered as rooms. For stairwells, the area (but not the height) can be

reduced to partially account for the stairs. The complex actual flow

phenonema, however, are beyond the capabilities of this version of the model.

6. 7. 4.

2

Room Number

The room number may be any whole number. Rooms are numbered 1, 2, 3,

etc. It is important however that each room number be unique. No letters can

be used in room number identification.

6 . 7 . 4 .

3

Width

Enter the room width in feet or meters as selected earlier. The

dimension may be either the longer or shorter dimension of the room so long as the other dimension is entered as depth. If the room is not a single

rectangle, the entry for width and depth should be revised from their actual

length to values that produce the correct floor area of the room involved, (see

Depth)

6. 7. 4.

4

Room Depth

Enter the room depth in feet or meters as selected earlier. The

dimension may be either the longer or shorter dimension of the room so long as the other dimension is entered as width. If the room is not a single rectangle

the entry for depth and width should be revised from their actual length to

values that produce the correct floor area of the room involved. (See Width)

6. 7.4.

5

Room Height

Enter the room height in feet or meters as selected earlier. The

dimension entered is the distance from the top surface of the room floor to the

underside of the ceiling above. If the ceiling is sloped or otherwise a varying level, use the average distance from the floor to the ceiling.

146
6. 7. 4. 6 Floor Height

Enter the elevation of the top surface of the floor. The value entered

is the distance that the floor surface is above the reference point. If the

reference point is at the same elevation as the floor surface, enter zero (0).

6.7.5 Connections

Connections refer to horizontal openings connecting any two compartments

(including openings to the outside of the building) through which energy and

mass flow. The model cannot handle openings in the floor or ceiling.

Connections are specified by entering the room numbers of the two compartments

between which the opening exists (both rooms must be defined first) followed by

the dimensions of the opening. These dimensions are the opening width, height

of the top of the opening above the floor, and height of the bottom of the

opening above the floor. The default units are meters for each of these

dimensions. To use other units see "SET UNITS".

6 . 7 . 5 .

Compartment Numbers

The program will prompt the user for the numbers of the two, connected

compartments. If the opening is to the outside of the building, the room

number assigned to the outside is one more than the total number of

compartments

6. 7. 5.

Vent Width and Height

The vent width and height are entered in the current units of length

(default is meters). If the vent height entered is greater than the ceiling

height, or the vent width is greater than the largest dimension of either of

the joined compartments, an error message is printed to the screen, and the

input is not accepted.

6. 7. 5.Sill Height

This refers to the bottom of an opening relative to the floor of the

compartment. Normally the sill of a door is at floor level and a sill of a window or other opening is above floor level.

6.7.6 Thermophysical Properties of Enclosing Surfaces

This section enters the thermophysical properties of the ceilings, walls

and floors in each room. The program assumes that all of the walls in any room

are of the same material or at least are of materials that have identical

thermophysical properties and thickness. The properties of both the ceiling

and floor in any room can differ from the walls . Each room can have different

wall, ceiling, and floor properties. The properties required and entered in

this section are conductivity, specific heat, density, thickness, and

emissivity

147
The model can also account for ceilings, walls or floors, that are composed of up to three layers of different materials. Unfortunately, it was

not possible to include entry of multiple layers in FINPUT. Thus, the

procedure for entering multiple layers is to enter the data for one layer with

FINPUT and edit the resulting data file (with an editor or word processor) as described in the FAST User's Guide (see Appendix).

The data for each room and each boundary are entered separately. These

values can be duplicated from room to room (see "COPY"). CAUTION: Be very

careful of units. The required units for an input value may not be the most

common units nor the units provided in the data base. For example, the common

unit for energy in thermophysical data is kilojoules where the program requires

joules unless the user changes the unit in SET UNITS.

6 . 7 . 6 .

1

Room Number

Enter one of the room numbers assigned in the previous section. This may

be any of the room numbers previously assigned.

6. 7. 6.

2

Ceiling Conductivity

Enter the conductivity of the ceiling in (kW/m/K) if metric or (btu/hour/ft/R) if engineering dimensions have been previously selected.

6. 7. 6.

3

Ceiling Specific Heat

Enter the specific heat of the ceiling material. Enter in (J/kg/K) if

metric or (btu/lb/R) if engineering dimensions have been previously selected.

6. 7. 6.

4

Ceiling Density

Enter the density of the ceiling material. Default units are (kg/m3 ).

To use other units see "SET UNITS".

6. 7. 6.

5

Ceiling Thickness

Enter the thickness of the ceiling material. Default units are meters.

To use other units see "SET UNITS".

6. 7. 6.

6

Ceiling Emissivity

Enter the emissivity of the ceiling. (Normally about 0.9 - non- dimensional) .

6. 7. 6.

7

Walls

See instructions for Ceiling.

6 . 7 . 6 .

8

Floor

See instructions for Ceiling.

148
6.7.7 Fire Specification

This section describes the characteristics of the fire that will occur. The details entered by the user will drive the computations of fire effects

through the entire simulation. This section identifies which room will be the

room of fire origin, the position of the fire in that room, and combustion

chemistry properties. Description of the fuel mass loss rate, the height of

the burning fuel above the floor and the energy released per unit mass is

required.

6. 7.

7.1

Room of Fire Origin

Enter the number of the room containing the fire. The user may select

any one of the rooms that has previously been defined.

6. 7. 7.Fire Position

Enter [1] if the fire is in the center of the room or any other position

not in close proximity to one of the walls or in a corner. Enter [2] if the

fire is to be located very close to a room corner. Enter [3] if the fire is

located very close to a wall, but is not in a corner.

Fire position is used to account for the amount of air that is entrained

in the fire plume as it rises from the burning fuel. The entrainment will be

restricted if the fire is very close to the wall or corner.

6. 7. 7.Heat of Combustion

Enter the effective net heat of combustion of the fuel. The net heat of

combustion is the amount of energy released to the surrounding environment by

the combustion of a specific amount of a fuel. Each fuel has a different net

heat of combustion. The heat of combustion is entered as energy released/unit

mass, such as J/kg or BTU/pound. BE CAREFUL OF THE UNITS!

6. 7. 7.

Number of Intervals of Fire Growth

Enter a number from one to twenty- one. The number entered indicates the

number of time intervals that the user desires (or finds necessary) to describe

the mass loss rate, fuel height, and species production as they vary through

the course of the fire. The mass loss rate, fuel height, and each species to

be tracked will be entered as a series of points with respect to time. When

evaluating a fire FAST performs a linear interpolation between these points to

determine the actual value at any time. It is important that a sufficient

number of intervals be selected to provide a reasonable approximation using

straight line segments for the mass loss rate, changes in fuel height, and rate

of species production that will be evolved by the fire. The time intervals are

the time gaps between these points. They do not have to be of equal length.

If the source data being used would not plot as a series of straight lines the

user should make the best reasonable approximation of the curve as a series of

straight lines . The number of straight lines equals the number of intervals to

be entered for this prompt. (See figure 2 in the FAST User's Guide in the

Appendix .

)

149
6 . 7 . 7 .

5

Interval

Time interval is the length of each of the intervals specified in the

previous prompt. The total duration of the fire is the sum of all of the time

intervals. The length of time of any interval is independent of the time

during the fire when that interval will occur. For example if the first time

interval after ignition lasts 60 seconds, time for that interval is 60 seconds.

If the second time interval runs from 60 seconds into the fire to 100 seconds

the length of the time interval is 40 seconds. If the next segment runs from

100 seconds into the fire to 300 seconds into the fire the length of that time

interval is 200 seconds.

Enter in sequence starting with the first interval called for in the

previous prompt in seconds. Separate each entry by a space. An example for a three interval fire is: 60 40 200. It may be easier to enter a single number

(which will set each time interval to that value) and then change the values to

those desired using the CHANGE command.

6. 7. 7.

6

Mass Loss Rate

Mass loss rate is the rate at which fuel is pyrolyzed at times

corresponding to the start of the fire and the end of each of the time

intervals. The burning rate values are entered in kg/s if default units are used. To use other units see "SET UNITS". Enter the rate of burning at the

start of the fire. If the simulation starts from the moment of ignition enter

zero. Leave a space and then enter the rate of fuel burning at the end of each

of the (N) time intervals entered in the description of the fire. The total

number of entries will be (N + 1) . An example for a four interval fire is: 0

.02 .1 .01 0. A convenient way to do this is to enter a single number which

the program will extend to all points and then to modify these values using the

"CHANGE" section.

6. 7. 7.

7

Fuel Height

Enter the height of the base of the flames above the floor at the start

of the fire and at the end of each time increment. Separate each entry by a space. A total of (N + 1) entries must be made. Enter the height in meters if

metric or feet if engineering dimensions have been previously selected. If the

entire course of the fire takes place without reducing the height of the

burning material the fuel height will be the same throughout the course of the

fire. Conversely if the fuel burns away from the surface or climbs to a higher position, the fuel height may change during the course of the fire. A

convenient method is to enter a single value which will be extended to all

points and then modify these values with the "CHANGE" section.

6.7.8 Species Production

Species production is optional. Any or all of the species can be omitted

in which case no calculation of those species concentrations will be made. If

a calculation of species concentration is desired FAST will evaluate and

separately track the average concentration in the smoke layer of any of the

following ten species: Nitrogen (N2)

;

Oxygen (02 ); Carbon Dioxide (C02 ); Carbon

150
Monoxide (CO) ; Hydrogen Cyanide (HCN) ; Hydrogen Chloride (HCL) ; Unburned

Hydrocarbons (TUHC) ; Water (H2 0) ; Smoke Density (OD) ; and Concentration-Time

Product (CT) . (The names in parentheses are the keywords for each species which

are entered at the species prompt to input yields for that item.)

The term species is used to mean either a chemical species (product of

combustion) produced by the burning process or a fire product related to the

tolerability of the smoke layer. Heat and energy release are not classified as species. The ten specific species are the only ones currently traceable. Each

of these species has a separate help call. The production of a species is

specified as a dimensionless (actually mass per mass) yield. For each species

enter either the complete time history or a single value which the program will

extend to all points. These values can then be modified with the "CHANGE"

section.

Yield is the fraction of the mass of each species generated by a fire to

the mass of fuel lost. Typically this is obtained by dividing the mass of a species produced per second by the mass of fuel lost per second, as the fuel is

combusted in an apparatus such as a calorimeter. For example if the rate of

burning is 1 kilogram per second and the rate of production of a species is

0.02 kilogram per second the yield is 0.02/1.0 or 0.02.

6. 7. 8.1 Nitrogen

Nitrogen is neither produced nor consumed in a fire. It is included as a tracked species because it is sometimes used as a fire inerting agent and for

use in the chemistry calculations within the model. This species will not

normally be used.

6 . 7 . 8 .

Oxygen

As a fire burns it consumes oxygen. The rate of oxygen consumption has

been found to be fairly constant with the rate of energy release; a fact which

is the basis for oxygen consumption calorimetry. This constant is generally

assumed to be 13,100 kJ of energy released per kg of oxygen consumed. The heat

of combustion of a fuel is defined as the energy released per unit mass of fuel

burned. Thus, the "yield" of oxygen (mass of oxygen produced per unit mass of

fuel lost) is obtained by dividing the heat of combustion by the oxygen

consumption constant, or (-Hc /13,100) when all fuel mass lost is burned (100%

efficiency). When more detailed combustion chemistry is added to the model,

the appropriate correction will be made for the actual combustion efficiency.

Since yields are defined as production rates and oxygen is consumed, a negative

value must be used. Also, since the yield of oxygen is defined by the heat of

combustion entered elsewhere, this yield is set simply by entering the keyword

02 at the SPECIES prompt. Note that because this is a fixed value based on the

heat of combustion the yield of oxygen cannot be changed by CHANGE.

151
6. 7. 8.

3

Carbon Dioxide

If carbon dioxide is entered as a species to be tracked, FAST will report

the average concentration of carbon dioxide in the smoke layers for each room

as a function of time. Enter the yield of carbon dioxide production at the

start of each of the (N) time intervals entered in the description of the fire,

plus one for the final value. Separate each entry by a space (n + 1 values

must be entered). The keyword is C02

.

6. 7. 8.

4

Carbon Monoxide

FAST can track the concentration of carbon monoxide (CO) in the smoke

layer for each room as a function of time. Enter the yield of carbon monoxide

production at the start of the (N) time intervals entered in the description of

the fire, plus one for the final value. Separate each entry by a space. A

total of (N + 1) entries must be made. An example of a four interval fire is:

0.0 0.2 0.2 0.8 0.0. The keyword is CO.

6 . 7 . 8 .

5

Hydrogen Chloride

It is generally assumed that all of the chlorine atoms available in the

fuel end up as HC1 gas (a "worst case" assumption). Thus, the yield of HC1 can

be derived from the fuel structure where actual yield data are unavailable.

For example, for pure PVC , this value is 0.58 (58% of the fuel mass becomes

HC1) . However, most PVC products are not pure PVC, but contain fillers and

plasticizers. Rigid PVC is generally of the order of 90% pure PVC and flexible

PVC is generally of the order of 50% pure PVC. Thus, yields of 0.52 and 0.29

would be used for rigid and flexible PVC respectively. The yields of HC1 for

other chlorine-containing fuels would be calculated in a similar manner. The

keyword is HCL.

6. 7. 8.

6

Hydrogen Cyanide

If hydrogen cyanide is entered as a species , FAST will report the average

concentration of hydrogen cyanide in the smoke layer for each room as a function of time. To cause FAST to track hydrogen cyanide enter YES when the

prompt HYDROGEN CYANIDE appears. Next enter the yield of hydrogen cyanide at

the start of each of the (N) time intervals entered in the description of the

fire, plus one for the final value. Separate each entry by a space. A total

of (N + 1) entries must be made. An example for a four interval fire is: 0.0

0.02 0.02 0.04 0.0. The keyword is HCN.

152
6. 7. 8.

Total Unburned Hydrocarbons

If total unburned hydrocarbons is entered as a species, FAST will report

the average concentration of unburned hydrocarbons in the smoke layers for each

room as a function of time. To cause FAST to track total unburned hydrocarbons

enter YES when the prompt TOTAL UNBURNED HYDROCARBONS appears . Next enter the

yield values at the start of each of the (N) time intervals entered in the

description of the fire. Separate each entry by a space and end with the yield

at the end of the final time interval. A total of (N+l) entries must be made.

The keyword is TUHC.

6. 7. 8.

Water Production

If water production is entered as a species, FAST will report the average

concentration of water production in the smoke layer for each room as a function of time. To cause FAST to track water production enter YES when the

prompt water production appears . Next enter the yield of water production at

the start of each of the (N) time intervals entered in the description of the

fire plus one for the final value. Separate each entry by a space. A total of

(N + 1) entries must be made. An example for a four interval fire is: 0.0 2.0

2.0 2.0 0.0. The keyword is H20.

6. 7. 8.

Optical Density

The optical density (which relates to visibility through smoke) is

derived from soot production. Enter the yield of soot generated at the start

of each of the (N) time intervals entered in the description of the fire, plus

one for the final value. Separate each entry by a space. A total of (N + 1)

entries must be made. An example for a four interval fire is: 0.0 0.02 0.02

0.1 0.05. A conversion from soot mass density to optical density in the units

of 1/m is automatically made. The keyword for optical density is OD

6.7.8.10

Concentration-Time Product

Species Ct is used as an indicator of toxicity (see section 6.12.6.2 for

a detailed discussion). It is the concentration- time product (actually the

time integral of concentration) of the total fuel mass lost during the fire.

The fuel mass lost is distributed into the upper layers in the various

compartments and is divided by the layer volume to obtain a mass concentration.

This mass concentration is then integrated over time to give Ct. The "yield"

of Ct is defined as 1.0 for each interval since it represents the total fuel

mass lost rather than a fraction thereof. The keyword is Ct.

153
6.7.9 Output File

This is an optional section. If an output (dump) file is desired for

plotting or additional listing the name of that file is specified here. If no file name is specified, the dump interval entered earlier must be a zero. If a non-zero value is entered for the dump interval, a file name must be specified

here. It should be remembered that the output file created by one run of the

model will be automatically replaced by the next run of the model if the output

file name is not changed between runs.

This section will also prompt for a CONFIGURATION file. This will be

used in a future version of FAST, but is not used now. Thus, no file name need

be entered. But if one is, nothing will happen.

6.7.10 Functions

Function commands are available to the user at any time during program

execution, and there are no user prompts for them.

6.7.10.1

Save

The command SAVE is used to save the file being created or edited for use

in executing the run with FAST. There is no prompt for SAVE, as it can be

entered at any prompt within FINPUT. If SAVE is called and all of the required

data for running FAST have not been specified, an error message is printed to

the screen which identifies which required parameters have not been specified.

After these have been input, SAVE should be called again. SAVE will not let

the user save a file under an existing file name (this would overwrite the

existing file), nor can a KEYWORD be used as a file name. Again, if such is

attempted, an error message is printed to the screen and the user should select

a different file name.

6.7.10.2

End

Like SAVE, END has no prompt since it can be entered at any prompt. If

the user calls END before the current file has been SAVEd, a message is printed

stating that the file has not been SAVEd and "ARE YOU SURE (Y OR N?)". If the

user types N, the program will return to the current prompt. If the user types

Y, the program ENDs and the current file is lost.

6.7.10.3

Set Units

The call to SET UNITS can be made from any prompt. The current units are presented, and the user can change any of the units by typing the unit desired

(the HELP message gives the units available) . Any data previously entered are automatically changed to the new units. It is not necessary to change back

before saving the file as the program SAVEs all data in the units required by

the model. If the user desires to work in english units, it is only necessary

to type ENGLISH, and all units are changed. Mixed english and metric are allowed (be careful!). The default units are SI, and not necessarily the most

common units for a given parameter. When entering a parameter from a source

(or even the data base), be very careful of the units.

154
6.7.10.4 Change

The call to CHANGE can be made from any prompt. It is used to CHANGE any

previously entered, time -dependant data (time intervals, pyrolysis or mass loss

rate, species production rate, and height of fuel). When CHANGE is called, the

current values for each interval are printed along with a small graph. Each

point can then be changed by answering the prompts. After all changes are made, entering a RETURN at the prompt will return to the prompt from which

CHANGE was called.

6.7.10.5 Copy

The call to COPY can be made from any prompt. COPY allows the user to

copy the dimensions or properties of the walls, ceiling, or floor from any

existing compartment to any other. COPY will prompt for the parameter (s) to be

copied and the compartment number to copy from and to. The possibilities are DIMENSION to copy width, depth, height or floor height; or WALL, FLOOR, or CEILING to copy the thermophysical properties of each respectively.

6 . 8 FAST User Information

6.8.1 Introduction

FAST (Fire and Smoke Transport) is a multi-room fire model which predicts

the conditions within a structure resulting from a user specified fire, FAST

version 17 for the PC can accommodate up to five rooms (within the building)

with multiple openings between the rooms and to the outside. The required

program inputs are the geometrical data describing the rooms and connections,

the thermophysical properties of the ceiling, walls and floors, the fire as a rate of mass loss and the generation rates of the products of combustion. The

program outputs are the temperature and thickness of, and species

concentrations in, the hot upper layer and the cooler lower layer in each

compartment. Also given are surface temperatures and heat transfer and mass

flow rates. FAST was written in ANSI/FORTRAN 77.

For a description of the program, the user should refer to A Model for

the Transport of Fire, Smoke and Toxic Gases (FAST), NBSIR 84-2934, or A

Multicompartment Model for the Spread of Fire, Smoke and Toxic Gases, Fire

Safety Journal, Volume 9 May/July, 1985. For a description of the input data,

the user should refer to the User's Guide for FAST, NBSIR 85-3284. These

reports appear in the appendix to this report.

Several changes have been made to the original program to permit the use

of the program on personal computers, however the basic structure of the

program remains the same. The input data file remains as described in the

User's Guide for FAST.

155
6.8.2 Program Files

An executable program file is included on the disk. The program will run

directly on computers without a FORTRAN compiler. However, it requires an 8087

or 80287 coprocessor. The program files are contributions of the National

Bureau of Standards and are not subject to copyright.

All FORTRAN compilers are not the same. As a result, this program may

not compile with all versions of FORTRAN on the market. This program has been

compiled with Ryan -Me Farland FORTRAN version 2.11. The OPEN statements in the

source code provided (subroutine INPUTP) have been tailored for the RyanMc Far land FORTRAN.

6.8.3 Program Use

All programs in HAZARD I are run from a master menu which is obtained by

typing HAZARD while in the HAZARDI directory. The desired program is then

selected by entering its number as it appears on the list. When completed, the

computer will return to the menu.

Two additional inputs have been added to the program. The first asks for

an input file name. This is the name of the input data file which has been

prepared using FINPUT or other editor. Some word processing editors place

special codes within the text and may not be appropriate for this purpose.

Detailed information on the data file can be found in A Computer User's Guide

for FAST, NBSIR 85-3284 (see Appendix). ALL LETTERS FOR THE LABELS MUST BE IN

UPPER CASE.

The second additional input asks for an output file name. This may be

any of the operating system reserved device names such as PRN for printer, CON

for the screen, etc. It may also be a file name for output to a file. Note

that when the output is directed to a file the carriage control codes are printed in column one. Program execution times for typical data sets are generally on the order

of 10-20 times the simulation time. For example a data set specifying 6

minutes of fire simulation could be expected to require from 1-2 hours to run. The sample data set DATA.DAT requires approximately 1.5 hours to run on an IBM

XT and 50 minutes on an IBM AT. In general the more complex the data set

(e.g., large number of rooms and openings) the longer the run time. There are however, very simple data sets which can result in very long run times (e.g.,

openings which are large with respect to room size or a rapidly changing fire

size)

.

156
6.8.4

Sample Input Data File

An input data file containing the test case found in Appendix B of the

User's Guide for FAST, has been included on the disk as DATA.DAT. Due to the

effect of the computer's internal precision on the solution of the equations

and revisions to the program, it is expected that the output from this example

will differ from the output listed in Appendix C of the user's guide. 6.8.5

Correction to User's Guide for FAST, NBSIR 85=3284

The input line beginning with VERSN must be the first line in the data

file and the line beginning with TIMES must be the second line. The order of

these lines may not be reversed. The version of FAST included with HAZARD I is

called version 17.5, (although the number in the first line of the input file

is still 17) , and includes all corrections which previously have been released

for FAST version 17.

6.8.6

Limitations

While FAST has been subjected to comparative validation against several

series of multi-room size experiments, and has shown reasonable ability to

produce results closely approximating the test measurements, it is not

currently possible to provide the user with a precise, analytical statement of

the accuracy of the predictions produced by the model. Thus, it is recommended

that this model, and the HAZARD I software package, be used for evaluating the

relative change in predicted hazard rather than the absolute hazard from a single calculation. Such use will minimize the impact of systematic errors, as these will be present in all of the calculations to be compared. Some specific

problems with regard to calculations with the FAST model which have been

identified include:

1. When the case involves a room (which is not the room of fire

origin) , with a door which is closed except for a small gap

at the bottom (i.e. an undercut), the model may predict a temperature in the lower layer of the closed room which

exceeds the upper layer temperature. This is caused by the

fact that the initial flow into the closed room (through the

undercut) is by expansion of the lower layer gases in the

adjacent room. The model has no way to transport these gases

to the upper layer until the layer interface at the door

drops to the level of the undercut. At this time, the

temperatures should correct themselves. The situation may be

corrected by including a vertical crack at the door, but

sometimes this also does not work. As long as the lower

layer temperature is not a great deal higher than the upper

layer, the results will not be too far in error. It should

also be noted that this is a physically impossible condition,

and as such should immediately raise a flag with the user.

157
2. FAST (like all zone models) assumes that all predicted

parameters are horizontally uniform within any given

compartment. This assumption ignores the transient jet

produced as the fire gases flow across ceilings. In many

situations this jet is thin and the zone assumption has

little or no consequences.

3. This assumption of horizontal uniformity also results in the

FAST model being insensitive to room shape. The model

assumes that all rooms are rectangular. Non- rectangular

rooms (e.g. L- shaped) must be entered as equivalent

rectangles, although if the five room limit is not a factor,

an L- shaped room can be entered as two rectangular rooms

connected by a full height and width opening.

4. The accuracy of predictions of species concentrations*

produced by FAST depend on data on the yields of these

species provided by the user. Users are cautioned that the

yields obtained in free burn tests may be inappropriate for

fully developed fires. This is expected to be most evident

in the conditions that can develop in internal unvented

corridors exposed to a room that is involved in a postflashover condition.

5. FAST assumes that there will be a sufficient supply of air to

effect complete combustion within the room of fire origin.

This can lead to erroneous results (particularly within the

room of origin) under conditions involving ventilation

controlled burning. At this time, the fire room should have

reached a maximum temperature and the products of combustion

should be fuel- rich. Here, ventilation controlled burning is

defined as where the oxygen entrained into the plume is

insufficient to burn all of the fuel and the upper layer has

been depleted of its oxygen. Under these conditions, a message is produced on the printer which gives the time at

which the ventilation limit was reached, and warns the user

that the predicted values which follow may not be valid.

Whenever this message appears, it is strongly suggested that

the oxygen concentration be plotted (with FASTPLOT) and the

values examined to determine how long these conditions

lasted. The user should also realize that under these

conditions, the properties of an individual material should

have a minimum effect on the total hazard posed by a flashed

over room and that the conditions in any room open to the

fire room will become intolerable in a very brief time.

158
6.9 Instructions for FASTPLOT

FASTPLOT is a graphing program which runs in conjunction with "FAST”.

The results for "FAST" are dumped to a special data file after each prescribed

time step, which only certain of the programs in the HAZARD I package can read.

FASTPLOT has the capability to form a list of variables, read in their values

at each time interval, list the values in tabular form, plot the values (hard

copy or screen) , and save the variables in a formatted file for use with other

software

The FAST model predicts the environment produced by a fire in one of

several compartments, or rooms, and follows smoke and toxic gases from one compartment to another. It separately predicts values for each of the

variables in both the upper and lower layers

The list of variables presently available through FASTPLOT are:

AREA. burning area of the fire (m2

) CONCENT. species density in parts per million

CONV. . . heat loss from layer to solid surface due to convection

(kW/m2

) DOORJT. ................ buoyant mass flow through a vent (kg/sec)

DOSE. species concentration integrated over time (ppm-min)

ENTR mass entrained by a plume (from lower layer to the

upper layer)

INTERFACE. height of the two -zone discontinuity (m)

MASS mass density in a layer (kg/m3

) MFIRE. mass loss rate of the fire source (kg/sec)

NEUT1

NEUT2 neutral planes (maximum of two) for each vent

PLUME. . total mass flow into the plume (kg/sec)

PRES reference pressure at the floor of the compartment (Pa)

QC total convective heat gain by a layer

QF total enthalpy increase from the fire source

QR total radiative heat gain by a layer

RAD. heat loss from layer due to radiation (kW/m2

) TEMP temperature of the layer (C)

VENT mass flow through a vent (kg/sec) - bidirectional

VOL. volume of the upper zone (m3

) WALLTEM. temperature of the wall (C)

159
The CONCENTRATION, DOSE, AND MASS also have associated with them a species number. The species currently tracked and their associated numbers

are

:

1 . NITROGEN 2

.

OXYGEN 3. CARBON DIOXIDE

4. CARBON MONOXIDE 5. HYDROGEN CYANIDE 6. HYDROGEN CHLORIDE

7. TOTAL UNBURNED HYDROCARBONS 8. WATER

9. SMOKE OPTICAL DENSITY 10. CONCENTRATION -TIME PRODUCT

At specific points in the program, a list of available options is presented to

the user. These options are:

ADD

CHANGE

CLEAR

DEFAULT

DELETE

END

HELP

LIST

PLOT

REVIEW

SAVE

Upon running the program, the first input requested will be the name of

the dump file to be plotted. Normally it will be of the form:

filename . DMP

Next, the user will be asked to select an option which he wishes to have

performed. The following is a description of each of the options available.

They are in the order that they usually will be encountered. However, some may

be executed before the other without any problems. The minimum number of

characters required to recognize and option is enclosed in the parenthesis at

the beginning of each word.

6.9.1 (DE) FAULT

This enables the user to set his own default parameters for the

following

:

COMPARTMENT NUMBER

VENTFLOW DESTINATION

LAYER

SPECIES NUMBER

This option may be done at any time and if is not done the defaults are set to 1, 2, upper, and 9" respectively. The purpose of this option is to

change the default available for other commands and data input.

160
6.9.2

(VA)RIABLES

The purpose of this option is to allow the user to recall the possible

variables for use. They will be listed on the screen. 6.9.3

(AD)D

This command is used to build a list of variables to be read into the

active list. When an option is requested, ADD may be entered by itself or together with a list of variables that are to be added. If it is entered

alone, a message will be printed asking for the variables that are to be added

to the list. For example: > ADD

- INPUT VARIABLES TO BE ADDED>

or > ADD TEMP , PRES ,

For each variable selected there is a series of questions that will be

asked to identify the type of that variable wanted. Questions asked about all

variables are:

WHICH COMPARTMENT? -> WHICH LAYER? ->

If VENTFLOW is chosen the compartment origin and destination will be

requested; if CONCENTRATION, MASS, or DOSE are selected the species number of

each will be requested.

The maximum number of variables allowed in the active list at any one time is 25. If the list is full or the variable is presently in the active

list the addition will be disallowed and another option requested.

6.9.4

(DEL) ETE

When this option is entered the present list of variables will be printed

to the screen and the user will be asked to input the variables to delete by

the number associated with them on the list. They must be entered on a single

line separated by commas or blanks.

If the variable number that is input does not correspond to one that is

currently on the list it will be skipped. After the deletions have been

processed a new list is presented and another option requested. If the list is

presently empty then that fact will be stated in an error message.

6.9.5

(HE)LP

This command may be input at any time that the user is asked for an option. Its purpose is to simply list to the screen, a list of the available

commands and a brief explanation; after which another option will be asked for.

161
6.9.6

(RE) VIEW

At times the user may wish to see what is presently on his list before

entering a command. This may be done with the REVIEW command. It will print

out the current list along with the compartment number, species, and layer of

each of the variables. After the printing of the entire list, the option

request is again displayed.

6.9.7 (LI) ST

After variables have been added to the list and their data values read

in, the user may list the values of any of the variables on the list to the

screen. After entering the (LI) ST command, the variables presently in the list

will be displayed. The user will then be asked to input the corresponding

number(s) of the variable(s) to be listed. They must be entered on a single

line separated by commas or blanks. The maximum number of variables which can

be listed at one time is 5. After the list appears on the screen, it can be

printed with the PRINT SCREEN key.

6.9.8 (PL)OT

After entering the PLOT command, the current list of variables will be

displayed along with their numbers. The user will be asked to input the

numbers of the variable (s) to be plotted from the list. They should be entered

in a string separated by commas or blank spaces. For example:

ENTER VARIABLES TO BE PLOTTED - >1,2, 3,4

or ENTER VARIABLE TO BE PLOTTED ->1234

Variables to be plotted together on a single graph are grouped in

parentheses. For example:

ENTER VARIABLES TO BE PLOTTED -> (1,2, 3, 4)

When plotting on the screen, only one graph at time should be made in

this manner. With the addition of appropriate device drivers, the program will

drive plotters with multiple graphs per page.

Before the graph is drawn, the user is given the opportunity to change

the range of the X and Y axes . The maximum and minimum value of the X and Y

axes will be displayed, followed by a request for a change in each, which will

be of the form:

CHANGE (X or Y) AXIS TO? ->

If no change is desired simply enter a <RETURN> and the next axis change

will be displayed. If a change is made, the value will be entered and the same

change request will be made again. This will be repeated until a <RETURN> is

entered

.

162
When all the changes have been made (if any) the graph of that particular

variable will be plotted. After the graph has been completed the option

request will be displayed and a new option may be entered. 6.9.9

(SA)VE

This option allows the user to save the values of the variables in the

list in a file. The format used will make the data directly compatible with an data processing program (RAPID) 1 designed for the reduction of experimental

data in the Center for Fire Research, or with other programs after editing or reformatting as needed.

The user will be asked for the name to be used for the file. A check

will be made to see whether that file presently exists or not. If it does, the

user will be asked if he wants to write over the old file with this new data.

If his answer is NO, nothing will be placed in the file and other option

requested. If, however, he does want the file rewritten, or the file does not

already exist, the new file will be created and the data stored in it.

Each variable in the list will be saved with the following format at the

beginning of each block of data:

I 6 , I 6 , A6 , * ---COMMENT-- --------

The first 16 will be for the number of data points for that variable, the

next 16 is for the number given to that variable on the list, and the A6 is the

actual variable name. Everything after the * is a comment block and will be

filled with information relevant to that particular variable, such as species

number, compartment number, layer, etc. The actual numerical data will be

written using the format 7E11.5.

6.9.10 (CL) EAR

The input of this command empties the current variable list.

6.9.11 (CH)ANGE

This option restarts the program by asking for a new file and resetting

all variable lists.

6.9.12

(EN)D

This function terminates the execution of the FASTPLOT program.

Breese, J. N. and Peacock, R. D., A Users Guide to RAPID, Reduction

Algorithms for the Presentation of Incremental Fire Data, N3S Special

Publication 722, National Bureau of Standards, Gaithersburg, MD . 20899 (1986).

163
6.10 Instructions for DETACT-QS

6.10.1 Introduction

DETACT-QS is a BASIC program to predict the response of thermal detectors

to fires of arbitrary heat release rate (see Appendix C) . It is an interactive

program where the user answers questions to input the data, and the results are presented in tabular form. Any user familiar with the calculation procedure

described in Appendix C of ANSI/NFPA 72E should have no problem with this

program as the procedures are similar. The questions asked are as follows:

1. HEIGHT OF CEILING ABOVE FUEL (METERS) - This is not the floor

to ceiling height, but rather the distance from the top

surface of the burning object to the ceiling.

2. DISTANCE OF DETECTOR FROM AXIS OF FIRE ('METERS ) - This is . the radial distance to the detector from a point directly

above the fire.

3. INITIAL ROOM TEMPERATURE (CELSIUS) - The room ambient

temperature

.

4. DETECTOR ACTIVATION TEMPERATURE (CELSIUS) - The temperature

rating of the device.

5. DETECTOR RESPONSE TIME INDEX (RTI) - For sprinklers, this is

now often given in the manufacturer's catalog. For fixedtemperature heat detectors, table 6-19 gives RTI values

corresponding to UL spacings. For rate-of-rise detectors,

table 6-20 gives RTI values for three rate-of-rise settings

(NOTE: 15 F/min would be the normal threshold rate used)

.

6 . RATE OF HEAT RELEASE - The rate of heat release of the fire

(which can be obtained from the FAST run with FASTPLOT by

LISTing the variable QF) is entered one point at a time by

answering the questions TIME (SEC) and HEAT RELEASE RATE (kw)

starting with time=0. When the last desired point is

entered, the user enters a -1 value for time, which stops the

request for data. The results are then sent to the printer

(or the screen if the user answers the question SEND OUTPUT

TO PRINTER? with a N) in tabular form.

164
TABLE 6-19 RTI VALUES FOR

FIXED -TEMPERATURE HEAT DETECTORS

UL

Listed

Spacing

(ft) 128 F

UL Listed Activation Temperature

135 F 145 F 160 F 170 F 196 F

All FM

Listed

Temps

10 894 738 586 436 358 217 436

15 559 425 349 246 199 101 246

20 369 302 235 157 116 38 157

25 277 224 174 107 72 107

30 212 179 136 81 49 81

40 159 128 92 40 - - -

50 132 98 67 - - -

70 81 54 20 - - -

NOTE: These RTI's are based on an analysis of the Underwriters

Laboratories (UL) and Factory Mutual (FM) listing test procedures.

Plunge test results on the detector to be used will give a more accurate

response time index.

TABLE 6-20 RTI VALUES FOR

RATE -OF -RISE HEAT DETECTORS

Listed UL Listed Activation Rate of Temp. Rise

Spacing

(ft) 15 F/min 20 F/min 25 F/min

10 1834 1308 984

12.5 1453 1073 805

15 1185 872 637

20 872 581 425

30 559 380 280

40 447 291 206

50 425 246 161

165
6.11 Simulation of Occupant Decisions and Actions

6.11.1 Introduction

The HAZARD I package includes a computer model that simulates the

decisions and actions, as well as the evacuation progress of the occupants of a residence during a fire. This model is used to determine the locations of the

building occupants during the progress the fire. The model is called EXITT

(since the word exit is reserved in most computer operating systems)

.

The EXITT model is designed to be easily used. It does not require the

user to be trained in the use of the program nor to be knowledgeable about

computer languages. The user controls the model by answering simple questions

that appear on the screen.

The fires, buildings and occupants that are modeled can come from. three

sources: (1) Three buildings, each with two or more fires, are stored in the

files supplied; (2) The user can add an additional building or fire by adding

information about the specifics of the building or fire to the computer

programs that are reserved for that purpose; and (3) The user can define a building and/or fire by answering a large number of simple questions appearing

on the screen.

6.11.2 General Nature of the Model

The simulated occupant decisions and actions are based on the fire

psychology literature and interviews of persons who have successfully escaped

from fires in buildings of various sizes. In assigning decisions to an

occupant, the computer considers such factors as: age of occupant; sex; whether

occupant is asleep; smoke conditions; whether smoke detector is sounding;

whether occupant needs help in moving; and location, condition and status of

other occupants. The permitted actions include: investigate the fire; alert

others; awake others; assist others in evacuating; and evacuate. Actions that

are not incorporated in the current version include: telephoning fire

department from within the building; fighting the fire; and re-entering the

building to make a second rescue. The program prints a narrative of the

occupants decisions as they are assigned by the computer, e.g., "OCCUPANT 3 WILL START LOOKING FOR THE SOURCE OF THE SMOKE AT 30 SECONDS (THAT IS 5 SECONDS

FROM NOW) . It also creates a file of occupant locations over time which is

used by other programs in HAZARD I.

The building is represented within the computer by: instructions that

will draw the building on the computer's monitor; nodes that represent rooms,

exits and secondary locations within rooms; and links or distances between

adjacent nodes. The smoke conditions in each room at the beginning of each

time period are used in assigning occupant decisions.

The occupants move from node to node at a speed that is a function of

their assigned normal travel speed, the smoke conditions, and whether or not

they are assisting another occupant. The computer will print the occupants

movements as they are determined by the computer, e.g., "OCCUPANT 3 ARRIVED AT

NODE 15 IN ROOM 7 AFTER 32.7 SECONDS".

166
The occupants also complete actions in addition to arriving at nodes.

These are also printed, usually in conjunction with other information, e.g.,

"OCCUPANT 3 STOPPED INVESTIGATING WHEN SEEING FLAME OR MODERATE SMOKE.

OCCUPANT 3 ARRIVED AT NODE 19 IN ROOM 4 AFTER 61.2 SECONDS".

Occupants move within the building from node to node. The path assigned

is largely based on a shortest path algorithm. The path is also based on smoke

conditions and exit doors are preferred to windows.

All the decision rules programmed in the computer are designed to make

the decisions as similar as possible to decisions that building occupants would

make. To the degree that time permitted, the decision rules were based on the

relevant research literature. Of course, future versions will make better use

of the literature and should have improved decision rules. Now that this

version is completed and being distributed, it will be possible for other

researchers to make suggestions that will contribute to improving the model.

6.11.3 Current Status of the Model

The current early version of the model has been used in demonstrating the

Hazard Assessment Method. Future versions will have improved decision rules

and improved validation of those rules. Despite the limitations of using an early version, the model is sufficiently developed for use in estimating

occupant locations when comparing two fire situations. If the model were

either optimistic or pessimistic in predicting the progress of the occupants in

evacuating, the bias would be similar for both situations being compared. The

model will provide a set of occupant movements and locations through a formalized procedure.

The user should be aware of the limitations of the current model. These

limitations include:

1. The model is deterministic. Only typical behavior is

modeled: aberrant behavior is not permitted.

2. The model has not been used previously: this is its

first "field test".

3Calibration of the parameter values incorporated into

the model algorithms is required to establish their

validity

4. The computer code is very large and some significant

"bugs" may remain in the program. These must be

corrected as they are identified.

5 . Data entered through the keyboard are not permanently

stored. It will all be lost when the computer run is

completed

167
6.11.4 User Options

The program is written to allow many options. These include:

1. Using building stored in the program or designing own

building

;

2. If using building stored in program, selecting one of

several fire scenarios or providing own fire scenario

by answering questions on the screen;

3. Printing results on printer for a permanent record;

4. Printing extensive or minimal information on the

screen;

5. Overriding some computer assignments of decisions;

6. Assigning times for the smoke detectors to work rather

than letting the computer calculate the time based on

smoke conditions.

These options are all selected through answering questions on the screen.

The number of options available will be curtailed if the user answers the

following question affirmatively, "IS THIS YOUR FIRST EXPERIENCE WITH THIS

PROGRAM?" Getting familiar with the program should be easier with fewer

options available.

More extensive instructions are included in the users manual in Appendix

B. However, it is suggested that the user experiment with the program before

intensive studying of the users manual. It is not recommended that the user

design his own building through keyboard entries for practical use of the model

because in this early version of the model information entered through the

keyboard is not permanently stored. It is suggested, however, that the user

enter a very small building through the keyboard to gain an appreciation for

the necessary data inputs.

The User's Manual describes how to enter an additional building of the

user's choice permanently into the model. This is not difficult but it is very

time consuming because of the large amount of data and information that must be

very carefully entered.

6.11.5 Fire Inputs

The program is designed to use the output of the FAST model for

distributing smoke throughout the building. The fire/smoke conditions that are stored in the program are all from the outputs of the FAST model. In this

early version, there is no provision for directly connecting with the output of

FAST: the printed output of FAST is used and entered into the EXITT program.

168
6.11.6 Model Outputs

The program provides outputs in three formats

1. A description of the decisions and movements of the

occupants is printed on the screen as the simulation

progresses. There will be frequent pauses to permit

the user to read the text on the screen: the user can

end each pause and permit the simulation to continue by

pressing the return key.

2. A description of the decisions and movements of the

occupants can be printed on the printer. Once the

program starts, the first question posed to the user

is, "DO YOU WANT TO USE YOUR PRINTER?"

3 . A record of the movements of the occupants can be

stored on the hard disk. The information recorded on

the disk is designed to be used as input to program

TENAB which determines the hazard for each occupant

according to the room conditions encountered along the

escape route. The model provides this output only when

the program is in the C disk drive , that is , on the

hard disk.

169
6.12 Tenability Limits

6.12.1 Introduction

The purpose of this section is to provide the background for the user to

decide on the appropriate tenability criteria to use in the program TENAB,

discussed in the next section of this report. To assess the impact of fire on

humans, it is essential to be able to assign such tenability limits to fire

generated conditions. It will be assumed here that tenability limits

correspond to the best available human or animal data on complete, acute

incapacitation of otherwise healthy victims. The lack of adequate data on sublethal incapacitation effects make such benchmarks into upper limits, instead

of best-estimates . Ideally, these limits would specify precisely at what point

of fire development escape is no longer considered feasible. In practice, the

response of different individuals to various fire threats is diverse.

Specifically, fire atmospheres survivable by the healthy individual can be

lethal to the sick or impaired. Furthermore, the individual with, say, a cardiac or respiratory impairment can be overcome by a fire condition which is

only very slightly different from ambient. Thus, if the target population to

be protected were seriously impaired individuals, no fire at all could be

tolerated. Such a design philosophy is rather specialized and will not be

considered in this report.

For most hazard calculations, it can be assumed that the individual at

risk is a '•healthy” individual. Even this, of course, is an indistinct

concept, since endurance limits for healthy individuals are not identical for

various threats. In most cases, only animal data are available. Thus, the

assumption is made that the response of the healthy individual can be

represented by a well-chosen animal model. Also, there is almost no information on the sub -lethal response of humans, or, indeed, of animals, to

fire situations. In many instances it would be more appropriate to ask not if

the fire atmosphere is, by itself, lethal, but, rather, is it sufficient to

introduce confusion, narcosis, or such strong irritancy that the individual

will no longer act to rescue himself. At the University of Pittsburgh, studies

of the sub- lethal effects of carbon monoxide (CO) currently are being conducted

[1]; but have not yet resulted in conclusions on appropriate limits for such

exposures

.

6.12.2 Flashover

Flashover is a perceived event which can be denoted by any of a number of

interrelated phenomena which can occur simultaneously during the course of a serious building fire. These include the reaching of temperatures of 500° C to

700°C in the upper portions of the room [2,3,4]; the reaching of a heat flux

of 25 kW/m2 at the floor level, with the near- simultaneous ignition of

combustibles not previously ignited [5,6]; the filling of almost the entire

room volume with flames [7]; and the dropping of oxygen levels to low values,

typically 5% or less [8]. When flashover is reached in a room, habitability is

completely precluded, due to high temperatures, high heat fluxes, low oxygen,

and high concentration of combustion products. Tenability will generally be

precluded at conditions prior to flashover; nonetheless, it is important to

emphasize that room flashover is an easily calculable time at which it is

170
definitely known that tenability is no longer possible. Flashover, as an

event, is also an important marker since when it occurs the threat to the

remaining spaces in a building usually becomes much greater.

6.12.3 Temperature

The effects of temperature as an exposure limit under fire conditions

have not been well studied. Industrial hygiene literature primarily gives data

for heat stress under conditions of prolonged, typically 8 hour, exposures.

The older literature, as it relates to fire, has been reviewed by Simms and

Hinkley [9]

although, based on that review, they could not make any recommendations of tenability values

Experimental data from studies with pigs have shown no injuries at 120°

for 2 minutes, 100°C for 5 minutes, and 90°C for 10 minutes [10,11]. Some

experimental data for humans have been reported which show that temperatures of

100°C could be withstood by a clothed, inactive adult male for about 30 minutes

before intolerable discomfort is reached; a 75°

exposure could be withstood

for about 60 minutes [12]

These experimental values seem high. To place them

in context, Zapp [13] has stated that " . . . air temperatures as high as 100°C can

be tolerated only under very special conditions (i,e.

still air) for more than

a few minutes, and that somfe people are incapacitated by breathing air at

65°C...". Crane [14] has recommended that for healthy, clothed, adult males,

collapse due to elevated temperatures will occur when the exposure time, t,

exceeds the following value:

t = 2.46 x 10 1/T3 • 5

(1)

where t is the time to collapse (s) and T is the air temperature (°C). This

expression, however, does not take into account the relative humidity of the

air.

Criteria for temperature are, in fact, especially difficult to set, since

the temperature at which adverse effects are noted depends not only on the

exposure time, but also on the relative humidity. Thus, for instance, in a study of acclimated adult males to a sauna exposure at 100 °C and 22% R.H. for

15 minutes, it was seen, despite physiological indications of stress, that no

ill effects occurred [15]. Similar concurring studies are available for 85-

90°C exposures for 20 minutes [16]. In the room of fire origin, it can be

expected that the air will be nearly, if not totally, saturated with water

vapor. In this case, medical recommendations are that "Air at temperatures

above about 50°

produces severe discomfort in the oral, nasal, and esophageal

passages if it is close to saturation with water vapor" [17].

The permeability and insulating value of the clothing worn can also have

a significant effect on the ability to withstand elevated temperatures. For

long exposures ( > 30 minutes) , extensive experimental data are available

[e.g., 18]. Similar data have not been obtained for short exposures, such as may occur in building fires, however. In previous fire hazard evaluation re- commendations, the tenability values for brief exposures at face level ranged

171
from 65°C [19] to 100°C [20]. Based on these references, we are suggesting the

use of temperatures of 50° C as a threshold of severe discomfort, 65 °C as an

incapacitating level, and 100° C as a lethal exposure, for short times. As will

be discussed in the next section, the output of the program TENAB provides a simple sensitivity analysis of this, and all tenability criteria selected.

Elevated heat fluxes can produce direct pain sensation on hands and face,

which can make escape untenable. Higher values of heat flux will produce

blistering and burning of the skin.

From heat transfer studies, Henriques [21] developed an integrated injury

index ft, such that exposure can be tolerated without irreversible injury if ft <

0.53, and deep burn injury occurs if ft > 1.

where T is the surface temperature of the skin (K) , and t is time (s) . This

relation is sensibly in an Arrhenius form, however, it is not, by itself,

predictive, since the surface rate of temperature rise has to be computed from

external boundary conditions.

Hendler [22], meanwhile had made measurements of the thermal properties

of human skin, and reported data on the spectral reflectance of human skin,

both white and black, over the spectral range of 0.4 to 20 iim. He also

obtained an experimental value for kpC = 111 ±8 xlO' 5 cal2 /cm4 /C2 /s . Stoll

[23], however, concluded that the kpC of human skin varies according to

irradiance, changing from 96 to 159 as the irradiance was quadrupled. She also

determined that a more complex expression than Henriques' ft value may be more

realistic

.

Stoll and coworkers [23,24,25] and Derksen and coworkers [26] have over

the years collected a large amount of experimental data, some of which are summarized in Table 6-21. Table 6-21 shows that literature agreement on the

incident irradiance required for achieving a blister or a burn to blackened

skin (which is the worst-case condition) is generally good. The work of Stoll

and Chianta [25] also gives data for pain thresholds, and shows that both pain

and blistering can be very well represented as power laws:

6.12.4 Heat Flux

( 2 )

Pain

t 85 (q")

- 1.35 (3)

Burn

t = 223 (q")

- 1.35

( 4 ) where t is the exposure time (s) and q" is the incident heat flux (kW/m2

)

.

172
Table 6-21

Time required to blister or burn blackened skin

Stoll/Greene

[23]

Stoll/Chianta

[25]

Berks en/Monahan/deLhery

[26]

Time Flux Time Flux

(s) (kW/m2

) (s) (kW/m2

)

1.08 50.2

1.41 41.8

1.95 33.5

3. 25.1

5.6 16.7

7.8 12.55

8.6 12.55

13.4 8.37

CM o OO 6.28

24.4 6.28

33.8 4.18

37.2 4.18

Tot. heat Time Flux Tot. heat

(kJ/m2

) (s) (kW/m2

) (kJ/m2

)

0.5 75.2 37.6

1.0 50.2 50.2

54.2

59.0

65.3

2. 29.3 58.6

75.3

5. 13.38 66.9

93.7

97.9

10. 9.2 92.0

112.2

20. 6.06 121.3

130.5

141.4

50. 3.10 154.8

100. 2.13 213.4

173
The relationships are somewhat more clearly evident if they are expressed

in terms of the time integral of the heat flux, H (kJ/m2 ). It can then be seen

that the total heat, H, required to cause pain or burn is not a constant, but

it is a relatively slowly varying function of exposure time (or of flux level)

.

The corresponding relations then become:

Pain

H = 26.8 t

0 - 26

(5)

Burn

H - 54.7 t°

•

26 (6)

In assessing the capability to withstand pain, the experimental data and

the derived equations above are all for relatively short times of exposure to

constant flux levels. For longer exposures, some older experimental data

indicate that heat flux values of 2.5 kW/m2 can be tolerated for 3 minutes

without reaching unbearable pain and that this value does not change appreciably for longer times [27-30]. By comparison, some 1943 Japanese data

reported by Hasemi [31] showed that an asymptotic value is not quite reached

even at 30 minutes. From 3 minutes to 30 minutes, however, the fluxes endured

in the Japanese study changed only from 2.9 kW/m2 to 2.1 kW/m2

, thus indicating

general agreement to the 2.5 kW/m2 limit derived from U.S. studies. This value

has been used as a tenability criterion for some time [5,20], and can be used

for evaluation purposes. The appropriate height for evaluation will normally

be at face level.

For evaluating burn injuries, in work on protective clothing, researchers

[32] have employed a direct comparison of the time- integrated flux exposure of

exposed skin to the relation in equation (6) . The time at which the timeintegrated flux exposure curve intersects the curve from equation (6) is

assumed to define the occurrence of second degree burns, representing the point

of irreversible cell damage requiring grafting.

In the hazard evaluation, this technique is used as a potential

incapacitation criterion, but is not used as a lethality end point since death

from skin burns depends on age, treatment, and the amount of skin exposed or the relative protection of clothing worn. Heat flux data to calculate the

time- integrated flux exposure is taken from the FAST model prediction of the

heat flux to the floor which is assumed to be the exposure that would be

received by unprotected skin.

6.12.5 Smoke Obscuration

The setting of limiting values for smoke obscuration is very difficult.

Unlike temperature, heat flux, or toxic gases, visibility obscuration is not,

itself, lethal. A hazard results only if the reduction in visibility prevents

required escape activity. This restriction of escape activity is crucial,

however, and thus smoke production has, in fact, been regulated longer than any

other product of combustion [33]. The most significant body of work in this

area has been due to Jin [34,35], who found that there is an approximate

174
reciprocal relationship between smoke and visibility distance (the distance at

which a person can identify an exit sign), according to:

kV = 2 (7)

where k = smoke extinction coefficient (m‘ 1

) , and V = visibility distance (m)

While this relationship permits visibility to be estimated, further data are needed to set criteria values. Jin conducted experiments where the walking

speed of individuals exiting buildings was measured as a function of smoke

levels, and compared to the exiting speed for blindfolded subjects. For "nonirritating" smoke the walking speed of the subjects dropped to the blindfolded

speed when a value of k = 1.2 m" 1 was reached. For "irritating" smoke, the

comparable figure was k = 0.5 m~

1

. Irritancy in Jin's experiments was not

well -quantified; for the purposes of setting limit values, It may be

appropriate to select k = 1 . 2 nf 1 as the limit. This limit also corresponds to

a visibility of 1.67 m by the relationship above, which appears to be a reasonable distance to see a room door in a residence, or the edge of a hallway. In some cases in the literature a much more stringent criterion,

typically k = 0.5 m“ 1

, has been selected [20,36].

Within the hazard evaluation system, smoke obscuration is accounted for

only within the evacuation model. That is, the smoke density is used to adjust

the walking speed of an occupant. (A little smoke makes the person walk

faster, and a greater amount slows his progress. See Appendix B for a detailed

discussion of the parameter values used in EXITT.) Smoke also represents a psychological barrier to an occupant entering a room. In the latter case,

excessive smoke will cause the person to seek an alternate route and can result

in the occupant being trapped in a room without a safe exit (door or window)

6.12.6 Toxic Gases

Studies on the causes of fire deaths have typically indicated that CO

poisoning accounts for roughly one-half of total fatalities [37,38]. The

remaining half is accounted for by direct burns, explosive pressures, and

various other toxic gases. Although the analysis of blood cyanide (which would

come from exposure to hydrogen cyanide) in fire victims is sometimes reported

in autopsy data, blood carb oxyhemoglobin saturation, resulting from exposure to

CO is often the only data provided. This provides no information on the

potential effect of other toxic gases on the lethality. Nonetheless, a significant emphasis on studying other toxic gases is placed by most research

organizations in this field, due to the fact that high hazards may exist from

additional combustion products whose presence is suggested by the decomposition

chemistry, although not necessarily confirmed by medical evidence. Table 6-22

lists, in order of increasing estimated toxicity, those primary gases which

have been suggested by various investigators as being potentially significant

in fire situations. Human data are in most cases unavailable, and even primate

data are rare. The tabulated values represent the estimated LC 50 's (in ppm),

i.e., those concentrations which would be lethal to 50% of the exposed subjects

for the specified time. Data on the combined effects are, as yet, rare,

inconsistent, and insufficient for a general tabulation [39,45-55].

175
Table 6-22

Preliminary List of Primary Toxic Gases

Gas Assumed LC 50 (man) Ref. Reference data (species, mins.)

5 min 30 min No. h=man r=rat m=mouse n=nrimate gr>g=guinea nig

(in ppm)

CO- carbon dioxide >150,000 >150,000 [39] r

C2^40 acetaldehyde 20,000 [40] LC(m,240)=1500 LC

0 (r,240)=4000 LC(ham, 240 )=17 , 000

[41] LC(r, 30 )=20 , 000 LC(r, 240)-16, 000

C

2H

4O2 acetic acid 11,000 [40] LC(m, 60 )=5620 NH

3 ammonia 20,000 9,000 [42] EC(m, 5)=20 , 000 EC (m, 30 )=4400

[43] EC(r, 5)=10, 000 EC(r,30)=4000

HCi hydrogen chloride 16,000 3,700 [44] r,p

[45] LC(r , 5)=40 , 989 CO carbon monoxide 3,000 [39] LC(r , 30 )=4600

[46] LC(h, 30 ) 3000 HBr hydrogen bromide 3,000 [40] LC(m, 60 )=814 LC(r , 60)=2858 NO nitric oxide 10,000 2,500 [41] 1/5 as toxic as NC^

LC(h,l) 15,000 COS carbonyl sulfide 2,000 [40] LC

Q (var. ,35-90)=1000-1400

H

2S hydrogen sulfide 2,000 [40] LC(m, 60 )=673 LC

Q (h, 30 )=600 LCQ (mam, 5)=800

[46] LC(h, 30 ) 2000

HF hydrogen fluoride 10,000 2,000 [40] LC(gpg,15)=4327 LC(p, 60 )=1774 LC

Q (h,30)=50

LC(m, 60 )=456 LC(r,60)=1276

[45] LC(r , 5)=18, 200

[46] LC(gpg, 2)=300 LC (m, 5 )=6247 LC(r , 5)=18, 200

C

3 H4N acrylonitrile 2,000 [40] LC(gpg,240)=576 LC(r, 240)=500

cof

2 carbonyl fluoride 750 [41] LC(r , 60 )=360 no2 nitrogen dioxide 5000 500 [42] EC(m, 5)=2500 EC(m,30)=700

[43] EC(r , 5)=5000 EC(r,30)=300

[45] LC(m, 5)=831 LC(r,5)=1880

C

3 H

50 acrolein 750 300 [40] LC(m, 360 )=66 LCg (p, 10 )=153

[47] LC(p, 5) 505 to 1025 ch

2o formaldehyde 250 [40] LCQ (r,240)=250

[46] LC(r , 30 )=250 LC(r , 240 )=830 (? ?

)

[41] LC( cat , 480 )=700 LC(m, 120 )=700

S°2 sulfur dioxide 500 [40] rodents poor; LCg (m, 300 )=6000

[46] LC(var.,5) 600 to 800 HCN hydrogen cyanide 280 135 [48] LC(r , 5)=570 LC(r,30)=110

[45] LC(r , 5)=503 LC(m,5)=323

[46] LC(h, 30 ) =135 LC(h,5) 280

C

9H60-N- toluene diisocyanate = 100 [40] LC(gpg,240)=13 LC (rbt , 180 )=1500

LC(r , 360 )=600 LC(m,240)=10

[46] LC(m, r , rbt , gpg , 240 )=9 . 7 to 13.9 COCi

2 phosgene 50 90 [40] rec. 50 ppm short exp.

[49] LC(h, 30 ) 90 C

4F

8 perfluoroisobutylene 28 6 [40] LC(r , 10 )=17 LC(r , 5)=28

Notes

:

EC - concentration for effect

LCO - concentration at which first lethal effects are observed
Oxygen deprivation is a special case of gas toxicity. Data on oxygen

deprivation alone, without any other combined gas effects, suggest that

incapacitation occurs when oxygen levels drop to approximately 10% [46].

Exposure to decreased oxygen levels alone is very unlikely in fire, however.

More commonly expected is some diminution in oxygen levels (although it can be

argued that any significant reduction in oxygen is always accompanied by

temperatures in excess of survivable levels), together with the presence of CO,

C02 , and other toxic species. Such combinations have, in general, not been

explored, although a few experimental points are available [48]

Currently,

the potential effects of reduced oxygen are not addressed in either the FED or Ct parameters discussed below.

Toxicity from , fire atmospheres can result not only from gases, but also

from solid aerosols, or from material adsorbed onto soot particles. Data in

this field are almost non-existent [56]

6.12.6.1 Fractional Effective Dose (FED)

Researchers at CFR [57] and at the Southwest Research Institute (SwRI)

[58] have been exploring the hypothesis that the observed effect of the

exposure of animals (and humans) to the products produced by burning materials

can be explained by the impact of a small number of the gases actually released

during combustion. That is that, while there are hundreds of compounds that

can be identified, the effect is caused by only a few (N) , key gases. By

investigating the effect of exposure to these key gases, singly and in

combination, a predictive model can be constructed. Thus, this model is

referred to as the N-Gas model.

Once such a predictive model is produced, a material is tested in a Toxicity Screening Protocol, measuring the time -dependant concentrations of the

gases included in the model. The model is used to predict the observed result,

with a successful prediction indicative of the material's toxicity being only

from those gases. If the prediction is unsuccessful, there are other gases of

importance which would then be identified, studied in pure form, and included

in the N-gas model. In this way, the model would be extended until the

combustion toxicity of most important materials can be properly predicted for a range of combustion conditions

The first version of such a model has been derived from the pure gas

studies of Levin, et al . . and Hartzell, et al . [57,58]. It includes the thre«

gases CO, C02

, and HCN, combining their effect in a parameter called Fractional

Effective Dose (FED) which is dimensionless and is defined as lethal at a value

of one. The hypothesis of FED states that the total observed effect equals the

sum of the effects of each of the component parts. That is, if one receives

50% of the lethal dose of CO and 50% of the lethal dose of HCN, a lethality

will occur. This has, in fact, been demonstrated by Levin, et al. , for these

two gases [48]. Simply stated then, FED is the sum of the effects of each of

the gases toward the total effect on the exposed person.

177
(ludd 0001- x) NOHVH1N30NOQ 00

I

I

1

I

on

c-1 <

1

V3X

C=J

1

N’

>

33>

2
Since it is the major combustion product implicated in fire deaths, CO

was the first gas studied in a long series of pure gas experiments. Rats were

exposed to varying concentrations of pure CO for various times , and the

concentrations necessary to produce deaths of 50% of the exposed animals (the

LC 50 ) for each exposure time was determined. The plot of these data (figure 6-

13), shows that the curve has two asymptotes; an exposure time (about 1 min)

below which no effect is seen for any concentration, and a concentration (about

1700 ppm) below which no effect is seen for any time. In the former case, this

would represent such physiological effects as breath holding and the time

required for the gas to be transferred to the blood and then to the tissues.

In the latter case, this represents an exposure concentration for which the

equilibrium concentration of COHb in the blood is below the level which causes

a lethality [48].

To account, for these effects in the N-Gas model, a linear regression was

performed on the curve of CO concentration versus 1/time. After adjusting the

constants for a best fit to the data available and maintaining appropriate

significant figures, this results in the following equation:

(Cco - 1700) t - 80000 (8)

where C co is the CO concentration in ppm and t is the exposure time for

lethality at that concentration. Note that the threshold concentration is

included but that the minimum exposure time for effect is zero as a conservative assumption.

The FED. concept states that the effect is the dose received (dose is the

time integral of the concentration) divided by the critical dose to produce the

effect. As shown in figure 6-13, the critical dose is not constant, but rather

varies with concentration. Thus, equation 8 is used within the -FED calculation

to determine the critical dose at the particular incremental concentration (see

figure 6-14 [48] )

Following the work with CO, the effect of C02 on the observed CO toxicity

was studied. The result of this work (shown in figure 6-15 [39]) was the

observation that the "effective toxicity" of CO increases linearly with

increasing C02 concentration, doubling at a level of 5% (50000 ppm) . The

physiological effects of the C02 are to increase the respiration rate and

reduce the blood pH, producing a metabolic acidosis.

'<*«? These data were used to produce a C02 "correction" to the CO term in the

calculation of FED whereby the denominator is multiplied by the following

factor

[100,000 - C co /100,000] (9)

2 where the C02 concentration is in ppm. While the data show this effect diminishing above 5% C02

, the model holds the correction constant at 5% and above as a conservative assumption. Also note that the data were only taken at 30 min

exposure times. Preliminary data on shorter times indicates that C02 may have

no effect, probably due to the fact that the acidosis takes long times to

179
develop. Thus, in the absence of complete data, the conservative assumption is

made that the effect holds for all times.

Finally, HCN and the combination of CO and HCN were studied. The data on

HCN [59] showed that the lethal dose ( time- integral of concentration) was

relatively constant at a value of 3100 ppm-min for exposure times from 2 to 30

min. Thus, this value is used in the HCN term of the FED calculation. The

data on CO and HCN combinations showed that the effects are directly additive

[48] (again for 30 min exposures). This is not surprising since they both act

to reduce the transfer of oxygen to the tissues; CO by tying up the hemoglobin

so that it -cannot carry the oxygen, and HCN by preventing the utilization of

the oxygen by the tissues

.

The resulting equation for FED, which represents the current N-Gas model

(N=3) is as follows:

At

C

CO {80,000/(CCO

- 1700)} {(100,000 - C

CQ )/100,000)

C

HCN

At

3100

( 10 )

where C co , C co2 , and CHCN are the average concentrations over the time interval

(ppm) and At is the length of the time interval (min)

.

The predictive capability of equation 10 was tested against the material

toxicity data included in the NBS Toxicity Screening Protocol report [60].

First, the average gas concentration data provided in the report was used,

assuming a constant value throughout the 30 min exposure period (i.e. a square

wave exposure) . The equation successfully predicted the observed results of 14

materials, with two more within 10%. Levin proposed an equation for predicting

the interactions of these same gases for 30 minute, square-wave exposures only

[48], which successfully predicts the results of the same 16 materials plus

flaming red oak. The reason for equation 10 falling 30% short on red oak is

currently unclear.

Next, the exposure time- independent nature of equation 10 was tested

against the data reported by Hartzell, et al. , for two ramped exposures to CO

only [61]

.

The equation predicted the results of the slower ramp within the

standard deviation stated and predicted a somewhat shorter time to death for

the faster ramp.

180
N0I1VH1N30N00

FIG

.

6-14

FRACTIONAL

EFFECTIVE

DOSE
(%) aaixoia Noaavo

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

CARBON

MONOXIDE

(ppm)
Table 6-23

Predictions from Average Gas Concentrations

Predicted FED Predicted

Observed at 30 min. Results

Material Mode * Deaths Levin Bukewski Levin Bukowski

ABS F W 1.21 1.3 Y Y

NF P 1.62 1.3 Y Y DFIR F • W 1.19 1.0 Y Y NF W,P 0.67 0.4 N N FPU F W 0.53 N N

NF P 0.29 — N N FPU/FR F W,F 0.95,1. 17* 0.9 N/Y N NF None 0.1 — Y Y MOD F W,P 1.22,1.73 1.4 Y Y

NF w 1.67 2.1 Y Y PPS F W,P 1.04 0.9 Y N

NF w 1.10 1.1 Y Y

PSTY F w 0.37 — N N

NF None 0.02 ~ Y Y

FVC F P 0.28 — N N

NF P 0.15 -- N N FVCZ F W,P 1.26,1.57 1.4 Y Y

NF P 1.66 1.4 Y Y Redo F w 1.03 0.7 Y N

NF p 0.61 0.3 N . ^ R RFV F w 1.27 1.4 Y Y

NF None 0.72,0.84 0.6 Y Y Wool F W,P 1.03,1.04 1.0 Y Y NF W,P 1.73,2.42 2.1 Y Y

Left value is for within-exposure deaths only and right value includes post- exposure deaths

Cannot be predicted since the avg CO concentration does not exceed the threshold values in equation 10
Table 6-24

Prediction of Ramped CO Exposure

Linear

RAMP

Observed Predicted

Lethality Time (min) Lethality Time ('Min')

to 9500 ppm in 10 min 22.8 + 3.5 16.5

to 7500 ppm in 30 min 43.9 + 13.9 33.3

Table 6-25

Prediction from Time -Varying Gas Concentrations

Material Mode

Observed

Deaths

Predicted FED

at 30 min

Time

FED=1

ABS F W 1.0 30

NF P 1.7 21

DFIR F W 1.0 30

MOD F W,P 1.7 17

NF w 2.3 14

WOOL NF W,p 3.3 10

184
Since the gas data reported in the NBS report were averages over the 30

minutes while, in fact, they increased exponentially over some finite time in

the experiment, the actual gas analyzer data from the tests of four materials

were obtained and input into the equation. The results showed that, for

materials which produced only within- exposure fatalities (except M.0D,NF), the

predicted FED reached unity (lethal) at 30 min. For materials which produced

some or all post-exposure fatalities, the predicted FED reached unity earlier,

in some cases, as early as 10 min. This would indicate that this is the time

at which a lethal dose was received, even though the death occurred later. The

details of these comparisons are provided in tables 6-23 to 6-25.

• 6.12.6.2 Species Ct

A second, independent indicator of toxicity is provided as species Ct,

computed in the FAST model. This parameter represents the time -integrated

exposure to the mass concentration of all of the mass of fuel lost within the

structure and is thus a concentration- time product (hence the name Ct) . The

units are gram-minutes per cubic meter. The lethality of smoke from most

common building materials is 900 g-min/m3

, so this can be used as a reference

value. Where materials more or less toxic are considered, this reference value

should be varied accordingly (e.g., by factors of ten).

Species Ct is calculated within the FAST transport model as a means of

estimating the relative toxicity of the combustion products produced by the

burning items without the need for extensive input data [62]

The concept of

Ct evolved from the NBS Toxicity Screening Protocol [60] in the following way.

In the screening test, the animals are placed in an enclosure of known

volume, which is connected to a furnace in which the material" -is burned. The

mass of fuel lost during the experiment is divided by the chamber volume to

obtain a mass concentration of "fuel vapors" to which the animals are exposed

for a specified time. Multiplying the mass concentration by the time gives the

"exposure dose" or a concentration- time product. Expressed mathematically:

Ct Y p dt

0

Where f ; -1 in the equation of section 6 .

mass fraction of the layer and p is its density.

2 and Y is the corresponding

In a similar manner, Ct is calculated in the FAST model by taking the

cumulative mass of fuel lost and distributing it into the upper layers in each

of the rooms according to the calculated mass flows through the defined

openings. The volumes of the layers are also calculated as a function of time,

so a mass concentration of "fuel vapors" is obtained. This concentration is

integrated over time to produce a concentration- time oroduct, or Species Ct

[63].

185
We suggest that a reference value for lethality of 900 g-min/m3 be used

for materials of "ordinary" toxicity. Several methods have been suggested for

categorizing materials into classes which generally vary in LC50 by factors of

ten (fig. 6-16 [64]). Thus, we suggest that, when the material in question

falls into a class above or below "ordinary", the reference value of Ct be

adjusted by a factor of ten (e.g. for a material one class more toxic, use a value of 90 for the lethal level)

.

6.12.6.3 Incapacitation

Most of the published toxicity data is for lethality since incapacitation

is often subjective in terms of an indicator of its occurrence. Thus, it is

suggested that valuds of 1/3 to 1/2 of the lethal values of FED and Ct be used

as incapacitation indicators [65] in the absence of better data. This

reference also includes a discussion of the various methods of determining the

occurrence of incapacitation in animals. Also, it should be understood that

the term incapacitation itself is subject to some interpretation, since it may

be used to indicate the lack of physical ability to move (walk, crawl) or the

mental ability to decide to move.

186
CONCENTRATION - RESPONSE

MUCH

TOXIC

WOOD

0J

more

THAN

1.0

MORE

THAN

TOXIC

WOOD

10.0 .

AS

AS

TOXIC

WOOD

1000.0

Each point represents the amount of material (gram on the X axis) which produced

sufficient smoke to kill fCKr of the animals <LC50> and the time (minutes on the Y axis) required to

kill 509c of the animals (LT50) using that amount of material. Reading the graph vertically each material is classified in terms of potency while each material is classified in terms of onset of action by

reading horizontally. To combine both, parallel quadrants separate class A. B. C. and D.

FIG. 6-16 EXAMPLE OF A TOXICITY GRADING SCHEME BY ORDER OF MAGNITUDE

OF OBSERVED EFFECT
References

1. Malek, D.E., Stock, M.F., and Alarie, Y. , Escape Performance Evaluation

under Intoxicating Gases , paper presented at the Fifth Expert Meeting of

the Tripartite Cooperative Study Group on the Toxicity of Combustion

Products, National Bureau of Standards (1986).

2. Hagglund, B., Janssens, R. , and Onnermark, B., Fire Development in

Residential Rooms after Ignition from Nuclear Explosions, FOA C20016-

D6(A3), Forsvarets Forskningsanstalt , Stockholm (1974).

3. Fang, J.B., and Breese, J.N., Fire Development in Residential Basement

Rooms (NBSIR 80-2120) . [U.S.] Nat. Bur. Stand. (1980).

4. Martin, S.B., and Wiersma, S.J., An Experimental Study of Flashover

Criteria for Compartment Fires, Project PYC 6496, Report PRC No. P-77-3-

1. SRI International, Menlo Park, CA; prepared for the Products

Research Committee (1979)

.

5. Babrauskas , V., Combustion of Mattresses Exposed to Flaming Ignition

Sources, Part I. Full-Scale Tests and Hazard Analysis (NBSIR 77-1290).

[U.S.] Nat. Bur. Stand. (1977).

6. Fang, J.B., Fire Performance of Selected Residential Floor Constructions

Under Room Burnout Conditions (NBSIR 80-2134). [U.S.] Nat. Bur. Stand.

(1980).

7. Babrauskas, V., and Williamson, R.B., Post- Flashover Compartment Fires:

Basis of a Theoretical Model, Fire and Materials . 3 . 1-7 (1979).

8. Alpert, R.L., et al. , Influence of Enclosures on Fire Growth, Volume 1:

Test Data (FMRC Reports, Serial Nos. 0A0R2.BU-0 through 8). Factory

Mutual Research Corp .

,

Norwood, MA (1977).

9. Simms, D.L., and Hinkley, P.L., Protective Clothing against Flames and

Heat (Special Report No. 3). Joint Fire Research Organization, HMSO,

London (1960)

.

10. Moritz, A.R. , Henriques , F.C., jr., Dutra, F.R., and Weisiger, J.R.,

Studies of Thermal Injury, Archives of Pathology . 43, 466-488 (1947)

.

11. Bond, H. , ed. , Fire and the Air War . Chapter 8, Fire Casualties of the

German Attacks, National Fire Protection Assn., Boston (1946).

12. Blockley, W.V.

,

and Taylor, C.L., Human Tolerance Limits for Extreme

Heat, Heating . Pining . and Air Conditioning . 21 . 111-116 (May 1949).

13. Zapp , J.A., jr., Fires, Toxicity and Plastics, pp . 58-74 in Physiological

and Toxicological Aspects of Combustion Products : International Svmpo

-

sium . National Academy of Sciences, Washington (1976).

188
14. Crane, C.R., Human Tolerance Limit to Elevated Temperature: An Empirical

Approach to the Dynamics of Acute Thermal Collapse (Memorandum Report

AAC-114-78-2) . Federal Aviation Administration, Aviation Toxicology

Laboratory, Oklahoma City (1978).

15. Leppaluoto, J., et al. , Strong Heat Exposure and Adenohypophyseal Hormone

Secretion in Man, Hormone and Metabolic Research . Z> 439-440 (1975)

16. Kosunen, K.J., et al. , Plasma Renin Activity, Angiotensin II, and

Aldosterone during Intense Heat Stress, J. AppI . Physiology . 41 . 323=327

(1976).

17. Bell, C.R.

Heat, Hot Work, in Encyclopedia of Occupational Health and

Safety , v.l, McGraw-Hill, New York (1972).

18. Veghte, J.H., and Webb, P. , Clothing and Tolerance to Heat (WADC Technical Report 57-759). Wright Air Development Center, Wright-Patterson AFB

(1957).

19. Operation School Burning , p. 269. National Fire Protection Assn., Boston

(1959).

20. Budnick, E.K. , Mobile Home Living Room Fire Studies: The Role of

Interior Finish (NBSIR 78-1530). [U.S.] Nat. Bur. Stand. (1978).

21. Henriques , F.C., jr., Studies of Thermal Injury, Part V. , Arch . Path . 43,

489-502 (1947).

22. Handler, E. , Crosbie, R. , and Hardy, J.D., Measurement of the Heating of

the Skin during Exposure to Infrared Radiation, ASME - Paper 57-SA-33

(1957).

23. Stoll, A.M.and Greene, L.C., Relationship between Pain and Tissue

Damage due to Thermal Radiation, J. AppI . Physiol . 14, 373-382 (1959).

24. Stoll, A.M.

Heat Transfer in Biotechnology, pp . 65-141 in Adv. Heat

Transfer . 4 (1967)

25. Stoll, A.M.

and Chianta, M.A.Method and Rating System for Evaluation

of Thermal Protection, Aerospace Medicine . 40, 1232-1238 (1969) . <>*

26. Derksen, W.L., Monahan, T.I., and deLhery, G.P., The Temperatures

Associated with Radiant Energy Skin Burns, pp . 171-5 in Temperature -

- Its

Measurement and Control in Science and Industry . 3, Part III (1963)

27. Buettner, K. , Effects of Extreme Heat and Cold on Human Skin, II. Surface

Temperature, Pain and Heat Conductivity in Experiments with Radiant Heat,

J. of AppI . Physiology . 3, 703-713 (1951).

28. Hardy, J.D., Thresholds of Pain and Reflex Contraction as Related to

Noxious Stimulation, J. of AppI . Physiology . 5., 725-739 (1953) .

189
29. Parker, J.F., jr. , and West, V.R.

,

Bioastronautics Data Book . NASA SP3006, Scientific and Technical Information Office, NASA (1973).

30. Dinman, B.D.

,

J. American Medical Assn . 235 . 2874-5 (1976).

31. Hasemi, Y. , and Shigekawa, K. , Radiation Tolerance of People in Big

Fires, Bull . of Jan . Assn , of Fire Science and Engineering . 31 (1), 7-14

(1981).

32. Braun, E. , Cobb, D. , Cobble, V.B.

,

Krasny, J.F., and Peacock, R.D.,

Measurement of the Protective Value of Apparel Fabrics in a Fire

Environment, J. of Consumer Product Flammability , vol 7, no 1, 15-25,

March 1980.

33. Steiner, A.J., Method of Fire-Hazard Classification of Building Materials, ASTM Bulletin , pp . 19-22 (March 1943).

34. Jin, T. , Visibility through Fire Smoke, Report of Fire Research Institute

of Japan . Part 2: No. 33, 31-48 (1971). Part 5: No. 42, 12-18 (1975).

35. Jin, T. , Visibility through Fire Smoke, pp. 100-153 in Main Reports on

Production, Movement and Control of Smoke in Buildings , -Japanese Association of Fire Science and Engineering (1974)

.

36. Malhotra, H.L., Movement of Smoke on Escape Routes, Part 1 - Instrumentation and Effect of Smoke on Visibility (Fire Res. Note 651). Joint Fire

Research Organisation, Borehamwood (1967)

.

37. Berl, W.G., and Halpin, B.M., Fire-Related Fatalities: An Analysis of

Their Demography, Physical Origins, and Medical Causes ,^-pp. 26-54 in Fire

Standards and Safety (ASTM STP 614), A.F. Robertson, ed. , American

Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia (1976).

38. Harland, W.A.

,

and Woolley, W.D.

,

Fire Fatality Study- -University of

Glasgow (Information Paper IP 18/79). Building Research Establishment,

Borehamwood (1979)

.

39. Levin, B.C.

,

Paabo, M. , Gurman, J.L., Harris, S.E., and Braun, E. , Toxicological Interactions between Carbon Monoxide and Carbon Dioxide, to

be published in Toxicology . (1987)

.

40. Sax, N.I., Dangerous Properties of Industrial Materials . Van Nostrand

Reinhold, New York (1984)

.

41. American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists, Inc., Documentation of the Threshold Limit Values . ACGIH, Cincinnati (1980)

.

42. Sakurai, T. , Toxic Gas Test by the Several Pure and the Mixture Gas,

paper presented at the Third Expert Meeting of the Canada- Japan-United

States Trilateral Cooperative Study on Fire Gas Toxicity, Ottawa (1984).

190
43. Nishimaru, Y. , Study on Evaluation of Toxicity of Gas using Pure Gas,

Seventh Joint Panel Meeting of the U.J.N.R. Panel on Fire Research and

Safety (NBSIR 85-3115), N.H. Jason and K. Davis, eds . , [U.S.] Nat. Bur.

Stand. (1985)

44. Hartzell, G.E., et al. , Intoxication of Rats by Carbon Monoxide in the

Presence of an Irritant, J. Fire Sciences . 3 , (1985).

45. Higgins, E.A. , Fiorica, V. , Thomas, A. A. , and Davis, H.V. , Acute Toxicity

of Brief Exposure to HF, HGi, N02 , and HCN with and without CO, Fire

Technology . 8, 120=130 (1972).

46. Kimmerle, G., Aspects and Methodology for the Evaluation of Toxicological

Parameters during Fire Exposure, JFF/Combustion Toxicology . 1, 4-51

(1974).

47. Kaplan, et al. , A Research Study of the Assessment of Escape Impairment

by Irritant Combustion Gases in Postcrash Aircraft Fires (DOT/FAA/CT84/16) , Federal Aviation Administration, Atlantic City (1984)

48. Levin, B.C., et al. , Effects of Exposure to Single or Multiple Combinations of the Predominant Toxic Gases and Low Oxygen Atmospheres Produced

in Fires, Fundamental and Apt) lied Toxicology (1987)

49. Clayton, G.D.and Clayton, F.E., eds., Patty' s Industrial Hygiene and

Toxicology , vols. 2a=2c, Wiley- Interscience , New York (1982).

50. Gaume, J.G., Bartek, P. , Rostami , H.J. , Experimental Results on Time of

Useful Function (TUF) after Exposure to Mixtures of Serious Contaminants

Aerospace Medicine . 42, 987-990 (1971).

51 . Pryor, A.J., Johnson, D.E.Jackson, N.N.Hazards of Smoke and Toxic

Gases Produced in Urban Fires, JFF/Combustion Toxicology . 2, 64-112

(1975).

52. Wohlslagel, J., DiPasquale, L.C., and Vernot, E.H.

Toxicity of Sold

Rocket Motor Exhaust: Effects of HCi , HF and Alumina on Rodents, J.

Combustion Toxicology . 3, 61-70 (1976)

53. Saito, F. , Evaluation of the Toxicity of Combustion Products, J. Combust

tion Toxicology . 4, 32-55 (1977).

54. Sakurai, T. , Toxic Gas Test by the Several Pure and the Mixture Gas,

paper presented at the Fifth Expert Meeting of the Tripartite Cooperative

Study Group on the Toxicity of Combustion Products, Nat. Bur. Stand.

(1986).

55. Tsuchiya, Y. , On the Non-Proven Synergism in Inhalation Toxicity of Fire

Gas, paper presented at the Fifth Expert Meeting of the Tripartite

Cooperative Study Group on the Toxicity of Combustion Products, Nat. Bur.

Stand. (1986)

191
56. Stone, J.P., Hazlett, R.N. , Johnson, J.E., and Carhart, H.W. , The

Transport of Hydrogen Chloride by Soot from Burning Polyvinyl

Chloride, J. Fire & Flamm . 4, 42-51 (1973).

57. Babrauskas , V. , Levin B.C., and Gann, R. G. , A New Approach to Fire

Toxicity Data for Hazard Evaluation, ASTM Standardization News . Sept.

,

1986.

58. Hartzell, G.E., Priest, D.N., and Switzer, W.G.

,

Mathematical Modeling of

Toxicological Effects of Fire Gases, pp. 1056-1060 in Proc. of the First

Inti . Svmn . on -Fire Safety Science . P.J. Pagni, and C.E. Grant, eds . , Hemisphere Publishing Corp., New York (1986).

59. Levin, B.C., Procell, L. , Gurman, J.L., Paabo, M. , Bier, L. , Braun, E.

,

and Newball, H.H.

,

Physiological Response of Rats to Acute Inhalation

Exposures of Hydrogen Cyanide, to be published (1986).

60. Levin, B.C., Fowell, A.J., Birky, M.M.

,

Paabo, M. , Stolte, A., and Malek,

D. , Further Development of a Test Method for the Assessment of the Acute

Inhalation Toxicity of Combustion Products (NBSIR 82-2532). [U.S.] Nat.

Bur. Stand. (1982).

61. Hartzell, G.E., et al.

,

Mathematical Modeling of Intoxication of Rats by

Carbon Monoxide and Hydrogen Cyanide, J. Fire Sciences . 3., (1985).

62. Jones, W.W.

,

A Multicompartment Model for the Spread of Fire, Smoke, and

Toxic Gases, Fire Safety Journal . 9. 55-79 (1985)..

63. Bukowski, R.W.

,

Quantitative Determination of Smoke Toxicity HazardPractical Approach for Current Use, pp. 1089-1100 in Proc . of the First

Inti . Svtttd . on Fire Safety Science . P.J. Pagni, and C.E. Grant, eds.,

Hemisphere Publishing Corp., New York (1986).

64. Alarie, Y. and Anderson, R.C., Toxicologic Classification of Thermal

Decomposition Products of Synthetic and Natural Polymers, Toxicology and

Applied Pharmacology . 57. 181-188 (1981)

.

65. Kaplan, H.L. and Hartzell, G.E., Modeling of Toxicological Effects of

Fire Gases: I. Incapacitating Effects of Narcotic Fire Gases, J. of Fire

Sciences . vol. 2, no. 4, 286-305 (1984).

192
6.12.7 Program TENAB

6 12.7.1 Introduction

The FORTRAN program FAST predicts the conditions of the upper and lower

layers of each room in a building as a fire, begun in a particular room,

progresses. The BASIC program EXITT, determines for each occupant of a burning building the optimal escape route according to knowledge about

occupant behavior and building layout. The purpose of TENAB is to estimate

the hazard for each occupant according to the room conditions encountered

along the escape route. The hazard is assessed by determining the fractional

effective dose of gases (FED), the flux (FLUX), integrated concentration- time

product (Ct) and the temperatures (TEMP) to which each occupant is exposed.

When any of the hazards exceed certain limits, then the occupant is considered

either incapacitated or dead.

The first section discusses the general logic underlying TENAB. The

second section discusses how the various hazards are computed and the third

section briefly describes the output generated by TENAB.

6.12.7.2 Logic

From EXITT, TENAB obtains for each time step, the location of each

occupant in the building. From FAST, TENAB obtains for each time step the gas

concentrations, interface height, temperature, flux and integrated

concentration- time product for each room of the building. At each time

interval, (ti . 1 ,t

i ), TENAB determines for each occupant of the building the

current room being occupied and the layer (upper or lower) to which the

occupant is being exposed. From this information, the average layer (upper or lower as appropriate) temperature of the room, the fractional-'effective dose,

the flux and integrated concentration- time product are computed. If the FED,

Ct, or temperature for a particular occupant exceed certain "critical"

incapacitation or lethal levels (which can be supplied by the user)then the

occupant is deemed incapacitated or killed by the appropriate cause. If the

flux at time ti seconds exceeds the corresponding Derksen Curve value then the

occupant is deemed incapacitated. When an occupant exits the building or becomes incapacitated or dead, the program records the time, the room, the

occupant's condition (incapacitated, dead, or alive), the cause (if

applicable) and the levels of FED, Ct, flux and temperature. At the final

time (the end of the simulation), the program records for each occupant, the*-

final time, the room occupied at the final time, and the levels of FED, Ct,

flux, and temperature. The program then prints out the information on each

person to a disk file, the screen, or the printer.

193
6.12.7.3 Computation of FED, Ct, Flux and Temperature

A discussion of the selection of the critical values used and the

derivation of the equations for FED and Ct are contained in the section of

this report titled Tenability Limits.

ACCUMCTk (ti

) ACCUMFLUXk (ti

) AVGTEMPk (tt

) CO ( room , tL , layer>)

C02 (room, tL

, layer)

CT(roora,ti .layer)

DELTAT

FEDk (ti

) FEDCOk (ti

) FEDHCNk (ti

) FLUX (room,

t

i

, layer)

HCN(room,ti .layer)

INTERFACE (room, tL

) TEMP(room,ti .layer)

The total integrated- time concentration accumulated

by person k by time tL (g-min/m3

) The total accumulated flux to which person k has

been exposed by time ti (KW-min/m2

) The average temperature person k is expose to at

time tL (degrees Centigrade)

Amount of carbon monoxide at time tL in a particular

layer of a particular room (ppm)

Amount of carbon dioxide at time ti in a particular

layer of a particular room (ppm)

The integrated- time concentration at time tL in a particular layer of a particular room (g-min/m3

) The length of the time interval (t i . 1 ,ti

) (minutes)

Total fractional effective dose due to gases by time

Fractional effective dose due to carbon monoxide by

time tL Fractional effective dose due to hydrogen cyanide by

time ti The flux at time ti in a particular layer of a particular room (KW/m2

) Amount of hydrogen cyanide at time t^ ' in a particular layer of a particular room (ppm)

The interface height at time ti in a^ particular room

(m)

The temperature at time ti in a particular layer of

a particular room (degrees Centigrade)

The i-th time step (seconds)

The following computations are made for occupant k during time (t i .

x

)

.

The room, r, occupied during the time interval (ti _ 1 ,t i

) is determined

by examining the data provided by EXITT. The room layer determination is as follows:

If INTERFACE(r,ti

) >1.5: person

If 1.0 <- INTERFACE ( r , tt

) Ai h-1

Ln is exposed to the lower layer

If 1.0 O INTERFACE (r,

)

<-1.5

is exposed to the upper layer

If INTERFACE ( r ,

t

i

) <1.0: person

k is exposed to the lower layer

and (TEMP(r,ti

) >- 50): person k

and (TEMP(r,ti

) < 50): person k

k is exposed to the upper layer

194
The fractional effective dose is determined by two components; the

fractional effective dose due to carbon monoxide (CO) and carbon dioxide

(C02 ), FEDCOk (ti ), and the fractional effective dose due to hydrogen cyanide

(HCN) , FEDHCNk (t.).

FEDk (ti

) - FEDCOk (tt) + FEDHCNk (t^ . The fractional effective dose due to CO and C02 is determined as follows: '

If ( CO ( room, , layer) -0): FEBCO^^) - FEDCOk (ti = 1

) Otherwise

If HCNAVG > ,0: COTH - 1300

If HCNAVG - 0: COTH - 1700

If C02 AVG <- 50000:

DCO - COAVG*(80000/(COAVG-COTH))*(1-C02 AVG*. 00001)

If C02 AVG > 50000:

DCO - C0AVG*( 80000/ (COAVG- COTH) )*( . 5)

If DCO < 0 and FEDC0k (ti

) <» 0:

FEDCOk (ti

) - FEDCOk (ti

„

1

) If DCO > 0 or FEDCOk (ti

) > 0:

FEDCOk (ti

) - FEDCQk (ti _ 1 )+COAVG*DELTAT/DCO

where

COAVG — [C0(room,. ti „ 1

, layer) + C0(room, tL , layer) ]/2

C02 AVG * [C02 (room, t1 . 1

, layer) + C02 (room, t1

, layer) ]/2

HCNAVG — [HCN(room, tt ± „ x

y layer) + HCN(room, ti , layer) ]/2

COTH — carbon monoxide threshhold.

The fractional effective dose due to HCN is determined as follows:

If HCNAVG - 0: FEDHCNk (ti

) - FEDHCNk ( ZL _ 1

) Otherwise

FEDHCNk (tL

) - FEDHCNk (t^) + HCNAVG*DELTAT/3100

The average temperature is determined as follows

AVGTEMP - [TEMP(r,ti . 1

, layer) + TEMP(r ,

i

, layer) ] /2

The accumulated integrated- time concentration is determined as follows:

ACCUMCTk

(

i ) - ACCTJMCTk (ti . 1

) + [ CT(r , t. , layer) - CT(r , t

i _ x , layer) ]

. The accumulated flux is determined as follows:

ACCUMFLUXk (tL

) - ACCUMFLUXk (ti . 1

) +

[FLUX(r,

i _x

, layer) + FLUX(r ,

i

, layer) ] /2

195
Determination of a Person's State:

A person k's state (alive, incapacitated, or dead) at time ti is

determined by comparing the values of FEDk (ti ), AVGTEMPk

(

t

i

) , and ACCUMCTk (ti

) with corresponding incapacitation and lethality critical levels (which the

user may specify) or by comparing the ACCUMFLUXk

(

t

£

) with the total heat

required to cause burns (for incapacitation) . The incapacitation and

lethality critical levels are discussed in the tenability limits section

(6.12) of this report. When a person exceeds any critical level for the first

time the program records all the pertinent information for that person at time

. 6.12.7.4 Input from FAST

TENAB requires a "dump" file from a FAST run and, upon running TENAB,

the user will be prompted for the name of that file. . If a file name

corresponding to a non-existent file is input, the user will be informed that

no such file exists and will be prompted for another file name. If it is then

desired to halt TENAB, the user may enter a / for a file name, which aborts

the run and returns to the system.

6.12.7.5 Input from EXITT

TENAB requires input from an EXITT run corresponding to the FAST dump

file. The data may be entered from the terminal, in which case TENAB prompts

the user for the necessary information, or the data may be read from a disk

file created by the user or the EXITT program.

After being prompted for the FAST file name, the user will be prompted

for the name of the file created by the program EXITT. If ,txo. EXITT created

file exists the user should enter a return and he will then be prompted for

the user created file's name. If the user wishes to enter the data at the

terminal the user should enter the device name corresponding to the

keyboard/terminal (CON on the PC) . If the data is to be read from a user

created disk file the appropriate file name is input. If a file name

corresponding to a non-existent file is entered, the user will be informed

that no such file exists and will then be prompted for another file name. If

it is then desired to halt TENAB, the user may enter a / for a file name,

which aborts the run and returns to the system.

't

*

fr.12.7.6 Format for an EXITT Data File

The EXITT data file consists of 4 sections of which 2 are required and 2 are optional. The first section, which is required, is a single entry

consisting of the number of rooms in the floor plan upon which the EXITT run

was made. The second section, which is also required, consists of the data

corresponding to the escape routes taken by the occupants. The third section,

which is optional, consists of the mapping between the "FAST" rooms and the

"EXITT" rooms. (Since FAST is limited to at most 5 rooms, some rooms may be

grouped together as one room for FAST, but appear as separate rooms for

EXITT.) This third section is necessary if FAST and EXITT have been run with

a different number of rooms. If this is the case and this section is not

196
provided, TENA3 will prompt the user for the information. The fourth and last

section which is also optional, contains data on the threshold values for

incapacitation and lethality for Ct, temperature, and the fractional effective

dose. If this section is omitted, default values will be used.

The format for the EXITT data file is as follows:

The first section is just a single integer denoting the total number of

rooms, NR, in the floor plan. The second section, describing the escape routes

taken by the occupants is entered as ordered, integer quadruplets as follows:

Occupant No., Room No., Time entered the room (seconds), Height

i where: Occupant No. must be a positive integer,

Room No. must be a positive number between 1 and 1+no . of rooms in

the building,

Time entered must be non-negative and in seconds

Height entered is the distance in meters the occupant is from

the base floor (when a room has a loft or balcony) . It is

a non-negative floating point number (usually 0.0).

The maximum number of rooms visited by an occupant is 100. A zero entry

for time denotes the location of the occupant at the start of the fire.

The third section (optional) consists of NR integers, separated by

commas or spaces, which lie between 1 and the number of rooms with which FAST

was run. The row(s) would appear as follows:

Nx ,N2 ,N3

, . . . ,Nhr where: Ni represents to which FAST room the i-th room of

EXITT corresponds.

The last section of the file (optional) indicates whether the user wants

to specify his own critical levels for FED, Ct, or temperature for

incapacitation or lethality. The data values for the critical levels are to

be entered as ordered real triplets. The first triplet represents the

incapacitation level for FED, the incapacitation level for Ct, and the

incapacitation level for temperature. The second triplet represents the

lethality level for FED, the lethality level for Ct, and the lethality level

for temperature. An entry of -1. indicates that the user wishes to use the

default value.

In order for TENAB to know that an optional section is present one of

the following rows of data must immediately follow the second section.

1. The third and fourth sections are not present.

0 , 0 , 0 , 0 . 2. The third section is present but not the fourth.

- 1 , 0 , 0 , 0 . 3. The fourth section is present but not the third.

- 2 , 0 , 0 , 0 . 4. The third and fourth sections are both oresent.

- 3 , 0 , 0 , 0 .
An annotated sample data file is shown below (EXITT assumes 6 rooms and

FAST assumes 5 rooms):

61 , 1 , 0 , 0 . 2 , 2 , 0 , 0 . 1 , 2 , 120 , 0 . 1.3.600.0.

1.6.500.0.

2.3.720.0.

- 3 , 0 , 0 , 0 . 1 , 2 , 2 , 3 , 4,

5

-1. ,400. ,-l.

-1. ,-l. ,110.

(EXITT run with a floor plan of 6 rooms)

(person 1 in room 1 at time 0 seconds on base floor level)

(person 2 in room 2 at time 0 seconds on base floor level)

(person 1 in room 2 at time 120 seconds on base floor level)

(person 1 in room 3 at time 600 seconds on base floor level)

(person 1 in room 6 at time 500 seconds on base floor level)

(person 2 in room 3 at time 720 seconds on base floor level)

(indicates third and fourth sections follow)

(indicates that room 1 of EXITT corresponds to room 1 of FAST,

, room 2 of EXITT corresponds to room 2 of FAST,

room 3 of EXITT corresponds to room 2 of FAST,

room 4 of EXITT corresponds to room 3 of FAST,

room 5 of EXITT corresponds to room 4 of FAST,

room 6 of EXITT corresponds to room 5 of FAST)

(default value for FED & temperature, 400. for Ct incapacitation)

(default value for FED & Ct, 110. for temperature lethality)

If the data file does not contain the third section when it is necessary

(when the number of rooms for EXITT exceeds the number of rooms used for

FAST) , Tenab will prompt the user for the information relating the room

numbers of EXITT to the room numbers of FAST.

Note: Tenab assumes that the number of rooms for FAST is always less

than or equal to the number of rooms for EXITT and whenever FAST and

EXITT assume the same number of rooms , that room number i of FAST

corresponds to room number i of EXITT.

6.12.7.7 Entering EXITT Data from the Terminal

To enter the EXITT data from the terminal when running TENAB the user

needs to respond to the prompts. When prompted for the number of rooms, the

user keys in an integer value denoting the total number of rooms in the floor

plan upon which the escape routes are determined and hits the return key.

When prompted for the Occupant No., Room No., Time Entered 6c Height, the

user can key in the data by one of three formats

:

Occupant No., Room No., Time (seconds) .Height {Entries separated by commas

and line ended with a return)

or Occupant No. Room No. Time (seconds) Height {Entries separated by blank

spaces and line ended with a return)

198
or Occupant No

Room No.

Time

Height

{return key)

{return key)

{return key}

{return key}

The occupant number must be a positive integer. The room number must be

an integer between 1 and 1+number of rooms in the building. The time must be

a non=negative integer in seconds. The height from base floor level (as

occurs when there is a room with a loft or balcony) is a non~negative floating

point number (usually 0.0).

i To end the input of occupant information, the user enters three integer

zeros and a floating point zero (0,0, 0,0.0).

If the number of rooms entered in response to the first prompt is

different than that provided by the FAST data file, the user will be prompted

to enter the FAST room to which the i-th room of EXITT corresponds.

After the occupant and possibly the room information are entered, the

user will be prompted as to whether he wishes to set his own incapacitation

and lethality critical levels for FED, Ct, or temperature. If so, the user

hits the Y-key and the return key and is then prompted for the new value. The

user should then enter his critical value as a real number (with decimal

point) and hit the return key. If the default values are to be used, the user

need only hit the return key in response to the prompt for changing the

critical values.

After the user is prompted for the input FAST and EXITT file names , the

user is prompted for the name to be given to the output file. The user may

have the output written to disk by entering a valid file name, provided no file by that name already exists, or he may have the output routed directly to

the printer by entering the printer device name (PRN on the PC) , or to the

screen by entering the screen device name (CON on the PC)

The output from TENAB begins by listing the FAST and EXITT file names

used. Then TENAB writes out the EXITT data and the incapacitation and"

lethality critical levels for FED, Ct, and temperature.

The last part of the output is in tabular form. For each person, TENAB

outputs in time order the pertinent information corresponding to when a person's FED, Ct, temperature, or flux exceeded a critical level or when a person was able to exit the building. The pertinent information consists of

the time of the occurrence, the room (according to EXITT) of occurrence, the

condition of the person (dead or incapacitated) due to the occurrence, the

factor cause, and the values of FED, Ct, temperature, and flux at that time.

Information related to the final time (the occupant's condition at the end of

the simulation) is also recorded. A sample of the output is shown on the next

6.12.7.8 Output from TENAB

page.

199
INPUT FAST FILE

INPUT EXITT FILE

TENABS OUTPUT FILE

RANCH. FST

RANCH. EVA

RANCH. TEN

OCCUPANT 1 ROOM NUMBER ENTER TIME (S)

6 0

5 170

1 180

8 190

OCCUPANT 2 ROOM NUMBER ENTER TIME (S)

4 0

7 160

6 170

7 180

3 190

FACTORS INCAPACITATION !LEVEL LETHAL LEVEL

FED 0.5 1.0

CT (G-MIN/M3) 450.0 900.0

TEMP (C) 65.0 100.0

PERSON 1

TIME ROOM CONDITION CAUSE TEMP FLUX FED

' CT

(MIN)

1 . 6 INCAPACITATED TEMP

(C)

92.7

(KW-MIN/M2)

155.3 0.00---

(G-MIN/M3

)

1 . 1 . 6 DEAD TEMP 109.4 160.1 0.00 3.

2. 6 INCAPACITATED FLUX 123.6 221.4 0.01 4.

30. OUT FINAL TIME 27.0 225.4 0.02 9.

PERSON 2

TIME ROOM CONDITION CAUSE TEMP FLUX FED CT

(MIN)

3. 7 INCAPACITATED TEMP

(C)

171.2

(KW-MIN/M2)

0.2 0.00

(G-MIN/M3)

2.

3. 7 DEAD TEMP 171.2 0.2 0.00 2.

12. 3 INCAPACITATED FED 92.6 0.7 0.51 287.

15. 3 INCAPACITATED CT 81.3 0.7 0.77 450.

19. 3 DEAD FED 74.4 0.7 1.00 597.

25. 3 DEAD CT 62.5 o oo 1.47 903.

30. 3 FINAL TIME 52.3 o oo 1.87 1179.

200
CHAPTER 7. CONCLUDING REMARKS

HAZARD I is a prototype of a general purpose fire hazard assessment

method. The scope of this prototype, its data base and the example cases are

focussed on single family residential occupancies. Based on the perceptions of

and feedback from users of this product, and continued support for planned

research, expanded and improved versions of this system will be released

Expansions and improvements will include increased applicability of the current

procedure, improved usability, the ability to address additional building

features, and more accurate treatment of the fire itself and the effects of the

fire on people and their actions.

The scope of applicability of the system can be extended to additional

occupancies through expansion of the data base and example cases. The next

occupancies to be considered will probably be hotel/motel and health care (see

figure 7-1 ) . Improved usability will be guided by input from users, but will most

likely include additions that would eliminate most of the manual transfers of

data to the input program, FINPUT. Data base files would be accessed directly.

That is, material properties provided in the data base will be loaded

automatically by selecting the material by name from a list which appears on

the screen. If the desired material is not on the list, the current procedure

of entering the individual properties would be followed.

Additional building features that need to be addressed to extend the

method to larger buildings include vents in floors and ceilings and HVAG

systems. In a. fire, a building's HVAC system may distribute fire products to

some parts of the building faster than the fire would alone. A model of the

HVAC system will be developed and probably linked to or incorporated in the

smoke transport model.

The accuracy of the current procedure is limited by the fire being

treated as a free-burning fire uninfluenced by its surroundings, and by our

inability to quantify accurately the effects of fire on people and their

actions. Research is underway to better understand burning under ventilationlimited and post flashover conditions, and predict fire growth and spread, fuel

mass loss rate and combustion product generation rates under those conditions.

More research is also needed to better understand the effects of fire on humans

and their actions during the fire incident.

The ability to provide these and other improvements to the hazard

assessment technology will depend on the reception and support given to this

first effort. User feedback is crucial to the process of identifying the most

needed changes and we encourage such from all interested parties. Through this

process, research priorities can be established to address the needs of the

community in the most efficient manner. In addition, we challenge the research

community to review and comment on this effort. The gaps in knowledge

identified herein can then help guide their work toward resolving these issues.

201
FIRE

i

-AFlammable

Materials

Duct

Heating

Equipment

»

t

*

Electrical Fire

in

Wall

Closet >

X

In

Room

Waste Basket > X >

Xmas Tree > X

^ ^ •

Mattress X > <*

Grease/

Kitchen X > >

Cigarette/ Sofa X X

Ranch 2

Story

Town

House Hotel Office

Hospital

Mercantile Restaurant

Place

of

Assembly

Prison

Warehouse 1

ONianna

FIG.

7-1

MATRIX

OF

EXAMPLE

FIRE

SCENARIOS


NBSIR 85-3284

USER'S GUIDE FOR FAST

William Dt Walton

Steven R. Baer

Walter W. Jones

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

National Bureau of Standards

National Engineering Laboratory

Center for Fire Research

Gaithersburg, MD 20899

December 1985

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE, Malcolm Baldrige, Secretary

NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS, Ernest Ambler, Director
*
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

LIST OF FIGURES

Abstract © © ©

iv

1

L INTRODUCTION 2

1©1 SUMMARY OF THE MODEL FEATURES © . © © © © © © © 2

1 • 2 USING THE COMPUTER PROGRAM ©©©.©©©©©©©© 4

2© DESCRIPTION OF THE INPUT DATA ............. 4

21 Title and Timestep G

2© 2 Configuration Parameters • . © © © © 7

2 ©3 Floor Plan Data ................. 8

2© 4 Connections 9

2.5 Thermophysical Properties of Enclosing Surfaces © 10

2© 6 Fire Specifications ©©©..©©©.©..©©. 11

2 ©7 Species Production © © © © © » © . © © © © © © © « IS

2 e © Output F il@ ©*e©o©©oc©©©ce©©eo© 17

3.

DESCRIPTION OF THE OUTPUT ............. . © 18

3.1 Summary of Input Data ..©.©..©.©.©©© 18

3.1.1 Geometrical Data 18

3.1 ©2 Thermophysical Properties .« © © © © © © © 19

3©1.3 Fire Specifications .©..©.«©..©. 20

3© 2 Results of Calculations .©...©©..©.©. 20

4

REFERENCES 22

APPENDIX A: SAMPLE INPUT 25

APPENDIX B: SAMPLE OUTPUT 26

iii
LIST OF FIGURES

Page

Figure 1. Schematic of upper and lower layer control

volumes 23

Figure 2. Example of mass loss data for a specified

fire 24

iv
User's Guide for FAST

William Do Walton

Steven R „ Baer

Welter W 0 Jones

ABSTRACT

FAST is a raulticompartment zone type computer model which

predicts the smoke hazard development in each compartment based

on a description of the compartments end the £ir@o A FORTRAN

program has been written for the model., This user's guide

provides a detailed description o£ the data input requirements

and the output produced by version 17 ©£ the program « Also

included are sample program input and output

Key Words: compartment fires; computer programs; fire growth;

manuals; mathematical models; room fires; smoke; toxicity.

1
1 INTRODUCTION

In 1984 Walter W. Jones published a report describing a

computer model for the transport of fire, smoke and toxic gases

1 (FAST) Cl, 23 • The report describes the basic phenomena used in

the model and a computer program (FAST Version 15) which performs

the calculations. Although that report includes a sample input

data set, it does not provide information about the input format

and options. This user's guide supplements the initial report by

providing a detailed description of the program input and output,

as well as information on installing and running a slightly

revised version of the program, FAST 17. This user's guide does

not include a catalog of fire related materials property data. A

recent report by Gross C33 provides examples and sources for such

data

.

1.1 Summary of the Model Features

FAST is a multicompartment control volume (zone) type fire

model . It assumes that each room or compartment can be separated

into volumes in which the properties such as temperature and

pressure are relatively uniform. The two volumes of most

importance to the user are the hot upper layer, sometimes known

as the smoke layer, and the relatively cool lower layer. A

schematic of the upper and lower layer control volumes is shown

Figures in brackets indicate literature reference at the end of

this report.

2
in Figure 1. The primary purpose of FAST is to predict the

conditions in the two layers as a result of a fire.

FAST considers the fire to be a source of heat and

combustion products. The heat generation rate used by the

program is the result of multiplying an effective net heat of

combustion by a time varying rate of mass loss ('“burning rate’0 ) of the fuel. Both of these values are user specified. The FAST

model assumes that the fire burns at the rate specified by the

user regardless of the conditions in the room.

The product or species generation rates are user specified

inputs in terms of the rate a species is generated per unit mass

loss of fuel. The generation rates may vary as a function of

time. FAST has the ability to track a number of common fire

species such as oxygen* nitrogen* carbon dioxide* carbon monoxide

and smoke. As with the mass loss rate* the fire conditions do

not affect the user specified species generation rates.

Using the specified heat and product generation rates and

geometrical and thermophysical data* FAST solves equations for

the conservation of mass* momentum and energy plus heat

conduction and mixing within each control volume as a function of

time. The results are the thickness and temperature of* and

species concentration in* both the upper and lower layers in each

compartment. Also given are the heat transfer and mass flow

rates* and boundary surface temperatures.

3
1.2 Using the Computer Program

The FAST program consist of over 3000 lines of FORTRAN and

is believed to adhere fully to the FORTRAN 77 standard C43

The

program source code is supplied on either magnetic tape or disk

and includes information on installing the program. Users may

require assistance from their local computer systems staff in

installing the program. The procedure used to run the program

will depend on the installation at a particular site.

The FAST program is written for "batch input." An input

data file is prepared by the user with a text editor. This data

file is then assigned as input to the FAST program. FAST does

not prompt the user with questions concerning the input data.

The following section of this paper describes the structure of

the input data file.

2. DESCRIPTION OF THE INPUT DATA

The input must be grouped in the following order 1) Title

and time step, 2) Configuration parameters, 3) Floor plan data,

4) Connections, 5) Thermophysical properties of the enclosing

surfaces, 6) Fire specifications, 7) Species production, 3)

Output file. Although the above sequence of groups must be

followed, the sequence of the lines within the groups is not

significant. The number of lines in a given data set will vary

depending for example on the number of openings or the number of

species tracked. A sample input data file is given in

4
Appendix A. A number o£ parameters such as heat transfer and

flow coefficients have been set within the program as

constants £1,23

Each line of input consists of a label followed by on© or

more numerical values associated with that input variable . The

label must always begin in the first space of the line and be in

capital letters. If the label is less than five characters in

length, spaces must be added to the end of the label to complete

the required five character length. Following the label, the

first of the value® may start in any column and all values must

be separated by either a comma or a space. Values may contain

decimal points if needed. Units are standard SI units except

energy CkJ) and power (kW)

In the following examples, the

symbol *" is used to indicate a apace. The symbol 0 indicates the

number zero and the symbol 0 indicates the letter 0. FAST will

successfully run with the omission of some input lines or values.

These cases are indicated throughout this document.

5
2.1 Title end Timestep

VERSN

INPUT:

VERSN [Number] [Title]

EXAMPLE

VERSN^OIT^BUILDING XYZ

NOTES:

VERSN nuat be typed in to the first five spaces of the

line followed by two blank spaces in columns six and

seven and the number 017. CTitle] is optional and may

consist of letters, numbers, and/or symbols that may be

entered in the next 50 spaces and permits the user to

label each run.

TIMES

INPUT:

TIMES [Simulation time (sec)] [Print interval (sec)]

[Dump interval (sec)]

EXAMPLE

TIMES‘''360^30*' 10

NOTES:

[Simulation time] is the length of time over which the

simulation takes place. The maximum value for this

input is 86400 seconds (one day)

.

[Print interval] is the time interval between each

printing of the output values. In this example, the

output will be printed for every 30 seconds of the

simulation

.

[Dump interval] is the time interval between each

writing of the output to the dump file. See Section

2.3. In this example, data will be written to the dump

file for every ten seconds of the simulation. A zero

must be used if no dump file exists.

6
2.2 Configuration Parameters

NROOM

INPUT

NROOM CNumber of rooms)

EXAMPLES

NROOM^S

NOTES

CNumber of roeia] is the number of rooms (compartments)

inside the structure to be analyzed. The maximum

allowable number of rooms is 10 for version 17 of FAST.

The space outside the structure is automatically

numbered 1 greater than the specified number of rooms.

In the above example, the outside would be room 4.

Rooms in the structure which are not part of the

analysis do not have to be numbered.

NMXQP

INPUTS

NMXOP [Maximum number of connections (openings)

between any two rooms)

EXAMPLE S NMXOP"5 1

NOTES

[Maximum number of connections] is the maximum number

of connections (openings) between any two rooms. For

example, if two windows and one door connect adjoining

rooms then 3 is used as the input. The [maximum number

of connections) cannot exceed 4.

The maximum number of connections is not a limit on the

number of connections to a single compartment. For

example if five rooms, each with a single opening, are

all connected to the same room then the maximum number

of connections is 1.

7
TAMB

INPUT:

TAMB'' [Ambient temperature <K)3

EXAMPLE:

TAMB"300

NOTES:

[Ambient temperature! ia the temperature of the ambient

atmosphere in Kelvin (Kelvin - degrees Celsius 273)

.

2.3 Floor Plan Data

INPUT:

HI/F" [Floor height <m)]

WIDTH [Room width <m)!

DEPTH [Room depth Cm) 3 HEIGH [Room height <m)3

EXAMPLE

HI/F"""0.0""0.0""0.0

WIDTH‘S "6

.

DEPTH‘*"9 .l'"w 4,3"*‘“4.3

HEIGH" "3 .6""2.4""2.4

NOTES

[Floor height} is the height of the floor of each room

with respect to some reference datum (e.g., the

ground)

.

[Room width} , [Room depth} , and [Room height} are the

dimensions of each room.

The number of values in each line must equal the number

of rooms specified for NROOM.

8
2.4 Connections

INPUT:

HVENT [From roe* number! CTo room number! [Opening

width Cm)! [Opening height Cm)! CSill height Cm)!

EXAMPLE:

HVENT^X*^^!. 1^2 *1^0.0

HVENT"'X^3~‘B l.X‘*‘*2 o X^0.0

HVENT^^^X.S^S.X^O.S

NOTES:

[From room number! is the room number from which the

smoke is assumed to be originating.

CTo room number! is the room number to which the smoke

is assumed to be flowing. The program will

automatically correct the flow direction if the assumed

direction is incorrect.

[Opening width! is the width of the opening.

[Opening height! is the height of the top of the

opening above the floor.

[Sill height! is the height of the bottom of the

opening Csill) above the floor.

Openings to the outside are included as openings to the

room with a number 1 greater than the number of rooms

specified for NRQQM, which in the above example

is room number 4.

9
2.5 Thermophysical Properties of Enclosing Surfaces

INPUT:

[Label]

COND- C Conductivity <kW/(m-K>>3

SPHT** [Specific heat~(kJ/ (kg-K) )

3

DNSTY [Density <kg/m >3

THICK [Thickness Cm)

3

EMISS [Emissivity]

EXAMPLE:

CEILI

COND~~ . 00018- . 00018- . 00018

SPHT~- .9—— .9*—.9

DNSTY-790 . - --790 . - - -790

.

THICK-. 016"'"'"'. 016"'''*'. 016

EMISS-. 9-----. 9-----.

9

WALLS

C0ND-- .00018- .00018- .00018

SPHT--.9-----.9-----.9

DNSTY-790 . - - -790 . - - -790

.

THICK- . 016--- . 016--- . 016

EMISS-.9—--.9-----.9

FLOOR

C0ND-- .0017-- . 0017-- . 0017

SPHT--1.0 ’1.0 1.0

DNSTY-2200 . --2200 . - -2200

.

THICK-. 15----. 15--- -.15

EMISS- .9 .9----- .9

NOTES:

CEILI , WALLS, and FLOOR are the required [Labels] for

the ceiling, walls, and floor respectively.

The number of values in each line should equal the

number of rooms specified for NROOM except as noted

below

.

COND, SPHT, DNSTY, THICK and EMISS are the labels for

the thermophysical properties of the enclosing surfaces

(walls, ceiling or floor)

.

If the thermophysical

properties of the enclosing surfaces are not included

FAST will treat them as adiabatic (no heat transfer)

.

Since most of the heat transfer is through the ceiling

and the conduction calculation takes more than half of

the computation time, it is recommended that initial

calculations be made using the ceiling only. Adding

the walls generally makes little change in the results

and the floor contribution is negligible. Clearly,

there are cases where the above generalization does not

hold, but it may prove to be a useful screening

technique

.

10
It is possible to account for enclosing surfaces

composed of a maximum of three layers of different

materials* To do this, the thermophysical parameters

are separated by "/’* for each surface and each

compartment* As an example using the sample data

above, the ceiling in compartment 2 is divided into

three layers* Each of these layers ha® the same

thickness but the properties of the center layer differ

from the outer two layers*

CEILI

COND" " * 00018~ * 00018/ . 00004/ * 00018^ * 00018

SPHT~ '

t 9^^'\9/.8/,g^ ~ ~ ' . 9

DNSTY~79G . ~ ~~790 . /50 * /790 . ~ ^790

THICK**. 016~" *018/. 08/ *016^^.016

EKISS" ,g ————— ———— c9

Note there is only a single value for the eraissivity

and it applies to the interior surface ©f the

enclosing surface*

2*6 Fire Specifications

LFB0

INPUTS

LFBO** [Room of fire origin!! [Description]

EXAMPLES

LFBG'^ROOM OF FIRE ORIGIN

NOTES

[Room of fire origin] is the room number in which the

fire originates.

[Description] is an optional user comment and has no

effect on the program, but serves to clarify the data

file to the user.

11
LFBT

INPUT:

LFBT4

* CFire type] [Description]

EXAMPLE:

LFBT^l-TYPE OF FIRE (SPECIFIED FIRE)

NOTES:

CFire type] is the type of fire and in version 17 of

FAST is limited to:

1

= SPECIFIED FIRE

[Description] is an optional user comment and has no

effect on the program, but serves to clarify the data

file to the user.

LFPOS

INPUT:

LFPOS [Fire position] [Description]

EXAMPLE:

LFPOS4*

l

4

* FIRE POSITION (CENTER)

NOTES:

[Fire position] is the area of the room in which the

fire originates and in version 17 of FAST is limited to

the following:

1 = CENTER OF ROOM

2 * CORNER OF ROOM

3 * ALONG WALL

The fire position is used to account for the entrainment

rate of the plume, which depends on the location of the

plume within the compartment. Fire positions 2 and 3

should only be used when the fire is very close to the

corner or wall respectively.

[Description] is an optional user comment and has no

effect on the program, but serves to clarify the data

file to the user.

12
CHEMX

INPUT:

CHEMI [Fraction of pyrolysis] [Fraction of water]

[Fraction of carbon] [Fraction of hydrogen] [Fraction

of oxygen] [Heat of combustion <kJ/kg)3 [Initial fuel

temperature CIO]

EXAMPLE:

CHEMI « 0^0 * 0"^© * 0^0 o O^ISOOO^SOO

NOTES:

[Fraction of pyrolysis] is the mass fraction of fuel

which actually burns. The remaining fuel is considered

to be char. For version 17 of FAST, use a value of

1.©, see discussion below.

[Fraction of water] is the mass fraction of water in

the fuel by weight. For version 17 of FAST, use a

value of ©•©, see discussion below.

[Fraction of carbon] , [Fraction of hydrogen] , and

[Fraction of oxygen] are the respective mass fractions

of carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen in the fuel by weight.

For version 17 of FAST, use a value of 0.0 for these

inputs, see discussion below.

[Heat of combustion] is the effective net heat of

combustion of the fuel.

[Initial fuel temperature] is the initial temperature

of the fuel and for version 17 of FAST should be the

ambient temperature specified for TAME.

This input line provides for future capabilities of the

program. For version 17 of FAST a value of 1.0 should

be used for the [Fraction of pyrolysis] and 0.0 should

be used for the [Fraction of water] , [Fraction of

carbon] , [Fraction of hydrogen] and the [Fraction of

oxygen]

13
LFMAX

INPUT:

LFMAX [Number of intervals] [Description]

EXAMPLE:

LFMAX~5~NUMBER OF INTERVALS OF FIRE GROWTH

NOTES:

[Number of intervals] is the number of time intervals

for the mass loss rate, fuel height and species inputs.

The mass loss rate, fuel height and species are entered

as series of points with respect to time. This is

referred to in this document as a specified fire. The

program performs a linear interpolation between these

points to determine the values at all times. A

sufficient number of intervals should be selected to

provide a reasonable approximation (using straight line

segments) for the input variables which specify the

fire. A graphical example of this is shown in Figure

2. The mass loss rates P1-P6 are specified over the

time intervals 11*15. The number of points specified

must be one greater than the number of time intervals.

For example, if there are six mass loss points there

should be a total of five time intervals (or one

interval between every two consecutive points) . The

maximum number of intervals allowed in version 17 of

FAST is 21.

[Description] is an optional user comment and has no

effect on the program, but serves to clarify the data

file to the user.

14
FTIME

INPUT:

FTIME CTime interval (sec)

EXAMPLE:

FTI ME**60 **30 **120 **45 "'SO

NOTES:

CTime interval] is the time between each point (mass

less rate# fuel height and species) specified for the

fire. The total duration of the fire is the sum of the

time intervals which in the example above is 315

seconds. This time is independent of the simulation

time which is specified for TIMES. If the simulation

time is longer than the total duration of the fire, the

final values specified for the fire (mass loss rate,

fuel height and species) will be continued until the

end of the simulation.

The number of time interval values must equal the

number of intervals specified for LFMAX.

FMASS

INPUT:

FMASS CMass loss rate (kg/s)

EXAMPLE:

FMASS"'©** .01"* .1^.01“* . 01^0

NOTES

CMass loss rate] is the rate at which fuel is pyrolyzed

at times corresponding to each point of the specified

fire (See Figure 2.).

The number of mass loss rate values must be 1 greater

than the number of intervals specified for LFMAX.

15
FHIGH

INPUT:

FHIGH [Fuel height Cm)]

EXAMPLE:

FHIGH"0 .5"0 .5"0.5"0.4"0.4"0.4

NOTES:

CFuel height] is the height of the base of the flames

above the floor of the room of fire origin for each

point of the specified fire.

The number of fuel height values must be 1 greater than

the number of intervals specified for LFMAX.

2.7 Species Production

INPUT:

[Label] [Species <kg/kg)]

EXAMPLE:

CQ**--*' .02" .02" .02" .02" .02“ .02

0D"""" . 02" . 02" . 02" . 02" . 02" . 02

CT""""1 .0"1.0"1 .(^"i.O"! .0"! .0

NOTES:

[Species] is an optional input and specifies the mass

production rates of each of the constituents for each

point of the specified fire.

y

V?

Available

M2""" a 02""" = C02"" * CO a HCN"" a HCL"" a TUHC" a H20"" a 0D""" a CT""- a

[Labels] are as follows:

NITROGEN PRODUCTION RATE

OXYGEN PRODUCTION RATE

CARBON DIOXIDE PRODUCTION RATE

CARBON MONOXIDE PRODUCTION RATE

HYDROGEN CYANIDE PRODUCTION RATE

HYDROGEN CHLORIDE PRODUCTION RATE

TOTAL UNBURNED HYDROCARBONS

WATER PRODUCTION RATE

SMOKE DENSITY (SOOT PRODUCTION)

CONCENTRATION-TIME PRODUCT

Units for [Species] are kilogram of species produced

per kilogram of fuel burned. The input for CT is the

kilograms of "toxic" combustion products produced per

kilogram of fuel burned.

The number of values for each specie must be 1 greater

than the number of intervals specified for LFMAX.

16
2.8 Output File

INPUT tDUMPR [Dump file]

EXAMPLE l DUMPR ~ FASTI . DAT

NOTES

EDump file] specifies the name ef the file (up to 17

ehereettri) te which the program outputs for plotting

are written. The dump file is read by the program

FASTPLQT which generates plots of the output.

EDump file] is an optional input. If omitted, the file

for use by the plotting routine FASTPLOT will not be

generated. A discussion of the program FASTPLOT is

given in reference Cl]

17
3. DESCRIPTION OF THE OUTPUT

The output of the FAST program conaiata of two major parts.

The first is a summary of the input data and the second consists

of the calculated results at the end of each print interval. A

sample of the program output is shown in Appendix B. Due to the

effect of the computer's internal precision on the solution of

the equations, it is expected that the results from other

computers will differ slightly from those found in Appendix <B.

The output is labeled and most of it is self explanatory. There

are however, a number of abbreviations used which are explained

in the following sections along with a general description of the

output. The outputs pertaining to each of the compartments are

listed across the page beginning with compartment one in the left

most column and proceeding to the right to the highest number

compartment

3.1 Summary of Input Data

The summary of input data is divided into three sections.

These are geometrical data, thermophysical properties and the

fire specifications.

3.1.1 Geometrical Data

This section lists the run title, the total number of

compartments, the maximum number of openings per pair of

compartments and the width, depth, height, area and volume for

18
each compartment. It also gives the ceiling and floor height

with respect to the reference datum. This is followed by the

connections between the compartments. Each compartment is listed

vertically down the page and horizontally across the page and the

connections between compartments are given at the intersection of

the vertical and horizontal lists. The final compartment in the

horizontal list is the exterior space. The parenthesized numbers

in the vertical compartment list are the number of openings for

each compartment. For example, if the maximum number of openings

between any two compartments is three, there would be three parts

for each compartment in the vertical list. Each part consists of

the followings

1) opening width CBW) Cm)

2) height of top of opening above floor CHH) Cm)

3) height of bottom of opening above floor CHL) Cm)

4) height of top of opening above reference datum CHHF) Cm)

5) height of bottom of opening above reference datum CHLP) Cm)

3.1.2 Thermophysical Properties

This section lists the thermophysical properties of the

ceiling, floor, upper and lower walls respectively for each

compartment. Although the thermophysical properties of the upper

and lower walls are the same, they are presented separately to

correspond to the temperature of the upper and lower temperature

19
layers of the compartment The thermophysical properties are the

thermal conductivity, specific heat, density, thickness and

emissivity

.

3.1.3 Fire Specifications

This section consists of three parts. The first part lists

the compartment number of the room of fire origin, the time step

used in calculating the results, how often output is to be

printed, the number of intervals for which the mass loss rate is

specified, the total time over which the results will be printed,

the fire location within the room of origin, and the fire type.

The second part lists the initial fuel temperature, the

ambient air temperature, the ambient sea level reference pressure

and the effective heat of combustion.

The third part lists for each specified point of the fire,

the mass loss rate of the burning fuel, the height of the base of

the fire with respect to the floor, and the fractional production

rates of the species. Also listed is the duration of each time

interval

.

3.2 Results of Calculations

The final part of the output consists of the calculated

results at the end of each print interval. The first line of the

output is the simulation time. For the sample output in Appendix

20
?

B, the results have only been included for times 0, 60* and 360

seconds. Following the time are the temperatures of the upper

(U.TEMP) CK) and lower (L.TEMP) (K) layers, the upper layer

volume CUoVOLUM) <m^) and thickness (U.BEPTH) Cm), and the

temperatures of the ceiling (GE.TEMP) <K>, upper (UW.TEMP) <K>

and lower CLW.TEMP) <K> walls*, and the floor (FLoTEMP) (K) •

Next is the flow rate of combustion products and entrained

air into the upper layer from the plume (EMS) Ckg/s) , the

pyrolysis rate of the fuel CEMP) <kg/s), the enthalpy release

rate of the fire <GF) <kW) , the total radiant heat transfer t©

the upper layer <QR) CkW) , the total convective heat transfer

from the surfaces surrounding the layers to the upper and lower

layers respectively (QC) (kW), and the difference between the

current pressure and the initial pressure at the floor (Pres)

(kpe)

The final part of the results consists of the species

concentration for each compartment. The total mass of each

specie in the upper layer is given for each compartment (kg)

Depending on the specie, a concentration (PPM) or opacity (1/M)

is also given. For CT, the concentration-time product, only the

time integrated (from time=0) concentration (mg-min/1) for the

upper layer in each compartment is given. The use of this time

integrated concentration is discussed in reference C5]

21
4. REFERENCES

Cl] Jones, W.W., A Model for the Transport of Fire, Smoke and

Toxic Gases (FAST). Nat. Bur. Stand. (U.S.) NBSIR 84-2934; 1984

September. 85 p.

E23 Jones, W.W., A Multicompartment Model for the Spread of Fire,

Smoke and Toxic Gases. Fire Safety Jour. 9: 55-79; 1985.

£33 Gross, D., Data Sources for Parameters used in Predictive

Modeling of Fire Growth and Smoke Spread. Nat. Bur. Stand. (U.S.)

NBSIR 85-3223; 1985 September.

C4] American National Standard Programming Language FORTRAN,

ANSI X3. 9-1978. New York: American National Standards Institute;

1978. 434 p.

C5] Bukowski, R.W., Quantitative Determination of Smoke Toxicity

Hazard - A Practical Approach for Current Use. Proceedings of the

First International Symposium on Fire Safety Sciences.

Gaithersburg, MD; 1985. to be published.

22
$p

23

4

Figure

1

.

Schematic

of

upper

and

lower

layer

control

volume®
(s/6>0 3iva SS01 SSVW

24

Figure

2.

Example

of

moss

loss

data

for

a

specified

fire
APPENDIX A: SAMPLE INPUT

VERSN 017 BUILDING XYZ

TIMES 360 30 0

NRQOM 3

NMXOP 1

TAME 300

HI/F 0.0 OoO 0. 0

WIDTH 6.1 4.6 4 o 6

DEPTH 9el 4.3 4. 3

HEIGH 3.6 2.4 2

.

4

HVENT 1 2 1.1 2. 1 0.0

HVENT 1 3 1.1 2. 1 0.0

HVENT 2 4 1.3 2. 1 0.6

CEILI

COND .00018 .00018 .00018

SPHT .9 .9 .9

DNSTY 790. 790. 790.

THICK .016 .016 .016

EMISS .9 .9 .9

WALLS

COND .00018 .00018 .00018

SPHT .9 .9 .9

DNSTY 790. 790. 790.

THICK .016 .016 .016

EMISS .9 .9 .9

FLOOR

COND .0017 .0017 .0017

SPHT 1.0 1.0 1.0

DNSTY 2200. 2200. 2200.

THICK .15 .15 .15

EMISS .9 .9 .9

LFBO 2 ROOM OF FIRE ORIGIN

LFBT 1 TYPE OF FIRE (SPECIFIED FIRE

LFPOS 1 FIRE POSITION (CENTER)

CHEMI 1.0 0 .0 0.0i 0.0 0.0 18000 : LFMAX 5 NUMBER OF INTERVALS OF FIRE GROWTH

FTIME 60 30 120 45 60

FMASS 0 .01 .1 .01 .01 0

FHIGH 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.4

CO .02 .02 .02 .02 .02 .02

OD .02 .02 .02 .02 .02 .02

CT 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

25

i
APPENDIX B: SAMPLE OUTPUT

BUILDING XYZ

TOTAL COMPARTMENTS » 3

MAXIMUM OPENINGS PER PAIR * FLOOR PLAN

WIDTH 6.1 4.6 4.6

DEPTH 9 c 1 4.3 4.3

HEIGHT 3.6 2.4 2.4

AREA 55.5 19.8 19.8

VOLUME 199.8 47.5 47.5

CEILING 3.6 2.4 2.4

FLOOR 0.0 0.0 0.0

CONNECTIONS

1 < 1) BW= 0.0 1.1 1.1 0.0

HH= 0.0 2.1 2.1 0.0

HL* 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

HHP* 0.0 2.1 2.1 0.0

HLP* 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

2 < 1) BW= 1.1 0.0 0.0 1.3

HH= 2.1 0.0 0.0 2.1

HL* 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.6

HHP* 2.1 0.0 0.0 2.1

HLP* 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.6

3 C 1) BW* 1.1 0.0 0.0 0.0

HH* 2.1 0.0 0.0 0.0

HL= 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

HHP* 2.1 0.0 0.0 0.0

HLP* 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

CEILING

COND * 1 . 800E-04 1.800E-04 1 . 800E-04

SPHT a 9 . OOOE-Ol 9 . OOOE-Ol 9 . 000E-01

DNSTY* 7 . 900E+02 7 . 900E+02 7 . 900E+02

THICK= 1 . 600E-02 1 . 600E-02 1 . 600E-02

EMISS* 9 . OOOE-Ol 9 . 000E-01 9 . OOOE-Ol

FLOOR

COND * 1 . 700E-03 1 .700E-03 1 . 700E-03

SPHT = 1 . OOOE+OO 1 . OOOE+OO 1 .000E>00

DNSTY= 2 . 200E+03 2.200E+03 2 . 200E^03

THICK= 1.500E-01 1.500E-01 1.500E-01

EMISS* 9 . OOOE-Ol 9 • 000E-01 9. OOOE-Ol

26
UPPER WALL

COND * 1 . 800E-04 1.8001-04 1.8001-04

SPHT = 9 . OOOE-Ol 9 e OOOE-Ol 9 .0001-01

DNSTY® 7 c 9001*02 7.9001*02 7.9001*02

THICK” 1 * 6001-02 1 . 6001-02 1 .8001-02

EMISS® 9 . 0001-01 9 * 0001-01 9. OOOE-Ol

LOWER WALL

COND » 1.8001-04 1 .8001=04 1 .8001-04

SPHT * 9 • OOOE-Ol 9.000E-01 9 0 OOOE-Ol

DNSTY® 7 • 9001*02 7 . 9001+02 7 .9001*02

THICK® 1.6001-02 1 .8001-02 1.8001-02

EMISS® 9 « 0001-01 9.0001-01 9. OOOE-Ol

FIRE ROOM NUMBER IS 2

TIME STEP IS 1.00 SECONDS

PRINT EVERY SO TIME STEPS

NUMBER OF FIRE INTERVALS ® 5

TOTAL TIME INTERVAL ® 3S0

FIRE SOURCE ® 1

FIRE TYPE = SPECIFIED

INITIAL FUEL TEMPERATURE <K) ® 300.

AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE (K) = 300.

AMBIENT REFERENCE PRESSURE <kPs> ® 101.30

EFFECTIVE HEAT OF COMBUSTION CKJ/KG) - 18000*

FMASS® 0.00 1.001-02 0.10 1.00E-02 1.001-02 0 o 00

FHIGH® 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.40 0.40 0.40

CO® 2.00E-02 2.001-02 2.00E-02 2.00E-02 2 • 00E-02 2 . 00E-02

0D = 2.00E-02 2.00E-02 2 . 00E-02 2.00E-02 2.00E-02 2.00E-02

CT = 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

FTIME® 80. 30. 1 . 20E*02 45

.

80.

27
TIME 0.0 SECONDS

U . TEMP

.

300.0 300.0 300.0

L.TEMP. 300.0 300.0 300.0

U.VOLUM 0.2 0.0 0.0

U. DEPTH 0.0 0.0 0.0

CE.TEMP 300.0 300.0 300.0

UW.TEMP 300.0 300.0 300.0

LW.TEMP 300.0 300.0 300.0

FL e TEMP 300.0 300.0 300.0

EMS < I )

O.OOOE+OO 0 • OOOE+OO O.OOOE+OO

EMP ( I )

0 . OOOE+OO O.OOOE+OO 0 • OOOE+OO

QF ( I ) 3 0 . OOOE+OO 0 . OOOE+OO O.OOOE+OO

OR < X > = 0 . OOOE+OO 0 . OOOE+OO 0 . OOOE+OO

QC(I)a 0 . OOOE+OO 0 • OOOE+OO 0 • OOOE+OO

0 . OOOE+OO 0 • OOOE+OO 0 • OOOE+OO

Pres <kpa) 0 . OOOE+OO 0 . OOOE+OO 0 • OOOE+OO

Upper layer species concentration

CO MASS ! 0 . 000 0.000 0.000

PPM ! 0 . 000 0.000 0.000

OD MASS : 0.000 0.000 0.000

1/M ! 0.000 0.000 0.000

CT mg-m/1 ! 0.000 0.000 0.000

28
TIME = 60.0 SECONDS.

U . TEMP

.

321.7 440.6 300.0

Lo TEMP

.

300.2 300 . 8 300 .

3

U. VOLUM 37.9 15 o 3 0.0

U. DEPTH 0.7 0.8 0.0

CE • TEMP 301 e 6 316 e 4 300.0

UW . TEMP 301 o 6 316.4 300.0

LW . TEMP 300.

1

301.3 300.0

PL 0 TEMP 300 o 0 300.2 300.0

EMS CD* 0 « 0001*00 7 o 9101=01 0 o 0001*00

EMPCD* 0 . 0001*00 1 . 000E-02 0 . 0001*00

QF CD* 0 o 0001*00 1 . 8001*02 0 . 0001*00

QRCD* -I « 836E*00 -8.5501*00 -6 . 990E-03

QC CD* ”8 . 9811*00 “3 . 5981*01 -9 « 722E-03

-1. 0901-03 -3 . 904E-03 -3 . 226E-02

Pres Ckpa) 2 . 190E-01 -5.1251-01 -4 . 926E-02

Upper layer species concentration

CO MASS : 1.4891-03 2 . 6591-03 0.000

PPM i 33.7 205 . 0 . 000

OD MASS : 1 .4891-03 2 . 6591-03 0.000

1/M S 0.137 0.609 0.000

CT mg-ia/l 1 0.811 4.54 0 o 000

29
TIME 360.0 SECONDS

U • TEMP

.

348.4 345.9 338.7

L. TEMP

302.2 318.8 302.1

U a VOLUM 137.5 17.3 28.0

U. DEPTH 2.5 0.9 1.4

CE.TEMP 320.4 351.6 312.8

UW. TEMP 320.4 351.6 312.8

LW.TEMP 306.2 324.3 303.1

FL. TEMP 301.1 304.5 300.4

EMS < I )

O.OOOE+OO 1 . 835E-01 0 . OOOE+OO

EMP < X )

0 • OOOE+OO 0 . 000E*00 0 . OOOE+OO

QF< X ) = 0 . OOOE^OO 3 . OOOE+OO 0 . OOOE+OO

QR < X ) = -5 . 147E+00 -4.475E-01 -1 . 445E+00

QC C I ) = -2 . 018E+01 2 • 910E-01 -6 . 271E+00

3.123E-01 3 . 596E-01 3 . 589E-02

Praa <kpa) -9. 113E-01 -7 . 843E-01 -6 . 492E-01

Upper layer species concentration

CO MASS ! 3.401E-02 2 . 433E-03 7 . 398E-03

PPM ! 230. 130. 239.

OD MASS : 3 . 401E-02 2 . 433E-03 7 . 398E-03

1/M S 0.866 0.491 0 . 924

CT ag-m/1 ! 53.8 64.5 45.7

30
FO«M N8S-114A ,«ev .n-84) U.S. OEPT, OF COMM.

BIBLIOGRAPHIC DATA

SHEET (See instructions)

1. PUBLICATION OR

REPORT NO.

NBSIR 8 ¥ 3284

2. Performing Organ. Report No. 3. Publication Date December 1985

4. TITLE AND SUBTITLE

User's Guide for FAST

§. AUTHQR(S)

William D. Walton, Steven R. Baer, and Walter W e Jones

6c PERFORMING ORGANIZATION (If joint or other than NBS. see instructions)

NATIONAL BUREAU Of STANDARDS

U.S. OffARTMBYT Of COMMBtCE

GAITHERSBURG, MD 20899

7c Centraet/Grant Ne„

8c T/pe of Report & Period Covered

9. SPONSORING ORGANIZATION NAME AND COMPLETE ADDRESS (Street. City. State, ZIP)

10c SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES

Document describes a computer program; SF»I85, FIPS Software Summary, is attached.

lie ABSTRACT (A 200-word or less factual summary of most significant information. If document includes a s ignificant

bibliography or literature survey, mention it here)

FAST is a multi compartment zone type computer model which predicts the smoke

hazard development in each compartment based on a description of the compartments and the fire. A FORTRAN program has been written for the model. This

user's guide provides a detailed description of the data input requirements

and the output produced by version 17 of the program. Also included are

sample program input and output.

12. KEY WORDS (Six to twelve entries; alphabetical order; capitalize only proper names; and separate key words by semicoion s) Compartment fires; computer programs; fire growth; manuals; mathematical models;

room fires; smoke; toxicity

13. AVAILABILITY ’

Xi Unl i mi ted For Official Distribution. Do Not Release to NTIS

" Order From SuDerin tendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC

20402.

~X~ Order From National Technical Information Service (NTIS), Springfield, VA 2216 1

14. NO. OF

PRINTED PAGES

33

15. Price

59.95

jSCCmm-OC 35-^006

Fire Safety Journal, 9 (1985) 55 -79 55

A Multicompartment Model for the Spread of Fire, Smoke and Toxic Gases *

WALTER W. JONES

National Bureau of Standards, Washington, DC 20234 (U.S.A.)

1. INTRODUCTION

In recent years there has been considerable

research in the area of the spread of fire and

smoke from a room of fire origin to con- nected compartments. The work is motivated

by a need to understand and be able to

predict the environmental conditions which

occur as a fire develops and spreads. Much of

the attention has focused on the development

of numerical models which are able to make a reasonably accurate assessment of the environment from ignition. The motivation is two-fold. Being able to correlate laboratory

scale experiments with full-scale tests is desirable from a cost standpoint. More important, however, from a life-safety and operational standpoint, the ability to make

accurate predictions of the spread of fire,

smoke and toxic gases opens up many possibilities for combating these problems, as well

as taking effective preventive measures. The

ability to prevent the hazards from developing

becomes especially important as new and

exotic materials become available.

This paper describes a model which allows one to predict the evolution of a fire in a room and the subsequent transport of the

smoke and toxic gases which evolve from this

fire. The numerical implementation improves

on previous work, for a review see Jones [1],

in particular by retaining the conservation

laws in their full differential form and solving

them as a set of coupled ordinary differential

equations (ODEs). Such a formulation takes

advantage of the effort which has gone into

solving such systems of equations. The result

is a numerical scheme which is considerably

faster and much more ‘rugged’ than previous

models.

Contribution of the National Bureau of Stan- dards (U.S.A.). Not subject to copyright.

The model is assumed to be in a world of

uniform temperature Ta and reference pres- sure Pa , with the outside of a wall at Te which

may not be the same as the ambient. The discussion is broken down into the basic struc- ture and fundamental assumptions which go

into the model, followed by a derivation of

the predictive equations, a discussion of the source terms, the numerical implementation

and some calculations and comparisons with

experimental data. The notation is given in

Appendix A. The numerical implementation

of the model is modular and straightforward.

It is designed to be transportable.

2. STRUCTURE OF THE MODEL

The primary element of the model is a compartment. The primary interest lies in the

composition of the gas layers in each of these

compartments. As such, the model is struc- tured around fluid transport phenomena. In

this context, the predictive equations for the

gas layers in each compartment result from

conservation of mass, momentum and energy

together with an equation-of-state for each

compartment. The actual physical phenomena

which drive the transport are then couched as source terms. Such a formulation allows the

greatest flexibility in adding, modifying or

deleting terms which are appropriate to the

problem being solved.

Each compartment is subdivided into one

or more ‘control volumes’. These control

volumes will be of sufficient size that we will

require only a few to describe any system of

interest. The choice is based on the premise

that the details which occur within such a volume do not concern us (at present), but

their mutual interaction does. Each of these

control volumes is called a zone. The rationale

for such a choice arises from the experimental

observation that when a fire spreads, the gas

Elsevier Sequoia/Printed in The Netherlands
56

layers in the compartments actually stratify

into two distinct zones. This is a compromise

between a network model and a finite differ- ence model. The former is computationally

fast but yields no information on the internal

structure whereas the latter yields a great deal

of information but requires more computational resources than is warranted. The two

zones are referred to as ‘upper* and ‘lower*,

respectively. The basic equations describe the

mass, momentum and energy transfer from

zone to zone in a fire driven environment. A

schematic is shown in Fig. 1.

Fig. 1. A schematic of one compartment in the zone model concept. Two layers (u, 1) and a single vent

are shown.

In considering dynamic systems, it is neces- sary to solve a problem self-consistently. If such is not done, then some of the dynamics

may be obscured or even lost. In particular,

discussion of movement of the zone interfaces

must be consistent.

The conservation equations for mass and

energy can be written in the form

dm

df

( 1 )

for mass and from the first law of thermodynamics we have

d dV . . — {EV) + p — = Q + h (2)

dr dr

together with an equation of state P = pRT (3)

which closes the set of equations, and with

the definitions

E - cv p(T rR )

h = cp jjr - tr ) - cP 2>«. out (T - tr ) +

i i

+ 2Xo(tr )

Q - Qt + Qr + Qc = net energy input

i = index of other compartments

(

i

=£ volume of interest).

The term h ( Q(TR ) is relative to the temperature from which this mass parcel, mdt, came.

It includes enthalpy of formation. The equation of state for an ideal gas is usually used

for closure of the system. More correctly it should be written

P = P(p, T, {/}), {{} = set of species (4)

especially for applications to fire problems

which are not ideal gas problems. However,

for the case of an ideal gas, the derivations

and discussion are simplified, and generalizations can be discussed later. The sign convention is that positive fluxes on the right-hand

side of an equation will increase the quantity

being calculated on the left-hand side, that is, transfer into a volume is indicated by a

positive flux on the right-hand side.

The general form of the model is to divide

each compartment into two zones: an upper

zone which contains a hot layer, and a lower

layer which is relatively cool. There may exist one or more fires and plumes in each compartment and these can usually be considered

to be part of the upper zone. Mass and energy

transfer between the zones is provided by the

plumes, mixing at the vents, radiation between layers and flow along the walls. In general a plume, once created, simply

transfers mass and energy from one zone to

another. Another set of equations could be

written for the plume, but as long as it is in

quasi-steady equilibrium, considering it to be

part of the upper zone is sufficient. Another

way of looking at the plume is to consider

it so small in mass, energy constant and

volume that it can be ignored except as a transfer mechanism. For some problems,

however, the plume must be considered a separate zone along with the concomitant

conservation equations. An example would be

when the rise time of the plume is of interest
57

«i.fi

Fig. 2. Radiation transport scheme. Shown is the view factor calculation of surface T as seen by surface 7\ trans mitted through both layers.

or when the actual size and composition of

the plume is important.

Since the conservation equations are written in terms of the volumes of these

entities, a relationship between the height and

the volume is needed, such as

Actual closure of the model is obtained by

assuming that the size of the compartment is fixed so that

F=yu + F3 (6)

and that there is a single reference pressure

Hi

Vu = f

ZA(Z) dZ (5)

to calculate the layer depths. This removes

the usual restriction that the compartments

be rectangular parallelepipeds, and allows

calculations for circular crosssections (aircraft) and trapezoids (atria).

The radiation transport scheme used is fairly simple and derives from the work of

Siegel and Howell [2]. The view factors which

are used in the calculation of solid angles are concomitant with surfaces which are planes or discs. The relationship is shown schematically in Fig. 2. The simplification used here

and discussed in more detail by Jones [1] is retained, but the actual areas are used, and

the exact view factors are used wherever possible [3], For example, in calculating the area of the upper wall, allowance is made for any

vents which exist by subtracting their area from the total wall area. In addition, ceiling

and upper wall, lower wall and floor are treated separately (as pairs). This is necessitated by the possible use of different materials for the respective surfaces which may

have different radiative properties, as well as the different types of convective flow which

occur over each of these surfaces. More

correctly, we should consider three surfaces,

ceiling, wall and floor. This is under development. A problem arises in treating vertical

convection as the layer depth tends to

zero.

Pu-Pi m

at the boundary (interface) of the zones. The set of equations which is necessary to

describe fully such a physical system can be

reduced by considering the physical impact of

some of the terms. In particular, the pressure

should be a general function of position,

P(X, F, Z), in the compartment, which would

require us to include a differential equation

for the conservation of momentum explicitly.

A general form for the perturbed pressure

might be

z

P{x, y, t ) - P(t

)

— Jp(f) dz + 8P{X, Y, Z, t) o

( 8 ) where P is a reference pressure and is usually

the pressure at the base of the compartment.

In the spirit of the ‘control volume’ formulation

5P 0

This implies that acoustic waves are filtered

out and that internal momentum need not be

calculated. The hydrostatic term is small in

absolute value in comparison with the refer- ence pressure, so it is not necessary to carry

this calculation through the equation of state. Finally, the time dependent portion of the

hydrostatic term deals with the movement of

the interface, and thus can be ignored if we limit ourselves to problems where the
58

momentum associated with the discontinuity

(alternatively the velocity) is not significant.

Dropping the momentum equation for

internal waves increases the computational

time step a great deal since we are not limited

by the Courant time step criterion (time step

a grid size/speed of sound). This prohibits us from considering problems such as deflagration waves and explosions. With these considerations in mind, we will assume Pu=Pi=P (9)

The pressure in eqn. (9) is the reference

pressure at the floor. This simplification is carried through the conservation equations

and greatly simplifies the resulting predictive

equations. However, it is necessary to retain

the hydrostatic term for the flow field calculations at vents. As we are considering only

small changes in the absolute pressure, differ- ences of these terms will be comparable to the

hydrostatic pressure change, eqn. (8).

For example, for eqn. (22)

8P - 1 - 1000 Pa

whereas

f(PiTl — p 2 T2 ) dz 100 Pa

where the integration is over a vent opening.

So the flow can be dominated by the hydrostatic term whereas the 8P/P < 1%.

3. DERIVATION OF THE CONSERVATION

EQUATIONS

A zone model describes a physical situation

in terms of integrals of extensive physical

quantities. Thus we deal with total mass

rather than mass density, total energy rather

than energy density but temperature is used

as before (an intensive quantity). The

integrals are volume integrals whose boundary

surfaces enclose the Euclidean space of

interest. The space with which we are con- cerned usually is a compartment with zones

including a hot upper gas, a cool (relatively)

lower layer, objects, plumes and fires. The

connections occur at the boundary of these zones. Examples of possible connections are the vents connecting compartments, the

radiation from a fire to the compartment

walls, etc. With this basis we can mold the

conservation equations into a form which

describes a fire in terms of the quantities

which are appropriate to the control volume

approach, intuitively understandable and lend

themselves to measurement.

3.1. Fluid transport

The conservation equations for each compartment of a two layer model are dm

df- = i —> *u

dm, . .

( 10 )

( 11 )

d dPu — {cv mu(Tu - Tr )} - vu — = Qu + hu (12)

dr dr

1 {cv m,(T, - rR )} - V! ^ = Q, + A, (13)

df dt

In writing these equations, we will make two

assumptions. First, that the fire will not feed mass directly into the lower layer. Second,

we will write the upper layer equation as if there is only one fire. If more than one fire exists, then a sum over such sources is necessary and if none are present, then this term

vanishes. The source term Q includes all energy transfers due to radiation and convection and h includes the enthalpy flow. We can

rewrite the energy conservation equations as predictive equations for temperature, in

which case they become

dT„ dP, dm,

m„cu w p df ~ Vu ~~ = Qu + hu — cp Tu +

df df

+ cv Tr dmu df

(14)

and

dTi dP\ . . dmj

m>Cv ir~ v

'ir

= Q' +hi ~ CpT'^r

+ cvv-tTR dml df

(15)

The right-hand side of eqn. (14, 15) can be

rewritten in a simpler form. The reference
59

temperature (TR ) is chosen arbitrarily. If the

only phase change occurs in pyrolysis of the

fuel, then we can set the reference pressure to zero and include the pyrolysis energy as a sink

term in the energy release rate. As TR 0 we

obtain

iu = Qf(u) + Qr(u) + Qc (u) — Qpmt + + cpmp(Tv — Tu) + cP 2>i; U(T| — Tu) (16)

and

Ei = Qf(l) + Qr(D + Qcd) + cP 2mu(rf - Tj)

i

(17)

The equations and assumptions necessary

to close this set are P ~ pRT (18)

PuRTu - P\RTi (19)

with

m - pV (20)

and V - Vu + V1 - constant (21)

The energy source terms {2?j , Eu} are shown

schematically in eqns. (16, 17) but can be

much more complex and depend upon the

configuration. Combining eqns. (10 - 11) and

(14-17), together with the closure relations,

we obtain

dP

dt (0 — l)V

1

1

J[u

PV„

+ dTu dt

v;, (P-i)v

Vi

dt 3 \PV, J\

1 <J3 — 1)V

1

= Ji. | e 15 pmu Tu + Eu — s df

( 22)

(23)

(24)

(25)

where

s = cpmu Tu + Cpmx Tx + Eu + Ex (26)

and j3 = cp/i? = 7/(7 ~ 1) (27)

It should be pointed out that the equations

are written in this form for the sake of clarity

and simplicity. In a numerical implementation

there are better ways to express the source terms which minimize the problem of the

small difference of large numbers.

4. SOURCE TERMS

Equations (22 - 25) are written so that

physical phenomena which affect the environment are source terms and appear on the

right-hand side. Sources which appear directly

are:

1. radiation between the gas layers and

walls, fires and other objects,

2. convective heating,

3. flow in plumes,

4. flow in vent jets, 5. mixing at vents. Phenomena which are included but do not

show up explicitly are:

1. radiation between objects,

2. conduction through walls and objects.

4.1. Source terms: radiation

In order to calculate the radiation absorbed

in a zone, a heat balance must be done which

includes all objects which radiate to the zone.

Clearly, in order for this calculation to be

done in a time commensurate with the other

sources, some approximations are necessary.

The terms which contribute heat to an

absorbing layer are the same (in form) for all layers. Essentially we assume that all zones in

these models are similar, so we can discuss

them in terms of a general layer contribution.

Radiation can leave a layer by going to another layer, to the walls, exiting through a vent, heating up an object or changing the

pyrolysis rate of the fuel source. Similarly a layer can be heated by absorption of radiation

from these surfaces and objects as well as from the fire itself. The formalism which we

will employ for the geometry is that used by

Siegel and Howell [2] and is shown in Fig. 2. The radiative transfer can be done with a great deal of generality; however, as with

most models we assume that zones and sur- faces radiate and absorb like a grey-body with

some constant emissivity (e < 1).

A further assumption consonant with the

stratified zone assumption is that emission

and absorption are constant throughout a gas

layer. In application to a growing fire, a
60

further assumption is made that the lower

layer is mostly diathermous. Althpugh not a necessary assumption, this reduces the computation time for this term by 50%. For

smoke propagation some distance from the

fire(s) such an assumption will not be valid,

but the temperature will be so low that

radiation will not be the dominant mechanism

for heat loss. Flames, plumes, fires, objects

and bounding surfaces have some average

shape from which the view factors can be

calculated. The walls of compartments are usually flat and rectangular. The gas layers are spheres with an equivalent radius of

L = 4 VIA (28)

and an effective emissivity of

eg = 1 — exp(—aL). (29)

The terms which contribute to heating of

a layer are:

1. fires and plumes,

2. walls,

3. other layers,

4. vents (radiation from other compartments),

5. nonbuming objects.

The radiation balance of items 2 - 5 can be

dealt with using the following notation:

Fjk — geometrical view factor of surface (j)

by surface ( k ) a — Stephen-Boltzman constant = 5.67 X

10-8 W/m 2 K

4 a — absorption coefficient of the upper gas

layer m

~ 1 L — mean beam length of the equivalent

sphere (m), defined in eqn. (28)

e^ i — emissivity of the upper/lower walls

e g — emissivity of the upper gas layer

Using the formalism of Siegel and Howell

[2] we have

D = {1 - (1 - eu)(l - <r g )Fuu}{l - (1 - ex )Fu] - {(1 - e„)(l - e,)(l - ef ) 2FM (30a)

nu = [{1 - (1 - eg )Fuu}{l - (1 - e,)Fn}

-Ul-ei )(l-et )*FulFlx}]oTm

* - (1 - eg )ful e,ffTlw 4 - [1 + (1 - e,)

X{(l-eg )Ful /'

lu -F11 }]6 g aTg4 (30b)

n, = [{1 - (1 - e u)(l - e/J(l - Fn ) -(l-eu)(l-eg ) 2 Ful FIU]aT,„4 - (1 - et ]FiuevoT„* - [{1 - (1 - e„)(l - et)FmFlu + (1 - 0(1 - eg )Flu]eg oTg4 (30c)

Finally,

Q(upper) = Au eu IIu /D

Q(lower) = A^I^/D

To this must be added the energy radiated by

the fire. A heat transfer balance with the fire

is not necessary simply because the amount of

heat radiated by the fire is usually much

greater than that absorbed by the fire. In order to investigate flashover, however, this

calculation must be generalized to include the

fire and lower layer absorption in the

radiative heat balance equation rather than

relying on the postulate that superposition of

the terms is sufficient.

A simple example of the results can be

given for the case

eu = 6! = 1,

for which we have

Qg = —o[et T*A + (1 - e g )Tuw

4(A u + ^uv)

Tuw

4 Au eg Tlw

4Ad — T^Auv] + Ff Qf (31)

where

A d = area of the upper/lower layer dis- continuity = area of vents which the gas layer ‘sees’ Au = area of the upper wall (including ceiling)

Ff = fraction of the fire which radiates times

its view factor for the gas layer

A — An + Ad

4.2. Source terms: convective heating

Convection is the mechanism by which the

gas layers lose (or gain) energy to walls or other objects. Conduction is a process which

is intimately associated with convection but

as it does not show up directly as a term for
61

heat gain or loss, it will be discussed

here.

Convective heat flow is energy transfer across a thin boundary layer. The thickness

of this layer is determined by the relative

temperature between the gas zone and the

wall or object surface, see Schlichting [4] and

Turner [5]. We can write the heat flux

term as Qc = hc (Tg -Tw)Aw (32)

where the transfer coefficient can be written

as k

/i c = yCv (GrXPr) 173

The terms are: Aw

- area of wall(s) in contact with the zone Gr = Grashoff number - gi 3

i T% — Tw | lv

2 Tg Pr - Prandti number ^0.7

which is consuming mass at a rate mf , heat

addition will be

Q - XeWf'Hc

Some fraction, Xr> will exit the fire as radiation and the remainder will be left to drive

the plume. We can empirically divide the heat

transfer into actual combustion and simple

gasification. The former, denoted by xc > is the

relative fraction of pyrolysate which participates in the combustion. Also, once eombustion occurs, a fraction of the energy leaves

the fire as radiation (xrQ) and convective

energy ({1 — Xr)Q)° The former is a function

of such external effects as radiation, e.g., other fires, and vitiation. The latter efficiencies relate to sootiness and Froude number.

The mass flow in a plume comes from a correlation of experimental data given by

McCaffrey [6]. This correlation divides the

flame/plume into three regions:

k - thermal conductivity of the gas

2.7 X 10' * T,

l = length scale - y

/ Aw Cv - coefficient which depends on orientation [5]

Nu = Nusselt number

v = 7.18 X 10" 10 ts + rw

j

7 ' 4

For the cases of interest

Orientation

Vertical

Horizontal

Horizontal

Coefficient

0.130

0.210

0.012

Condition

Gr X Pr > 10 8 T > T

T <N T•‘w The coefficients for horizontal surfaces apply

to a slab over the zone. For the inverse of this

situation the coefficients should be reversed.

flaming:

mp - 0 . 011<5 ( Z/<3

2/s)°' 566 Z/Q 2/S < 0.08

intermittent:

mp = 0.026Q(Z/Q 2/s

) 0- 909 0.08 <Z/Q2,S

plume:

mp = 0.124Q(2/Q 2/5 )‘- 89S 0.20 < Z/Q 2/s

r (33)

<0.20

Entrainment in the intermittent region

agrees with the work of Cetegen et al. [7] but

yields greater entrainment in the other two

regimes. This difference is particularly important for the initial fire as the upper layer is far removed from the fire. In this formulation, the total mass flow in the plume is given

by the above correlation and the fuel

pyrolysis is related to it by

4.3. Source terms: plumes

A fire generates a plume which transports mass and energy from the fire into the upper

layer. In addition, the plume entrains mass from the lower layer and transports it into the

upper layer. The former generally increases

the upper zone internal energy whereas the

latter will have a cooling effect. For a fire

mp + mv = f(mz, Q) (34)

given above.

4.4. Source terms: door jets

Flow at vents is governed by the pressure

difference across a vent. In the control volume approximation the general momentum

equation for the zones is not solved. Instead,
62

the momentum transfer at the zone boundaries is included by using Bernoulli’s solution

for forced flow. This solution is augmented

for restricted openings by using ‘flow coefficients’. The modification deals with the

problem of constriction of velocity streamlines at an orifice.

There are two cases which apply to these

models. The first, and most usually thought

of in fire problems, is for air or smoke which

is driven from a compartment by buoyancy.

The second type of flow is due to a piston

effect which is particularly important in the

early stages of a fire. Rather than depending

on density difference between two gases, the

flow is forced, for example, by volumetric

expansion when combustion occurs. The results used for this model are those

of Bodart and Jones [8] and will not be

duplicated here. The notation used is: 5 = smoke

A = air

ij = flow from compartment (z) to (j)

P = floor pressure (reference)

The order of the letters indicate the type of

atmosphere from which the fluid is coming

and to which it is going. As many as three

neutral planes can exist for such flows. Two

mixing phenomena which occur at vents are

similar to entrainment by plumes. For the

case when hot gas leaves a compartment and

is driven by buoyancy into the upper layer

of a second compartment, a door jet exists

which is analogous to a normal plume. Mixing

of this type occurs for flow

SAij > 0

and is discussed in detail by Cetegen et al. [7] and Tanaka [9]. The other is much like an inverse plume and causes contamination

of the lower layer as cold gas from a compartment flows through a hot layer in a second compartment and is driven by

buoyancy (negative) into the lower layer.

Quintiere et ai [10] discuss this phenomena

for the case of crib fires in a single room and

deduce the relation

= (36)

This term is predicated on the KelvinHelmholz shear flow instability and requires

shear flow between two separate fluids. The

instability is enhanced if the fluids are of

different density since the equilibration distance is proportional to 7p. A schematic of

this type of flow is shown in Fig. 3. As can

be seen, mixing into the lower layer of a room

occurs under the same conditions for which

the ‘door-jet’ mixing to the upper layer occurs.

4.5. Source terms: fire

Currently we can deal with two types of

fires. The first is a specified fire. Then the mass pyrolysis rate is specified and the heat

release rate becomes

Qi = h c mf — cp (Tu ~ Tf )rhf — Qv mt (37)

whereas the mass loss rate, mv , is related to the pyrolysis rate by

mv — m f = (1 ~Xf)^v

a b

Fig. 3. Possible upper/lower mixing mechanisms which occur at vent jets.
63

As the burning efficiency becomes 100%, all of the volatiles are burned, and nothing

remains for sooting. The heat release goes into

radiation and enthalpy flux

Qa(fire) « xRQf

Qc (fire) = (1 -Xr)Q«

The term Qc (fire) then becomes the driving

term in the plume flow equation (see eqns.

(33,34)).

This approach is extended for a pool fire. A pool fire is basically the same except that

it is driven self-consistently by reradiation

from the compartment and the flame itself. From Rockett [11] we have

Qf “ QR(ext) + Qflame QrR + Qconv ~ Qcond

(38)

where

Qr - external radiation to the fuel source

Aflame = radiation from the flame back to the

fuel

Qrr = fuel surface reradiation

QC onv ~ enthalpy flux away from the fire

QC ond = conductive heat loss from the fuel to

the surroundings

4.6. Source terms : conduction

Conduction of heat through solids is not a source term in the sense mentioned earlier.

That is, loss or gain of energy from solids occurs by convective heating, which in turn

is influenced by subsequent gain or loss

through the solids. However, as much of the

net heat loss from a compartment occurs through loss to the walls, as well as heating of

interior objects, the form of heat propagation

in solids will be discussed here.

The equation which governs the heat

transfer in solids is dT

a?

k— , V

2 T

pc

(39)

and is a linear parabolic equation [12]. As

such, it must be solved by a different technique than is used for the ordinary differential equations which describe mass and

enthalpy flux. In order to couple these sys- tems in a reasonable way, we appeal to the

principle of time splitting. Simply stated, we

have two systems of equations which are decoupled as long as the time step used is

short compared to the characteristic time

scale for either set of equations. Wall temperatures change and the characteristic time for

energy flux through a solid is characteristically on the order of minutes. By using a time step of no more than one second the

applicability of time splitting is assured.

Currently the model assumes two walls, the

upper wall (and ceiling) which is in contact

with the upper layer, and the lower wall (and

floor) which is in contact with the lower

layer. A refinement will be to separate the

ceiling and upper wall, and the lower wall and

floor. This will be useful since walls are generally constructed of materials whose

thermal properties are different than the

ceiling and floor. A futher assumption is that

conduction is one dimensional only. That is, the heat equation is dT _

k 8

2 T

3 1 pc dx 2 (40)

and the solid behaves as an infinite slab in the

other two space dimensions. A corollary to

this is that the wall in contact with the gas

layer changes temperature instantaneously as the layer interface moves up and down. Such

a formulation is not entirely satisfactory as there is a finite equilibration time for the

solid. An additional refinement will be to extend this equation to two dimensions to track the layer as it moves up and down. So

far, the only zone model to attempt to in- clude this effect is discussed by Jones [1] and

Mitler and Emmons [13]. Even in this case the attempt was made only to include heat

loss from the upper layer as it moves down

and comes in contact with cool lower walls.

However, the phenomenon is important, as is discussed by Quintiere et al. [14], especially

as the thermocline in the wall will influence

the direction in which the wall boundary flow

propagates.

Conduction through solids occurs in two

places: the compartment walls and interior

objects. The technique used is the same in

both cases, although the boundary conditions on the equation may be different. Generally

a slab is cut into iV intermediate slices (N + 1 nodes). Then eqn. (40) is solved for each

slice. The actual finite difference used is a time centered, implicit scheme which is symmetric about the nodes. For the interior

nodes we have
64

|

[T, +1

' + W] +

+ |r,+ |[r(+1 -2T, + r,_ 1 ]|

(41a)

and for the edge nodes

r? _ . Qc

1 + — T-X « +

I + 1 —

L 2 2 k .

+

l

77 Tt + -

2

T,

(41b)

The temperature at the starting time at node

‘i* is T; and at time f + 5f it is T/. The number

of nodes is chosen to reduce the residual error

to some reasonable value, say less than 1%.

Use of N > 20 will improve precision with no

concomitant increase in accuracy. This technique would allow one to use different

constituents for each slab, although such is not done in the current implementation. Each

time step requires both an initial condition

and one boundary condition. We start with

the internal temperatures in each case, and

the flux on the ‘hot’ side. The usual scheme

is to set the far side boundary condition to zero heat flux (which allows heat build up in

the interior) or to approximate the far side

exterior as a constant temperature bath.

Either technique is satisfactory unless this far

side happens to be the interior boundary for

another compartment.

T/[1+t?]-

where

At k

7? = Ax pc

5. NUMERICAL INTEGRATION

The problem of the spread of fire, smoke,

etc. has been formulated as a set of differential equations. These equations are derived

from the conservation of mass and energy. As

a result, most of the equations are non-linear

and first order ordinary differential equations

(ODE). The exception to this rule is the heat

conduction equation which is a linear parabolic equation, in one or two dimensions. The

former can be solved using implicit predictorcorrector methods [15], and the latter by

successive over-relaxation (SOR) [16].

In the numerical implementation, we have

relied on the validity of a technique called

time splitting. Simply stated, we have decoupled equations which have greatly differing relaxation times, that is

1 dn - *

=z"> n df

where Ln varies by more than an order of

magnitude for each process. Except for the

driving program which invokes the hydrodynamics, species transport and thermal conductivity, the various modules which incorporate the physical processes are exercised

separately and interact as source terms. This

splitting technique is standard but the

inherent assumptions should be checked when

implementing a new numerical model. In addition, a check should be made at each time

step to insure that the relevant stability

criterion (similar to a Courant condition for

fluid flow) is not violated.

For both types of equations the solution at each time step is found by an implicit scheme.

The implicit method allows us to implement

the numerical solution as a time centered

algorithm. This insures reversibility in the

physical phenomenon, at least for nondiffusive systems. A test of this assertion is to exclude thermal conduction, integrate

from an initial condition to some final time,

and subsequently, by changing the sign of the

time step, we should be able to return to the

starting position. A time reversal calculation

is an important step in assuring ourselves that

the integration scheme itself is not dissipative

and thus will not relax to an incorrect final state. This is a real property in non-dissipative

physical systems and should be mirrored as closely as possible in a numerical model.

When conductivity is included, such

reversibility ceases to be strictly valid, of

course. An additional virtue of the time centered

scheme is avoiding the bifurcation which can occur in pure leapfrog schemes. The disadvantage is the one additional source calculation required at each time step. This time

appears to be short, however, in comparison
65

with the ‘corrector’ phase of the implicit

scheme.

The order of the integration is as follows:

(1) Estimate the values for pressure, etc. at

t0 + St. (2) Find the source terms for eqns. (22 - 25) based on the time centered values ( tQ +

1 / 260= (3) Integrate eqns. (22 - 25) using the source terms defined at the time centered

positions.

(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3) until conver- gence is reached.

(5) Integrate the conduction equation

using the SOR technique.

The following illustration shows where

each of these time-step points is, in relation

to steps (1 - 5):

(1) t0 —*t0 + St

estimate values at (tQ + 60

(2) x * t0 + St

find sources at (t0 + 60

(3) t0 —*t0 + 8t/2~*t0 + 8t

integrate from (t0) to (t0 + St/2)

(4) tQ —+t0 + St

repeat steps (2) and (3)

(5) t0 —*t0 + 5t

integrate conduction equation

Since each step is of at least second order

accuracy, the overall scheme will also be

second order accurate (0(5 f

3

)). The relative error allowed at each time step is ~10“3

. Thus

the precision is greater than the precision of

the computer being used (at least as long as these calculations are being done in single

precision).

As for the integration scheme itself, it is derived from an Adam-Bashford backwards

difference scheme [15], of order k = 1. This

yields a single step predictor and second order

corrector, 0(5

3

). These equations become

‘stiff’ if the individual source terms are large,

which leads to a short time step, yet the total source function may be tightly coupled if the

solution is being approached asymptotically.

Another possibility is that the source terms

for the variqus equations differ by more than an order of magnitude. In either case, the

usual time step criterion would require a time

step which is prohibitively short. It is possible

to modify the Taylor expansion used in obtaining the predictor-corrector scheme to use

the asymptotic nature of the equations to enhance the speed of the solver [17].

The general form of an equation is dn

dt -

g — In sf

Using the notation n(0), q(0), 1(0), f( 0) are the initial values at time ( t0), and n(l), <?(1),

/(l), and f(l) are the values at the new time

(f0 + 5f)» we obtain first for the normal equations

5t

predictor n(l) = n( 0) + —/( 0) (42a)

St

corrector n(l) * rc(0) + — (f(0) + f(l)) (42b)

2

and for the stiff equations

predictor «(1) = rc(0) +

corrector n(l) - n(0) +

St

1 + St1(0)

m (43a)

26 f l + 5f{/(0) + /(!)}

X{f(0) + q(l)~l(l)n(0)}

(43b)

The corrector must be iterated until some

specified error criterion is reached. If the

specified error cannot be reached in a small

number of iterations, say two or three, then

the time step must be reduced. It turns out

to be advantageous to halve the time step for

each instance that a reduction is required, and

increase it by only 10% for each subinterval

that the error criterion is satisfied.

One technique which has been used in

previous work to reduce the solution time for

these equations is to convert them to an

algebraic form. The conversion is done by

noting that the final state of the equations at each time step is a pseudo equilibrium. Thus

the transient term can be dropped. For a number of reasons, simultaneous ODEs are generally easier to solve than the corresponding algebraic equations unless one is exceedingly close to the solution. Such an assertion

is difficult to prove in the general case but

two examples should suffice to indicate the
66

difference in the nature of the root finding

procedure. One of the simplest nonlinear

algebraic equation is AB = C

with A, B, and C being integers. Until recently

this nonlinear decomposition was thought to

be unsolvable (in finite time) for an arbitrary

value of C. Also, a straight comparison of this

method (embodied in a model) with other

models using the algebraic scheme, has shown

a reduction by at least a factor of ten in the

time required for a given calculation. A

detailed timing comparison of several models

is given elsewhere [18].

6. COMPARISON WITH EXPERIMENTAL DATA

The series of tests which serve as a database for this analysis are based on a two-room

fire scenario by Cooper et al. [19] and an ongoing series of full-scale validation tests at the National Bureau of Standards. The former was a two-room configuration, consisting of

a bum (or fire) room and a corridor. It is referred to as the ‘Nike Site’ in later discussions. The latter is a three-room configuration

with the additional room being a target room

for testing high density occupancy, referred

to as ‘Building 205 \ The geometry of each of

these configurations is shown in Table 1. Comparisons between the model and

experimental data are for fires of 100 kW.

Figures 4 and 5 show the comparison for the

Nike Site tests for the upper layer temperatures in the bum room and corridor, and the

interface height in the corridor. Figures 6 and

7 show a similar comparison to the current

experiments in B205, a full scale facility at NBS. It is apparent from a comparison of

Figs. 4 - 7 that plume entrainment is esti- mated very well but that the door jet entrainment is underestimated. We can see this from

the good agreement between experiment and

theory in any compartment which contains a primary plume whereas in other compartments the predicted temperature is too high

and the layer depth too small in comparison

with experimental values. This underestimate Site 100 kW

400 1 I

g

200

Top TC

Theory

TIME (s) Fig. 4. Comparison of experimental and calculated

temperature profiles for the upper layer in the burn room and corridor in the ‘Nike Site’ experiments

(Table 1).

TABLE 1 Geometry data for validation calculation

Burn Vent Corridor Vent Target

Nike Site Depth* 4.3 — 11.1 - 20.2 —

Width 3.3 1.07 2.4 0.95

Height 2.3 2.00 2.3 0.15

Area 14.2 2.14 26.6 -48.4 0.14

Volume 32.2 — 61.2 - 112.3 —

Bldg. 205 Depth 2.3 — 12.2 — 2.3 Width 2.3 1.0 2.4 1. 0/1.0** 2.3 Height 2.2 1.9 2.4 1. 9/2.0 2.2 Area 5.5 1.9 29.7 1. 9/2.0 5.5 Volume 11.8 — 72.6 — 11.8

* Lengths are in meters, areas in square meters and volumes in cubic meters. **V1/V2: VI is from corridor to target room and V2 is from corridor to the ambient.
67

tion occurs in the regions which McCaffrey

[16] calls the flaming and far field regions. In the intermittent region, where the results of

McCaffrey [6] and Cetegen et al [7] agree,

the entrainment rate appears to be correct,,

Fig. 5. Comparison of experimental and calculated

interface height in the corridor of the ‘Nike Site’ experiments (Table 1), See refs, 14 and 19 for an

explanation of the criteria (10%, 20%) used to deter- mine the experimental interface height.

Another factor which gives rise to disparity

between theory and experiment is the as- sumption, in the model, of known and

uniform wall materials. In the experiments,

walls consist of several materials in a composite such as calcium-silicate board over gypsum. Allowing for these factors, the agreement seems quite good. As research continues, these discrepancies will be resolved.

7. STABILITY AND COMPLETENESS

There are a number of phenomena which

are either not included or need additional

work. They are:

1. Wall effect — two dimensional, unsteady

heat flow

2. Separation of flow — vents

3. Ceiling jet — transit time

The first refers to the finite thermal inertia

of the wall as the hot layer moves down {or

possibly up). There will be a two dimensional

thermocline in the wall which differs from

that in the compartment. Although this has

only a small direct effect, it can lead to flow

along the walls which can subsequently contribute to contamination of the lower layer.

Such effects become particularly important as the smoke travels further from the fire source and temperature differentials become small.

The second problem is quite important for

asymptotic predictions, especially near the

room of fire origin. Currently we assume that

hot gas mixes with hot gas or cold with cold

Fig. 6. Comparison of experimental and calculated upper layer temperature in the corridor of ‘B205’ experiments

(Table 1).
68

--- Ceiling

\

1 205 Corridor 100 kW

\

-- Experiment (15%)

-V

— Theory

-

~ \ 'A*

-

i 0 900 1800 TIME (s) Fig. 7. Comparison of experimental and calculated interface height in the ‘B205’ experiment (Table 1 ).

gas as it traverses a vent. This was a reasonable

approximation while the lower layer was as- sumed to be ambient. Now that we calculate

the lower layer temperature, we find that the

recirculating gas may have a temperature of

the order of the lower layer of the room into

which it enters. A particular example will demonstrate the effect. In a two-compartment calculation, Jones and Quintiere [20] found that

the layer outside of the bum room is lower

than that in the compartment of fire origin.

As there is no source of heat in this second

compartment and cooling occurs due to mixing, the upper layer in this adjacent space is cool relative to the upper layer in the fire

room, and even comparable in temperature

with the lower layer. Currently we assume all of the hot gas in the adjacent room, which

flows into the fire room, will be deposited in

the fire room upper layer. As can be seen in

Fig. 8 (Evans [21]), this assumption leads to

discrepancies in prediction versus experiment.

A better approach is to divide the incoming

flow into two components: for flow into

compartment (i) from compartment (;'), we

have a component into the upper layer

with the remainder going into the lower layer.

This occurs only after an interface discontinuity has been established.

The third problem will only be important

for very long corridors (20 m) or very tall compartments or shafts. Also, it is only a

TIME (min) Fig. 8. An example of the upper layer separation

which occurs in actual flows.

transient phenomenon. For purposes of siting

smoke detectors, for example, this transient

may be important.

8. CONCLUSIONS

The fire and smoke transport model, as described in this paper, is quite detailed and

complete as far as our current understanding

of fire phenomenology is concerned. It draws on a great deal of the research into fires which

have occurred over the past ten years, pulling

together much of the best work which has

been done in the field. The numerical
. 69

implementation is of particular interest

because it is extremely durable. The problems

discussed in Section 7 ‘Stability and Completeness’ need to be addressed if we are to carry this work further, such as to fires in

high rise hotels or on aircraft carriers,

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

Two NBS cooperative students, Alicia

Fadell and Charles DeWitt have contributed

to this effort, Ms. Fadell was instrumental

in implementating the ‘BUILD’ program

which generates the configuration and

description files for the ‘FAST’ model. Mr.

DeWitt is responsible for ‘FASTPLOT’, a routine which enables one to analyze rather

easily the extensive output available from

‘FAST’.

A machine readable copy of the model is available through NTIS. The tape includes the

data file listed in the appendices.

REFERENCES

1 W, W. Jones, A Review of Compartment Fire

Models, IR 83-2684

National Bureau of Standards, Washington, DC, 1983.

2 R. Siegel and J. R. Howell, Thermal Radiation

Heat Transfer, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1981.

3 T= Kusada, NBSLD, The Computer Program for Heating and Cooling Loads in Buildings, BSS 69,

National Bureau of Standards, Washington, DC,

1976.

4 H. Schlichting, Boundary Layer Theory,

Pergammon Press, New York, 1955, (translated

by J. Kestin).

5 J. S. Turner, Buoyancy Effects in Fluids,

Cambridge University Press, 1973.

6 B. J. McCaffrey, Momentum implications for buoyant diffusion flames, Comb. Flame, 52

(1983) 149.

7 B, M. Cetegen, E. E. Zukoski and T. Kubota,

Entrainment and Flame Geometry of Fire Plumes, Ph.D. Thesis of Cetegen, Cal. Tech.,

1982.

APPENDIX A - NOTATION

8 W. W. Jones and X. Bodart, On a proof of the

solvability of the conservation equations which

describe the transport of fire and smoke, Fall Technical Meeting of the Combustion Institute,

Clearwater, 1984.

9 T. Tanaka, A Model of Fire Spread in Small Scale

Buildings, RP #84, Building Research Institute,

Japan, 1980; T. Tanaka, A Model of Multiroom

Fire Spread, IR 83-2718, National Bureau of

Standards, Washington, DC, 1983.

10 J. G. Quintiere, K. Steckler and B. J. McCaffrey,

A model to predict the conditions in a room

subject to crib fires, First Specialists Meeting

(Int.) of the Combustion Institute, Talence,

France, 1981.

11 J. A. Rockett, Experimental determination of the

heat flux to a burning surface, private communication (to be published).

12 H. S. Carslaw and J. C. Jaeger, Conduction of

Heat in Solids, Oxford University Press, London,

1959.

13 H. E. Mitler and H. W. Emmons, Documentation

for CFC V, The Fifth Harvard Computer Fire Code, Home Fire Project Tech. Rep. rf45. Harvard University, 1981.

14 J. G. Quintiere, K. Steckler and D. Corley, An

assessment of fire induced flows in a compartment, Fire Sci. Technol., 4 (1984) 1. 15 S. D. Conte, Elementary Numerical Analysis,

McGraw-Hill, New York, 1965.

16 A. R. Mitchell and P. F. Griffiths, The Finite Dif- ference Method in Partial Differential Equations,

Wiley, New York, 1980.

17 T. R. Young and J. P. Boris, A numerical tech- nique for solving stiff ordinary differential equations associated with the chemical kinetics of

reactive flow problems, J. Phys. Chem., 81 (1977)

2424.

18 W, W. Jones, An improved numerical method for

fire models, Fall Technical Meeting of the Eastern

Section of the Combustion Institute, Atlantic

City, 1982.

19 L. Y. Cooper, M. Harkleroad, J. Quintiere and W.

Rinkinen, An Experimental Study of Hot Layer

Stratification in Full Scale Multiroom Fire Scenarios, ASME 81-HT-9, Milwaukee, 1981.

20 W. W. Jones and J. G. Quintiere, Prediction of

corridor smoke filling by zone models, Comb. Sci. Technol., 11 (1983) 111.

21 D. Evans, private communication, 1983.

22 W. W. Jones and A. Fadell, A Device Independent

Graphics Kernal, to be published.

A area (m 2

); Au , Ax , Ad are the upper and lower compartment surface areas in contact with

the upper and lower gas layer, Fig. 1, respectively. Ad

is the interface area between the

upper and lower layers. In Section 4.4, ‘A’ is used as a variable in the flow equations to indicate air. B width of a vent (m)

C, C' flow coefficient ^ 0.6 - 0.7 for both smoke and air c specific heat — cp , cv (J/kgK)
^

ft,

-c*

ft; co

70

E energy release rate (J/s)

E internal energy of the gases — see eqn. (2)

Fij view factor — relative area of ‘i ’ as seen by V

’ (dimensionless)

g acceleration of gravity (9.8 m/s 2

) H height (m), i/u , Hlt are the upper and lower limits of a vent — Fig. 1

h enthalpy (J/kgK)

hc heat of combustion — theoretical (J/kg)

i, j compartment indices

k thermal conductivity (J/smK)

L mean beam length (m) equivalent opaque sphere

m mass (kg)

m mass flow (kg/s):

rhv — rate of release of volatiles

me — entrained into a plume

m{ — fuel burning rate = Xe^v

rhij — mass entering room ‘f from room

mp — flow rate in plume (mp = mv

-- me ) height of the neutral plane (m)

pressure (Pa):

P-*P — floor reference pressure

Pa — outside ambient pressure

rate heat is added or lost (J/s):

9u» Qi ~ upper, lower zones, respectively

Qt — fire (/i c mv ) Q0 — objects

Qr — radiation

Qc — convection by walls — radiation added to upper gas layer

Qk — radiation from surface ‘k’ Qp — combustion energy lost by formation of volatiles

gas constant for specific mixture

smoke — Section 4.4

t time (s)

T temperature (K):

Ta — ambient

Tc — external wall

Tu — upper wall

Tj — lower wall

TR — reference temperature for enthalpy flow

Tg — upper zone temperature

Tv — pyrolysis temperature

V volume (m 3

) Z layer thickness (m) — Zx = interface height in compartment (i)

Qi absorption coefficient of upper gas layer (m-1

), thermal diffusivity (m 2/s)

7 ratio of specific heat (c p /cv ) e emissivity (dimensionless):

e{ — surface *i* e g — upper gas layer

eu — upper compartment surface

ej — lower compartment surface

p mass density (kg/m 3 ); pui — density of the lower layer in compartment (i) k thermal conductivity (J/msK)

5 ij Kronecker delta =0 i^=j = 1 i=j
71

At time step (s)

Ax spatial discretization

Subscripts — In general ‘u’ and T indicate upper and lower gas layer, respectively . For area and

emissivity variables, reference is to the compartment itself.

APPENDIX B

Shown in Table 2 is a sample input for FAST, The organization is that control is at the

beginning, followed by component information, connections, wall properties, a description of the

fire, species generation information and finally file descriptors for graphics and the dump file. TABLE 2

VERSION 16 Toxic hazard evaluation

T iraes taps 600 120 000 0 0 NFL0R 1 NUMBER OF FLOORS IN THE CALCULATION

NR0QM 4 TOTAL NUMBER OF ROOMS

NMX0P 1 T AM6 300.

HI/F Q.O O.C 0 .0 0.0

WIDTH 3.3 2.4 2 .9 2.4

DEPTH 4.3 18.8 9 .9 9.9

HUGH 2.3 2.3 2 .3 2.3

HVENT 1 2 1 .07 2.0 0.0

HVENT 2 3 1.07 2.0 0.0

HVENT 3 5 0.95 .15 0.0

HVfNT 2 4 1.07 2.0 0.0

HVENT 4 5 .95 . 10 0.0

WALLS 2 C0N0 .0012 .0012 .0012 rst • O O v. SPHT .340 .840 .840 .840

ONSTY 2000. 2000. 2000. 2000.

THICK 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50

EMXSS 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8

C0N0 .0012 .0012 .0012 .0012

SPHT .840 .840 .840 .840

ONSTY 2000. 2000. 2000. 2000.

THICK 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50

EMISS 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8

L F 30 1 ROOM OF FIRE ORIGIN

LF3T 1 TYPE OF FIRE (GAS BURNER)

LFMAX 6 NUMBER OF INTERVALS OF FIRE GROWTH

LFP0S 1 POSITION OF THE FIRE (CENTER)

1.0 0.0 . 750 . 250 .00 49758

FMASS .002 .002 . 002 .002 .002 .002 .002

FAREA .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 FhlGH .0 .0 .0 .0 c 0 « 0 • 0 FTIME 60 . 60. 60. 60. 60a 60a

SPECI 3 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

SPEC! 7 1.0 .025 .025 .025 .025 .025 .025 .025 .025

SPECI 9 3500. .02 .02 .02 .02 .02 .02 .02 .02

SPECI 10 31.2 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

EN0SP

In general, the first word in each line is a key word and must be included. The explanation of

this file will be by example:

Line Meaning

1 version and title 2 time step information

600 -* number of seconds for the calculation

120 print interval
72

3

4

5

6

7-10

11-16

17

18-27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37-40

41

42-44

120 dump interval (requires files)

1 graphics interval (requires files)

0 - hard copy counter

Number of floors — not used with this version, but retained for compatibility

Total number of compartments

Maximum number of openings between compartments (<4)

ambient temperature,

compartment geometry, W X L X H X Floor (1 NROOM)

connection configuration (outside is compartment NROOM + 1)

number of walls used in the calculation 1 thermophysical properties of the upper and lower walls respectively (units are SI except energy (kJ) and power (kW).

which compartment the fire is in

type of fire (currently only a gas burner is allowed)

number of intervals for production rate 2 interior position of the fire to establish entrainment rate (1 -* center)

fuel properties necessary for partial combustion

1.0 fraction of pyrolysis which bums

0.0 -* fraction of water in the fuel

0.750 - fraction of carbon in fuel by weight

0.25 fraction of hydrogen in fuel by weight

0.00 fraction of oxygen in fuel by weight

49758 heat release rate (kJ/kg)

300.0 fuel inlet temperature

0.0 fraction of heat which exits the fire plume

in the lower layer as radiation mass loss rate at each end point (kg/s), LFMAX + l e area of the fire at each end point (m 2

) height of the base of the flame (m)

duration of each time interval (LFMAX)

fractional production rate of species 3, 7, 9 and 10 3

first number is species (1 12)

second number is a conversion factor

third through LFMAX + 3 are fractional production rates

4 termination label (required)

file descriptors

DISFG = plan view 5 CONFG = layer information 5 DUMPR = dump file for FASTPLOT

There are two primary output files for the model. The first is binary (UNIT = 9) and is used by

the routine ‘FASTPLOT’ described in Appendix D. The other is an ASCII file (UNIT = 6) and

usually is displayed on the printer. Units are SI (MKS) except for energy which is in kJ. The

meanings of the symbols, in the order which they appear, are:

1 Currently an upper and lower wall are used. This will change shortly to four wails to reflect the physical differ- ence among the ceiling, walls and floor.

2 Figure 9 shows a sample fire production curve.

3 Species 1 - 12 are N2 , 02 , C02 , CO, HCN, HCL, ThHC, H2 0, smoke density, total % LCS o, smoke number

density and HCL number density.

4 Fraction of the mass burning rate at the corresponding endpoint (see line 33 and Fig. 9).

s Format for the graphics files is given in the NBSIR by Jones and Fadell [22].
73

TIME (s) Fig. 9. An example of fire size specification through mass loss data.

Initial

Tixnestep output

TIME

U. TEMP

L. TEMP

U. VOLUM

U. DEPTH

C. TEMP

F. TEMP

EMS

EMP

ADS

QF

QR

QC

Pres mass

— reiterate the input parameter, generally in the order of input — simulated time (s) — upper layer temperature (K) — lower layer temperature (K) — upper layer volume (m 3

) — vertical thickness of the upper layer (m) “ ceiling temperature at the surface (K) — floor temperature (K) — flow into the upper layer from the plume (kg/s) — pyrolysis rate (kg/s) — area of the fire (m 2

) — enthalpy release rate of the fire (kW) to the upper and lower layer — total radiant energy to the upper and lower layers (kW) “ total convective heating of the upper and lower layers (kW) — floor reference pressure (Pa) — vent flow from i -*• j (kg/s) - sec (Section 4.4)

Species concentrations listed by species:

mass — total mass of that species in the layer (kg)

M/V — mass per unit volume multiplied by the conversion factor shown in line

37 - 40 of the input fuel. Unity leaves this value in (kg/m 3

) 6

. PPM — parts per million of the total molecules present

PPM-M — dosage which is an integral of (PPM) over time (PPM — minutes)

APPENDIX C

The program BUILD is used to construct data files for configuration display. These files can then be used by FAST to display a decision tree either interactively or as a graphics streaming

file. Both the configuration file for display as well as information on position and type of display

for the decision tree are built by this program. The commands are:

6This conversion factor allows the user to convert this output to an optical density, LCso or whatever.
74

ADD [VERTEX, EDGE, POLYGON] (default = VERTEX)

add vertex — create vertices by specifying three (x, y, z) coordinates; add vertices to the

work file add edge — create edges by specifying two vertices; add edges to work file add polygon — create polygons by correcting vertices. A minimum of three vertices are required to define a polygon, and there is an internal maximum specified

by NPVERT.

DELETE [VERTEX, EDGE, POLYGON] (default = VERTEX)

delete vertex — delete vertices and any edges or polygons which are connected to the

deleted vertices

delete edge — delete edges

delete polygon — delete polygons

DISPLAY [ALL, VERTEX, EDGE, POLYGON] (default = ALL)

display all — display all edges and polygons in graphics mode

display vertex — display all vertices and their line numbers in graphics mode

display edge — display all edges in graphics mode

display polygon — display all polygons in graphics mode

DUPLICATE

Duplicate a polygon at another location — asks for a displacement vector.

END

End the program.

ERASE

Erase the display screen. GET [filename] (default = INFILE)

Open an existing file and assign the filename to INFILE; the elements of this file make up the

new work file. HELP

List all the BUILD commands, their corresponding options, and the default values.

LIST [VERTEX, EDGE, POLYGON] (default = VERTEX)

list vertex — list the world coordinates, window coordinates, and the vertices of the

work file on the display screen

list edge — list the edges of the work file on the display

list polygon — screen list work file’s polygons on the display screen MOVE [VERTEX, POLYGON] (default = VERTEX)

move vertex — move a vertex from its present location to a new location — asks for a displacement vector

move polygon — move a polygon from its present location to a new location — asks for a displacement vector

PRINT [ALL, VERTEX, EDGE, POLYGON] (default = ALL)

print all

print vertex

print edge

print polygon

— list the work file’s world and window coordinates, vertices, edges, and

polygons on the printer — list the world coordinates, window coordinates, and vertices of the work

file on the printer — list the work file’s edges on the printer — list the polygons of the work file on the printer
75

SAVE [filename] (default * OUTFILE)

Save the current file under the specified filename; assign the filename to OUTFILE,

STATUS

List the filenames stored in INFILE and OUTFILE; indicate the current number of vertices,

edges, and polygons and the maximum number of each element allowed,

WINDOW

Create the work file’s window space by specifying minimum and maximum x and y coordinates for display. Defaults to WORLD,

WORLD

Create the work file’s three-dimensional world space by specifying x, y, and z coordinates. All

structures must be contained in this cartesian coordinate system.

APPENDIX D

FASTPLOT is a data analysis program which runs in conjunction with ‘FAST’. The results for

‘FAST’ are dumped to a data file after each prescribed desired time step. FASTPLOT has the

capability to form a list of variables, read in their values at each time interval, list out the values

in tabular form, graph the values (hard copy or screen), and save the variables in a file for future

reference.

The FAST model models a fire in one of several compartments, or rooms, and follows smoke

and toxic gases from one compartment to another. We are concerned with variables in both the

upper and lower layers.

The list of variables presently available through FASTPLOT are: AREA ..................... burning area of the fire (m 2

) CONCENTRATION . species density in parts per million

CONVECTIVE heat loss from layer to solid surface due to convection

(kW/m 2

) DOORJET. . buoyant mass flow through a vent (kg/sec)

DOSE species concentration integrated over time (ppm-min)

ENTRAINED . mass entrained by a plume (from lower layer to the upper

layer)

INTERFACE . height of the two-zone discontinuity (m)

MASS mass density in a layer (kg/m 3

) MDOTFIRE mass loss rate of the fire source (kg/sec)

NEUTRAL 1 ) NEUTRAL 2 > neutral planes (maximum of three) for each vent

NEUTRAL 3

> PLUME . total mass flow into the plume (kg/sec)

PRESSURE reference pressure at the floor of the compartment (Pa)

QC total convective heat gain by a layer

QF total enthalpy increase from the fire source QR total radiative heat gain by a layer

RADIATION heat loss from layer due to radiation (kW/m 2

) TEMPERATURE temperature of the layer (C)

VENTFLOW mass flow through a vent (kg/sec) — bidirectional

VOLUME volume of the upper zone (m 3

) WALLTEMP temperature of the wall (C)
76

K

UJ

a.

a.3

Fig. 10. Sample output from ‘FASTPLOT’. Shown is one of the 100 kW calculations for the ‘B205’ experiments

in the three compartment configuration.

The CONCENTRATION, DOSE, and MASS also have associated with them a species number.

The main control of the program is carried out in the subroutine WHICHONE. It does the

actual building of a list and the processing of the options. The possible options available to the

user are: ADD

CHANGE

CLEAR

DEFAULT

DELETE

END

HELP

LIST

PLOT

REVIEW

SAVE

Upon running the program, the first input encountered will be that of the dump file generated

by FAST. Most of them will be of the form:

filename .DMP

Next, the user will be asked to input the option which he wishes to have performed. The fol- lowing is a description of each of the options available. They are in the order that they usually

will be encountered. However, some may be executed before the others without any problems.

The minimum number of characters required to recognize an option is enclosed in the parenthesis

at the beginning of each word.

1. (DE)FAULT

This enables the user to set his own default parameters for the following:

COMPARTMENT #

VENTFLOW DESTINATION

LAYER
SPECIES #

CHARACTER SET FOR PLOTTING

77

This option may be done at any time and if it is not done the defaults are set to ‘1, 2, upper,

9, and 4’ respectively. The purpose of this option is to change the defaults available for other

commands and data input.

2. (VA)RIABLES

The purpose of this option is to allow the user to recall the possible variables that are available

for use. They will be listed on the screen.

3. (AD)D

This command is used to build a list of variables. When an option is requested ADD may be

entered by itself or together with a list of variables that are to be added. If it is entered alone a message will be printed asking for the variables that are to be added to the list. For example:

> ADD - INPUT VARIABLES TO BE ADDED > or

> ADD TEMP, PRES,

For each variable selected there is a series of questions that will be asked as to the type of that

variable wanted. Questions asked about all variables are: WHICH COMPARTMENT? -> WHICH LAYER? ->

If VENTFLOW is chosen the compartment origin and destination will be requested; if CONCENTRATION, MASS, or DOSE are selected the species number of each will be requested.

The maximum number of variables allowed on the list at any one time is 25. If the list is full or

the variable is presently on the list the addition will be disallowed and another option requested.

4. (DEL)ETE

When this option is entered the present list of variables will be printed out to the screen and

the user will be asked to input the variables to delete by the number associated with them on the

list. They must be entered on a single line separated by commas or blanks.

If the variable number that is input does not correspond to one that is currently on the list it will be skipped. After the deletions have been processed a new list is presented and another

option requested. If the list is presently empty then that fact will be stated in an error message.

5. (HE)LP

This command may be input at any time that the user is asked for an option. Its purpose is to simply list out to the console a list of the available commands and a brief explanation after which

another option will be asked for.

6. (RE)VIEW

At times the user may wish to see what is presently on his list before entering a command. This

may be done with the REVIEW command. It will print out the current list along with the compartment number, species, and layer of each of the variables. After the printing of the entire list the option request is again displayed.

7. (LI)ST

After variables have been added to the list and their data values read in, the user may list out

the values of any of the variables on the list to either the printer or the console. The user will

input the device number (5 = CONSOLE, 6 = PRINTER), and the list of variables presently on

the list will be displayed. He will then be asked to input the corresponding number(s) of the

variable(s) to be listed out. They must be entered on a single line separated by commas or blanks.

The maximum number of variables able to be listed at one time is 8 for the printer and 5 for the

console.
78

8. (PL)OT

This option is central to the data analysis. After entering this command the current list of

variables will be displayed along with their numbers. The user will be asked to input the number

of the variable(s) to be plotted from the list. They should be entered in a string separated by a comma or a blank space. For example:

ENTER VARIABLES TO BE PLOTTED -> 1,2,3,

4

or ENTER VARIABLES TO BE PLOTTED -> 1 2 3 4

After entering the variable numbers, the number of the device which the graph is to be plotted

on will be asked for.

The possible devices are:

1. CALCOMP

2. PRINTER

3. LEXIDATA

4. SCREEN

The maximum number of plots per call to PLOT is limited to 4. They will be printed in the

following order on the device depending on the number of graphs per page:

1 2

3 4

FOUR

TWO ONE

1

2

1 2

3

THREE

1

If more than 4 variables are input only the first four will be accepted and the remaining ones

disregarded. If a variable number not on the list is entered, an error message will appear, the list will be reprinted and the input will be asked for again. This will continue until all variables

entered are currently on the list. Before the graphing is done the user is given the opportunity to change the range of the X and

Y axes. The maximum and minimum values of the X and Y axes will be displayed, followed by a request for a change in each, which will be of the form:

CHANGE (X or Y) AXIS TO? ->

If no change is desired simply enter a (RETURN) and the next axis change will be displayed.

If a change is made the value will be entered and the same change request will be made again.

This will be repeated until a (RETURN) is entered.

When all die changes have been made, if any, the graph of that particular variable will be

plotted. After it has been completed the next variable’s maximum and minimum will appear and

their changes input as before.

After the final graph has been completed the option request will be displayed and a new

option may be entered.

9. (SA)VE

This option allows the user to save the values of the variables on the list in a file. The format

used will make the data compatible with an experimental data processing program designed for

handling of data in the Center for Fire Research.
79

The user will be asked for the name to be used for the file. A check will be made to see whether

that file presently exists or not. If it does the user will be asked if he wants to write over the old

file with this new data. If his answer is NO, nothing will be placed in the file and another option

requested. If, however, he does want the file rewritten, or the file does not already exist, the new

file will be created and the data stored in it. Each variable on the list will be dumped with the following format at the beginning of each

block of data:

I6,X6,A6, * — — COMMENT ———

The first 16 will be for the number of data points for that variable, the next 16 is for the

number given to that variable on the list, and the A6 is for the actual variable name. Everything

after the * is a comment block and will be filled with information relevant to that particular

variable, such things as species number, compartment number, layer, etc. The actual numerical

data will be dumped using the format 7E11.5.

10. (CL)EAR

The input of this command empties the variable list.

11. (CH)ANGE

This option restarts the program by asking for a new file and resetting all variable lists.

12. (EN)B

This function terminates the execution of the FASTPLOT program.
*’ ' ! - .


NBSIR 87-3591

EXITT - A SIMULATION MODEL OF OCCUPANT DECISIONS AND ACTIONS IN RESIDENTIAL

FIRES: USERS GUIDE AND PROGRAM DESCRIPTION

Bernard M . Levin

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

National Bureau of Standards

National Engineering Laboratory

Center for Fire Research

Gaithersburg, MD 20899

July 1987

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS
.
TABLE OF CONTENTS

LIST OF FIGURES

Abstract

1 . INTRODUCTION

2 . DESCRIPTION OF THE MODEL

2 . 1 Introduction

2.2 Input Variables and Parameters.

2.2.1 Building

2.2.2 Smoke

2.2.3 Noise and Alarm.

2.2.4 Characteristics of the Occupants.

2 . 3 Decision Rules

2.3.1 Introduction . . . . 2.3.2 Aware of Fire

2.3.3 Assigning Actions to Occupants Who Are Aware of Fire...

2.3.4 Investigation Top Priority.

2 . 4 Travel Within the Building

2.5 Delays, Pauses, and Action Times

2.5.1 Introduction

2.5.2 Speed. . 2.5.3 Delay Time

2.5.4 Minimum Response Time

2.5.5 TPAUSE

2.5.6 Decrease in Preparation Time Due to Heavy Smoke.

2.5.7 Hesitation Due to Not Being Alone

2.5.8 Time Required to Alert, Wake or Prepare for Evacuation.

2 . 6 Smoke Detectors L>

2.7 Current Limitations and Future Development

3. USING THE MODEL

3.1 Introduction

3.2 How to Start and Run the Program

3.3 Description of the Options

ii

vi

1

1

3

3

3

34

5

5

5

5

6

8

8

9

10

10

10

11

11

11

11

11

12

12

12

14

14

15

17
i, jhBhBHHBHH
3.4 Description of Input Data 20

3.4.1 Introduction.... 20

3.4.2 Occupant Characteristics 20

3 . 4 . 2 .

Introduction. . 20

3.

4.2

= 2 Age 21

3. 4. 2.Sex. .... 21

3. 4. 2.Help. 21

3. 4. 2.

Sleep ...... ... 21

3. 4. 2.Room .... 22

3.4.3 Building Characteristics 22

3.4. 3.1 Introduction 22

3. 4. 3.

Description of the Three Buildings 22

3 . 4 . 3 .

Background Noise 23

3. 4. 3.

Input Variables for One Story Buildings 24

3. 4. 3.Input Variables for Two Story Buildings........ 24

3. 4. 3.Smoke Detectors 24

3.5 Making Changes in the Program . 25

4. DESCRIPTION OF COMPUTER PROGRAM 26

4.1 Introduction 26

4. 2 Structure of the Program. 26

4.3 Description of the Fire.... 27

4.3.1 General Description 27

4.3.2 HF(I) 28

4.4.3 Smoke 28

4.4 Awareness of Fire 28

4.4.1 The Basic Algorithm 28

4.4.2 Detectors 29

4.4.3 Measures of Fire Cue Impact 29

4.4.4 Minimum Response Times 31

4.5 Choice of Actions 31

4.5.1 Permitted Responses 31

4.5.2 Reasons for Investigation Being Low Priority or Not

Permitted 33

4.5.3 Criteria for Setting ACT1(J)=1 33

4.5.4 Criteria for Fire to be Considered Serious 34

iii
4.6

Finding Shortest Path 34

4.6.1 Shortest Path Algorithm 34

4.6.2 Handling Obstacles 34

4.6.4 4.6.3 Choice of Exit. 35

Choice of Shortest Path Subroutine 35

4.7

Moving the Occupants 36

4.7.1 Introduction 36

4.7.2 Speed 36

4.7.3 Available Time. 37

4.7.4 Criteria for Branching out of Subroutine 37

4.7.5 Smoke ' 37

4.7.6 Assisting Other Occupants to Escape 38

5. PARAMETER VALUES 39

5.1 Introduction 39

5.2 Parameters 39

5.3 Delays and Action Times 41

5.3.1 Introduction 41

5.3.2 TPAUSE 42

5.3.3 Decrease in Prepartion Time Due to Heavy Smoke 43

5.3.4 Hesitation Due to Not Being Alone 43

5.3.5 Time Required to Alert, Wake or Prepare for Evacuation. 44

6.0 DESCRIBING A NEW BUILDING, ITS OCCUPANTS AND THE FIRE 45

2

6.1 Introduction 45

6.2 Describing the Building 46

6.2.1 Introduction 46

6.2.2 Number of Nodes, Room, and Exits 46

6.2.3 Lengths of Links Between Nodes 46

6.2.4 Defining Windows 47

6.2.5 Front Door 47

6.2.6 Room Location of Nodes 47

6.2.7 Height of Rooms 47

6.2.8 Combining Rooms 48

IV
6 . 3 Smoke Characteristics 48

6.3.1 Introduction. 48

6.3.2 Smoke Characteristics 48

6.3.3 Number of Time Periods 49

6.3.4 Description of the Fire 49

6.3.5 Smoke Detectors 49

6.3.6 Background Noise 50

6 .4 Occupant Characteristics 50

6.4.1 Introduction 50

6.4.2 Number of Occupants 50

6.4.3 Age 50

6.4.4 Diabilities. 50

6.4.5 Sex 50

6.4.6 Location of Occupants 51

6.4.7 Sleep. 51

6.4.8 Travel Speed 51

6 . 5 Output to TENAB 51

6 . 6 Layout of New Building 51

6.6.1 Introduction. 51

6.6.2 How to Skip the Graphics 52

6.6.3 How to Draw the Building 52

6.6.4 Labelling Nodes 53

7 . 0 OUTPUTS 55

REFERENCES 56

APPENDIX A: DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF PARAMETERS AND VARIABLES..... 58

v
List of Figures Page

Figure la. Floor Plan of a Typical Ranch House 69

Figure lb. Floor Plan of Townhouse 70

Figure lc . Lower Floor Plan of a Typical 2 -Story House 71

Figure Id. Upper Floor Plan of a Typical 2 -Story House 72

vi
EXITT - A Simulation Model of Occupant Decisions and Actions in Residential

Fires: Users Guide and Program Description

Bernard M. Levin

Center for Fire Research

National Bureau of Standards

Gaithersburg, Maryland 20899, USA

ABSTRACT

EXITT is a computer model that simulates the decisions and actions of

occupants in a residence. This model can be used to determine the locations

of the occupants during the progress of a given fire. The rules for the

action choices of the occupants are based largely on studies of residential

fires and to a lesser extent on relevant controlled experiments. These rules

involve consideration of the smoke conditions, and the characteristics,

capabilities and locations of the occupants. EXITT can be run on a personal

computer and does not require user training- - the user controls the model by

answering simple questions that appear on the screen. It can be run with preselected scenarios and, also, with buildings, fires and occupants selected by

the user.

1. INTRODUCTION

The EXITT model simulates occupant decisions and actions in fire emergencies

in small residential buildings. In assigning decisions to an occupant, the

computer considers such factors as: age of occupant; sex; whether occupant is

asleep; smoke conditions; whether smoke detector is sounding and how loud it

sounds; whether occupant needs help in moving; and location, capabilities,

condition and status of the occupants. This version of the model does not

consider the heat or toxic components of the smoke. The permitted actions

include: investigate the fire; alert others; awake others; rescue others; and

evacuate/escape. Actions not permitted in the current version include:

telephoning fire department from within the building; fighting the fire; and

re-entering the building to make a second rescue.

The simulation is currently being developed as a series of progressively more

sophisticated models. This report describes an early interactive version of

the model.

The next Chapter of this report describes the EXITT model, with emphasis on

the rules used in determining the simulated decisions and actions of the

occupants. The casual user, who is familiar with personal computers, may

1
wish to read only the first two chapters of this report. The remaining

chapters are designed to be reference material plus some guidance for the

computer novice to help him get started (see Section 3.2).

Chapters 3 and 4 of this report serve as a users manual and computer program

documentation, respectively. The program is written to be sufficiently user

friendly that it should not be necessary to read the users manual in Chapter

3. Chapter 4 also contains details about the program that are not in the

general description of Chapter 2.

This simulation program is designed to run on the IBM- PC computer (and similar

microcomputers using the MS-DOS operating system) using the BASICA programming

language. 1 To run the model the user must load BASICA into the computer and

run the program EXITT. The program is sufficiently user friendly that the

user can run and understand the program from the comments, questions and

information appearing on the screen. Descriptions of the full set of thd

various options given to the user are provided in Section 3.3.

The necessary input data for running the model are: a description of the

building, the smoke characteristics of the fire, and the characteristics of

the occupants. The user can provide his own input data or select from three

buildings, nine fires and eight occupant sets "stored" in the computer

program. While the layout of a building stored in the program will be

displayed on the screen, the user may find it important to have a copy of the

building layout available in hard copy. See Figures la- Id for copies of the

layouts of the three buildings used.

'The use of company names or trade names within this paper is made only

for the purpose of identifying those computer hardware or software products

with which the compatibility of the programs of EXITT has been tested. Such

use does not constitute any endorsement of those products by the National

Bureau of Standards.

2
. DESCRIPTION OF THE MODEL

2 . 1 Introduction .

The EXITT model simulates occupant decisions and actions during fire

emergencies in small residential buildings. Buildings are represented in the

model as nodes that represent rooms, exits and secondary locations within

rooms; and links or distances between adjacent nodes. The occupants move from

node to node at a speed that is a function of their assigned normal travel

speed, the smoke conditions, and whether or not they are assisting another

occupant

The user controls the model through the keyboard by answering simple questions

that appear on the screen. (A "batch" version of the model, that does not

require or permit user interaction during the running of the model, is also

available in the FORTRAN programming language: the decision rules in this

paper apply also to the batch version.) The decisions of the occupants are

reported on the screen and on the printer. The movements of the occupants are displayed graphically on the screen, reported on the printer, and stored in a data file. The user can suppress outputs on the printer and on the screen.

All the decision rules programmed in the computer model are designed to make

the decisions as similar as possible to those that building occupants would

make. The decision rules are based on: 1. a limited number of controlled

experiments; 2. case studies of occupant actions in residential fires; and 3.

the judgment of the author. Whenever the rules are based directly on data in

the literature or specific case studies, reference is made to such data.

Otherwise, the rules are based on the author's judgment.

Imbedded in the decisions rules are parameters that can be easily changed.

Developing improved values for these parameters is a major part of the future

development of the model.

The fires , buildings and occupants that are modelled can come from three

sources: 1. three buildings- -each with two or more fires and two or more sets

of occupants- -are stored in the computer programs and associated data files;

2. the user can substitute a new building, fire and/or set of occupants by

answering a large number of simple questions appearing on the screen; 3. the

user can substitute a new building, fire, and/or set of occupants by changing

the program and/or providing a new data file using the guidance provided in

Chapter 6.

2.2. Input Variables and Parameters .

2.2.1. Building . The building is represented within the computer by nodes

that represent rooms, exits and secondary locations within rooms; and by links

or distances between adjacent nodes. The major data used to define a building

are: the number of rooms, nodes and exits; the height of each room; the room

location of each node; nature of each exit (door or window); and the distances

between adjacent nodes. Windows that cannot or would not be used in a fire

3
\

are not entered into the computer as exits, e.g., those with a window air

conditioner installed.

2.2.2. Smoke. The program is designed to use the output of the FAST model- -or any other similar model- -for distributing smoke throughout the building over

time [Jones, 1984]

.

2 EXITT assumes a two layer smoke model. However, it is

assumed that a small proportion of the smoke in the upper layer gets into the

lower layer so that there is an odor of smoke in the lower layer. Exitt

accepts as input the smoke density in the upper layer and the depth or height

of the two layers in each room at the beginning of each time period, e.g.,

every five seconds.

The measure of optical density for which the model is being calibrated is the

one used by Jin in his studies of human behavior in smoke.

OD = In (L0 /L)

where L0 is the initial light intensity which reduced to a value of L over a path of one meter. This measure is consistent with the well recognized fact

that when people perceive a physical stimulus, the perceived intensity tends

to vary directly with the log of the physical intensity of the stimulus.

One important factor in making action choices in a residential fire is the

properties of the smoke in the occupant's room. A measure of the

psychological impact of smoke is determined as follows:

S=2*0D*D/H where

,

S is the psychological impact of the smoke.

OD is the optical density of the smoke in the upper layer,

D is the depth of the upper layer, and

H is the height of the room.

This expression is based on the assumption that the impact varies directly

with the optical density (i.e., the log of the amount of smoke in the upper

layer) and with the depth of the upper layer relative to the height of the room. The formula is an arbitrary representation of this assumption.

Some of the decision rules and definitions that involve S include:

Sometimes the response to smoke is largely a function of the height of

the lower layer, which can be presumed to be relatively clear. For

example, occupants will escape through a room containing any density of

smoke provided there is sufficient clear space for crawling, say, 1.2

meters

.

Occupants will not move to a node where S>0 .

5

unless the depth of the

lower layer (H-D) is at least 1.2 meters.

Occupants will not move to a room where S>0 .

4

unless the depth of the

lower layer is at least 1.2 meters.

2 Items in brackets refer to references at end of report.

4
Occupants will increase their travel speed by 30% after encountering a room where S>0 . 1

Occupants will terminate an investigation if they are in a room where

S>0.05. They will terminate their investigation before entering a room

where S>0 . 1

Once an occupant is in a room where S>0.1, the decision rules are modified, e.g., in the text below these changes are referred to as consequences of believing the fire to be serious

When S>0.4 there are prohibitions and penalties: these are referred to

below as consequences of encountering "bad smoke,"

Each of the above mentioned thresholds is an input parameter and can be easily

changed as we continually improve the calibration of the model, i.e., modify

the model to correspond better to behavior in real fire emergencies . Although

the values selected are consistent with a conservative interpretation of Jin's

data [1976], these values will be reconsidered as part of the further

development of the model,

2.2.3. Noise and Alarm . The background noise level in a room affects the

ability of an occupant to hear the alarm, both in real fires and in the model.

The background noise is preset at 35 decibels. The user can easily override

this value, on a room by room basis, by entering a larger value when defining

the fire scenario.

Another input, related to a specific fire scenario, is the loudness of each

smoke detector in each room, including the room in which it is located- - it is

a function of distances and of which doors are open. The impact of the alarm

is a function of the difference between the signal intensity of the alarm and

the background noise.

2.2.4. Characteristics of the Occupants . The user has an opportunity either

to define or modify the characteristics of the occupants through the keyboard.

The characteristics are: age, sex, normal travel speed, whether or not the

occupant needs help in evacuation, whether or not the person is awake, room

location, and, if the occupant is asleep, a measure of how difficult it is for

the occupant to awaken.

There are a number of additional parameters imbedded in the decision rules

which are described below. These include: the age below which a child is

considered as a baby, unable to initiate any action; and the times required to

perform various actions, such as waking a sleeping adult occupant when the

fire does not appear to be serious. Some of these additional parameters are described in Section 2.5, Delays, Pauses and Action Times.

2.3. Decision Rules .

2.3.1. Introduction . There are two types of occupants: those who are fully

capable when awake and those who need assistance in moving. The decision

rules apply only to those who are capable when awake. Those who need

5
assistance moving make no decisions and their movements are determined by

their "rescuer".

At the beginning of the simulation, all occupants are unaware of the fire and

the potential danger. Actions and decisions are assigned, in part, based on

the smoke conditions in each room at the beginning of the appropriate time

period.

The following paragraphs describe the sequential steps the computer follows in

determining the decisions and actions of one occupant for one time period.

The computer goes through these steps for each capable occupant for the first

time period and then repeats the process for each subsequent time period, in

turn, until all the occupants are either out of the building or trapped by the

fire. (For each step, the computer considers all occupants before proceeding

to the next step.)

2.3.2. Aware of Fire . The first step in determining the actions of an

occupant is to determine if and when an occupant is sufficiently aware of the

fire cues (i.e., smoke, sound of alarm and visible flame) to undertake an

action. If the occupant became aware of the fire cues in a previous time

period, he will remain aware of the fire cues for this and all subsequent time

periods. An occupant becomes aware of the fire when the fire cues are

sufficiently strong. Obviously, stronger cues are needed to awaken and alert

a sleeping occupant than to alert an awake occupant. The fire cues are: the

sound of the smoke detector; the odor of smoke; and, for awake occupants,

visible smoke. (Visible flame can be used, if desired, as input data: if it

is used, it will be an additional fire cue.) If the weighted sum of the

intensities of the cues reach a prescribed threshold, the occupant will be

flagged as being aware of the fire cues. (If the fire cues are of borderline

intensity, the occupant will become awake and aware after an assigned delay.)

If the fire cues are not sufficiently strong for the occupant to become aware

of the fire during the current time period, the consideration of this occupant

for the time period is completed.

The following basic equation, for determining if and when an occupant will

start to respond to the fire cues, was suggested by the empirical results of

Nober et al.[1981]. While Nober studied only the response of the smoke

detector alarm, his results were generalized for the odor of smoke, and the

sight of smoke.

T = 70 - 4(C-20) and

C = ( A - N ) +X1+X2+X3+X4 where,

T is the delay time, in seconds, before the occupant will start his

first action;

C is the sum of the sensory impacts on the occupant;

A is the sound intensity of the smoke detector as heard by the occupant;

N is the background noise;

XI is impact of an awake occupant seeing flame. It is set sufficiently

high to assure a rapid response whenever an awake occupant is in the

6
same room as a visible flame; and set equal to zero if the occupant is

asleep or if the location of the flame is not entered into the computer;

X2 is impact of an occupant smelling smoke --it is a function of the

smoke density and smoke depth and applies to both sleeping and awake

occupants. It varies directly with S, the psychological impact of smoke

when the smoke remains above 1.2 meters. However, its value

dramatically increases when the upper smoke level gets down to the

height of a person in a bed;

X3 is impact of an awake occupant seeing smoke- -it is a function of the

product of the smoke density and smoke depth in the upper layer and also

varies directly with S ; and

X4=0 if the (typical) occupant is asleep and X4=15 if the occupant is

awake. This reflects the fact that more stimuli are required to awake

than to alert an occupant. The value of 15 is based on the data in

Nober [Nober et al , 1981]. Occupants who have difficulty waking could

be assigned negative values of X4.

Subject to the restrictions:

A-N cannot be less than zero. If N>A let A-N = 0;

If C < 20 then T — infinity (i.e., 99999 in the computer). This

restriction is based on Nober' s data where occupants usually either

responded within 70 seconds or remained asleep for the remainder of the

test period;

XI and X3 equal zero if the occupant is asleep.

The model as described above assumes that the response is a function of the

sum of the impacts of different sensory cues. This assumes that the relevant

aspects of the perceptual processing of olfactory, visual and auditory cues

are similar. There does seem to be a surprisingly consistent perceptual

observation (Fechner's Law) that the intensity of a perception varies directly

with the log of the physical stimulus. (While Fechner's Law has broad

applicability, it is not universal and only approximate [Boring, 1950].)

Since our measure of the psychological impact of all the cues are based on the

log of a physical measure, the impacts to the three types of cues can be

assumed to be roughly comparable. The decision to sum the impacts of the

three cues is based on the assumption that simple behavioral rules are better

than complicated ones when there is no technical reason to select a complicated one. Furthermore, simple summing is consistent with the results

of Fletcher and Munson who found that a tone heard binaurally seems twice as loud as the same tone heard monaurally [Licklider, 1951].

The physical measure of each fire cue is measured in different units and they

must be converted to a single measure of sensory impact. The cue most easy to

quantify, and the one for which we have the most data, is the sound of the

smoke alarm which is measured in decibels. It was decided to use "equivalent

decibels" as the single measure of sensory impact. The impacts of the other

sensory cues are "converted" to equivalent decibels, i.e., the values of X2

and X3 are transformed to the number of decibels that would approximate an

equivalent impact in alerting occupants. (When the flame is visible to an

awake occupant, the value of XI is set sufficiently high to ensure a rapid

7
response.) The transformation factors are input parameters: their values

will be the subject of future research and analysis.

While occupants respond more quickly to strong fire cues, there is a minimum

duration of time required to awaken or become aware of the fire cues, select

an action, and perform preparatory actions. These minimum times range from 1

to 10 seconds depending on whether the occupant is asleep and the amount of

smoke. (See Section 2.5.5.)

For each occupant, a time to start his actions is computed independently at

each time period until the occupant starts his first action: that is, a different time to start his actions will be computed each time period. He

will start his action at the earliest time among those computed.

2.3.3. Assigning Actions to Occupants Who Are Aware of Fire . If an occupant

has been assigned an action in a previous time period, he will be given an

opportunity to complete that action before any consideration is made regarding

additional actions.

2.3.4. Investigation Top Priority . The normal first action is to investigate

the fire cues to determine the nature of the hazard. However, there are a number of exceptions, i.e., situations that would make investigation either a lower priority or an unreasonable choice. [Levin, 1985] If the computer

determines that none of these exceptions applies, the computer assigns the

room with the most smoke as the GOAL, labels the occupant as investigating,

and assigns him the task of going to the room with the most smoke.

One special situation that would cause investigation to be a low priority

arises when an adult female occupant is in the same building as a baby- -in a case study provided by Keating and Loftus a mother rescued her baby before

determining if it was necessary. [Keating and Loftus, 1984]

Investigation is not permitted: if the occupant has already completed an investigation; if the occupant has been in a room with moderate or bad smoke; or if the occupant has been awakened or alerted by an occupant for whom

investigation is not permitted.

If the exceptions do apply, the computer considers the following alternative

actions in the order given below.

Help Occupant in Same Room . The computer determines if there is another

occupant in the same room who needs help. If that occupant is fully

capable but asleep, he will be awakened. If he needs assistance moving,

he will get that assistance. (If more than one occupant qualifies for

help, the sleeping occupant is given priority.)

Help Occupant in Different Room . If there is one or more persons in a different room(s) who needs to be alerted, rescued or awakened, the

computer will make two assignments: tentatively assign the fully

capable occupant a person to alert, rescue or awaken; and assign the

capable occupant the action of going to the room of that person . (Once

he arrives at that room, a new action will be assigned based on the fire

8
situation at that time and the capabilities of the persons in the room. Exception: if he is going to the room of an awake and capable person who

needs to be alerted, he will automatically alert that occupant.) The

priority order of these tentative assignments for helping persons in

different rooms is: alert capable adult; rescue other occupant; wake

other occupant; and alert child.

Occasionally an occupant will go to a room for the purpose of assisting

a sleeping or disabled occupant: upon arrival at the room he finds an

awake, capable adult unaware of the fire, i.e., not responding to the

fire cues. In such a situation, the responding occupant will quickly

alert the unaware occupant before addressing the needs of the other

occupant.

Investigate . If investigation is still a permitted choice, the occupant

is assigned the task of investigating. The computer assigns the room

with the most smoke as the GOAL, labels the occupant as investigating,

and assigns him the task of going to the room with the most smoke.

Egress. If none of the above alternative assignments apply, the

occupant is assigned the action of evacuating.

Every capable occupant is considered for helping an occupant in the same room

before any occupant is considered for helping an occupant in a different room.

In this version of the model, an occupant over the age of ten functions as an

adult, that is, they follow the priority list presented above for adults.

A child who is 8,9, or 10 will rescue any occupant in the same room and will

go to another room to awaken or alert another occupant. However, he will not

go to another room for the purpose of rescuing an occupant. Children 7 and

younger do not assist others out of the building but will wake or alert other

occupants who are older. A child is considered to be a baby if his age is

equal to or less than the parameter BABY: babies do not initiate any actions.

The tentative value of BABY is 3.

The general rationale for the above priority order is to determine if there is a need for positive action, to assist those known to require help, and then to

assist those who might require help. (When it is unknown if a sleeping

occupant has awakened, he can be considered as someone who might require

help.) If two people are known to require help, provide help to the one

needing more limited help, that is, a sleeping but otherwise capable occupant.

The rule that supercedes all others is to help someone in the same room before

helping an occupant in different room.

2.4. Travel Within the Building . Occupants move within the building from node to node. The path assigned is

determined by finding the shortest path to an exit based on a shortest path

algorithm which contains an option for assigning penalties for going through

bad smoke and for leaving through windows

9
The route to be taken to a designated room, the best exit, or another

designated node is determined by a shortest path algorithm. The shortest path

algorithm used is described by Levin and Hedetniemi [1963]. Normally when the

occupant is investigating or going to assist another occupant, a straightforward shortest distance is determined.

If the occupant wishes to egress or evacuate the building, or if the occupant

had encountered too much smoke when going to assist another occupant, then the

path with the lowest number of demerits is selected. Each meter of travel is

assigned one demerit, leaving by a window is assigned 100 demerits, and going

to a node through bad smoke is assigned 200 demerits. If the smoke at a node

is intolerable, that node cannot be part of a route. If smoke is blocking all

routes to the designated node, the occupant will decide to escape. If the

occupant is escaping, the route out of the building with the least demerits is

selected. If all escape routes are also blocked, he will be considered

trapped. (See section on Smoke in Section 2.2 for decision rules regarding

moving or not moving through bad smoke.)

As an occupant attempts to move, whenever he encounters an intolerable amount

of smoke based on the criteria in Section 2.2, he will stop moving and the

computer will redetermine his best route to his destination, i.e., the route

with the fewest demerits. If the shortest path algorithm fails to find an

acceptable path, the computer will look for the best route out of the

building. If all exit routes are blocked by smoke, the occupant is considered

trapped.

2.5. Delays. Pauses, and Action Times .

2.5.1. Introduction . The time consuming activities of an occupant can be

classified into three categories.

Movement from one node to another. He travels the shortest path at the

speed defined below.

Delays and pauses. These activities include time to awaken, time to

make decisions, and time to prepare for action.

Assisting actions, i.e., waking another occupant and preparing another

occupant for egress.

2.5.2. Speed . The travel speed of each occupant is set at:

1.3 meters per second for normal conditions;

1.69 m/s (30% faster than normal) if an occupant should consider the

fire to be serious (e.g., he has been in a room with heavy smoke);

0.65 m/s (50% of normal) if the occupant is assisting another occupant,

or 0.845 m/s if the occupant also considers the fire to be serious;

0.78 m/s (60% of normal) if the smoke is bad (i.e., S>0.4) and if the

depth of the lower layer is less than 1.5 meters, i.e. if the occupant

has to "crawl" under the smoke. (0.52 m/s if the occupant is also

assisting another occupant.)

10
The normal travel speed and all the modification factors are parameters that

can be set by the user. While these values will be reconsidered as part of

further model development, they are similar to those reported by Jin [1976].

Whenever an occupant moves, his actions are printed on the screen and on the

printer, recorded in a data file, and graphically represented on the screen.

(Printing on the screen or on the printer can be suppressed.)

2.5.3. Delay Times . The delay time, the decision time, and the time to

perform assisting actions (hereafter, collectively called Delay Times) depend

on the occupant characteristics, the fire characteristics and the impact of

the fire cues on the occupant. The length of these Delay Times are determined

by a set of decision rules as described below. These Delay Times can be

changed rather easily and all assigned values should be considered as tentative

2.5.4. Minimum Response Time . The normal (i.e., smoke is not bad) minimum

response (delay) time is 6 seconds for awake occupants: this includes

decision and preparation time. The normal minimum response time for sleeping

occupants is 10 seconds: this also includes decision and response times.

These values are based on the work of Nober [Nober et al , 1981]. The status

of sleeping occupants is changed to awake status whenever the remaining

response time is 6 seconds or less.

2.5.5. TPAUSE . An occupant is assigned normally a delay time of TPAUSE

seconds whenever: he completes his investigation or terminates his movement

along a route because of intolerable smoke; or changes his mind about helping

another occupant. This delay includes the time required to choose a new

action. TPAUSE is tentatively set equal to 3 seconds.

2.5.6. Decrease in Preparation Time Due to Heavy Smoke . When an occupant is

subjected to normal fire stimuli, a ten second response Delay Time is assigned

to a sleeping occupant and six seconds to an awake occupant. (Note the

response time will be greater if the fire stimuli are not sufficiently strong

for an immediate response.) However, if the occupant believes the fire to be

serious, the maximum Delay Time for the occupant becomes four seconds and if

the smoke in the room is bad, the maximum Delay Time becomes 1 second.

2.5.7. Hesitation Due to Not Being Alone . Research by Latane and Darley

[Latane and Darley, 1968] has shown that when the fire cues are noticed but

not immediately compelling, adults will hesitate in their responses if other

capable adults are in the same room. A simple explanation is that there is a failure to respond due to a feeling of shared responsibility. The computer

program accounts for this by delaying responses by one time period for each

time period where: there is no one that needs to be rescued, alerted, or roused; there is a second capable occupant in the room; the smoke detectors

are not sounding; and the sum of the psychological impacts of the fire cues is

less than 30, i.e., if C<30 then T=99999, where C and T are defined in Section

2.2. (The threshold for this hesitancy is 30 rather than 20 to reflect that

more stimuli or cues than the ’’minimum for response" are required to prevent

the "hesitation due to not being alone.")

11
2.5.8. Time Required to Alert. Wake or Prepare for Evacuation . Whenever one

occupant assists another, time for providing or receiving the service must be

assigned. The following times are assigned:

If Occupant J is alerting a fully capable and awake adult, he moves to

the node of the other occupant. Once he arrives at that node, Occupant

J starts his next action with no delay or decision time charged. The

occupant being alerted is assigned a Delay Time of five seconds or 2.5

seconds depending on whether the alerting occupant believes the fire to

be serious.

There are two types of assistance that an occupant may be flagged as needing: waking; and help moving. If an occupant is asleep and does

not need help moving, the delay is five seconds for the occupant doing

the waking. For the occupant who is being awakened the delay is ten

seconds- -5 seconds for waking plus 5 seconds decision and preparation

time. However, if the assisting occupant believes the fire to be

serious, then his time devoted to waking would be only 2.5 seconds and

the total Delay Time for the previously sleeping occupant would be 5

seconds

.

If an occupant needs help moving, the Delay Time (at the time the

assisting occupant arrives at the location of the other occupant) is

usually 10 seconds if the disabled occupant is awake and 12 seconds if

he is asleep. However, if the disabled occupant is a baby, the Delay

Time, in seconds, is the baby's age plus 4. (It does not take long to

pick up a baby and wrap him or her in a blanket.) In addition, if the

capable occupant believes the fire to be serious , the previously

determined Delay Time is halved. For example, if the fire is believed

to be serious, the Delay Time for helping a 2 year old baby would be 3

seconds ((2+4)/2).

2.6. Smoke Detectors

.

The building may have up to three smoke detectors. These smoke detectors are

independent and are not interconnected in any way. It is necessary to provide

the locations of the smoke detectors and how loud each detector would sound in

each room of the building. A smoke detector will sound if the smoke density

of the upper layer smoke is at least .015, and the depth of the upper layer is

.15 meters or greater.

An option in the program is to consider the smoke detectors as broken. It is,

therefore, easy to determine the effect of smoke detectors by running the-"

program twice with the same fire and occupants, once with smoke detectors

working and once with them broken.

A third option is for the user to preset the time for each detector to sound.

2.7. Current Limitations and Future Development .

12
The model as described in this paper is a preliminary version of a model under

development. The development, improvement and expansion of the model is a continuing activity. The user should be aware of the limitations of the

current model. These limitations include:

1. The model is deterministic. Only typical behavior is modelled:

aberrant behavior is not permitted.

2. Improved calibration is required to upgrade its validity.

Calibration means changing parameter values in the model based on: a. analyses of data in the technical literature; b„ judgments of a panel of

experts; c. analyses of in depth interviews of survivors of residential

fires; and, d. attempts to simulate behavior in real fire emergencies

for which we have information. An intensive effort to improve the

calibration of the model, is scheduled for the next year.

3 Some typical actions are not included, especially, fighting the

fire, phoning the fire department from within the residence,

reentering the building.

4. Occupants respond to smoke conditions but not to heat

conditions

The current development program is designed to overcome and eliminate these

limitations. The program can be made probabilistic, and heat will be added as

a factor in decision making and route selection,

The model permits the user at the keyboard to override a very limited set of

the occupant decisions assigned ’by the computer. Within the next few months,

the user will be given the opportunity to override most, if not all, of these

assigned decisions. This will permit the model to be used in studying the

effect on safety of alternative decisions by the occupants.

13
3 USING THE MODEL.

3 . 1 Introduction.

The program is written in the BASICA programming language for the IBM- PC

computer. Other computers can be used if: they can accept programs written

for the IBM- PC; and there is available a version of BASICA (or BASIC)

compatible with BASICA for the IBM-PC. It is very user friendly in that it

requires very little knowledge about the program- -and no knowledge about

programming- - to use. It is designed to be sufficiently easy to use that it

should not be necessary to refer to this chapter in order to run the model.

However, this chapter is valuable as the source of information for the

following purposes:

To assist users to get started if they have no knowledge of the Dis.k

Operating System (DOS):

To obtain a better understanding of the options given the user when

running the program;

Since much of this chapter is designed to be used as reference material, many

of the sections are written as reference material rather than as descriptive

narrative

.

The simulation normally displays the building layout and the location of the

occupants on the monitor screen (i,e., the "TV" screen). This feature

requires the computer to have a "graphics board" that enables the computer to

handle the graphics instructions in programming language BASICA. The computer

will ask if the computer has an IBM graphics board or one that works like it.

If the computer does not have the proper graphics board, answer NO, and the

program will not display the floor layouts and the location of the resident on the screen.

There are nine fire scenarios available for use in the version being

distributed. (It is possible to add a fire scenario of the users choice but

adding a completely new scenario requires a considerable amount of effort to

input all the data that is needed.) Making changes to the fire

characteristics and to the occupants is relatively easy. Making minor changes

to the characteristics of the building is also easy but some changes require a working knowledge of the BASIC programming language (but not an expert

knowledge). More information on this will be given later.

While it is not necessary to know anything about programming to use this

simulation, it is, of course, necessary, to know enough about your computer to

start the running of a BASIC program and to understand the limited computer

terminology in this introduction.

The simulation is provided on one floppy disk. This floppy disk contains a number of different programs and data files. These programs must work

together for the simulation to work properly. If all these programs and data

files remain together in a single disk drive (and directory) , the computer

14
will switch or chain from one program to the other automatically „ The user

must tell the computer in which disk drive the program is available by

answering a question which will appear on the monitor or screen.

The program has a number of options. The user selects the options he wants by

answering questions. The number of such options might overwhelm the first

time user. One question is "IS THIS YOUR FIRST EXPERIENCE WITH THIS PROGRAM?"

A YES answer directs the computer to select a fire scenario and to limit the

number of options for the novice.

There are three different building layouts permanently available to the user.

(It is possible for the sophisticated user to add a fourth building of his/her

own design. Instructions for doing this are in Chapter 6, Describing a New

Building, Its Occupants and the Fire.) One option is to load the

characteristics of a building of the user's choice through the keyboard by

answering a series of questions. When you define a building through the

keyboard you lose the option of having a graphical representation of the

building layout on the monitor screen. To gain an understanding of the input

data that affects the simulation, it is suggested that you enter the

characteristics of a very small building, its occupants and a fire, through

the keyboard. (Such a small building might be only two rooms and a hallway.)

However, use of the stored scenarios and buildings are recommended for use by

the novice as he experiments with the model and learns its characteristics.

3 . 2 How to Start and Run the Program.

To run the simulation model the user must load BASICA into his computer and

then load and run the program EXITT. If all the provided programs and data

files are available on the default disk drive, no other actions are needed to

run the simulation model. However, if you have fancy options on your

computer, you may have to program your computer to perform like a standard

IBM- PC.

The following describes, for the novice, one way to set up a computer to do

this if the simulation is being run as a self contained model. If the

simulation is being run in conjunction with other models, such as is done with

the Hazard Assessment Methodology [Bukowski, 1987], procedures and

instructions that permit the models to work together will supercede the

recommendations below.

Whether or not your computer has a hard or fixed disk drive will determine how

the program is loaded into the computer. The following discussion is for

users with a standard IBM- PC personal computer (or compatible computer) and

very limited knowledge of the disk operating system for their computer.

If your computer has one or two floppy disk drives and no hard disk

drives, place a disk with MS DOS (DISK OPERATING SYSTEM) into disk drive

A, close the "door" of the disk drive and turn the computer on. (When

you turn on the computer, the disk operating system will automatically

load into the computer- - If you have problems, you probably put the disk

in the wrong disk drive.) At the A> prompt- - i . e .when A> appears on

15
the screen- -type BASICA and press the return key. This will load the

BASICA programming language into your computer. (If you do not have an

IBM computer, you may have to replace the MS DOS disk with a disk

containing BASICA before typing BASICA.)

Once the programming language BASICA has been loaded into the computer,

you will receive a prompt, Ok, from the computer. At the Ok prompt,

replace the MS DOS DISK with the disk containing all the programs for

the simulation, close the door, type the expression RUN "EXITT" and

press return. This statement will load the simulation into the computer

and start the program.

If your computer has a hard disk drive and you wish to copy the simulation

onto the hard disk, use the following instructions: (It is assumed that the

computer has the root directory on the hard disk as the available directory.

Unless the computer has been programed to do otherwise, you have this

situation when you turn on the computer.)

Place the disk containing all the programs for the simulation in drive A

and close the door.

At the C> prompt type COPY A: EXITT and press return. (This will load a program that will make it easier to start the program.)

At the C> prompt, type MD EXIT. (This will make a new directory in

which we will store the simulation programs on your hard disk.)

Type CD\EXIT. (This will tell the hard disk to refer to the EXIT

directory.

)

Type COPY A: *.* and press return. (This will copy the contents of the

programs and data files on the simulation disk onto the hard disk.)

Remove the simulation disk from drive A and replace it with the MS DOS

disk. (If you do not have an IBM computer, use whatever disk has your

copy of BASICA.) At the C> prompt, type COPY A: BASICA.* and press

return. (This will copy BASICA onto the hard disk in the simulation

directory .

)

Note: This step can be omitted if you can access BASICA from

this directory. You can test for this by typing BASICA and

pressing the return key before starting this step. If

BASICA appears on the screen, you can omit this step. You

can get out of BASICA by typing SYSTEM and pressing the

return key.

To start the program when you are using a hard disk, type EXITT and

press the return key. (You can do this if you are in either the root

directory or the EXIT subdirectory.) This will start a program that

will change to the proper directory; load BASICA; load program EXITT;

and tell the computer to start running the EXITT program.

16
To control the running of the program, the user answers the questions posed by

the computer on the monitor screen (i.e. the "TV screen"). To answer these

questions it is not necessary to have any knowledge of computers, programming

or the characteristics of this computer simulation.

Exception: the user should know if his computer has an IBM graphics

board (or one that works like one) . If the user does not know, he

should assume his computer has the proper board. If the program stops

running immediately after he answers YES to the question about the

graphics board, he can assume he does not have the proper board (or the

board in his computer is not currently programmed to act like an IBM

graphics board)

3 . 3 Description of the Options.

The options are presented as questions and are self explanatory. However,

some of the effects of the option choices are not obvious. While it is not

necessary to know these effects to use the program, they are described below.

DO YOU WANT TO USE YOUR PRINTER? A negative response will suppress all

printer output. If your computer does not have a printer, the program

may not work unless you give a negative response. If you give an

affirmative response, a record of the simulation results will be

printed.

IN WHICH DISK DRIVE IS YOUR PROGRAM: A, B, OR C? Since some users may

have stored the program on a hard disk (drive C) and others may have the

program stored on a floppy disk (drive A or B) , this option gives users

the flexibility to use any of these disk drives.

DOES YOUR COMPUTER HAVE A COLOR MONITOR (TV SCREEN)? Color displays on

the screen often cannot be seen on black and white screens . This option

permits the computer to use color displays on color monitors and

monochrome displays on monochrome monitors. Type 1 if you have a color monitor or 2 if you have a monochrome monitor. (Note there will

be color displays only when you use building 1.)

It is not necessary to ask the user this question when he is using an

IBM-PC. Instead he should change the instructions in statement 971 of

program EXITT to X=l. When X=1 , the program will direct an IBM computer

to determine for itself whether it is attached to a monochrome or color

monitor

DO YOU WANT TO DEFINE YOUR OWN BUILDING? The normal mode of running

this simulation program is to use one of the available fire scenarios,

including scenarios you have "programmed". If you do, the

characteristics of the building are preset. If you choose to define

your own building, you must also enter the characteristics of the smoke

and of the building occupants through the keyboard. Entering the

characteristics of the building, smoke spread and occupants is very easy

but time consuming because of the amount of data that must be entered.

17
If you define your own building through the keyboard, the graphics part

of the output is suppressed.

ARE YOU IN A HURRY- -THAT IS, WOULD YOU LIKE TO BYPASS SOME OF THE

REPETITIVE INFORMATION THAT CAN BE PRINTED ON THE SCREEN? This option

is self explanatory. It also applies to output from the printer if the

printer is working. The most important sets of data that are not

displayed, if you respond affirmatively, are the smoke conditions. It

is recommended that you answer YES to this question unless you have a special reason to answer NO.

IN THIS SIMULATION THE COMPUTER WILL MAKE DECISIONS FOR THE BUILDING

OCCUPANTS SUCH AS WHETHER TO INVESTIGATE THE FIRE OR ESCAPE. DO YOU WANT

THE ABILITY TO OVERRULE SOME OF THE OCCUPANT DECISIONS AS GENERATED BY

THE COMPUTER? The current version of the program gives the user a limited capability to make changes. Future versions will give the user

additional capability. An affirmative answer gives the user an

opportunity to change the cycle time if the user is entering the smoke

characteristics through the keyboard. An affirmative response gives the

user the opportunity to answer the following questions about the smoke

detectors

.

ARE THE SMOKE DETECTORS BROKEN? The simulation is based on the

assumption that there is one, two or three independent single station

detectors in the building. The available fire scenarios all include

working detectors. This option gives the user the capability of

disabling all the defined detectors. If the user defines his own

scenario that does not include operating smoke detectors, he must answer

ves to this question. (He must also respond YES to the question DO YOU

WANT THE ABILITY TO OVERRULE SOME OF THE OCCUPANT DECISIONS AS GENERATED

BY THE COMPUTER? in order to get to this option.) If the smoke

detectors are not functional, the initial response to the simulated fire

may be delayed, just as in real life.

DO YOU WANT TO PRESET WHEN THE SMOKE DETECTOR WILL SOUND? The

simulation will normally determine when a smoke detector will sound

based on the smoke conditions in the room in which the specific smoke

detector is located. If the user chooses to have the ability to

overrule some the occupant decisions, he will be presented with this

option. If he answers affirmatively, he will be directed to preset the

time of sounding for each of the smoke detectors in the building.

DO YOU WANT TO CONTROL THE DENSITY AND THICKNESS OF THE UPPER SMOKE

LAYER? If the user is using one of the available fire scenarios, the

spread of the smoke is normally controlled by the computer. However, if

this question is answered affirmatively, the computer will ask the user

to input the smoke conditions each time period. (To minimize the effort

required, only changes in the smoke conditions from the previous time

period need to be entered.) If you are defining your own building

through the keyboard, you must, of course, provide the smoke densities

through the keyboard. The computer will give the user an opportunity to

change smoke densities, height of upper layer, and whether or not a

18
flame is visible at the beginning of each separate time cycle. Note: if

the simulation program contains smoke data for X time cycles and the

simulations runs for X+l time cycles, at the X+l time cycle, the program

will switch to this option.

DO YOU WANT TO RUN AN ADVANCED VERSION OF THIS PROGRAM? The "advanced"

features relate to the ability to make and store changes in the input

data and the program parameters. Specifically, an affirmative response

to this question will automatically give the user the opportunity to

make changes in the input data and some of the parameter values (unless

the user is defining his own building through the keyboard.) If a negative response is chosen, the user will be given the opportunity to

make changes only in the characteristics of the occupants.

DO YOU WANT TO SAVE THE INPUT DATA FROM THIS RUNNING OF THIS PROGRAM?

An affirmative answer to this question directs the computer to save all

the input data and parameter values used in the current running of the

program. The purpose of saving these values is to use them in a subsequent running of the model. It should be noted that if no changes

are made, the future running of the model will give the same output as the current run. However, the user will have ample opportunity to make

changes when he runs the model with the saved data.

DO YOU WANT TO USE THE INPUT DATA FROM A PREVIOUS TIME YOU RAN THIS

SIMULATION? An affirmative response permits the user to use the input

data saved from a previous run. See comments under previous option.

WE WILL USE THE INPUT DATA AND PARAMETERS IN A COMPUTER FILENAME

' DATA . SAV ' . DO YOU WANT TO USE A DIFFERENT FILE? The program contains

some error checks when renaming files - -however , failure to follow the

rules for naming files might cause the running of the program to

terminate

THE RESULTS OF THIS RUN WILL BE STORED IN A COMPUTER FILE NAMED

'DATA. SAV' . DO YOU WANT THE FILE TO HAVE A DIFFERENT FILENAME? These

two options permit the saving and reusing of many sets of input data and

parameter values

THE RESULTS OF THIS RUN WILL BE STORED IN A COMPUTER FILE NAMED 'RERUN.

EVA' . DO YOU WANT THE FILE TO HAVE A DIFFERENT NAME? The data being

saved contains the arrival time of each occupant as he arrives at a node. It is used by Program TENA3 which calculates the toxic smoke

exposure of each occupant [Bukowski, 1987'. Although the suggested name

may differ, the user is always given an opportunity to assign the name

he prefers. Therefore, the user can easily save the results of an

unlimited number of runs.

DO YOU WANT THE COMPUTER TO PLACE OCCUPANTS IN THE BUILDING? If the

user is using one of the available fire scenarios, the location and

characteristics of the occupants are normally preset. However, if the

user answers this question affirmatively, the computer will ask a series

of questions that permits the user to define the characteristics of the

19
occupants. In any event, the user is given the opportunity, at a later

point in the program, to modify the characteristics of the occupants.

3 . 4 Description of Input Data .

3 . 4.1 Introduction . In order to run this model it is necessary to define the

characteristics of the building, the building occupants and the fire. These

input data can be defined in one of three ways:

The user can enter the characteristics through the keyboard. He does

this by answering a very long series of questions. The user activates

this option by giving an affirmative respond properly to the question:

DO YOU WANT TO DEFINE YOUR OWN BUILDING? (If he answers negatively, the

user will be asked to choose among the three buildings stored in the

computer programs and data files.)

The characteristics of three buildings, nine fires and eight sets of

occupants are stored in subroutines and data files. These subroutines

and data files will be automatically called, as needed, if the user

responds properly to the questions:

DO YOU WANT TO DEFINE YOUR OWN BUILDING?

DO YOU WANT TO CONTROL THE DENSITY AND THICKNESS OF THE

UPPER SMOKE LAYER? and

DO YOU WANT THE COMPUTER TO PLACE OCCUPANTS IN THE BUILDING?

The user will be asked to select among the three buildings, the two or more fires for that building, and the two or more sets of occupants for

that building. (It is possible to change these inputs by modifying the

appropriate subroutines and data files: information that will assist the

user in making these modifications is contained in Chapter 6.) The user

will be given an opportunity to change the characteristics of the

occupants through the keyboard. He also will be given the opportunity

to change the characteristics of the building and the fire by answering

affirmatively to the question: DO YOU WANT TO RUN AN ADVANCED VERSION

OF THIS PROGRAM?

The characteristics used in a previous run can be used. The user

selects these data if he answers affirmatively to the questions: DO YOU

WANT TO RUN AN ADVANCED VERSION OF THIS PROGRAM? and DO YOU WANT TO USE

THE INPUT DATA FROM A PREVIOUS TIME YOU RAN THIS SIMULATION? Note that

if you use the same input data, you will get the same output.

Therefore, the user will be given ample opportunity to make changes.

3.4.2 Occupant Characteristics

3. 4. 2.1 Introduction : The user will always have an opportunity to either

define or modify the characteristics of the occupants. The characteristics

that can be defined or modified by the user are: age, sex, whether or not the

20
occupant needs help in evacuation, whether or not the person is awake, room

location, and, if the occupant is asleep, a measure of how difficult it is for

the occupant to awaken. These characteristics are used in the decision rules

of the simulation.

3. 4. 2.

Age

The age of an occupant is most important if the occupant is a child. An infant is defined as being age 0. Very young children will not

respond to a fire and should be labeled as needing assistance.

The computer may assign capable children different actions than it assigns

adults in the same situation. An occupant over the age of ten functions as an

adult. Young children (i.e., seven or younger) respond differently than

children eight or older, e.g., young capable children will not be assigned to

assist someone out of the building. Younger persons who need assistance are rescued before older persons in the same room.

3c 4. 2.

Sex

,

The sex of the occupant plays a significant role only if the

occupant is over twenty and young children are in the building. A male adult

may investigate a fire before he attempts to rescue his children, while a female occupant, twenty years of age or older, will always rescue a baby

first

3.4 .2.4 Hein

Whether or not an occupant needs help in evacuating plays a large role in the simulation. An adult who needs help evacuating cannot

investigate a fire and cannot leave unless another occupant over the age of

ten can assist him. It is assumed that it does not require much strength to

assist an occupant out of the building: e.g. carry a baby, assist an elderly

occupant, lead a mentally retarded occupant.

When an occupant is being helped to evacuate, the travel speed of the rescuer

is decreased.

An occupant cannot need partial help; he is either capable or incapable of

egress ing the building. An occupant, over the age of ten, who does not need

help evacuating, is assumed to be able to help any other occupant who does

need help.

Very young children are automatically defined as needing help. If the age of

the child is equal to or less than the assigned value of the parameter

BABY, the child is labelled as needing help.

3. 4. 2.

Sleep

An occupant who is asleep cannot respond to the fire until

after he awakes. The fire cues or stimuli must total at least TH (the

response threshold) or the occupant will remain asleep until awaken by another

occupant. His state of consciousness (i.e., asleep or awake) is important in

determining the total length of time it will take for that occupant to react

to a given set of fire cues. SELECT A SLEEPING PENALTY FOR PERSON J. The sleeping penalty is an

extra amount of fire cues or stimuli needed to awaken a sleeping

occupant. A sleeping penalty of zero is normal. The higher the number,

the heavier a sleeper the occupant is: a high value may prevent the

21
occupant from awakening without help. (Entering a negative value for

the sleeping penalty will indicate that the person is a light sleeper-

e.g. parent of a baby.) An occupant who is in a relatively deep sleep

will have a sleeping penalty of around five to ten and will require a greater intensity of fire stimuli before awakening: an intoxicated

occupant may be assigned a much larger sleeping penalty, depending upon

how much alcohol he has consumed. A person with a minor hearing loss

should normally be assigned a sleeping penalty equal to his hearing loss

in decibels.

3. 4. 2.

6

Room. This item is self explanatory. The occupant must be in a room and not at an exit node at the start of the program. His room location

is defined when his other characteristics are defined and can be changed

whenever the user is given the opportunity to change the characteristics of

the occupants. The occupant is automatically placed at the node that is the

same as his assigned room number, e.g., if an occupant is placed in room' 2

,

the computer will place him at node 2.

3.4.3 Building Characteristics

3. 4. 3.1 Introduction . The user will have the opportunity either to define or modify the characteristics of the building if he selects the correct options -- see Section 3.4.1. The characteristics of the building are: number of rooms,

number of exits, number of nodes, room location of each node, distances

between nodes, background noise in each room, and information about smoke

detectors and how loud they sound in each room.

The simulation has three subroutines that each contain the input data that

describe one building, giving the user easy access to three different

buildings. It is possible to write a fourth subroutine that contains the

input for a building of your choice, but it is very time consuming to write.

Procedures for creating a fourth building or for changing the stored values of

the building characteristics, will be described in Chapter 6. Changes that

can be made through the keyboard by answering questions will be discussed in

this section. Data for the three buildings includes floor plans based on

common layouts

.

3. 4. 3.

2

Description of the three buildings

.

Ranch House

.

This is a three bedroom, two bathroom, one level ranch

house. It includes a living/dining room and a kitchen as well. This

building layout is the simplest of the three in that there is only one

story. See Figure la.

Two -story Townhouse. On the first floor there is a living/dining room

off of the kitchen, a foyer, a family room directly off of the kitchen,

a bathroom, and a broom closet that houses the hot water heater. The

second floor includes three bedrooms and two bathrooms. There is a central hallway on each of the levels. The most important difference

between the townhouse and the ranch house is that the townhouse has two

stories and, therefore, has a staircase leading to its second floor. See

Figure lb.

22
Two- storv Detached House. The first floor features a separate living

and dining room, family room, kitchen, and bathroom. The second floor

has three bedrooms, two bathrooms and an extra room (bedroom, study or office) . At the front door is a foyer and a hallway leading to the

family area. The rest of the first floor rooms can be separated from

adjacent rooms by doors. The second floor has a central hallway that

leads to all of the bedrooms and one of the bathrooms. See Figure 1c.

Limitations . This program is limited to 12 rooms and a total of 35 nodes.

The program that distributes the smoke throughout the building is limited to a smaller number of rooms. To keep the number of rooms small, in the two story

houses, not every room is necessarily treated as aa separate "room'* . In the

town house, the kitchen and family area constitute one room as opposed to two

separate rooms: the only bathroom that is counted as a separate room is the

one in the master bedroom. In the two-story detached house, none of the

bathrooms are treated as a separate room. Although the kitchen has been

assigned a node, it is considered to be in the same room as the family area

(i.e., the smoke conditions in the entire area are similar). Room five

includes the stairs and the second floor hallway, and room three includes the

living room and the foyer. Room numbers are assigned to be consistent with

the program from which the smoke data is obtained, i.e., FAST.

3. 4. 3.

Nodes. Rooms and Exits . Number of Rooms . This program is limited to 12 rooms. Number of Exits . Exits include doors to the outside and windows that can and

might be used to exit the building. Windows that are not usable (e.g. painted

shut or with a window air conditioner) or near a door, would not be considered

to be exits

Number of Nodes . Each room contains at least one node: the node number of

the most central node is the same as the corresponding room number. Each exit

is considered a node. In addition, additional nodes may be assigned within

any room. These extra nodes are usually assigned at choice points along paths

between rooms/nodes: for example, in Figure la, node 15 is a choice point on

all routes starting at room one and ending elsewhere in the building such as the route between node 1 and node 2 and the route between node 1 and node 7.

Distances Between Nodes . If the normal route between two nodes is direct-

i.e., not by way of a third node--then the distance (the length of the link)

between the two nodes should be an input variable. It is necessary to define

the distance in one direction only- -either direction is acceptable. The unit

of measure is meters

3. 4. 3.Background Noise . The background noise level in a room will affect

the ability of an occupant to hear the alarm. There is a minimum of 35

decibels of background noise- -even if there is no background noise, the

computer will consider the background noise to be 35 decibels. The white

noise generated by an air conditioner will result in approximately 50 decibels

23
of background noise. A loud stereo will result in even more background noise.

If the background noise is louder than the smoke detector (i.e. if the

background noise is greater in decibels than the alarm) , the occupant in that

room will not hear the smoke detector. The loudness of the alarm can also be

changed (see below)

.

3. 4. 3. 5 Input Variables for One Storv Buildings . A building is treated as one story building when the parameter NB1=*1. (A building with only one story

could be treated as a two story building but the converse is not true.) In

"one story" buildings there is only one smoke detector and it is defined as being in the hall. It is necessary to set the loudness of the detector in the

hall and the door position (open or closed) of the doors between the hall and

the other rooms. The loudness of the alarm in each room is computed using the

following rule: 12 decibels are lost as the sound passes into a room with an

open door and 24 decibels are lost as the sound passes into a room with a closed door. The minimum background noise is 35 decibels.

Whether or not a door is open or closed will affect two aspects of the

simulation. A closed door will result in a decrease in loudness of the alarm

signal in that room. Secondly, smoke movement will be restricted. For

example, little or no smoke may enter a room with a closed door, depending on

how the leakage through the door is defined. Because of this, the response

time of an occupant in a room with a closed door- -other than the room of fire

origin- -may be greatly delayed, both in the simulation and in real life.

3. 4. 3.

6

Input Variables for Two Storv Buildings . A building is treated as a multiple story building when parameter NB1—2 . (A building with only one story

could be treated as a two story building but the reverse is not true.) In one story buildings the computer computes, for each room, the loudness or signal

intensity of the one smoke detector. In larger buildings there may be more

than one detector and the geometry of the building is such that it is easier

to enter the loudness of each detector for each room than to enter data that

permits the computer to compute these values. Therefore, the user must enter

the loudness of each detector for each room. (If the loudness is 35 decibels

or less, the value of value 35 should be entered: lower values will be

automatically increased to 35.) It should be noted that in the current

version of the model, whenever the user defines the building through the

keyboard, he is restricted to using a one story building, i.e. NB1=1. (If

NB1=2 , there is neither the need nor the opportunity for the user to set the

door positions when running the EXITT model.)

3. 4. 3.

7

Smoke Detectors . There are several opportunities in the program to

alter different aspects of the smoke detectors by answering questions through

the keyboard. Those aspects that can be changed will affect the

responsiveness of an occupant to the fire cues. Broken Smoke Detectors . The user will get a chance to "break" the smoke

detectors if he answers affirmatively to the question, DO YOU WANT THE

OPPORTUNITY TO OVERRULE SOME OF THE OCCUPANT DECISIONS AS GENERATED BY THE

COMPUTER? A broken smoke detector will never work. It is equivalent to not

having a smoke detector at all- -one way to model a building with no smoke

detectors is to define the detector(s) as broken. (Another way is to set the

24
smoke detectors to activate at a time after all occupants are certain to be

safe or dead- -see option DO YOU WANT TO PRESET WHEN THE SMOKE DETECTORS WILL

SOUND in Section 3.3). Occupants in a building where the smoke detectors do

not work are dependent solely upon the other fire cues (e.g., smoke) to

determine that there is a fire. This may greatly increase the amount of time

necessary to respond to the fire.

Loudness . The loudness or signal intensity of a smoke detector alarm is

important in determining if a person will hear the alarm or, if sleeping, if

he will awaken. The normal signal intensity for a smoke detectors alarms in

the hall of a one story building is 85 decibels, but it can have a range from

75 to 141 decibels when the user defines his own building through the

keyboard. Locations more remote from the alarm will have lower signal

intensities

Presetting Smoke Alarm . The smoke detector will sound if the smoke density

exceeds a prescribed level, and the depth of the smoke in the upper layer is

at least .15 meters. The user will be given the opportunity to override this

automatic feature and preset the time when the smoke alarms will sound.

Whether the smoke detector activation is controlled by the program or is

preset, the alarm will sound only at the beginning of a time period.

(The minimum smoke density that will activate a smoke detector is the

parameter T0L(5)

it is set equal to .15. The user will get a chance to

change this value if he responds affirmatively to the question: DO YOU WANT

TO RUN AN ADVANCED VERSION OF THIS PROGRAM?)

3 . 5 Making Changes in the Program . Much of the information in the following chapters is designed to permit the

user to make changes in the program. The casual user is unlikely to want to

make such changes. However, there are some changes that the serious user may

want to make. Some examples are:

The user may want to add an additional building of his own design to the

available set of buildings.

The user may want to change some of the parameter values that cannot be

changed through the keyboard for a given run. The user may want to change default values of parameters that can be

changed through the keyboard for a given run. O

The user making such changes should be aware that program DEC3 is too large to

run within the 64k bytes of memory available in BASICA. To make it small

enough, it has been compressed. The compressed program is called C0MP4. To

make changes in DEC3 , the user must have access to a program to compress the

modified version of DEC3 or the user must make the changes directly in program

C0MP4. (The program used to compress DEC3 is copyrighted and cannot be

provided as part of the simulation disk.)

25
4. DESCRIPTION OF COMPUTER PROGRAM.

4 . 1 Introduction . EXITT is programed in the BASICA programming language for an IBM PC computer

with 128k bytes of random access memory. It can be run without modification on

similar computers of other companies. DOS 2.1 or later is required.

For the most part the program is written in a simple style. Emphasis was

given to making the model easy to modify and expand rather than to minimizing

computer running time

.

This Chapter presents information about the computer program. While the

general description of the model in presented in Chapter 2, additional details

about the model are included in this chapter.

4.2 Structure of the Program . Because of the characteristics and limitations

of the BASICA programming language, the computer instructions are contained in

10 separate programs. One of the programs, DEC3 , contains the basic

simulation model. Since program DEC3 does not fit into the maximum space

permitted by BASICA, it has been compressed and the shorter version is called

C0MP4. (The difference between the two programs is that C0MP4 contains no

comment statements and two or more short statements in DEC3 may be combined

into one long statement in C0MP4.) All the other programs are concerned with:

defining the building, fire and occupants; defining the parameters; and input

and output. The program switches from one program to another through the

CHAIN instruction. These programs are:

EXITT. The EXITT program contains: an alphabetic list and very brief

description of all parameters and variables; the dimension statements; and the

statements that give the user an opportunity to select some of the options.

It chains to program DEC1. (A brief description of all parameters and

variables is in Appendix A of this report.)

DEC1. The main function of DEC1 is to control the input of the desired fire

scenario, including the characteristics of the building, fire and occupants.

Based on options selected by the user, the program will:

Give the user the opportunity to enter the fire scenario (i.e., the

characteristics of the occupants, the building, and the fire) through

the keyboard;

Call other programs (using the CHAIN statement) that will provide

the fire scenario;

Provide an opportunity to modify the fire scenario and many of the

program parameters;

Combinations of the above.

26
DEC1 also contains additional statements that give the user an opportunity to

select options

There is a package of programs that contains: 1. programs with the

characteristics of three buildings; two or more set of occupants for each

building; and two or more fires for each building; and 2. a program for

saving, retrieving and modifying the input data of a run. DEC1 calls these

programs (i.e. , CHAINS to them), as needed, to obtain the desired information.

These programs are:

0CC1. 0CC1 is the program that contains the information about the

characteristics of the occupants. This program chains back to the DEC1

program.

BLDG. BLDG1 is the program that contains the information about the

characteristics of building 1, a ranch house. (See Figure la.) BLDG2

contains the information about building 2, a townhouse. (See Figure lb.)

BLDG3 contains the information about building 3, a two story detached house.

(See Figures lc and Id.) BLDG4 is reserved for a building designed by the

user. These programs chain either to another BLDG program or back to the DEC1

program.

SMOKE9 . The smoke characteristics of each fire is stored in a data file with

a name containing the word SMOKE followed by one or two digits and the suffix

SMK. The first digit indicates the building in which the fire is located. The

second digit, if any, is used to distinguish between fires in the same

building. (For example, SM0KE11.SMK is the file for one of the fires in

building 1.) Program SM0KE9 inputs data from the selected data file. SM0KE9

also contains (and inputs) data for other aspects of the fire scenario such as background noise and the location and characteristics of the smoke detectors.

Program SM0KE9 chains to the DEC1 program.

AGAIN. AGAIN is a program that stores the input data from a run so that it

can be used again and that retrieves these data in a subsequent run. If the

data were used unmodified in a second run, the run would be identical and the

results would be identical: therefore, AGAIN provides the user with an

opportunity to change one or more of the input datum, including many of the

parameter values

4 . 3 Description of the Fire . 4.3.1 General Description . The fire characteristics within room I at a given

time are fully described by three variables

SDUL(I) . The simulation model is based on a two zone smoke spread model

with a layer of smoke at the top of the room and a lower layer of non

defined density. SDUL(I) is the density of the upper layer.

SDLL(I) . SDLL(I) is the height of the lower layer. If there is no smoke in a room, then SDLL(I) is defined equal to the height of the room.

27
FLAME(I). FLAME(I)=0 if there is no visible flame, FLAME(I)=999 if

there is visible flame in room I, and FLAME(I)=1 if there is no visible

flame in room I but flame in another room can be seen from room I. It

is not necessary to input values of FLAME(I) and little will be lost if,

at ignition, no occupant is awake in the room with the flame. The

program is normally run without inputting flame characteristics, i.e.,

FLAME(I)=0 for all rooms. In future versions flame may have a more

important role.

4.3.2 HFjCII. To decrease the number of rooms in a computer run of a smoke

spread model, rooms may be consolidated. A "room" could contain a stairway

and a upstairs hallway. The height of the floor at a node in the hallway

would be above the height of the bottom of the room, i.e.

,

the bottom of the

stairs. This difference is the variable HF(I)

.

It is used in determining the

impact of the smoke. If this problem does not arise, ignore this variable , it

will be automatically be given the default value of zero and the program will

operate correctly. Note: the value of HR(I)

,

the height of the room at node

I, will be the distance from the floor to the ceiling at node I. 4.3.3 SMOKE . The impact of smoke is a function of the density of the upper

smoke layer and its thickness. The generally used measure of this impact in a room is the variable SMOKE. It is computed in subroutine 3090-3098 of program

DEC3. (It is twice the product of SDUL(I) and the ratio of the thickness of

the upper layer to the height of the room--see Section 2.2).

4 .

4

Awareness of Fire . 4.4.1 The Basic Algorithm . The 5000 series of instructions in program DEC3

contains the decision rules for determining if and when an occupant will

respond to the fire cues. The basic equation (which is statement 5250 of

program DEC3) is:

TRESP(J) = 70 - 4(AWARE ( J) -TH) , subject to the following restrictions:

TRESP(J) is unchanged if TH>AWARE(J) ; and

TRESP(J) >= a minimum value based on the smoke conditions and whether the

occupant is awake or asleep, where:

AWARE(J) is the sum of the impacts of all the fire cues;

TRESP(J) is the time until occupant J starts his action; and

TH is the threshold for response, i.e., the minimum value of AWARE(J)

necessary for a response. Its value is set in statement 1008 of program

DEC1 and can be modified through the keyboard in program AGAIN if the

appropriate options are selected. It value must be greater than 15

unless instruction 5125 of DEC3 is modified. That is, TH must be greater

than X4.

28
The basic equation for computing AWARE(J) is:

AWARE(J) = ALEFF + XI + X2 + X3 + X4 , where:

ALEFF is the difference between the loudness of the alarm and the

background noise;

XI is impact of an awake occupant seeing flame;

X2 is impact of an occupant smelling smoke;

X3 is impact of an awake occupant seeing smoke; and

X4 is bonus for being awake or (penalty for being asleep)

4.4.2 Detectors . Detectors sound at a signal intensity of LROOM(I,II) where

I is the room number and II is the detector number. The units are decibels.

In two story buildings, these values are input variables. In one story

buildings, the values are computed using the rule that 12 decibels are lost as the sound enters a room with the door open and 24 decibels are lost as the

sound enters a room with the door closed. See instructions 5055, 5155, 5255

or 5355 of program SM0KE9 (and subroutine 4250 of program DEC1 when user' is

defining his own building and subroutine 5400 of program DEC1 when the user is

changing or correcting the door settings from open to closed or vice versa)

The volume of the detector alarm in the room containing the alarm is the

parameter LALARM. Its value is set in statements 1400-1428 of program DEC1

when the user defines the building through the keyboard. Otherwise, it is

defined in statement 20 of program SMOKE9

4.4.3 Measures of Fire Cue Impact . Each of the fire cues is measured in

different units. The units for the loudness of the smoke alarm is decibels

(dB) . All the other units are "converted" to decibels, i.e., the values are transformed to the number of decibels that would approximate an equivalent

impact in alerting occupants

Sound . ALEFF is the difference between the loudness of the alarm and the

background noise. This is computed in statements 5010 to 5115 of program

DEC3. The first step in computing ALEFF is to determine if the smoke

detectors are sounding. One of the options is to preset when the detectors

will sound. If the detectors are preset, statement 5026 will flag a detector

as sounding. If the detectors are not preset, statement 5031 will flag a detector as sounding if there is sufficient smoke in the room/hall containing

the detector.

XI . XI is the impact of an awake occupant seeing flame. It is the product of

SLP, CFIRE and FLAME(I) . (See statement 5116 of program DEC3 . ) Since both

SLP AND FLAME(I) are either zero or >=1 , XI will be either zero or >=CFIRE.

SLP . If the occupant J is asleep (i.e., if SLEEP(J)=1) , then SLP=1

Otherwise, SLP=0 . (See instruction 5010.)

29
FLAME Cl) . FLAME(I)=999 or 1 if flame is in or near room I. Otherwise,

FLAME(I)=0. Note: the program normally runs well if FLAME=0 throughout

the running of the program because the smoke conditions provide

sufficient information about the fire.

CFIRE . CFIRE is a parameter that defines the magnitude of the impact of

seeing a fire on becoming aware of the fire. Its value is set in

statement 1005 of program DEC1 and can be modified through the keyboard

in program AGAIN if the appropriate options have been selected (see

statement 4325 of program AGAIN)

.

X2 . X2 represents the impact of the odor and irritability of smoke. Its

value is the product of SMOKE and COLF where:

SMOKE is a measure of the impact of smoke and is described in Section

4.4.3.

COLF is a parameter that determines the importance of the odor of smoke

in alerting an occupant to the fire cues. It is the multiplier used to

modify a measure of smoke so that is can be combined with a measure of

sound. Its value is set in statement 1005 of program DEC1 and can be

modified through the keyboard in program AGAIN if the appropriate

options have been selected (see statement 4355 of program AGAIN).

Exception 1. If the occupant is asleep and the lower smoke layer is

between 1 and 1.2 meters in depth, then X2=5*(SDUL(I) ) . (See statement

5119 of program DEC3)

.

Exception 2. If the occupant is asleep and the lower smoke layer is 1

meter in depth or less, then X2=10*(SDUL(I) ) . (See statement 5120 of

program DEC3 .

)

X3 . X3 represent the impact of seeing smoke. It is the product of SLP, CSMK,

and SMOKE where SLP and SMOKE have the properties described above. CSMK is

analogous to COLF but relates to the importance of seeing smoke.

Note: if the occupant is sleeping, SLP=0 and, therefore, X3=0

.

X4. X4 reflects the phenomenon that awake occupants will require less

impacting cues to be alerted. If the occupant is awake, X4=15 (see statement

5125 of program DEC3) . If the occupant is asleep, X4=-CSLP(J)

.

CSLP(J) is a measure of the extra amount of fire cues or stimuli needed

to awaken a sleeping occupant who has difficulty waking. It is called a sleeping penalty. A sleeping penalty of zero is normal, i.e., no extra

cues are needed. The higher the number, the heavier a sleeper the

occupant is: a high value may prevent the occupant from awakening

without help. An occupant who is in a relatively deep sleep may have a sleeping penalty of ten or more and will require a greater intensity of

fire stimuli before awakening. An intoxicated occupant may be assigned

a much larger sleeping penalty, depending upon how much alcohol he has

30
consumed. A person with a minor hearing loss should normally be

assigned a sleeping penalty equal to his hearing loss in decibels if it

is expected the fire alarm will sound.

Entering a negative value for the sleeping penalty will indicate that

the person is a light sleeper- -e . g. , a parent of a baby. If the value

of the sleeping penalty were negative 15, the intensity of the fire cues

necessary for response would be the same as when the occupant is awake--

see value of 15 given X4 in statement 5125 of program DEC1. Therefore,

CSLP(J) should not be given a large negative value.

The values for CSLP(J) are defined in the appropriate subroutine of

program 0CC1 (and in statement 5292 of program DEC1 when the

characteristics of the occupants are being entered or modified through

the keyboard)

4.4.4 Minimum Response Times . While occupants respond more quickly to strong

fire cues, there is a minimum amount of time required to awaken, if necessary,

select an action, and perform preparatory actions. If the occupant is asleep,

the minimum time is 10 seconds, (see statement 5258 of program DECS). If the

occupant is awake, the minimum time is 6 seconds, (see statement 5257).

Exception 1. If the smoke is bad (i.e., SM0KE>T0L(3) ) , the minimum is 4

seconds. (See statement 5263.)

Exception 2. If the smoke is very bad (i.e., SM0KE>T0L(2) , the minimum

is 1 second. (See statement 5265.)

For each occupant a time to start his actions is computed at each time period

until the occupant starts his first action: that is, a different time to start

his actions will be computed each time period. He will start his action at

the earliest time among those computed.

4 . 5 Choice of Actions . 4.5.1 Permitted Responses. Once a capable occupant has decided to respond or has completed an action, he has a choice of responses or actions. Several

common responses are not available in this version of the simulation: phoning

the fire department; fighting the fire; reentering the building, and assisting

or escorting more than one occupant out of the building . The available

responses for capable adults in order of priority are listed below. The order

of items 2-7 is determined by instructions 7800-7806 and 7900-7906 (or 7820-

7829 and 7920-7922 for children). It should be noted that the priority list

of items 2-10 is also followed when an action choice is made upon arrival at a room.

1. Investigate the fire- -there are a number of conditions that will

make this action an unacceptable or lower priority choice. See Section

2.3.4 and statements 7120-7129 of program DEC3

31
2. In the unlikely event that there is a capable and awake adult in the

same room who is not aware of the fire cues, alert that occupant. See

statements 7450-7469.

3 . Wake a sleeping but otherwise capable occupant in the same room

(see statements 7500-7516 and 7400-7429 of program DEC3)

.

4. Rescue an occupant in the same room (see statements 7500-7548).

Sleeping occupants are considered first in subroutine 7500: if there

are no sleeping occupants that need rescue, awake occupants will be

considered in subroutine 7530.

5. Go to the room of a capable awake adult (age between 18 and 60) who

is unaware that there may be a fire (response delay of more than 10

seconds) and alert him. (See instructions 7700-7708).

6. Go to the room of an occupant needing rescue (see instructions 7560-

7574)

.

7. Go to the room of an occupant who is asleep (see instructions 7580-

7599).

8. Alert an awake and capable occupant, whose response delay is greater

than 10 seconds, that there is a need to respond or hurry (see

instructions 7710-7718).

9. Investigate the fire if investigation is a permitted choice (see

instructions 7200-7202).

10. Egress the building (see instruction 7216).

The available responses for competent children (age 10 years or less) are

listed below in order of priority. Competent children are those who don't

need assistance in evacuating, i.e., ACT(J) is not equal to 1, 11 or 21.

In this version of the model, an occupant over the age of ten functions as an

adult, that is, they follow the priority list presented above for adults.

(See statements 7142 and 7160 of program DEC3 for the branching statements.)

Young children (i.e., seven or younger) respond differently than children

eight or older. (See statements 7129 and 7820 of program DEC3 .

)

1. Investigate the fire- -there are a number of conditions that will

make this action an unacceptable or lower priority choice as discussed

below. In this version of the model, the rules for older children are the same as for adults. Capable children 7 or younger will not

investigate (see statement 7129)

.

2. In the unlikely event that there is a capable and awake adult in the

same room who is not aware of the fire cues, alert that occupant. See

statements 7450-7469.

32
3. Wake a sleeping but otherwise capable occupant in the same room.

(See statements 7500-7516 of program DEC3 for children eight and older

and statements 7400-7429 for younger capable children. See statement

7820 for the statement with the branching instruction)

4. If the child is 8, 9, or 10 years of age, rescue an occupant in the

same room. (See statements 7500-7548.)

5. Go to room of an unaware (or sleeping) but capable adult (age

between 13 and 70). (See instructions 7720-7728.)

6. Go to room of an unaware (or sleeping) but capable occupant who is

older, i.e., a child will awake or alert another child in another room

who is older than he is. (See instructions 7480-7499.)

Note that a child who is 8,9, or 10 will rescue any occupant in the same room

but will not go to another room for the purpose of rescuing an occupant.

Children 7 and younger neither investigate nor assist others out of the

building

4.5.2 Reasons for Investigation Being Low -priority or Not Permitted.

Investigation is the most likely action or response unless one of the

following conditions apply:

1. If the occupant is a female at least 20 years old and there is a baby who has not yet been assigned to a rescuer, then rescue, waking and

alerting have a higher priority than investigation for that female

occupant (see instructions 7120-7124 of program DEC3) . A child is

considered to be a baby if his age is equal to or less than the

parameter BABY.

2. Investigation is a permitted action for occupant J only when

ACT1(J)> equals zero.

4.5.3 Criteria for Setting ACT1(J)=1. Investigation cannot be selected as an

action for occupant J whenever ACT1(J)> is one or two. The criteria for

setting ACT1(J) equal to two is described below in the section, "Criteria for

the Fire to be Considered Serious". In addition ACT1(J) is set equal to one

by any of the following instructions in program DEC3 . (Note: none of these

apply when ACT1(J)=2)

6844. Occupant is in room with a smoke density of T0L(4) or greater.

6971. Occupant was alerted to the fire emergency by another occupant

for whom investigation was not a permitted action.

7127. Same as in instruction 6844.

7678. Occupant was awakened or alerted by another occupant for whom

investigation was not a permitted action.

33
(

4.5.4 Criteria for Fire to be Considered Serious. A fire is considered to be

serious by Occupant J if ACT1(J)=2; occupant J being any capable occupant in

the building. ACT1(J) can be set equal to two by any of the following

instructions

6845. Occupant is in a room where the smoke density is at T0L(3) or greater, or in a room where flame is visible.

6937. Occupant is in the same room as another occupant who considers

the fire to be serious. (In this early version of the model, this

statement is reached only under special circumstances.)

6971. Occupant is being alerted to the fire emergency by another

occupant who considers the fire to be serious.

7128. Same as in instruction 6845.

7678. Occupant is being awakened by another occupant. If the other

occupant considers the fire to be serious, then the occupant being

awakened will also consider it to be serious.

8150. Occupant has completed his investigation.

8488. Occupant cannot reach his goal (i.e., cannot successfully

complete his action because of heavy smoke)

.

4 . 6 Finding Shortest Path . 4.6.1 Shortest Path Algorithm . The shortest path algorithm is adapted from

Levin and Hedetniemi [1963] . All routes are considered to be composed of

nodes along the route and links between the nodes. The basic approach is to

develop a tree of nodes and links representing the shortest routes from the

origin node to all other nodes . Each time a shorter route is found to any

node, that route is tested to determine if it can be used (or extended) as the

first n-1 nodes of an n node route to another node. Much of the computer code

is concerned with the bookkeeping: to assure that all routes that should be

considered for extension are, in fact, tested; and to record the tentative

shortest routes.

4.6.2 Handling Obstacles . There are two versions of the subroutine for

finding the shortest path. Statements 6100-6199 comprise a subroutine that is a straightforward application of the shortest path algorithm.

Statements 6200-6399 comprise a subroutine that considers obstacles such as smoke and windows. The approach of the second subroutine is to find the route

with the fewest demerits where demerits are assigned as follows:

One demerit is assigned for each meter to be travelled. Fractional

demerits are assigned. (See statements 6219 and 6257.)

34
One hundred demerits are assigned for leaving by a window. This is a sufficient penalty to assure that an unobstructed exit path through a door is considered superior to an exit path through a window. (See

statements 6219 and 6257.)

Two hundred demerits are assigned for reaching a node that is in a room

where the value of SMOKE is between T0L(2) and T0L(1) at the time the

subroutine is being run. (See statements 6232 and 6237.)

A link is considered blocked if:

The destination node of the link is in a room where the value of SMOKE

is T0L(1) or greater. (See statements 6227 and 6236.)

The destination node of the link is in a different room than the origin

node of the link, and the destination node is in a room where the value

of SMOKE is T0L(2) or greater. (See statements 6222 & 6227 and 6260 &

6236.)

Exception. If lower smoke layer has depth of at least 1.2 meters,

The route is considered passible. (See statements 6221 and 6259.)

Note that a link that may be passible, when the shortest path routine is run,

and it may be blocked later, when the occupant attempts to travel the link.

4.6.3 Choice of Exit . When searching for the route out of the building, the

subroutine that considers obstacles is used, i.e., the subroutine starting at

statement 6200. This subroutine finds the route out of the building with the

fewest demerits.

The subroutine uses a two step approach. The routine first finds the best

path to the front door. In running this subroutine the computer finds all

"shortest 11 paths to other nodes that are "shorter" than the distance to the

front door; that is, all paths that have fewer demerits. (A blocked path is

considered to have an infinite number of demerits.) After the best path to

the front door is found, the computer selects the path out of the building

with the fewest demerits as the best egress route. (See statements 8210=8224.)

4.6.4 Choice of Shortest Path Subroutine . In brief, the straightforward

subroutine is called when the occupant has not had an opportunity to learn

much about the fire. The subroutine that considers smoke is called when the

occupant has learned about the fire or is attempting to leave the building.

When the occupant is investigating the f irg) cues , the straightforward

subroutine is called. (See instruction 8110.)

When the occupant is leaving the building, the subroutine that considers

smoke and windows is called. (See statement 8209.)

When the occupant is going to another room to alert, awaken or rescue

another occupant, the straightforward subroutine is used. Exception:

if the occupant has just been blocked by smoke in his attempt to go to

35
a room or to investigate- - that is ACT2 ( J )=93 - - the subroutine that

considers smoke is called. (See statement 8418.)

4 . 7 Moving the Occupants . 4.7.1 Introduction . Statements 6800-6999 comprise the one set of

instructions that moves all occupants along the path selected by the shortest

path programs described in Section 4.6.

4.7.2 Speed . SPEED (J) is the normal travel speed of occupant J. SPD is a parameter which is set at 1.3 meters per second (i.e., almost 3 miles per

hour) in statement 1006 of program DEC1. SPEED(J) can be set in three ways:

If the characteristics of the occupants are entered through the

keyboard, an occupant's speed is entered in response to a question.

(See 5270-5276 of program DEC1.)

If the characteristics of the occupants are entered when running program

0CC1 , the values of SPEED(J) can be defined with the other

characteristics

.

If the characteristics of the occupants are entered when running program

0CC1 , and if the value of any SPEED(J) is not defined with the other

characteristics, the value of that SPEED(J) is set equal to SPD. (See

statements 1910-1919 of program 0CC1 .

)

The following modifications to the travel speed do not apply to occupants who

are investigating.

If an occupant J should consider the fire to be serious, as described in

Sections 2.2.2 and 4. 5. 4- -that is, if ACT1 ( J )=2 - - then the travel speed would

be multiplied by SPD1. SPD1 is set equal to 1.3 in statement 1006 of program

DEC1. Therefore, the travel speed of occupant J would be increased by 30% if

ACT1(J)=2. (See statements 6809 and 6962 of program DEC3 .

)

If occupant J is assisting another occupant out of the building, his travel

speed usually is cut in half. (See instruction 6808 and 6961.) Note that if

he considers the fire to be serious, it is the increased travel speed that is

cut in half.

Travel speed to the next node is set as follows when the occupant needs to

crawl or bend very low. He is deemed crawling if SMOKE at the next node is at

least the average of T0L(2) and T0L(3) and if the depth of the lower smoke

layer is less than 1.5 meters. (See statements 6847 and 6848.)

If he is assisting another occupant out of the building, their speed

will be .4(SPEED(J) )

.

If he is not assisting another occupant out of the building, his speed

will be . 6 (SPEED(J) ) . (See statement 6945.)

36
4.7.3 Available Time . In this model, the computer must know the location of

each occupant. It does this by recording the node at which the occupant is

located and the time he started his current action. In this context the

"action" could be moving or making a decision. If the occupant cannot

complete his movement to the next node in the current time period, the

movement is deferred to the next time period.

There are three quantities of interest: distance, travel speed and time. To

see if an occupant can complete a movement to a node in the time period, it is

necessary to either convert the length of the link to a travel time or convert

the available travel time to a travel distance. In this version, the program

converts the available travel time to a distance that can be traveled in that

time. This new variable is called DT. (See statement 6810.) It is then

possible to compare DT with the distance between nodes (statement 6825) and to

subtract the distance between nodes from DT to get a new value of DT

(statement 6950). By cycling back to statement 6815, the new DT can be used

to see if the occupant can move to another node in this time period.

4.7.4 Criteria for Branching out of Subroutine . Whenever the distance to the

next node exceeds DT, the program branches out of this subroutine. (See

statements 6825-6832.) The program also branches out when: 1. SHORT(J)=0,

i.e., the shortest path has not yet been determined (see 6805); 2. route is

blocked by smoke (see 6868); 3. occupant reached an exit node (see 6919 and

6929); 4. occupant reached goal, i.e., arrived at destination node (see

6976); and 5. occupant terminated his investigation because he encountered

heavy smoke (see 6889)

4.7.5 Smoke . An occupant cannot move to the next node if it requires that he

pass through intolerable smoke. Also, if he is investigating the fire cues,

he will not move through unpleasant smoke. When SMOKE exceeds T0L(2) and the

lower smoke layer is less than 1.2 meters in depth, the smoke is too bad to

enter that room. When SMOKE exceeds T0L(1) and the lower layer is less than

1.2 meters, the smoke is too bad to go from one node to another in the same

room. Note that the smoke is never so bad as to prevent an occupant from

leaving a room if the next node is in a location with an acceptable level of

smoke. (See instructions 6850-6855)

When an occupant is investigating, he will:

Terminate (i.e., complete) his investigation when he arrives at a node

where SM0KE>=T0L(4) or flame is visible (see especially statements

6844, 6845, 6930, and 6932);

Terminate (i.e., complete) his investigation without additional

movement when the next node on his path is in a room with bad

smoke, i.e. SM0KE>=T0L( 3) and the lower smoke layer is less than

1.8 meters in depth (see statements 6847 and 6848); and

Complete his investigation if he arrives at his goal, i.e., node

GOALJ(J) (see instruction 6948.)

37
Whenever an occupant moves, his actions are printed on the screen, may be

printed on the printer, and may be graphically represented on the screen.

Many of the statements in this subroutine are concerned with printing this

information. They are straightforward and obvious and are not described in

this report.

4.7.6 Assisting Other Occupants to Escape . When an occupant is assisting

another occupant to escape, the following is done whenever the first occupant

moves to a different node. The program branches to a set of statements that:

1. describes the action on the screen; 2. prints similar information on the

printer; and 3. resets the node location of the disabled occupant. (See

statements 6988-6991 and 6920-6929.)

38
5. PARAMETER VALUES

5.1 Introduction . There are a number of numerical constants, imbedded in the

decision rules, that the user might wish to change. The value of each of

these constants can be changed by making a simple change in the program

itself. To provide the user with greater flexibility and control, some of

these constants are described below and information necessary to modify them

is provided. Usually, the change is so simple and obvious that a brief

description of the function of the constant and the location of the statement

assigning the constant its value, is all the information provided.

An attempt has been made to make it easy for the user to change some of these

values. These constants are assigned parameter names, and the parameter

names, rather than the numerical value, are used in the decision rules. These

constants will be called parameters. They can be changed by redefining their

values in the computer program. Also, some of them can be changed through the

keyboard when the user responds affirmatively to the question DO YOU WANT TO

RUN AN ADVANCED VERSION OF THIS PROGRAM?

A number of these constants appear as numerical values In the computer

statements that set delay times. These values can be changed only by changing

the appropriate program statement.

5 . 2 Parameters . BABY . BABY is the upper limit of the age at which a child is considered to be

too young to perform productive actions in a fire emergency. It is set equal

to 3.0 in instruction 1005 of program DEC1.

CFIRE . CFIRE is the scaling factor for seeing flame when summing the impacts

of the fire cues. It is set equal to 100 in statement 1005 of program DEC1.

The impact of seeing the fire is equivalent to awake person hearing an alarm

of CFIRE decibels. Any assigned value above TH+15 will result in the same

rapid response.

COLF. COLF is the scaling factor for smoke odor and irritability when summing

the impacts of the fire cues. It is set equal to 50 in statement 1005 of

program DEC1.

Obviously, the impact of smoke odor is important for awakening and alerting

sleeping occupants. However, it appears to have only a mild effect when the

smoke conditions are not severe [Kahn, 1984]

The impact on sleeping

occupants depends on: smoke density, the irritability of the smoke components

and, the location of the head in relation to the upper smoke layer. This

model disregards variations in the irritability of the smoke components. If

the sleeping occupant's head is in the upper layer, i.e., the depth of the

lower layer is less than 1 meter, the impact is similar to a sound of

COLF*10*(SDUL(I) ) decibels. (See instructions 5118-5123 of program DEC3)

CSMK . CSMK is the scaling factor for awake occupants noticing smoke when

summing the impacts of the fire cues. It is set equal to 1000 in statement

39
1005 of program DEC1. When the upper and lower smoke level depths are equal,

the impact is similar to a alarm of CSMK*SDUL(I) decibels. (More precisely,

it is the impact of CSMK*S decibels, where S is defined in Section 2.2.2.)

Note that for awake occupants, this factor dominates the impact of smoke

odor/irritability

.

LALARM . LALARM is the loudness or volume of the smoke detector alarm in the

hall of a one floor ranch house. Depending on the options selected, it is

assigned a value by the user in response to a question or in statement 1105 of

program BLDG1, In this version, LALARM is not used for two story houses.

SPD. In program DEC1, SPD is the normal speed of typical capable occupants as they move through the building. It is set equal to 1.3 meters per second (2.9

miles per hour) in instruction 1006 of program DEC1. As described in Section

4.7.2, the normal travel speed of each individual, SPEED(J) , can be set equal

to SPD or to a value provided by the user, depending on the options selected

by the user. Once the values of SPEED(J) are set for all occupants, SPD can

then used in program DEC3 for the actual speed of the current occupant being

considered. Occupant J refers to any of the occupants in the building.

SPDl. When occupant J considers the fire to be serious (i.e., ACT1(J)=2) , he

increases his travel speed. This increase is accomplished by multiplying his

normal speed by the parameter SPDl. It is set equal to 1.3 in instruction

1006 of program DEC1. This value of SPDl increases travel speed by 30%.

TCYCLE . TCYCLE is the number of seconds in one time period. It is set equal

to 5.0 in statement 1050 of program DEC1 and this value can be superceded

through the keyboard if the appropriate options are selected after choosing to

use an "advanced" features of the program. If the fire is loaded into the

computer by running program SM0KE9 , TCYCLE could be assigned a value by a statement in the SM0KE9 program: this would supercede the value assigned in

statement 1050 of program DEC1 but not the value assigned through the

keyboard.

TH . TH is the threshold for an occupant to respond. The sum of the impact of

all fire cues or fire stimuli must equal TH units for any occupant to respond:

otherwise he will ignore the fire stimuli. The value of TH is set equal to

20.0 in instruction 1008 of program DEC1.

Awake occupants are given an extra 15 units when computing the sum of

the impacts of the fire cues. This is mathematically equivalent to

decreasing TH by 15 for awake occupants. These 15 extra units are given

in instruction 5125 of program DEC3 : it is the value assigned to X4.

The value assigned TH in statement 1008 of program DEC1 must be greater

than the value assigned to X4 in statement 5125 of program DEC3

.

TOL(I) . There are five levels of smoke tolerance used in this simulation.

Their values are set in instruction 1007 of program DEC1. In applying four of

these parameters, T0L(1) through T0L(4)

,

the measure of the impact of the

smoke is called SMOKE. SMOKE is twice the product of two factors: 1. the

optical density of the smoke and 2. the ratio of the depth of the upper smoke

layer to the height of the room. That is, it is the optical density of the

40
smoke in the upper layer (SDUL(I)) if the room is half filled with smoke.

(See discussion of S in Section 2.2.2 and instruction 3095 of program DEC3.)

T0L(1) is the threshold for stopping action. It is set equal to 0.5.

If an occupant tries to reach a node with this level of smoke, he will

cease all action, unless the lower layer of cleaner air is greater than

1.2 meters (3.9 feet) in depth; that is, he will stop movement unless he

can crawl under the smoke.

T0L(2) is the threshold for not entering a room. It should be noted

that an occupant will not be assigned a route that involves entering a room with smoke density greater than T0L(2) unless the lower layer of

cleaner air is greater than 1.2 meters. It is set equal to 0.4.

T0L(3) is the threshold for quickening the pace of an occupant's

actions. It is set equal to 0 . 1If Occupant J encounters this much

smoke, ACT1(J) is set equal to two. When ACT1(J)=2, travel speed is

increased by 30% and some response (delay) times are less (See Section

4.3. Delays and Pauses, and the above description of SPD in this

section)

T0L(4) is the threshold for terminating an investigation or deciding an

investigation is not necessary. When SM0KE>=T0L(4) , there is enough

smoke for an occupant to realize that egress is necessary. It is set

equal to 0.05.

T0L(5) is the threshold for activating a smoke detector. If the upper

or smoke layer has optical density greater than or equal to T0L(5) and

if the depth of the smoke layer is greater than .15 meters, a smoke

detector will sound. T0L(5) is set at 0.015 per meter. The depth of

.15 meters is set in instruction 5031 of program DEC3.

TPAUSE . TPAUSE is the time allotted for an occupant to spend between

completion of an action and the start of the next action. It basically

accounts for decision time. TPAUSE is set equal to 3.0 in instruction 1009 of

program DEC1. It is used after completing an investigation and after finding

that a path is blocked by smoke.

5 . 3 Delays and Action Times . 5.3.1 Introduction . The time consuming activities of an occupant can be

classified into three categories.

Movement from one node to another. (This section is not concerned with

these actions .

)

Delays and pauses. These activities include time to awaken, time to

make decisions, and time to prepare for action.

Assisting actions . These activities include awaking another occupant and

preparing another occupant for egress.

41
The delay time, the decision time, and time to perform the assisting actions

(hereafter called Delay Times) depend on the fire characteristics and the

impact of the fire cues on the occupant. In this section, the times assigned

to these actions will be presented and, also, information will be provided

that will permit the user to change these assigned times by making changes to

statements in program DEC3. (The time to move from one node to another and

the time to become aware of the fire cues will not be discussed in this

section: those times are treated differently and they have been amply

discussed in earlier sections.)

The numerical value of most Delay Times is specified in a program statement as

a number rather than as a parameter. Therefore, to change its value, i.e.,

the time duration, the number in the statement must be changed. To permit the

user to change these Delay Times, the relevant statement is identified. One

exception is the decision time after completing some of the actions: see discussion of TPAUSE in Sections 5.2 and 5.3.2.

The normal (i.e., smoke is not bad) minimum response (delay) time is 6 seconds

for awake occupants. This includes decision and preparation time. It is

based on the work of Nober [Nober et al, 1981] . It is set in statement 5257 of

program DEC3. A new value can be selected by substituting the new value for

the number 6 both times it appears. If the smoke is bad, this can drop to 4

seconds (if SM0KE>=T0L(3) ) or to 1 second (if SM0KE>=T0L(2) . (See statements

5263 and 5265 where TRESP(J) is the response time for occupant J.)

5.3.2 TPAUSE . When an occupant completes his action (e.g., reaches his goal)

or terminates his action (e.g. blocked by smoke), he is assigned a delay time

of TPAUSE seconds. (See TPAUSE in Section 4.2 for the assigned value of

TPAUSE.) This delay includes the time required to choose a new action. There

are times, however, when the usual delay time is not assigned.

Exception 1. There is no Delay Time assigned when the completed action

is to alert an able and awake adult to the fire emergency.

Exception 2. There is no Delay Time assigned when the occupant arrives

at the room of someone needing assistance.

Exception 3. When the action is to wake a sleeping occupant, the rules

in Section 5.3.5 apply.

There are currently four cases where the Delay Time of TPAUSE seconds is

assigned.

Suppose an occupant is moving towards another occupant in order to

alert, awaken, or assist that person. If for some reason the second

person awakens, becomes alerted to the fire, or is being actively

assisted by a third occupant before the first occupant arrives, the

first occupant will change his action, i.e., change his decision in midroute and be assigned a Delay Time of TPAUSE (decision time for choosing

another course of action). See statement 2134 of program DEC3 .

.

42
If the chosen route is found to be blocked by smoke, the occupant will

stop and select another route or action. The time taken to decide on

another course of action will be accounted for in the assigned Delay

Time of TPAUSE. See statement 6868.

After seeing sufficient smoke or fire to stop the investigation, the

occupant will decide on another course of action. After a Delay Time of

TPAUSE, he will start his next action. See statement 6886.

After arriving at the end point of the investigation- - the room with the

most smoke or with visible flame --the occupant will decide on another

course of action and be assigned a Delay Time of TPAUSE accordingly.

The occupant will then start his next action after the Delay Time has

elapsed. See statement 6973.

5.3.3 Decrease in Preparation Time Due to Heavy Smoke . When an occupant is

subjected to normal fire stimuli, a ten second response delay time is assigned

to a sleeping occupant and six seconds to an awake occupant. (See instructions

5257=5258.) (Note the response time will be greater if the fire stimuli are

not sufficiently strong for a timely response- = See Section 4.5.1.)

Exception. If the fire cues are sufficiently strong or long lasting

such that the occupant is scheduled to respond within 10 seconds, the

maximum remaining delay time of the occupant is : four seconds if

SM0KE=>T0L(4) ; or one second if SM0KE=>T0L(3) . These delay times can be

changed by changing the values related to TRESP(J) in instructions 5263

and 5265. (Note' the need for two changes in each instruction.)

5.3.4 Hesitation Due to Not Being Alone . Research by Latane and Darley

[Latane and Darley, 1968] has shown that when the fire cues are noticed but

not immediately compelling, adults will hesitate in their responses if other

capable adults are in the same room. A simple explanation is that there is a failure to respond due to a feeling of shared responsibility. The computer

program accounts for this by delaying responses by one time period for each

time period when all of the following conditions apply:

1. There is no one that needs to be rescued, alerted, or roused (see

instruction 7225 of program DEC3)

2. There is another fully capable adult occupant in the same room (see

instructions 7332-7344)

3. None of the smoke detectors is sounding (see instructions 7345-

7347);

4. There is no visible flame (see instruction 7348);

5. The fire cues are noticed but are not taken very seriously by the

occupant(s) i.e., AWARE(J)>=TH and AWARE( J)<TH+10- -see instruction

7350.

43
5.3.5 Time Required to Alert. Wake or Prepare for Evacuation . Whenever one

occupant assists another, time for providing or receiving the service must be

assigned. The following times are assigned:

If Occupant J is alerting a fully capable and awake adult, he moves to

the node of the other occupant. Once he arrives at that node, Occupant

J starts his next action with no delay or decision time charged. The

occupant being alerted is assigned a Delay Time of five seconds or 2.5

seconds depending on whether the alerting occupant believes the fire to

be serious (i.e., ACT1(J)=2). These delay times can be altered by

changing values of TRESP(JK) in statement 6971. (See Section 4.6.4,

Criterion for Fire to be Considered Serious.)

There are two types of assistance that an occupant may be flagged as needing: waking; and help moving. If an occupant is asleep and does

not need help moving, the delay is five seconds for the occupant doing

the waking. (See value of ZZZ in statement 7642 for assigned waking

time. See statement 7676 for the adjustment of TCR(J)--time remaining

in the time period. In statement 7676, Y is the time, if any, required

to travel within the room to the node of the occupant needing

assistance- -see statements 7636-7639.) For the occupant who is being

awakened, the delay is ten seconds. His remaining time in the time

period is the amount assigned the person waking him plus 5 seconds-

i.e., plus ZZZ seconds - -decision and preparation time. (See statement

7684.)

Exception: if the assisting occupant believes the fire to be

serious (i.e., ACT(J)=2) the value of ZZZ would be halved (see

instruction 7670). Therefore, his time devoted to waking would be

only 2.5 seconds and the total delay time for the previously

sleeping occupant would be 5 seconds . (See Section 3.6.4,

Criteria for Fire to be Considered Serious.)

If an occupant needs help moving, the Delay Time (starting at the time

the assisting occupant arrives at the location of the other occupant) is

10 seconds if the disabled occupant is awake and 12 seconds if he is

asleep. (See value of ZZZ in statement 7643.)

Exception 1. If the disabled occupant is a baby (i.e.,

AGE(JK)<=BABY) , the Time Delay in seconds is the baby's age plus

4. (See value of ZZZ in statement 7646.)

Exception 2. If the capable occupant believes the fire to be

serious (i.e. ACT(J)=2)

,

the previously determined Delay Time is

halved. (See value of ZZZ in statement 7647.)

Note: if you wish to make a change in the Delay Time in statements 7642

or 7643, change the values of ZZZ but do not change the values of Z.

44
6.0 DESCRIBING A NEW BUILDING, ITS OCCUPANTS AND THE FIRE

6 . 1 Introduction . There are three ways of entering input data when running the simulation:

Enter input data through the keyboard by answering questions;

Enter input data saved from a previous run;

Enter input data by chaining to programs that contain data in DATA

statements and LET statements and that call data files. These programs

will be called INPUT PROGRAMS.

In this chapter we will discuss; the structure of the INPUT PROGRAMS; the

format of the data files; and the structure of the subroutines in programs

DEC1 and DEC3 that draw the building layout.

This section is written for a user who is familiar with the BASICA programming

language. It is recommended that you not attempt to make alterations in the

input programs unless you have a knowledge of BASICA.

Warning ! ! Do not make changes in the program before you have made copies of

the original disk.

The set of computer programs and data files comprising this simulation

contains the characteristics of three buildings, nine fires and eight

different sets of occupants. The information is stored in the form of

computer instructions in a number of separate programs and data files.

There are three programs that contain the characteristics of the three

buildings, one program for each building. They are called BLDG1 , BLDG2

and BLDG3

There are nine data files that contain the characteristics of the nine

fires, each containing the characteristics of one fire. They are called

SM0KE1.SMK, SM0KE2.SMK, etc. One program, called SMOKE 9 , contains

information about the loudness of the smoke detectors and about the

position of the bedroom doors in the one story building. Program SM0KE9

also calls the appropriate data file containing information about smoke

conditions

One program, called 0CC1, contains the characteristics of all eight sets

of occupants

One additional program, BLDG4, is also provided. It is only half

written and can be completed by the user as he defines a building of his

own selection. Together with additions to programs DEC1, DEC3/C0MP4,

SM0KE9 and 0CC1, the user can add another building of the user's choice.

45
In this section, we will discuss how to add an additional building, fire and

set of occupants. This discussion will also provide sufficient information to

permit the user to modify the characteristics of the other buildings

,

occupants, and fires, although the focus of the discussion will be on adding a completely new building, fire, and set of occupants.

If the user wishes to add a second new building after defining the first one,

it is recommended that he add it on a separate disk, starting with the

original set of programs and using BLDG4. Similarly, if the user changes the

characteristics of a building, he should do it on a separate disk and save the

original disk.

If the user adds a new building, he must also add: 1. new occupants by

modifying or expanding program 0CC1, and 2. new fire data by modifying program

SM0KE9 and providing a new data file for smoke characteristics.

6 .

2

Describing the Building .

6.2.1 Introduction . The characteristics of the new building will be

contained in program BLDG4. A substantial part of program BLDG4 is devoted to

locating nodes and occupants on the building layout on the screen. That part

of the program is discussed below in Section 6.5, Layout of New Building.

Note in program BLDG1 , most of the input data is in the 1000 series of

statements; in BLDG2 , the 2000 series; in BLDG 3 , the 3000 series; and BLDG4,

the 4000 series: but the last three digits of the statement numbers are

comparable for similar instructions in the four programs. Similarly,

different series of instructions are used in the different programs that

contain the smoke characteristics and within the program that contains the

occupant characteristics.

6.2.2 Number of Nodes. Rooms, and Exits . The number of nodes, rooms and

exits are entered as variables into the program in the form of LET statements.

The number of nodes is variable NN, the number of rooms is NR, and the number

of exits is NE. Statement 4010 of programs BLDG4 is reserved for entering the

values of these parameters. Variable NB1 tells the computer what graphics

mode to use: it is given the value of 2 in statement 4005 which directs the

computer to use high resolution graphics

.

6.2.3 Lengths of Links Between Nodes . The distance, in meters, between two

nodes is stored in the matrix DIST(I,II). Initial values are defined as 999

meters in subroutine 500. The distance DIST(I,I) is defined equal to .01.

because the shortest path routine would not work if it were zero: any positive

value could have been assigned to DIST(I,II). When the link between the two

nodes, node I and node II, is X meters, the length of the link is entered as a LET statement in the form DIST(I , II)=X. A separate entry is made for each

link. The distance from node I to node II is normally the same as the

distance from node II to node I: it is necessary to define the link only

once, using either direction. Statements 4030 to 4039 of program BLDG4 are

reserved for these entries. You may enter more than one DIST parameter per

line, if you separate each statement with a colon. For example:

46
4030 DIST(1 , 12 ) =2 : DIST(1 , 15)=3 . 5 : DIST(2 , 13)=1 .

6.2.4 Defining Windows . If an exit node X is a window that can be used as an

exit, set WIND0(X)=1 in instruction 4040. (Do not place a node at a window

unless it can be used as an exit: an unusable window can be shown in the

graphical representation of the building on the screen but it should not

considered as a node and it must not be defined as an exit node.) The values

WINDO(I) should be defined in instruction 4040 of program BLDG4. For example:

4041 WIND0(11)-1: WIND0(12)-1: WIND0(18)-1: FR0NT=3

When determining the desirability of a path, 100*(WINDO(I) ) demerits are given

if the egress path involves going out window I. Note that exiting by window

II could be given fewer or greater than 100 demerits by assigning WINDO(II) a value less or more than one, respectively.

6.2.5 Front Door . The number of the exit node for the front door is entered

in instruction 4040 of program BLDG4 as the value of the variable FRONT. (See

above example .

)

6.2.6 Room Location of Nodes . If there are NR rooms, each of the first NR

nodes are assigned to a room of the same number (e.g. node 1 is in room 1).

This assignment is made automatically by statements 4064-4068 of program

BLDG4. The exit nodes are not considered to be in any room. If there are

additional nodes, it is necessary to inform the computer in which room they

are located. This information is stored in parameter RMNOD(I) . If node Y is

in room X, then RMNOD (Y) =X . This information is entered in instructions 4060 = 4063 of program BLDG4. For example:

4062 RMNOD (15) =7 : RMNOD (16) -4 : RMNOD (17) =4

6.2.7 Height of Rooms . The heights of all the rooms in the other buildings

is set at 2.4 meters, i.e., as close as we can get to 8 feet using two

significant digits. The heights are set in instructions 4130=4134. The user

can change the heights, if he wishes, by a simple change in these

instructions. Note that parameter HR(I) is the height of room I. If there is

a staircase in your building, and the staircase is a room, double the height

of the room and add the thickness of the floor/ceiling construction. Line

4140 is reserved for this type of modification. Also note that the default or

"no smoke" value of SDLL(I) , the height of the lower smoke layer, must be set

equal to the height of the room in this instruction. (The reason for this is

explained in the next section.) For example:

4132 HR(I)=2.4: SDLL(I)=HR(I) '--existing instruction

4132 HR(I)=2.3: SDLL(I)=HR(I) '--new instruction if we want to change

the room heights

4140 HR(4)=4.7: SDLL(I)=HR(I) '--room 4 is stairs

If a computer model is used to provide the characteristics of the spreading

smoke, it must use the same room heights as the EXITT model.

47
6.2.8 Combining Rooms . This set of computer programs can model a building

with up to 12 rooms. The programs that distribute the smoke (i.e. programs

that provide input to the EXITT model) also have limits on the number of rooms

that can be modelled. To keep the number of rooms within the prescribed

limits, it is sometimes necessary to treat several rooms as a single room. Normally one would consider the hall or foyer at the bottom of a stairs, the

stairs, and the upstairs hallway as three separate rooms. However, it may be

desirable to treat the foyer, the stairs, and the upstairs hallway as three

(or more) nodes of one room. If this is done, the smoke conditions of the

three areas should be treated differently because the psychological and

physiological impact of the smoke in the three areas are different. This is

handled by treating the combined area as one smoke compartment with different

heights of the floors and ceilings for the various nodes in the compartment.

The height of the ceiling, i.e., HR(I) , in relation to the bottom of the smoke

compartment, must be defined for each node.

Similarly, the height of the floor- -HF(I) -- in relation to the bottom of the

smoke compartment must be defined for each node. Since the usual value of

HF(I) is zero, and HF(I) is automatically assigned a value of zero, nothing

needs to be done unless we combine a stairway with the upstairs hallway.

Similarly, the program assigns the same value of HR(I) for all rooms and nodes

and nothing needs to be unless we combine the stairway with a portion of the

downstairs. The special values of HR(I) and HF(I) , if any, can be specified

in statement 4145 and 4146

6 . 3 Smoke Characteristics . 6.3.1 Introduction . Each fire is stored in a separate data file with a name

that starts with the word SMOKE. The next character is the building number:

an additional digit may be used to distinguish among different fires for the

same building. The suffix is . SMK. The data file name reserved for the first

fire in the new building, building 4, is SM0KE4.SMK

Statements 5000-5090 in program SM0KE9 contains information about one fire

scenario. Each of the eight succeeding blocks of 100 statements contains

information about another fire scenario. The block of statements from 5900-

5990 is reserved for a new fire scenario. The organization of the data in the

nine blocks of statements are similar.

6.3.2 Smoke Characteristics . The current version of this simulation is based

on the assumption that there are two layers of air in each room- -an upper

layer contaminated with smoke particles and a lower layer that is practically

clear. The two characteristics of smoke that are used are: 1. the optical

density of the upper layer with smoke; and 2. the depth of the lower clear

layer (i.e., the distance from the floor to the upper (or smoke) layer).

Before a fire takes place, the depth or height of the lower "smoke" layer is

equal to the height of the room. This is because there is no smoke in the

room. If the room were to become completely filled with smoke, the depth of

the lower layer would be equal to zero because there would be no more clear

air left in the room.

48
The two sets of smoke characteristics for each room for a single time period

are stored in the data file whose name is stored in the string XX$ . For a fire in the new building, XX$ is defined as SM0KE4 . SMK in statement 14118,

However, the user will be given the opportunity to change this data file

through the keyboard (see subroutine 7000 of program SM0KE9)

In the data file, each data entry is a separate data record. If there are N

rooms, there will be (2*N)+1 entries for each time period. The first N

entries will be the optical densities of the N rooms in sequential order of

the room number (i.e.

,

the smoke density of room one will be first). The

second N entries will be the depth or height of the lower clear layer in each

room, again in sequential order of room number. The last entry will be 999.

The computer will accept any value for the smoke densities and height of the

lower layer but will check to see if there are 2*N entries between the 999

entries. The height of the lower layer should not exceed the height of the

room (but it may exceed the height of a foyer if the foyer is in the same room

as the stairs)

If the data file contains data in a different format, statements 7100=7170 can

be modified to accept the new format.

6=3.3 Number of Time Periods . The current version of the program can input

from a data file smoke conditions for 102 time periods, (The limit comes from

one of the dimensions of the matrix of smoke values.) The actual number of

time periods for which smoke data is obtained from a data file is NZ and the

value of NZ should be entered in instruction 14116 of program SMOKE 9 . If the

simulation is run for more than NZ time cycles, then smoke conditions for the

NZth time period can serve as the smoke conditions for the remainder of the

simulation. However, if the simulation is run for more than NZ time periods,

the user will have an opportunity to change the smoke conditions in all time

periods following the NZth period.

6=3.4 Description of the Fire . Statements 14110=14111 are reserved for a brief description of the fire. The description can be either a comment

statement or the part in quotes of a print statement. Remember to put an

apostrophe before the comment to avoid a syntax error.

6.3.5 Smoke Detectors . The building may have up to three smoke detectors.

(Building 1, i.e., NB=1 , can have only one detector. Also, since NB=1 for

buildings defined through the keyboard, they also have only one detector.)

These smoke detectors are independent and are not interconnected in any way.

It is necessary for the user to provide the characteristics of the smoke

detectors and how loud each detector would sound in each room of the building

for any new fire scenario. Statements 14120-14130 of program SM0KE9 are

reserved for these entries. The following parameters should be defined. NSD

is the number of smoke detectors. DET(I) is the room (or node) where detector

I is located. LR00M(N,I) is how loud (decibels) detector I will sound in room

N: all combinations of rooms and detectors should be entered. (Note that

detectors usually sound about 85 decibels in the room in which they are located, and they sound about 12-15 decibels less in an adjoining room if the

door is open and about 24-30 decibels less if the door is closed.) See

statements 5620-5628 for an example.

49
(If you are using statements 5000-5300 as a guide in making changes in a building stored in the computer, you should note that in building 1 the smoke

detectors are treated differently. Because of the simplicity of the building,

there would normally be only one smoke detector and it is possible to let the

computer compute the loudness of the detector in each room. However, it is

necessary to input information about the bedroom doors that are closed-

default position is open. An example of the instructions for doing this are

located in statements 5140-5159 of program SM0KE9 .

)

6.3.6 Background Noise . The background noise in each room is set as 35

decibels in statements 4082-4086 of program BLDG4. If any room has a greater

amount of background noise, this information can be entered in statement 4088

of program BLDG4. If the background noise in room I is X decibels, then

N0ISE(I)=X.

6

.4

Occupant Characteristics . 6.4.1 Introduction . The characteristics of all occupants are in program

0CC1. The space reserved for the occupants of the new building is the 3000

series of instructions. The 0CC1 program will not accept the new set of

occupants until statement 400 is changed to read: 400 GOTO 3000

As you enter the characteristics of the occupants, be sure to keep statement

3000 as an instruction or comment statement.

The 3000 series of statements, when constructed as described in this section,

will be similar to the nine series of statements starting with statement 2000.

They can be used as examples.

6.4.2 Number of Occupants . Set the parameter NP equal to the number of

occupants in statement 3005.

6.4.3 Age . Set the parameter AGE(J) equal to the age, in years, of occupant

J in statement 3010. A separate LET statement is needed for each occupant:

they should be separated by colons

.

6.4.4 Disabilities . An occupant either is fully capable when awake or is in

need of assistance to evacuate. The actions of capable children are limited

solely as a function of age, e.g., they may be too young to rescue others. If

ACT(J)=1 or AGE(J)<=BABY, then occupant J is treated as one who needs

assistance escaping. Setting ACT(J)=1 is the only way of flagging an occupant

of age BABY+1 or older as needing assistance in moving. This should be done

in statement 3011. (To avoid careless errors, you may wish to set ACT(J)=0

for the capable occupants .

)

6.4.5 Sex . When SEX(J)=1, occupant J is a male. When SEX(J)=0, occupant J

is a female. The sex of the occupants should be defined in statement 3015.

6.4.6 Location of Occupants . The parameter RP(J) signifies the room number

50
in which occupant J is currently located. The initial room locations should

be defined in statement 3020.

6.4.7 Sleep . When SLEEP (J)=0, occupant J is asleep. When SLEEP (J)*l } occupant J is awake. The initial sleep status of each occupant should be

defined in instruction 3030.

Some occupants are deep sleepers and require more stimuli than the average in

order to awaken from sleep. The deviation from the norm is indicated by the

value of the parameter CSLP(J). When CSLP(J)=0, occupant J requires the

normal amount of stimuli to awaken. As a general guideline in setting the

value of CSLP(J) , consider the units as additional decibels required to awaken

the occupant. Note the parent of an infant is likely to awaken more easily

than most people and might be assigned a small (say less than 8) negative

value for CSLP(J). Values of CSLP(J) are defined in statement 3035.

6.4.8 Travel Speed . The parameter SPD is the normal travel speed of the

occupants. It is set in statement 1006 of program DEC1. In subroutine 1910

of program 0CC1, the speed of all occupants is set as SPD. The speed of

occupant J is stored in parameter SPEED(J) . If you wish to set the normal

speed of any occupant to be different than the value of SPD, you can override

the speed set in subroutine 1910 by defining a new value for SPEED(J) in

statement 3091.

6 . 5 Output to TENAB . When this model is being used as part of the Hazard Assessment Methodology, it

provides a data file specifying all movements of the occupants. TENAB is a model that determines the physiological impact of the toxic gases and heat on

the occupants. It uses as input the data file specifying all movements of the

occupants. The name of the data file must have the suffix .EVA. The name of

the file for the fire in the new building is given in statement 14105. The

user will be given the opportunity to change the name through the keyboard.

The name given by the program can also be changed by changing statement 14105.

6 . 6 Layout of New Building . 6.6.1 Introduction . The simulation is designed for use at the computer with

the results being displayed on the screen. It includes displaying the floor

layouts, and the movements of the occupants in the building: the layout is

displayed on the monitor screen using the computer graphics of BASICA.

The simulation program contains the layouts of three buildings: a ranch house;

a townhouse; and a detached house. The model is designed to print the

appropriate layout on the monitor screen during the running of the model. The

user may add a fourth building of his choice. To add the layout of the new

building, it is necessary to develop a set of instructions that will draw the

floor layouts and that locates nodes on the layout. While this is relatively

easy, it can be very time consuming, especially if you show details of the

layout in the graphics

51
6.6.2 How to Skip the Graphics . You can run the program without developing

the instructions that draw the layout by either of the following methods:

1. Answer the question "DO YOU HAVE AN IBM GRAPHICS BOARD?" negatively

each time you run the simulation with that building; or

2. In the program SMOKE9 , add the instruction: 5 OWN$="Y"

Do not forget to delete this instruction when you want to run the

program with the graphics.

6.6.3 How to Draw the Building. The complete set of instructions for drawing

the new building must be included in both the DEC1 and the DEC3/C0MP4

programs. The first statement must be number 14110 and the last statement

must be less than 14199. (These restrictions apply to both the DEC1 and

DEC3/C0MP4 programs .

)

The following instructions are for drawing the building in the high resolution

graphics mode. The programs are written with the assumption that the layout

for the additional building will be in the high resolution graphics. High

resolution graphics are used when NB1—2.

The screen is composed of 640 horizontal points and 200 vertical points.

(Numbering starts from the upper left corner of the screen.) All of the

horizontal range may be used but only some of the vertical range is available:

the remainder of the screen is reserved for text describing the actions and

decisions of the occupants. The vertical range reserved for the graphical

representation of the building is 61 to 181.

Detailed descriptions of the instructions used for drawing the building can be

found in the IBM BASIC MANUAL. It explains the use of the PSET and DRAW

functions used in the BASICA language. It is not necessary to draw the

building in the style (e.g., level of detail) used in drawing the other

buildings stored in this set of computer programs. It is important, however,

to stay in the vertical range defined above.

The general approach used in drawing the other buildings is to start at line

61 using the PSET instruction. (The horizontal coordinate should be selected

so that the final drawing is reasonably centered on the screen.)

In drawing the other buildings stored in this set of computer programs, the

simulation used diagonal lines to represent doors and gaps to represent

windows. In drawing the building the following features of BASIC should be

noted

1. The length of a diagonal line is longer than a vertical or horizontal line of the same number of units,

2. On typical monitors, five vertical units are the same length on the

screen as twelve horizontal units (high resolution mode)

.

52
3. Retracing a line does not affect its characteristics.

When drawing the buildings, select a scale so that the drawing will be in

proportion to the actual dimensions. Two scales should be made: one for the

vertical and one for the horizontal dimensions. The reason for two scales is

because of feature 2 noted above. Remember that the vertical dimension should

not exceed 120 units.

The 12000 and the 13000 series of statements of programs DEC1 and DEC3 are

examples

6.6.4 Labelling NodesIt should be noted that the coordinate system for

locating alphanumeric characters on the screen is different from that for

locating lines on the screen. In the high resolution graphics there are 80

horizontal positions and 24 vertical ones, again counting from the upper left

corner

In the graphics mode, the LOCATE instruction can be used to place an alphanumeric character on the screen. The LOCATE instruction requires a pair

of coordinates to define the desired location on the screen. If you give the

computer the coordinates for the location of each node on the floor layout,

the computer will show the location of those nodes (and the location of the

occupants who are at that node) . These coordinates are stored in matrix

G(I,J). G(I,1) is the vertical coordinate of node I and G(I,2) is the

horizontal coordinate of the same node. Sometimes there will be more than one occupant at a node. The parameters G(I,3) and G(I,4) are for use when more

than one occupant is at node I.* They tell the computer where to place the

second occupant in relation to the first.

When there are two occupants at node I

1. If occupant 2 is to be shown below occupant 1, then

G(I,3)-1 and G(I,4)-0;

2. If occupant 2 is to be shown above occupant 1, then

G(I,3) —1 and G(I,4)=0;

3. If occupant 2 is to be shown to the right of occupant 1, then

G(I , 3)=0 and G(I,4)=1, etc.

The values of G(I,J) are stored in instructions 4900-4998 of program BLDG4 as DATA statements. It is suggested that instruction 4901 be used for node 1,

instruction 4902 for node 2, etc. Each instruction should be a DATA statement

with five numbers. The first four numbers should be G(I,1), G(I,2), G(I,3)

and G(I,4) respectively. The fifth and last number must be 999. The first

data statement will contain the data for node 1, the second for node 2, etc.

For example in program BLDG1 , the positions of the nodes for the Ranch house

are entered as

1901 DATA 9,10,1,0,999

1902 DATA 18,11,1,0,999

53
1903 DATA 18,17,1,0,999

etc

.

The line number 1901 is the data for node 1, 1902 is the data for node 2, etc

Using statement numbers starting with 4901, enter the data values that define

the node/occupant locations to suit your own building. (You may wish to use

program DEC1 to print the layout on the monitor screen, interrupt the running

of DEC1, and move the cursor across the layout on the screen to determine the

desired coordinates of the nodes.)

54
7 OUTPUTS

The program provides outputs in three formats

1. A description of the decisions and movements of the occupants is

printed on the screen as the simulation progresses,, There will be

frequent pauses to permit the user to read the text on the screen: the

user can end each pause and permit the simulation to continue by

pressing the RETURN key. The pauses and graphics can be suppressed by

selecting the appropriate options.

2. A description of the decisions and movements of the occupants can be

printed of the printer. Once the program starts, the first question

posed to the user is, "DO YOU WANT TO USE YOUR PRINTER?"

3. A record of the movements of the occupants will be stored on hard

disk drive if the program is run from the hard disk. The information

recorded on the disk is designed to be used as input to program TENAB

which determines the hazard for each occupant according to the room

conditions encountered along the escape route. [Bukowski, Chapter 6.]

The model provides this output only when the program is in the C disc

drive, that is, on the hard disc.

When the movements of the occupants are stored on the hard disc, the

information is stored in the following order:

1. Number of rooms, number of exits, total number of nodes, number of

occupants, and length of one time cycle in seconds.

2a. Occupant number, initial room location of occupant, time in seconds

(i.e., zero if it is the initial location).

2b. Height of floor at node in relation to lowest level in "room".

2c. Node number.

2d. Height of separation between lower and upper smoke layers.

2e. Smoke density of the upper layer.

3. Repeat steps 2a to 2e for each occupant

O

4. Repeat steps 2a to 2e each time an occupant arrives at a node.

(Modify step 2a to reflect that we are not recording an initial

location.

)

The arrival time Is recorded as an integer: it is obtained by dropping the

fractional portion of the number. That is, there are no fractional seconds in

this output although there are fractional seconds in the other outputs.

55
The name of the data file used to store these results is defined in program

SM0KE9 . The file name is a function of the fire scenario and is defined at

the time the fire scenario is defined. See statements 5005, 5105, 5205, 5305,

etc

.

REFERENCES

Boring, E.G., A History of Experimental Psychology, Appleton-Century-Crofts

,

Inc. New York, 1950, p.289.

Bukowski , R.W, et al . , HAZARD I, Vol.l: Fire Hazard Assessment Methods.

National Bureau of Standards Report, Gaithersburg, MD. (In preparation.)

1987.

Kahn, M.J., Human Awakening and Subsequent Identification of Fire-Related

Cues, Fire Technology, Vol.20, No . 1 , February 1984, pp. 20-26.

Nober, E.H., et al , Waking Effectiveness of Household Smoke and Fire Detection

Devices, Fire Journal, Vol.75, No. 4, July 1981, pp . 86 - 91 , 130

.

Jin, T., Visibility through Fire Smoke: Part 5, Allowable Smoke Density for

Escape from Fire, Report of Fire Research Institute of Japan, No. 42, September

1976.

Jones, W.W. , A Model for the Transport of Fire, Smoke and Toxic Gases (FAST),

NBSIR 84-2934, National Bureau of Standards, Gaithersburg, MD, 1984.

Keating, J.P. and Loftus , E.F., Post Fire Interviews: Development and Field

Validation of the Behavioral Sequence Interview Technique, National Bureau of

Standards, Report Number GCR-84-477, Gaithersburg, Md. , 1984. Interview

records provided by the authors in private communication.

Levin, B.M., Design as a Function of Responses to Fire Cues, General

Proceedings of Conference Research and Design 85: Architectural Application

of Design and Technology Research held at Los Angeles, California, March 14-

18, 1985, American Institute of Architects Foundation, Washington, D.C., 1985,

pp . 289-294

.

Levin, B.M., and Hedetniemi, S., Determining Fastest Routes Using Fixed

Schedules, Proceeding- - Spring Joint Computer Conference, 1963, American

Federation of Information Processing Societies, Spartan Books, Inc.,

Baltimore, MD , 1963.

Latane , B., and Darley, J.M., Group Inhibition of Bystander Intervention in

Emergencies, Journal of Personality Psychology, Vol.10, No . 3 , Nov. 1968,

pp. 215-221.

Licklider, J.C.R., Basic Correlates of the Auditory Stimulus, in S.S. Stevens,

Handbook of Experimental Psychology, John Wiley & Sons, Inc, New York, 1951,

p.1031.

56
Nober, E.H., et al. Waking Effectiveness of Household Smoke and Fire Detection

Devices, Fire Journal, Vol.75, No. 4, July 1981, pp . 86 - 91 , 130

57
APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF PARAMETERS AND VARIABLES

ACT(J) is the current action choice of Occupant J. The choices are:

0. Initial setting. The choice of preferred action has not yet been

addressed by the simulation.

1. Needs rescue. This is the choice if Occupant J has been

classified as needing help in evacuation (see, for example,

instruction 5266 of program DEC1)

.

3. Go to occupant (in other room) who needs rescue.

4. Investigate. Go towards room with greatest smoke.

5. Escape. Egress without helping others.

7. Go to occupant (in other room) who needs waking or alerting.

11. Rescuer assigned. This assignment is made to Occupant JJ--an.

occupant who needs assistance. This assignment is made when

Occupant J makes the choice of going to rescue Occupant JJ

.

13. Take someone out of building. This choice is permitted only if

Occupant J and an occupant needing rescue are in the same room.

(Use choice 7 if in different rooms.)

21. Rescuer has started assisting this occupant.

50. Awaiting new choice. This assignment is made when Occupant J has

completed the actions required by his most recent choice of

action, e.g. occupant completed investigation by arriving at room

with visible flame.

100. Actions completed. This assignment is made when Occupant J has

left the building. Note that in this version occupants do not

reenter the building.

ACT1(J) is a flag to indicate if investigation is a permitted choice for

Occupant J. Investigation is not a permitted choice for an occupant who has

already completed an investigation or who has been awakened by an occupant who

has completed an investigation.

0. Investigation is a priority choice.

1. Investigation is not a priority choice. See Section 4.5.3,

Criteria for Setting ACT(J)=1.

2. Investigation is not a permitted choice. See Section 4.5.4,

Criteria for Fire to be Considered Serious.

ACT2(J) indicates the status of Occupant J in accomplishing the goal of his

most recent action choice.

0. Initial status including sleeping.

90. Successfully^completed action or terminated investigation due to

seeing flame^'or moderate smoke- -accomplished goal.

93. Cannot reach GOAL using current shortest path- - shortest path

blocked by smoke.

95. Cannot reach GOAL- -cannot find route using subroutine 6200.

98. Trapped- -cannot find route to outside of building using subroutine

6200.

99. Waiting at a window for help in evacuating disabled occupant- - all

routes to exit doors are through bad smoke. Completed final

action

.

58
100. Completed final action- -outside building.

101. Needs assistance- - that is, ACT(J) =1, 11, or 21.

ADJ is an adjustment to TCR(J) that permits subroutines to be called at

different times in relationship to instruction 2158 of Program DEC3

ADJ1 is an adjustment to TCR(J) that permits subroutines to be called at

different times in relationship to instruction 2158 of Program DEC3.

ADV(I) are switches for using or by-passing "advanced" features. Default

values are zero. ADV(1)=0 . Bypass all "advanced" features.

ADV(1)=1. Can use "advanced" features.

ADV ( 2

) =0 . Will not store input data for future run. ADV(2)=1. Will store input data in file on disk.

ADV(3)=0. Will not rerun simulation using input data from previous run. ADV(3)=1. Will rerun simulation using input data stored during a previous run where ADV(2)=1.

ADV(4)=0 or 1. Progress of the simulation can be followed on the

monitor screen.

ADV(4)=2. Graphic presentations on monitor are suppressed and pauses

that permit reading of the screen also are suppressed.

AGE(J) is the age of Occupant J. Children who have not reached their first

birthday are considered to be 0 years old. The maximum age permitted to be

entered through the keyboard is 110 (See instruction 5254 of Program DEC1)

ALARH(I) is a flag to indicate if there is sufficient smoke to activate smoke

detector I if it is working.

0. Not sufficient smoke to activate a detector.

1. Sufficient smoke (but detector may be broken and not sound.)

ALEFF is the difference between the loudness of the smoke detector alarm and

the background noise. It is used in the subroutine for calculating the

awareness index which starts with instruction 5000.

ALERT(J) is a flag indicating that someone is coming to alert occupant J.

0. Default value- -no one is coming.

1. An occupant is coming.

ALONE (J) indicates if Occupant J is the only one in the room.

0 . Occupant is alone

1. Other occupants are also in the room. AWARE(J) is the sum of the impacts of all the fire cues. It is described in

Section 4.4, Awareness of Fire.

B$ indicates if the smoke detectors are broken.

"N" . All smoke detectors are working properly.

"Y" . All smoke detectors are broken.

BABY is upper limit of the age of children who will not make rational

decisions

C indicates if the monitor is color.

1. Color.

2. Monochromatic.

59
CFIRE is the scaling factor for seeing fire when determining how quickly an

occupant will respond to the fire cues. See Section 3.5.3, Measures of Fire

Cue Impact.

COLF is the scaling factor for smoke odor (olfactory sense) when determining

how quickly an occupant will respond to the fire cues. See Section 4.4.3,

Measures of Fire Cue Impact.

CLSP(J) is a sleeping penalty for occupants who have difficulty waking, such

as occupants who have hearing loss and young children. Occupants who awake

more easily than most, such as mothers of infants, can be assigned a negative

penalty. The units are additional decibels. When entering the value through

the keyboard, permitted values are -15 to 50.

CSMK is the scaling factor for seeing smoke when determining how quickly an

occupant will respond to the fire cues. See Section 4.4.3, Measures of Fire

Cue Impact.

DET(I) indicates the room location of detector I. DIST(K,KK) is the distance from node K to node KK in meters. The distance

from a node to itself is defined to be 1 cm. so that the shortest path

algorithm will operate more efficiently. The distance from K to KK is defined

to be equal to the distance from KK to K in this version. A distance of 999

meters or greater indicates there is no link between the two nodes.

DOPEN(I) indicates if the door to room I is open or closed. When entering a building's characteristics through the keyboard and when using the Ranch

House, the room with the smoke detector is the corridor and it is considered

to have no doors. This variable is not used when modelling two story

buildings

.

0. open.

1. closed.

DT is the distance, in meters, to be travelled by the occupant in this time

period (or in the remaining time of this time period)

.

E is a flag that warns that an input value is not within the permitted range.

0. Value is within the prescribed range or the string is an

acceptable string of alpha characters.

1. Value is not within the prescribed range or the string is not an

acceptable string of alpha characters.

E has a second use. When screen is not in the graphics mode, pressing E,

after a pause, will terminate the run. (See instructions 3165 of program DEC1

and 3162 of program DEC3 .

)

F is a count of the number of times the examples of the smoke densities have

been printed. After 5 printings, the printing is suppressed. (See

instruction 3651 of programs DEC1 and DEC3)

.

FAST indicates if the user will provide the smoke data through the keyboard.

0. Provide smoke data through the keyboard.

1. Use smoke data in data statements or input file.

FF indicates if this is the first or second series of passes through

subroutine 7000 of Program DEC3 . (See statements 2144 and 7140.)

60
FFF indicates if all occupants are either outside the building or are trapped.

When this is true, FFF=0 and the simulation will end (see instruction 2948 of

Program DEC3)

FXRST$ indicates if the user calls himself a first time user.

"Y" . Yes

"N" . No

FLAME(I) indicates the location of flame visible from room I. 0. No visible flame.

1. Flame in another room is visible from room I. 999. Flame is in room I.

FRONT is the number of the exit node representing the front door (see, for

example, instructions 1144-1148 of program DEC1)

G(K,II) is a matrix of information about the location on the screen of node K.

(See Section 5.5.4, Labelling Nodes.)

G1 is a variable for the LOCATE instruction in locating an occupant on the

screen. (See Section 5.5.4, Labelling Nodes and statement 11410 of programs

DEC1 and DEG.)

G2 is a variable for the LOCATE instruction in locating an occupant on the

screen. (See Section 5.5.4, Labelling Nodes and statement 11415 of programs

DEC1 and DEC3 .

)

GOAL is the number of the node toward which the movement of an occupant is

directed.

GOAU(J) is the number of the node toward which movement of Occupant J is

directed.

H$ indicates if some displays on the screen are to be bypassed because

information is redundant and user is in a hurry.

"Y"Yes.

"N"No.

H(J) indicates the next time to print on screen the status of occupant J, if

his status does not change earlier. Only has meaning if H$="Y"

HELP$ is a temporary variable indicating if an occupant needs assistance in

evacuating. Y=Yes , N=No

HF(I) is the height of the floor at a node compared to the height at the

bottom of a stairs. Applies only when there is more than one node in a room

and the different node are at different heights, e.g., bottom of stairs &

hallway at top of stairs, or room 5c balcony.

HR(I) is the height of room I in meters.

HUE indicates if the location of the occupants will be displayed on the

screen. it is used in setting the color on the screen.

0. Use colors for showing occupant locations.

1. Use colors for showing only node locations.

I is the number of the room under consideration. It also is used as a general

index number.

61
IFLAG is a flag that warns that an input value is not within the permitted

range

.

0. Value is within the prescribed range or the string is an

acceptable string of alpha-numeric characters.

1. Value is not within the prescribed range or the string is not an

acceptable string of alpha-numeric characters.

II is the number of a room or node. It is used when determining in which room

a node is located.

III indicates the character position in a string.

J is the number of the occupant under consideration.

J9 is used to temporarily store the value of J.

JJ is the number of an occupant- -usually an occupant who needs assistance of

some sort (e.g. waking, evacuating).

JK is the number of an occupant- -usually an occupant who needs assistance of

some sort (e.g. waking, evacuating). There is no logical difference between

JJ and JK.

K is the number of a node --often the node at the end of a path.

KK is the number of a node other than the one at the end of a path.

KK1 indicates the character position in a string.

KKK is the sequence number of a node on a route. It is used in recording the

route to node J in PATH(J,KKK). PATH( J , KKK)=-0 when KKK is greater than the

number of nodes in the route.

LALARM is a measure of the loudness or signal intensity of all smoke detector

alarms. The measure used is decibels as heard by a person in the same room

as the detector. (The possibility that the sound might vary within a room is

ignored.

)

LP is switch for sending output to the printer. This switch is part of each

statement that sends output to the printer.

0. Send output to the printer.

1. Do not send output to the printer.

LROOM(I) is the loudness or signal intensity of the smoke detector alarm in

room I. The units are decibels.

M$ indicates on which disk drive the program is stored.

MATCH1$ is a temporary string variable used in checking keyboard input.

MATCH2$ is a temporary string variable used in checking keyboard input.

MMM is an alpha-numeric character in ASCII code.

MN$ is string for use in the CHAIN command.

N is the number of a room or node- -often a room being considered for entry and

which needs to be evaluated for safety.

NE is the number of exits --doors and qualifying windows.

62
NELSON(I,J) is a array of variables that stores the values of input variables

that change during a simulation run so that the run can be "repeated" using

the same input data.

NELSON (1,J)-ACT(J)

NELSON (2 , J)=RP(J)

NELSON (3, J)-SLEEP(J)

NELSON ( 4 , J

) -SPEED ( J

)

NLEN indicates the length of a string.

NN is the total number of nodes including exits.

N1 is a local variable.

NB is the building number of the building stored in programs BLDG1 , BLDG2

,

BLDG3 , and BLDG4

NB1 indicates the screen resolution used in the graphics for the different

buildings

1. medium resolution- -used for one story buildings.

2. high resolution- -used for two story buildings.

NOISE(I) is the background noise in room I. The units are decibels. If

NOXSE(I)<35, it is treated as if it were 35 (see statement 5111 of program

DEC3) . NP is the number of occupants

NPATH(J) is the number of nodes in the route from the location of occupant J

to his desired goal.

NR is the number of rooms

NSD is the number of smoke detectors

NT is the maximum number of time periods or time cycles to be simulated.

NZ is the number of time periods

NZZ is the maximum number of time periods for which smoke conditions can be

stored, i.e., DIM SDU(12,NZZ) and DIM SDL(12,NZZ).

OWN$ indicates if the computer operator is to define the building or if the

computer will use a pre-defined building. After the building characteristics

are entered, it is used to bypass the graphical representation.

"N" . User will not define own building and graphical representation of

the building layout, and occupant locations will be shown on the

screen.

"Y"User will define own building and graphical representations will

be bypassed.

P$ indicates if the user or the computer will place occupants in the building

"N"User places occupants in the building by answering questions

through the keyboard.

"Y"

Computer places occupants in the building from stored information.

63
PATH(K,KKK) contains the sequence of nodes in the path to each node K (i.e.

the Kth row of the matrix defines the path to node K) . Zeros indicate that

the path to node K was fully described by previous (more to the left) cells in

row K.

PATHJ(J,KKK) indicates the sequence of nodes (path) in Occupant J's route to

his goal. Zeros indicate that the path to node K is fully described by

previous (more to the left) cells in row K.

PPATH(J) indicates where on his route Occupant J is located. If PATH(J)=KKK,

then occupant J is located at node PATH(J,KKK).

Q$ is a switch that indicates if the computer operator will be given the

opportunity to override or change some of the decisions made by the computer

for the occupants

.

"N" . No, computer operator cannot override decisions.

"Y" . Yes, computer operator will have an opportunity to override some

of the decision.

QUICK indicates if there are any occupants who need assistance in waking or evacuating

.

0. No occupants need help.

1. At least one occupant needs help.

R(XP) indicates the number of occupants found so far to be located at node XP.

Used to prevent locating two occupants at the same precise location on the

screen when they are at the same node (i.e. avoid erasing one occupant when

locating another)

.

RMNOD(K) indicates the room in which node K is located.

RP(J) indicates the room in which Occupant J is located.

RR indicates the number of occupants already located on the screen at node XP

.

Used to prevent locating two occupants at the precise location on the screen

even though they are at the same node. Note in instruction 11400 RR=R(XP)-1.

S(I) is used to define a block of times and rooms where the smoke conditions

will be changed. That is, S(I) is used to define a block of rows and columns

in matrices SDU(II,NZ) and SDL(II,NZ).

1=1. First time period

1=2. Last time period

1=3. First room in block.

1=4. Last room in block.

S1(K) is used in the shortest path algorithms (subroutines starting at

instructions 6100 and 6200) to indicate the length (distance in meters or demerits, see Section 3.7.2, Handling Obstacles) of the shortest path found so far from node START to node K. S1(K) also is used to indicate changes that

will be made in the input data, if the input data is entered into the computer

using program AGAIN, i.e. if input data from a previous run is being used.

Default values are zero.

SI ( 1

) =0 or 1 . No changes in occupants.

Sl(l)=2. User will have opportunity to change characteristics of

occupants through the keyboard.

.

64
Sl(l)=3. User will be required to provide characteristics of new set of

occupants through the keyboard.

Sl(2)=0 or 1 . No changes in building characteristics.

Sl(2)=2. User will have an opportunity to change characteristics of the

building.

Sl(3)=0 or 1. No changes to fire/smoke conditions.

Sl(3)=2. User will have opportunity to change some of the smoke

characteristics

Sl(3)=3. User will enter the smoke characteristics as the simulation

progresses

S2(K) is used in the shortest path algorithms (subroutines starting at

instructions 6100 and 6200) to indicate if the path to K should be tested as the first n-1 nodes of a path (with n nodes) to each of the other nodes.

0. The path to node K either has already been tested or it is not a promising candidate.

1. The path to node K needs to be tested to determine if it can be

extended to form a shorter route to other nodes.

54 is a flag in the shortest route algorithms (subroutines starting at

instructions 6100 and 6200) to indicate if any S2(K) has been set equal to 1

since the last check of the flag.

0. No value of S2(K) has been set equal to 1 since the last time S4

was set equal to 0.

1. At least one S2(K) has been set equal to 1 since the last time S4

was set equal to 0.

55 is the length of a trial route in the shortest route algorithms

(subroutines starting at instructions 6100 and 6200) . The units are meters or demerits (see Section 4.6.2, Handling Obstacles).

S6(K) contains the numbers of nodes in the current shortest path from node

START to the other nodes. The origin node, START, and the destination node,

GOAL, are both counted.

SAV(J) indicates the occupant number of the occupant that Occupant J is

assigned to assist. If SAV(J) is 0, then Occupant J is not currently assigned

another occupant to awaken or rescue.

SDL(I,NZ) a matrix containing the values of SDLL(I) for all time periods.

SDLL(I) is the height of the top of the lower layer of smoke (i.e. the top of

the clear layer at the bottom) of room I for the current time period. The

units are meters.

SDU(I,NZ) a matrix containing the values of SDUL(I) for all time periods.

SDUL(I) is the smoke density in the upper layer of room I for the current time

period.

SETAL(I) indicates when detector I will sound.

0. Will sound when sufficient smoke reaches the detector.

1 or greater. Detector will sound at (SETAL-1) seconds. (Note the

sound of the detector affects the decisions and actions of the

occupants only if it sounds at the beginning of the time period.)

65
SEX(J) indicates the gender of Occupant J.

0 . Female

.

1. Male.

SHORT(J) indicates if a shortest path for occupant J from node START(J) to

node GOAL is stored in the Jth row of PATHJ (J , KKK)

.

SLEEP(J) indicates if occupant J is asleep.

0. Asleep.

1 . Awake

.

SLP indicates if an occupant is asleep, i.e., current value of SLEEP(J)

.

SMOKE is a measure of the impact of the smoke in a room (or at a node) . See

instructions 3090-3098 of program DEC3

.

SPD is the current travel speed for Occupant J in meters per second in program

DEC3 . Before DEC3 is run, SPD is the normal speed of typical occupants.

SPD1 is a parameter (multiplier) for increasing the travel speed of an

occupant who considers the fire to be serious.

SPEED(J) indicates the normal travel speed of Occupant J. The unit of speed

is meters per second. If occupant characteristics are not entered through the

keyboard, SPEED(J)=SPD

.

START is the number of the first node in a route.

0. Shortest path not stored.

1. Shortest path is stored.

SX indicates if screen is in the graphics mode.

0. In graphics mode.

1. Not in graphics mode.

TCR(J) indicates the time remaining for movement of Occupant J in the current

time period of time cycle. It is also the unused time at the end of the time

period. TCR(J) is often greater than the length of one time period because at

first it includes the length of the current time period plus the unused time

of the previous period.

TCYCLE is the number of seconds in one time cycle or time period.

TH is the threshold for awareness of fire cues in terms of loudness or volume

of sound, i.e. units of decibels. Measures of odor and visibility are scaled

to "equivalent" units of decibels.

TLENGTH indicates the approximate maximum length of the run in seconds. It is

defined in statement 1066 of program DEC1. The program will also stop

whenever each occupant is either out of the building or awaiting rescue at a window. Periodically (every 10 time cycles as currently set in instructions

2911-12 of program DEC3) the computer operator has the option of stopping the

simulation.

TNOW indicates the number of the current time cycle or time period. TNOW = 1

for the time period beginning at time 0.

T0L(I) are parameters related to response to smoke. See Section 4.2,

Parameters

.

66
TPAUSE is the time, in seconds, between completion of one action and the start

of the next- -decision time.

TRESP(J) is a delay time (in seconds) before occupant(J) will respond. Its

initial value (set in instructions 4215 and 5251 of program DEC1) is 9999 or

999 which corresponds to infinity. Once an occupant decides to perform an

action (e.g. investigate, evacuate) the value of TRESP(J) represents a response time that includes time for preparatory actions . Ten seconds is

frequently used. Sometimes it includes time to wake up which can be up to 70

seconds

W(J) indicates if occupant J has started moving toward his current or soon to

be assigned GOAL.

0. Has not yet started.

1. Has started.

WINDO(K) indicates if an exit is a window. If an exit is not a window, it is

assumed to be a door.

0. Exit is a door.

1. Exit is a window.

X is a local variable. It is often used as the temporary storage location of

an input parameter while the computer checks if the input parameter value is

within a defined range.

X$ is a local string variable.

XI is a local variable. It indicates: 1, the location (node number) of an

occupant in the graphics subroutine; 2, the first node of a link in the

subroutine that moves occupants (starting at instruction 6800 of program

DEC3) ; 3, the contribution of seeing the fire in the subroutine for computing

the awareness index starting at instruction 5000 of program DEC3

X2 is a local variable. It indicates the second node of a link and, also, the

contribution of the odor of smoke in the subroutine for computing the

awareness index starting at instruction 5000 of program DEC3

X3 is a local variable. It indicates the contribution of seeing smoke in the

subroutine for computing the awareness index starting at instruction 5000 of

program DEC3

X4 is a local variable. It indicates the contribution of being awake in the

subroutine for computing the awareness index starting at instruction 5000 of

program DEC3

X5 is a local variable.

XHIGH indicates -- for an input variable- -at what magnitude a value is so high

that the computer operator should review the input value before the computer

accepts it.

XLL indicates the lowest value of an input parameter that the computer will

accept

XLOW indicates -- for an input variable- -at what magnitude the input is so low

that the computer operator should review the input value before the computer

accepts it.

XP is the node at which Occupant JJ is located. It is used in graphics only.

67
XT$ is a dummy variable used in examining structure of user's response.

XUL indicates the largest value of an input parameter that the computer will

accept

.

XX is a local variable.

Y is a local variable.

Y$ is a string variable used in checking to see if an input string is "Y" or

»y" for a yes answer. See subroutine 3660-3669 of programs DEC1 and DEC3

.

YY is a local variable.

Z is a local variable.

Z$ is a local string variable used in entering input from the keyboard.

ZZ is a local variable.

ZZ$ is local string variable.

ZZZ is a local variable.

ZZZ$ is a local string variable.

68
69

Figure

la.

FLOOR

PLAN

OF

A

TYPICAL

RANCH

HOUSE
70

Figure

1b.

FLOOR

PLAN

OF

TOWNHOUSE
71
72

Figure

Id.

UPPER

FLOOR

PLAN

OF

A

TYPICAL

2-STORY

HOUSE
APPENDIX C

NBSIR 85-3167

METHODS TO CALCULATE THE

RESPONSE TIME OF HEAT AND

SMOKE DETECTORS INSTALLED BELOW

LARGE UNOBSTRUCTED CEILINGS

David D. Evans

David W. Stroup

U.S, DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

National Bureau of Standards

National Engineering Laboratory

Gaithersburg, MD 20899

February 1985

Issued July 1 985

Prepared for the Sponsor:

U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission

Washington, DC 20555

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE, Malcolm Baldrige, Secretary

NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS, Ernest Ambler, Director
-
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0

2.0

3.0

4.0

5.0

6.0

7.0

8.0

2

Abstract. . . ........

Introduction. ...... Detector Response to t“ - Fires..

Detector Response to Arbitrary Fires..

Smoke Detector Response. .............. Summary ............................... Acknowledgement ....................... References ............................

Notation. ............................. Appendix A - DETACT - T2 CODE.........

1) Example Calculation

2) Program Listing

Appendix B - DETACT - QS CODE.........

1) Example Calculation

2) Program Listing

Page

1

1

4

9

11

15

15

15

17

19

32

I

1
.

.
METHODS TO CALCULATE THE RESPONSE TIME OF HEAT AND SMOKE

DETECTORS INSTALLED BELOW LARGE UNOBSTRUCTED CEILINGS

Abstract

Recently developed methods to calculate the time required for ceiling

mounted heat and smoke detectors to respond to growing fires are reviewed® A

computer program that calculates activation times for both fixed temperature

and rate of rise heat detectors in response to fires that increase in heat

release rate proportionally with the square of time from ignition is given.

This program produces nearly equivalent results to the tables published in

Appendix C, Guide for Automatic Fire Detector Spacing, (NFPA 72E, 1984). A

separate method and corresponding program are provided to calculate response

time for fires having arbitrary heat release rate histories. This method is

based on quasi-steady ceiling layer gas flow assumptions. Assuming a constant

proportionality between smoke and heat released from burning materials, a

method is described to calculate smoke detector response time, modeling the

smoke detector as a low temperature heat detector In either of the two

response time models.

1. INTRODUCTION

Studies of the response of heat detectors to fire driven flows under

unconfined ceilings have been conducted since the early 1970's [1, 2, 3, 4].

Results of these largely experimental studies have been used to develop correlations of data that are useful under a broad range of fire conditions and

building geometries. These correlations have been used to construct engineering methods to determine heat detector spacing, sprinkler response time, and

smoke detector alarm times for industrial buildings where large undivided

1
ceilings over storage and manufacturing facilities are common. The method for

calculation of heat detector spacing has been adopted by the National Fire

Protection Association (NFPA) as an alternate design method published in the

standard NFPA 72E, 1984 [5].

Although the NFPA heat detector spacing calculation is a well documented

method, it is not in a convenient form for use by the Nuclear Regulatory

Commission (NRC) in evaluating the response characteristics of existing

systems for two reasons. 1) Currently, the only available form of the information is the tabular form published in the NFPA 72E standard. An analytic

form or computer subroutine that produced equivalent answers would be more

flexible and of greater use to NRC. 2) The published tables are organized to

look-up spacing requirements for a given response time. In the evaluation of

existing systems, the opposite problem is of interest - for a given spacing

and detector determine the response time.

As part of this study, the basis for the calculation method published in

Appendix C of the NFPA 72E standard was determined. Alternative correlations

of the same experimental data that are the basis for the tables in Appendix C

of the NFPA 72E standard were used to construct a FORTRAN program (DETACT-T2

Code) to evaluate the response time of existing heat detector systems. Using

the program, calculated values for response time agree to within 5 percent of

those published in the tables contained in Appendix C of the NFPA 72E

standard. Although this calculation method is the most firmly based of those

to be discussed in this report, it is restricted to application in which the

fire to be detected increases in energy release rate proportionally with the

square of time from the ignition.

2
separate program (DETACT-QS Code), written in PC BASIC, is capable of

evaluating detector response for a fire with an arbitrary energy release rate

history. The only restriction is that the energy release rate must be represeated as a series of connected straight lines, the end points of which are

entered as user input data* Inaccuracies may be introduced in the analysis of

rapidly varying fires because this code uses a quasi-steady approximation for

the fire driven gas flow. This means that changes at the fire source

immediately affect the gas flows at all distances from the fire. In reality,

time is required for the gases to travel from the fire to remote locations.

Generally, fire driven flows have a velocity the order of one meter per

second. Thus a quasi-steady analysis for locations close to the fire will

only be in error by a few seconds, while remote locations can be delayed by

tens of seconds. Keeping this approximation in mind, this program represents

the most flexible of available methods but has not been tested against experimental data.

Both of the codes discussed above analyze detector response at

Installation sites under large unconfined ceilings. For smaller compartments,

in which confining walls will cause a layer of fire products to accumulate

under the ceiling, hence submerging the ceiling-jet flow before the heat

detector can respond, different calculations are necessary. The problem of

analyzing the response of heat detectors or sprinklers in a two-layer

environment (warm fire products over cool air) has been studied [6], but no single code has been produced to facilitate analysis. This class of problem

will not be discussed in this report.

3
Analysis of smoke detector response is currently performed by

approximating the smoke detector as a low-temperature zero-lag-time heat

detector. Selection of the response temperature corresponding to a given

detector sensitivity also depends on the relative proportion of "smoke" and

energy released by the burning fuel. Test data of gas temperature rise at the

time of smoke detector alarm is presented in this report. An alternative

approximate method is given to determine this same temperature rise by using

fuel smoke and energy release rate measurements obtained in a laboratory scale

apparatus developed by Tewarson [7].

2. DETECTOR RESPONSE TO t 2 - FIRES

Appendix C of the NFPA 72E standard [5], "Guide for Automatic Fire

Detector Spacing," contains methods to determine the required heat detector

spacing that will provide alarms to growing fires before the fire has grown to

a user specified energy release rate. Tables provide information to evaluate

different fire growth rates, ceiling heights, ambient temperatures, detector

alarm conditions (fixed temperature or rate of rise), and detector thermal

time constant. The tables reflect the extensive experimental studies and

mathematical fire modeling performed by Heskestad and Delichatsios at Factory

Mutual Research Corporation [3, 4].

Beyler [8] uses a different correlation of Heskestad and Delichatsios*

data than was used to produce the tables in NFPA 72E Appendix C to obtain an analytical expression for the gas flow temperature and velocity produced under

ceilings that can be used to evaluate heat detector response. Beyler's solutions are limited to evaluation of fires that increase in energy release rate

4
proportionally with the square of time from ignition. This class of fire is

commonly referred to as a "t-squared-f ire® ,e Briefly, the problem of the heat

detector response is solved using analytic solutions for the time dependent

temperature of the detector sensing element up to the point when it is heated

to the specified alarm conditions® The model for the detector sensing element

temperature is based on a convective heat transfer process® Characterization

of the thermal response of heat detector and sprinkler thermal sensing

elements is discussed by Heskestad and Smith [9], and Evans [10]« The first

order differential equation that describes the rate of temperature increase of

the sensing element is [6]s

dT

s dtU

1/2

RTX

( 1 )

The notation for all equations is given in the notation section® The value of

RTI (Response Time Index), a measure of the thermal time constant of the

detector, is determined by testing [9]® Values of the time-dependent gas

temperature and velocity are obtained from the following correlations [8j.

it it if AT

2

0 for t 2 < (t

2 )f

AT* - {[t* - 0.954(1 + r/H)] / [0. 188 + 0.313 r/H]

}

4/3 for t* > (t*)

0.954 [1 + r/H]

0.59 [ r/H]

_0, 63

[AT*]

1/2

( 2 )

where

5
* 1/5

U

2 - 0/[A o H]

4T

2 - &T/[A2/5 (T/g) a

2/S

H

_3/5

]

e* - t/[A

-1/5

a

-1/5 H

4/5

]

A => g/(c T p ) p

as as

AT = T - T

a t /Q

The solutions to equation (1) for detector sensing element temperature, T

g , and rate of temperatue rise, dT

g

/dt, in response to the t^ - fire with growth

rate specified by the value of a are from Beyler [8] as follows:

AT

g - (AT/AT^) AT

2 [1 - (1 - e_Y)/Y]

dT

s dt

(4/3)(aT/aT2 )(aT2 ) 1/4

(t/t

2 )(0.188 + 0.313 r/H)

(1 - e"

Y

)

(3)

(4)

where

* 1/2 *

3 1/2 U AT

t Y - j — jjjj -* (0.188 + 0.313 r/H)

U, AT,

assuming that AT

g = 0 initially. T and U in equation 1 are obtained from the

* correlations in equation set (2) for AT2

and U

2 respectively. Equations 3 and

4 were programmed into a user interactive FORTRAN code called the DETACT-T2

6
Code. This code solves for the time required to reach a specified positive

value of AT or dT /dt representing detector alarm. Details of the DETAGT-T2

3 S

Code use, a worked example, and program listing are given in Appendix A.

Briefly for a fixed temperature detector, the user enters values for?

Ambient air temperature

Detector response temperature or rate of temperature rise

Detector RTI

Fuel to ceiling distance

Radial distance of detector from the fire plume axis

Fire growth rate constant a (for t^ fires)

Outputs of the code are the time to detector response and fire energy

release rate at that time.

In Appendix A, use of the DETACT-T2 Code to calculate the response time

of a fixed temperature detector is demonstrated in a worked example using the

following program inputs:

Ambient air temperature 21.1®C (70°F)

Detector response temperature 54.44°C (130°F)

Detector RTI

Fuel to celling distance 3.66 m (12 ft.)

Radial distance of detector from

axis of fire 2.16 m (7.07 ft.)

11.71 J/s 3 (0.0111 BTU/s 3 Fire growth rate constant )

7
The calculated response time using the DETACT-T2 Code is 298 seconds and

corresponding fire energy release rate is 1.04 MW (986 BTU/s). This same fire

and detector combination can be seen in the table C-3-2. 1.1(e) in Appendix C

of NFPA 72E [5], (in the table notation, threshold fire size 1000 BTU/s, fire

growth rate, medium; DET TC 300 A3, AT * 60°F, ceiling height « 12 Aft,

installed spacing in the body of the table 10ft). All values in table C-3-

2.1.2(e) [5] are for detector response times of 300 seconds. This is in

agreement with the 298 s calculated with the DETACT-T2 Code given in Appendix

A of this report.

Eleven other randomly selected combinations of fires and detectors were

calculated using the DETACT-T2 Code and results compared to table values in

Appendix C of NFPA 72E [5]. Of these cases the greatest deviation was 7.5%

and least was 0.17%.

Use of the DETACT-T2 Code has two main advantages over the tables in

Appendix C of NFPA 72E [5]. One is that the code is specifically designed to

evaluate existing facilities. The other is that any t - fire growth rate can

be analyzed. The tables in Appendix C of NFPA 72E [5] contain only three

different fires. At present, an NBS special publication is being prepared

containing tabular results with the same information as those in the NFPA 72E,

Appendix C [5], but recast into a form useful for evaluation of existing

facilities. This publication "Evaluating Thermal Fire Detection Systems," by

Stroup, Evans, and Martin should become available in 1986.

8
3. DETECTOR RESPONSE TO ARBITRARY FIRES

The DETACT-T2 Code is useful for evaluating the response of specified

detectors to t2 - fire grcwth rates® In some cases a fire of interest does

not follow an energy release rate that is proportional to the square of time

from ignition. For these cases use of the DETACT-T2 Code to evaluate the

responses of detector systems is inappropriate.

To evaluate detector response to an arbitrary energy release rate

history, an assumption of quasi-steady gas flow temperatures and velocities is

made. With this assumption, correlation for ceiling-jet temperatures and

velocities obtained from experiments using steady fire energy release rate

sources can be used to evaluate growing fires. The growing fire is represented in the calculation as a series of steady fires with energy release

rates changing in time to correspond to the fire of interest.

Correlations of ceiling-jet temperatures and velocities from experiments

using steady fire sources have been published by Alpert [1]. Recast into

metric form they are:

AT » 16.9 Q

2/ ?H

5/3 for r/H < 0.18

U = 0.95 (Q/H) 1/3 for r/H < 0.15 (5)

AT = 5. 38(Q/r ) 2/ ?H for r/H > 0.18

U = 0.2 Q

1/3

H

1/2

/r 5/6 for r /H > 0.15

9
I

where the metric units are T[°C], U[m/s], Q[kW], r[m], H[m].

| A computer code to perform the integration of equation 1, the

differential equation for detector sensor temperature, using the quasi-steady

fire driven flow approximation and Alpert's correlations from equations in 5,

is listed in Appendix B. This code, called the DETACT-QS Code, is written in

PC BASIC. The code requires user input similiar to the DETACT-T2 Code in

Appendix A, with the one exception that the fire energy release rate is specified as a series of time, energy release rate data pairs.

The same fire and detector case used as an example of execution for the

DETACT-T2 Code was evaluated using the DETACT-QS Code. The example inputs and

results are given in Appendix B. The fire was input as time, energy release

2

rate pairs at intervals of 5 seconds to match the t - fire with a = 11.7105

W/s . Other parameters were maintained the same. The resulting predicted

detection time using the DETACT-QS Code was 313 seconds with the corresponding

fire energy release rate at detection of 1147 kW. Remember that with the

DETACT-T2 Code the calculated time of detection was 298 seconds with fire

energy release rate at detection of 1040 kW. This example was chosen to

demonstrate specifically that there will be differences between the two

methods even in the evaluation of the same fire. The quasi-steady fire

analysis on which the DETACT-QS Code is based has the advantage that arbitrary

fire energy release rates can be input as a data set.

10
4. SMOKE DETECTOR RESPONSE

Both of the heat detector response models discussed are based on predictions of the temperature and velocity of the fire driven gas flow under

the ceiling and models of the heat detector response. The same calculations

could be used to predict smoke detector response given a relationship between

smoke concentration and temperature rise in the fire driven gas flow and the

response characteristics of the smoke detector.

The response characteristics of smoke detectors are not as well

understood as thermal detectors. Smoke detector alarm conditions depend on

more than smoke concentration. Smoke particle sizes and optical or particle

scattering properties can affect the value of smoke concentration necessary to

reach alarm conditions. For thermal detectors* measured values of RTX

characterize the lag time between gas temperature and sensing element temperature. For smoke detectors there is no analogous method to characterize the

lag time between gas flow smoke concentration and the smoke concentration

within the sensing chamber. In the absence of understanding of the many

processes affecting smoke detector response, a smoke detector will be considered to

be a low temperature heat detector with no thermal lag, i.e. RTI = 0. The

analogy between smoke obscuration in the gas flow and temperature rise will be

developed in order to determine the corresponding temperature rise to use as a model for a smoke detector known to alarm at a given smoke obscuration.

Similarity between temperature rise and smoke concentration will be

maintained everywhere within a fire-driven flow if the energy and smoke

continuity equations are similar. For the case of constant c , k, and D these

equations are:

11
pc

dAT _ , dt

* V AT ( 6 )

P P D

2

7

» t t m ( 7 )

If the Lewis number k/pc^D * 1, then the ratio of temperature rise to

smoke concentration can remain constant throughout the fire driven flow, if

.» »

» .

1 »

the ratio Q /c m

g is maintained constant in all regions where energy is

exchanged with the flow. Reactions in the flame over the burning fuel will

determine the ratio of temperature rise to smoke concentration throughout the

flow. Other energy exchanges in normal fire flows, convection to cool room

boundaries, and radiation from smokey gases decrease the ratio of temperature

rise to smoke concentration because energy is extracted from the flow without

a proportional decrease in smoke concentration. Mixing of hot combustion

products with cool smokey gases that may accumulate in an enclosure also

decrease the ratio of temperature rise to smoke concentration because smoke

mass is added to the flow without a proportional increase in energy. For fire

driven flows in which the effects that alter the ratio of temperature rise to

smoke concentration are not significant, the response of smoke detectors may

be calculated as if it were a fixed temperature heat detector. The temperature rise necessary for alarm of this substitute heat detector is calculated

from the product of smoke concentration needed to alarm the smoke detector and

the ratio of temperature rise to smoke concentration produced by the burning

material.

Generally the sensitivity of smoke alarms are given in terms of the

amount of obscuration by the smokey flow that is necessary to produce an alarm

and not directly in smoke concentration. The more sensitive the smoke

detector the smaller the amount of obscuration needed to alarm.

12
The obscuring ability of a smoke laden gas flow is measured by the

attenuation of a light beam. The measure of the attenuation is the optical

density per unit beam length* OD, [3]

OD * (Xeg

10 “f)/L (8)

By testing, Seader and Einhom [11] found that the attenuating abilities of

smokes produced from many different materials undergoing flaming combustion

were similar. For flaming combustion they found that the optical density per

unit length was proportional to the mass concentration of "'smoke'

0 in a gas

flow as:

OD = 3330 C

g (9)

where OD is optical density per meter and C

g is smoke mass concentration in

kilograms per cubic meter.

The ratio of temperature rise in a fire driven flow to smoke

concentration may be recast in terms of optical density using equation 9 as:

AT = pAT 3330pAT (10)

Y C OD

s s

Under the assumption discussed at the beginning of this section, this

m

t t t 1 1 t ratio will be equal to the ratio Q /c^m^ * Xhe last ratio may be approxi~

mated by a volume average over the combustion region so that

3330 o aT

OD

c m

P s

13
OD

AT

3330pc m

E_i

•Q

(U)

As an example, literature values for oak wood may be used to obtain a representative value* For oak

Q

= 7600 kJ/kg fuel consumed per unit time [12]

m = 0.017 kg smoke/kg fuel consumed per unit time [12]

sair Cp 3 1 kJ/kg °C

air p * 1.165 kg/m^ at 30°C

From equation (11) = 8.68 x 10 ^ (m°C) *• A i

Heskestad and Delichatsios [3] have reported representative optical

density per meter for smoke detector alarm and corresponding temperature rse in the gas flow. For wood crib (unknown type) fires, the ratio of these

-3

values was 0D/aT 3 1.2 x 10 [l/m°C]. This is the same order of magnitua as

the number calculated in the analysis given above and may be representatie of

the expected accuracy given no knowledge of wood type. Heskestad and

Delichatsios [3] report that an ionization detector will alarm in response to

a wood fire at 0D = 0.016 1/m.

Using the OD/aT value for wood of 1.2 x 10”^(m°C)"^ the corresponding

change in gas temperature would be 13°C, (0.016/1.2 x 10“^). For the purpose

of response time calculation using the heat detector models, this ionization

smoke detector would be represented as a low temperature heat detector

alarming at 13°C above ambient for a wood fire.

14
Other measurements of the ratio OD/aT are obtained for burning materials

in a laboratory scale apparatus developed by Tewarson [7j. Values for a large

number of plastics and wood under many environmental conditions are given by

Tewarson [12]°

5* SUMMARY

Two methods have been presented to calculate the response of heat

detectors installed under large unobstructed ceilings in response to growing

fires. Smoke detector response is calculated using the same thermal calculations by approximating the smoke detector as a low temperature, zero lag time

thermal detector.

6. ACKNOWLEDGMENT

The authors are grateful to Mr. Doug Walton for coding DETACT-QS version

1.1 for exection in PC BASIC.

7. REFERENCES

1. Alpert, R. L. , Calculation of response time of ceiling-mounted fire

detectors. Fire Technology , 8, 1972, p 181.

2. Alpert, R.L. , TUrbulent ceiling-jet induced by large-scale fires,

Combustion Science and Technology , 11, 1975, p 197.

3. Heskestad, G. and Delichatsios , M. A. , Environments of fire detectors

phase 1; Effects of fire size, ceiling height and material. Volume II - Analysis. Technical Report Serial No. 22427, RC 77-T-ll, Factory Mutual

Research Corporation, Norwood Massachusetts 02062, 1977.

4. Heskestad, 6, and Delichatsios, M.A. , The initial convective flow in

fire, Seventeenth Symposium (International) on Combustion , The Combustion

Institute, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, 1978, pp 1113-1123.

15
5. Standard on Automatic Fire Detectors, NFPA 72E-1984, Appendix C, National

Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA, 02269.

6. Evans, D. D. , Calculating Sprinkler Actuation Time in Compartment, to be

published in Fire Safety Journal, 1985.

7. Tewarson, A., and Pion, R. , "A Laboratory-Scale Test Method for the

Measurement of Flammability Parameters, FMRC serial No® 22524, Factory

Mutual Research Corporation, Norwood, Mass. 02062, Oct 1977.

8. Beyler, C.L. , A design method for flaming fire detection, Fire Technology,

20, 4, 1984, p 5.

9. Heskestad, G. , Smith, H. , Investigation of a New Sprinkler Sensitivity

Approval Test: The Plunge Test FMRC Technical Report 22485, Factory

Mutual Research Corporation, Norwood, Mass. 02062, 1976.

10. Evans, D. D. , Madrzykowski, D. , Characterizing the Thermal Response of

Fusible-Link Sprinklers, NBSIR 81-2329, U. S. Department of Commerce,

National Bureau of Standards, Washington, D. C. 20234, (1981).

11. Seader, J. and Einhorn, I., "Some Physical, Chemical, Toxicological, and

Physiological Aspects of Fire Smokes", Sixteenth Symposium

(International) on Combustion , The Combustion Institute, Pittsburgh,

Penn. 1976, pp 1423-1445.

12. Tewarson, A. , Physico-Chemical and Combustion/Pyrolysis Properties ol

Polymeric Materials. FMRC J. I. OEONG. RC, Factory Mutual Research

Corporation, Norwood, Mass 02062, Nov. 1980, p 27.

16
8. NOTATION

g/(Cp ^ae Poe ^ specific heat capacity of ambient air

smoke mass concentration

effective Binary diffusion coefficient

acceleration of gravity

vertical distance from fuel to ceiling

light intensity

initial Light intensity

light beam length

smoke gas mass production rate per unit volume

optical density per unit length (see eq e 8)

fire energy release rate

energy release rate per unit volume

radial distance from fire axis to the detector

response time index, the product of the detector thermal time

constant and the square root of the gas speed used in the test

to measure the time constant [9].

time

dimensionless time t/[A

dimensionless time for time delay for gas front travel.

ambient temperature

gas temperature at detector location

temperature of detector sensing elements

T - T

a© dimensionless temperature difference AT/[A^^(T /g) a gas speed at the detector location

dimensionless gas speed U/[A a H]*'^
local ratio of smoke mass to total mass In flow

proportionality constant for t^- fire growth * Q/t

ambient air density
APPENDIX A « DETACT-T 2 CODE

FORTRAN Program to Calculate

2 Detector Response to t - Fires

1) Example Calculation

2) Program Listing

19
APPENDIX A. DETACT-T2 CODE

A FORTRAN Program to Calculate Detector Response to - Fires

y

This appendix describes the theory and use of a computer program which

determines the response of fixed temperature and rate of rise heat detectors

2

to fires with energy release rates described by the expression Q * at . The

program is designed for use in evaluating detectors installed at known

spacings.

The activation time of a given detector is a function of fire growth

rate, ceiling height, detector spacing, detector activation temperature,

ambient temperature, and detector response time index (RTI). The program

prompts the user to provide this information. These input data are converted

to a dimensionless form for use in the calculations. Equations for the

activation time of a fixed temperature detector and a rate of rise detector

are set up. The two equations are then solved using a Newton-Raphson

technique. Once the activation times are known, the fire energy release rates

at those times are calculated. Finally, the results for each detector type

are printed as well as some appropriate input data.

In the following example, input prompts from the computer program are

printed in all capital letters while user responses are printed in lower case

(where possible) and proceeded by the character ">".

20
EXAMPLE

Calculate the activation times for fixed temperature and rate ©f rise

heat detectors installed,, using a 3.05 meter spaeingj, in an area with a ceiling height of 3o66 meters® The detectors have an RTI of 370® 3 (ar=

sec )!/ 2

. The detector activation temperature is 54.4 e C s and the activation

rate of rise is 8. 33 Q C/min. Ambient temperature is 21 °C.

ENTER 1 FOR ENGLISH UNIT INPUT

2 FOR METRIC UNIT INPUT

>2

ENTER THE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IN DEGREES C.

>21

ENTER THE DETECTOR RESPONSE TIME INDEX (RTI) IN (M~SEG)**l/2.

>370*3

ENTER THE DETECTOR ACTIVATION TEMPERATURE IN DEGREES C.

>54*4

ENTER A DETECTOR RATE OF RISE IN DEGREES C/MIN.

>8.33

ENTER THE CEILING HEIGHT IN METERS®

>3.66

ENTER THE DETECTOR SPACING IN METERS.

>3.05

ENTERS S FOR SLOW FIRE GROWTH RATE

M FOR MEDIUM FIRE GROWTH RATE

F FOR FAST FIRE GROWTH RATE OR

0 FOR OTHER

9 1
RESULTS

CEILING HEIGHT = 3.66 METERS ( 12.0 FEET)

DETECTOR SPACING » 3.05 METERS ( 10.0 FEET)

DETECTOR RTI =* 370.3 (M-SEC)**l/2 ( 670.8 (FT-SEC)**l/2)

FIRE GROWTH CONSTANT » .1171+002 WATTS/SEC**2)

(.1111-001 BTU/SEC**3

)

FOR TEMPERATURE ACTUATED DETECTOR:

ACTIVATION TEMPERATURE - 54.4 DEGREES C (129.9 DEGREES F)

TIME OF ACTIVATION => 297.88 SECS

HEAT RELEASE RATE =» .1038+007 WATTS (.9840+003 BTU/SEC)

FOR RATE OF RISE ACTUATED DETECTOR:

ACTIVATION RATE OF RISE » 8.33 DEGREES C/MIN

(14.99 DEGREES F/MIN)

TIME OF ACTIVATION = 182.75 SECS

HEAT RELEASE RATE = .3908+006 WATTS (.3704+003 BTU/SEC)

22
The results show that the heat detector would activate approximately 298

seconds after the fire reaches a flaming state* The heat release rate at this

time would be 1038 kilowatts. A rate of rise detector would activate at about

183 seconds with a corresponding heat release rate of 391 kilowatts c

If English units had been selected, the input requests would have called

for data in English units instead of metric units.

The program is written in ANSI 77 FORTRAN. A PC BASIC version is being

coded. Each is in a form which makes it easy to incorporate into existing

computer fire models as a subroutine.

23
PROGRAM DE7ACT-72 ******

PROGRAM DEI ACT

C

ccc DE1ACT-72 CODE

*

CC A FORTRAN PROGRAM FOR CALCULATING DETECTOR RESPONSE

C TO TIME SQUARED FIRES.

C(I******************** ************ ********

C ************ ******* c****************   ** ********** *** *** * *** *******

CC THIS IS A PROGRAM FOR CALCULATING ACTIVATION 7I*»E AND HEAT

C RELEASE RATE FOR A GIVEN DfcTECTCR. THE PROGRA* CALCULATES RESULTS

C FOR BOTH TEMPERATURE AND RATE OF RISE ACTUATED DETECTORS. T «E

C PRCGRAM RE G I U RE S DATA DESCRIBING THE DETECTOR. ROOM. AND FIPe

C CH AR ACT ER 1ST ICS • C

C P R 06 R AM WRITTEN BY D. Vi. STROUP 1/4/85

C FINAL REVISION 1/9/85

CC****************** ********* *******************************************

CC=--=> VERSION 1 .0 <=====================================

C

C INFUT:

C J - UNITS CODE II OR 2>

C 1 - INFUT DATA IN ENGLISH UNITS

C 2 - INPUT DATA IN METRIC UMTS

C 7AMB - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

C » 1 I - DETECTOR RFSPONSE TIME INDEX

C TACT - DETECTOR ACTIVATION TEMPERATURE

C RCR - DETECTOR ACTIVATION RATE OF RISE

C H F - C EILIN G HE IGHT

C 2 F - DET E CT CR S P AC IN6

C

** - GROWTH FACTOR CODE. CHARACTe* VARIABLE (S. M, f. OR Q)

C ALPHA - FIRE GROWTH RATE FACTOR

C IF M = 0. ALPHA SHOULD CONTAIN THe GROWTH FACTORR TO EE USED.

C IF M <> 0, ALPHA MAY BE SET TO ZERO.

Cc**************** **************** ******************************* * ******

c character m DATA IRT1 Y, IWTT Y/5 ,6/

DATA GE.CPE , R HO E / 3 2 . 2 t C. 2 4 , C . 07 35 / DATA GM,CPM,RN0N/9.8 f 1 .CC35, 1.1768/

I E RR=C

C

C CUlPuT:

C T C QD

C T R

C Q D R

C I ERR

C

C

time OF ACTIVATION FOR A TEMPERATURE DETECTOR

HEAT RELEASE RATE AT TIME OF ACTIVATION. T TIME OF ACTIVATION FOR R A 1 E OF RISF DETECTOR

HEAT RFLEASE RATE AT TIME OF ACTIVATION, TR

ERROR CODE (0 OR 1)

0 - SU CCFS S FUL

1 - UN SU CC ESS FUL

9 A
****** PROGRAM DE7AC7-T? ******

WRITE (IWT1 Y , IQ ) 1C FORMAT C' ENTER: t FOR ENGLISH UNIT INFUT'/ 19 , FOR METRIC UNIT I 8NPUT')

READ CIRTTY ,*) J If (J«EQ«D THEN

WRITE <XW77Y,20>

2Q FORMAT (' ENTER THE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IN DEGREiS F e ')

READ CIRTTY f O IAMB

WRITE CXW11Y V 30)

30 FORMAT C' ENTER THE DETECTOR RESPONSE TIME INDEX <RTI) IN CPI-SEC)

***1/2®')

READ « IRTTY ,*) R 1 I IF CRT I.LT. C.OOOOOT) Rll^CeOOCOOl

RTX R-RTI

WRITE (IWT7Y,4G>

40 FORMAT C' ENTER THE DETECTOR ACTIVATION TEMPERATURE IN DEGREES P . '

P )READ { IRTTY ,*> T ACT

WRITE CIWTT Y , 5 0 ) 50 FORMAT f' ENTER A DETECTOR RATE OP RISE IN DEGREES P/MIN.')

READ CIRTTY ,*) ROR

WRITE <Ite77Y f 6Q)

60 FORMAT (' ENTER THE CEILING HEIGHT IN F EE 7 e ')

READ (IRTTY ,*> HP

WRITE CIWTT Y, 70 ) 70 FORMAT ( ' ENTER THE DETECTOR SPACING IN FEET®')

READ CIRTTY,*) Zf

WRITE CIWTT Y , 80 ) 80 FORMAT f ' EMERs S FOR SLOW FIRE GROWTH RATI'/ , 8 ' M FOR MEDIUM FIRE GROWTH RATE '/

K ' F FOR FAST FIRE GROWTH RATE OR'/

K

' 0 FOR OTHER ')

READ ( IRTTY ,410 ) M

IF CCM.EG.'s').OR.CM*EQ.'S')) Al PH A -G . 0 C 2 ? ? ??g

IF «(M.EQ.'*'>.0R.<M.EG«'M')) ALPH AsQ.q 11-f 1 11

IF CCM.gG.'f ').OR.(M.EQ.'F ')) ALPH A -Q .Q 444445

IF (M.NE.'G') GO TC TOO

WRITE ClwTT Y , 9Q ) 90 FORMAT (' ENTER THE FIRE GROWTH RATE CONSTANT (ALPHA) IN PTU/SEc/S

E EC/SEC

)

READ (IRTTY ,*> ALP PA

TOO CONTINUE

ELSE

WRITE (IWTT Y, 11 C)

110 FORMAT (' ENTER THE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IN DEGREES C« ')

READ CIRTTY ,*) T AM E WRITE (IWTTY,12C)

1 2 Q FORMAT C' ENTER THE DETECTOR RESPONSE TIME INDEX (RTI) IN (M-SEC)*

8

* 1 / 2 .')

READ (IRTTY ,*) RTI

If CRT 1. LI. C. 000001 ) R1I=0«000001

RTI R = R T I WRITE ( I W 7 7 Y , 1 3 0 ) 1 3 C FORMAT (' ENTER THE DETECTOR ACTIVATION TEMPERATURE IN DEGREES C.'

8 )READ ( IRTTY ,*) T ACT

WRITE (IWTT Y, 14 0)

140 FORMAT (' ENTpR A DETECTOR RATE OF RISE IN DEGRFES C/"IN.')
****** pRo6RAp DETACT-7 ?. ******

READ (IR 7 7Y f *> R OR

WRITE (IW11 Y

f 15 C)

1 5 Q FORMAT (' ENT FR THE CEILING HEI6HT IN METERS.')

READ CIRTTY f * ) H

F

WRITE (IWT7Y,16Q)

160 FORMAT C' ENTER THE DETECTOR SPACING IN METERS.')

READ (IRTTY ,*> ZF

WRITE (IWTT Y * SO ) READ ( IRTTY ,410 ) M

IF CCM.EC.'s').OH.(M.EQ.'S')) ALPHA=2.93C555556

IF ( (M.EG •'»')• OR.(M.EG.'tf')) ALPHA = 11 .7222 222 2

IF C(W.EG.'I').OR.CM.EQ.'F')) ALPHA = 46 . 88*8889

If (M.NE .'O') GO T C 180

WRITE Cl y TT Y » 17 C

)

1 70 FORMAT (' E NT fR THE FIRE GROWTH RATE CONSTANT (ALPHA) IN WATT/SEc'

2 S EC .')

READ ( IRTTY ,*> ALP HA

1 8 Q CONTINUE

END IF

C

C ************************ CALCULATIONS *****************************

C

R = G«5*SQRT C 2.)* Z F RGH=R/ HF

RCR = RO R/60

IF CJ.EQ.1) THEN

T AMB=TAMb+4 60 . TACT=TACT*46G.

A=GE/ (CPE*T AMP* RHOE>

G = 6 E ELSE

T ANG = 1 AMb + 2 73 . T AC 7 = TAC T+2 73 . A=G*/ CCPKM AMP* RHOMMQGO.)

G =G M

ENO IF

lCTS2=A**C-1./5.)*ALPHA**C~1./5.)*HF**(4./5.>

DLTC0L=A**C2./5.)MTAMB/G)*ALPHA**(2./5.)*HF**(-3./5.)

UOUS2=A**(1./5.)*ALFHA**(1./5.)*HF**(1./5.)

DE LTD = TA CT- T A MB

IF (kOH.GT, 0.3) THEN

UOD LT H=0 • 59 *R OH **C -0.6 3)

ELSE

UCDL7H = 3.87 /(9. 115 **Q.5>

END I F T S2F = 0.9 54* Cl .4 ROH)

A2=<4./3.)*OL70PL*UOUS2**(-0.5)*UODLTH**(-0.5)*RTI/

2 CT CTS2*C0.188*CW?13*RQH))

C = 1 .0*0 E LTD /A 2 CALL NW7N C C , Y , I EP R , I V T 7 Y > IF <IE RR .EQ .1 > GO TO 330

DELTS2=C4./ 3. )* UOUS?** (-Q. 5 >*UODLTH ** C-r. S)*R7 I* Y/

F < T OT S ?* ( 0. 1 88 *0 . 3 1 3* ROH ) ) TS^ = 0.954*( 1.+R0H) *<Q.186*0.3l3*R0H)*DEtTS2**C3./ 4.)

TS2 = TS2-HS2 f T=TS2*A**<-1./5.)*ALPHA**(-1./5.)*HF**C4./5.)

G D = A L P HA * 1 * *2

IF ( RT IR .L£ .2 .0 ) R T IR = 2. U
****** PROGRAM DETACT-’TZ ****** 0l*CA./3.)*ELT0 0L/O01S2*(0.18b+C.31i*RCH))

D 2 = ( 3./ 4 . )* UGUS 2**C.5*UODITH**0.5«(1./R1XP)M01S2

* * CO. 18 8 + C. 313 * ROH)

CALL BIStCT ( 01 v 02 v ROR V DELT S2 yl ERR tTWTl V)

If CIERR.EG .1) CO 10 3 30

TS2R- 0.954* fl e *RGH>*(0 .188 *P«313*P OH >*DEL7S2**(3 e /4e)

1 S^P-T S?R*T S £ F 1 R = 1 S2R*A** (~1 e / 5* )* ALPHAS* l-U5.)*Hf*«(4./5.)

QD R~ A LPHA *1 p**2

c

C ****** PRIN1 OU 1 RESULTS * ** * *********** * ** * * ********************** **

c ROR=ROR* tO.

WRITE (IWTlY f 1vn>

19Q FORMAT ('1 ft ES U LI S :')

200

4 1 C

220

IF (J.EQ.D 1 HE *

H F 2 = H F *0 • 30 48

ZF 4 =ZF * 0. 7 0 4 2 UR HE CIW11 Y t ?0 0) HF, H F2 f 2 f ,2f 2

f OH*' M C'C CEILING HEIGHT ” *

l T t f "D FT E CTQR SPACING = * NTIp-RTX* CO .304A**C e 5)

WRITE ClwnY f 21C) RTIfftTII

FORMAT C * G OrlECTQR RTI “ %F6®

? FC>**1/?>0

ALFHA2 = A lPH a *10 r

5 . WRITE (IWTT Y t 22 C) ALPHA 9 ALPHA2

FORMAT f'O FIRE GROWTH CONSTANT

f 4>

F6.2 9 ' FEET (

v f 6 . 2

* * * E T£ R $

> *

/

F6 e 2 FEET C' t F6e2* rf *£7ESS)')

< M-SEC > *«1 / 2 < % *6* 1

- '

» FI? e 4 f * PTU / CSE C**3 ) *!

C^t.Fl2.4 t " WA7TS/$Ef«*? K)

WRITE < X W 7 7 Y » 40 0 > READ (IP. TTY ,4 10) 19 WRITE CIWT7 Y

f 23 05

23 C FORMAT i/'O FOP TEMPERATURE ACTUATED DETECTORS'*’)

T A C T = T A C T - 4 6 u • TAC 72- C5 • /9 e ) *( 7 ACT -3? «)

WRITE CIwTt Y f 24C) 7 ACT t T A C 7 5 240 FORMAT C'0 ACTIVATION TEMPERATURE “ '

f f6.7 t ' DEGREES F (%F6.1*

£ " DE GRE E S C) "5

WRITE (IwTTY f 25D T 250 FORMAT C'O T I P E TO ACTIVATION - %FEc2,' SECONDS')

9 D E s U D *1 ‘v,. 5

* WRITE CIWTTY,26C) Q D « Q 02

260 FORMAT C'C HEAT RELEASE RATE = ',fc12.4 f * BTU/SFC"/

2 (' ,E1 2.4,' WAITS) ')

WRITE (l«11Y f 40D

READ ClPTTy f 4lO ) P

WRITE ( IWTT Y f ?7 0)

27 0 FORMAT C / / ^ 0 FOR RATE OF RISE ACTUATFD DETECTORS')

PCK 2 -ROP* ( 5 ./ 9 . ) WRITE <IWTTY,?9C> RCR.R0R2

49 0 FORMAT f'C ACTIVATION PATE OF RISE = * f F 6 . ? f " DEGREES F/ M IN (',

y F 6 . 2 , ' DEGREES C/*IN)')

WRITE C U T T Y , r 5 n ) TP

GDR2 = QDP* 1u c 5 . WRITE (IWTT Y , 2 6 0 ) GDR f 0DR2

WRITE CIwTT Y f 4CC)

READ (IPT 7 Y, 41 C) * EL S E

27
****** PROGRAM DETACl-lT ******

HF t =HF*(1./C.3C48)

ZF L = ZF * ( 1 ./ n.70 AS)

WRIU (IW11 Y f TCO) H F, H F2 ,7 f ,zr 2

500 FORMAT C"C CEILING HEIGHT = ",F6.2," MEIERS (",F6.?," * E E T ) " / £ T 6 , 'DETECTOR SPACING = ",F6.2," METERS C",F6.2," EE E 1 > RTir = RTI*(( 7c/G .304*)**n.5)

WRITE (IWTTY,3ZC) RT I , RT 12

3 2 G FORMAT <"C OfTFCTOR RT1 s ",F6.1*' < P-SE C ) * * 1 /

2

(FT-$

kEC)**1/2)">

AL PHA2 = A LPH A *> U ./1q55.)

WRITE CIWTT Y , 72 0} ALP H A, ALPH A2

3 3 C FORMAT ("0 FIKf GROWTH CONSTANT = ",F12.4," WAT T S / ( S E

C

* * 2

) *

/

£ " (",E12.4," B1U/SEC**3) " ) WRITE < I* TTY ,400)

READ ( IR T TY f 4 1C ) M

WRITE (IWTT Y

f 730)

TAC7=T ACT-273.

T A C T 2= (9 ./5 .)*7 ACT -* 3 2 . WRITE ( I W T T Y 9 74 0 ) TACT, TACT?

34 C FORMAT ('Q ACTIVATION TEMPERATURE = DEGREES C (",F6.1f

* " 0EGRE6S F) ")

WRITE CIWTT Y, 350) T 350 FORMAT ("0 TIME TO ACTIVATION = *,Fis.2»" SECONDS")

uD 2 = QD *M ./ 1055 .)

WRITE CIWTT Y , 36 0) QD,OD?

36 0 F 0 R V A 7 ("0 HEAT PELEASE RATE = ",El 2.4,' WATTS"/

C" ,E12.<«," BTU/SEO")

WRITE ( IWTT Y, 400)

READ (IRTTy»410) * WRITE ( I w T 1 Y , 27 C)

R0R2 = R0R * (9 ./ 5.

)

WRITE ClwTTY, 37 0) RCR,ROR2

37 0 FORMAT C"C AC1IVATION RATE OF RISE - ',F6.2," DEGREES C/*IN C",

F 6.2," DEGRE ES F /KI N )"

)

WRITE ( I W T T Y , 3 5 P ) 7R

CDf<; = QDP* (1 . / 10 55 .)

WRITE CIwTT Y, ^6 n) GPH,GDK2

WP lit (IWTT Y, 40 0)

READ ( IR 1 TY ,4 TO ) * END IF

STOP "FRGGRAK completed"

380 CONTINUE

WRITE (IWTTY, 7 90)

39 Q FORMAT (" ******** ERROR IN DF7AC7 ROUTINE <*******')

400 FORMAT Kir <RETURN> TC CONTINUE")

4 1 G FORMAT C A 1

STOP "PROGRAM ABORT FD"

END

28
****** SUBROUTINE NW1N

SUBROUTINE NW'TN C C , P , X ER R f I V T T Y > C£********* + ******************* * *.* + *.**(•**,*<:*£<* i- it £<-* t*<t*t*

c

c NEfelCN-RAPHSON SUgRGUTjNI

C

c this subroutine is uses to evaluate the time expression for the

C FIXED T E MP E R A 1U RE DETECTOR*,

C

c POO«1

TCL=G. COOOI

NC = 1G0C

1 = 1 I E R R = 0

10 CONTINUE

IF (I.LE.NQ) THEN

IF (POeGT .5 r ) THEN

x=C .0

ELSE

x=exp c-pg>

END If

F X~ PG* X “C

F P*X = 1 .C-X

IF (FP^X.LT •G.GCGOCCGl) 00 TO 3C

F = P

r » ( f X J IPWX)

IF UBSfP-PO) -LT .TCI) THEN

IE R R = 0

RETURN

ELSE

1 = 1 + 1 PC = P END IF

GO TO 10

END IF

IE k P= 1 WRITE (IttTTYfPO) I 20 FORMAT (' NFWTON-R APHSON FAILED AFTER NO ITERATIONS? NC = ' ?I 4 ) RETURN

30 WRITE (IwTT v

f 4C ) 40 FORMAT (' SLOPE OF EQUATION TOO CLOSE TC ZERO FOR '/

n ' NEWT ON-R APHSON METHOD.'/

P

' EkROP RETURN')

I FRR=1

RETURN

END

29
o

<"»

r>

subroutine BISECT *

SUbROUTINE RISE C T C P 1 f D? f RO R , P , I E R R , I W 1 T Y

C B I SECTION SUBROUT IN

C

c this Subroutine evaluates the tine expression for the rate of

c rise detector using a bisection method.

c

£ 44444444 ** 444*44 44 * 4

** 4444 4**44 44444 * 4 * 4*444444444444444444444 4 * 444 * c

I ERR=C

TOL=0. COCCI

NC=TOOC

A =0 .0

U = 1 CGC .0

RLMT = TCL/20 .Q

TO CONTINUE

If ( (D 2+b ). CT .5 0.) T HEN

x=G .0

ELSE

X=EXP(-D c*B > END If

FXh=Dl*P **C .2 5- 01* E**0.?5* X-ROR

If (FXB.LT. f.O) 1HEN

A =6

b=b+500.

GO TO IQ

END IF

1 = 1 2G CONTINUE

IF <1 .LE .NO > THFN

F = A + (8-A )/2 .Q

If ( <D2*P). GT .50.) THEN

X = u .0

El S E X =E X P C-D t *P ) END I F FX = C>1*P**C. Z5-D 1*P*+G.25*X-ROP

IF ( ( < f X .GT ,-RLMT ) . AND .( FX.LT . RLM T )).0R.(<(R-A)/2.).LT.T0D) T H

C N

IE R*>=0

RETURN

ELSE

1 = 1+1

If ( (D 2*A ) . ri .5 C .) THEN

x = G .0

ELSE

X ~ £ X P (-0 i * A ) E ND If

Fxa = D1*A**C .2 5-01+ A**0.?5*X-rOr

IF (CFXA * FX ). GT .G.C) 1 Hf N

A=P

E LSE

fj = P end If

END I F G C TO 2 0
****** subroutine bisect ******

END IF

IF RR = 1 WRITE IXWTTY.3G) I 3C FORMAT C" BISECT ROUTINE FAILED AFTER NC ITERATIONS* NO ~ %X4>

RETURN

END

31
APPENDIX B - DETACT-QS CODE

PC BASIC Program to Calculate

Detector Response to Fire with Arbitrary

Energy Release Rate Histories

1) Example Calculation

2) Program Listing

32
DETACT-QS Code Sample Calculation

DETACT-QS VERSION 1.1 WRITTEN BY D.D. EVANS 1985

CONTRIBUTION OF THE NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS (U„S e )c

NOT SUBJECT TO COPYRIGHT

QUASI -STEADY FIRE CALCULATION OF DETECTOR ACTUATION TIME

BELOW AN UNCONFINED CEILING BASED ON ALPERT'S EQUATIONS

AS PUBLISHED IN FIRE TECHNOLOGY AUGUST 1972.

USER SUPPLIED INPUT

HEIGHT OF CEILING ABOVE FUEL (METERS) ? 3*6576

DISTANCE OF DETECTOR FROM AXIS OF FIRE (METERS) ? 2*155

INITIAL ROOM TEMPERATURE (CELSIUS) ? 21*111

DETECTOR ACTUATION TEMPERATURE (CELSIUS)

(140 F - 60 C 160 F 8 71 C 165 F * 74 C) ? 54*444

DETECTOR RESPONSE TIME INDEX ( RTI ) (m*s)~(l/2) ? 370*34

NEXT A DESCRIPTION OF THE FIRE HEAT RELEASE RATE AS A

AS A FUNCTION OF TIME MUST BE CONSTRUCTED * THIS WILL BE

DONE BY THE USER ENTERING KEY HEAT RELEASE RATES ALONG

THE DESIRED FIRE CURVE . FOR THE USERS INFORMATION THE

MINIMUM HEAT RELEASE RATE NECESSARY TO ACTUATE THE

DETECTOR AT THE LOCATION GIVEN IS 232 kW D

ENTER KEY HEAT RELEASE RATES THAT DETERMINE THE SHAPE OF THE

DESIRED FIRE DEVELOPMENT CURVE . USUALLY THE FIRST DATA

PAIR WILL BE < TIME 0 HEAT RELEASE 0 ) . UP TO 100

PAIRS CAN BE ENTERED. TO STOP ENTERING DATA ENTER ANY

NEGATIVE TIME VALUE. THE PROGRAM WILL GENERATE HEAT

RELEASE RATE VALUES BETWEEN THE VALUES ENTERED AS NEEDED

BASED ON A STRAIGHT LINE INTERPOLATION BETWEEN POINTS AT

ONE SECOND INTERVALS

TIME (SEC) ? 0

HEAT RELEASE (kW) ? 0

TIME (SEC) 7 5

HEAT RELEASE (kW) ? 0.2928

33
3 . . TIME (SEC) ? 10

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 1.1711

4 . . TIME (SEC) ? 15

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 2.635

5 . . TIME (SEC) ? 20

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 4.684

6 . . TIME (SEC) ? 25

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 7.319

7 . . TIME (SEC) ? 30

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 10.539

8 . . TIME (SEC) ? 35

HEAT RELEASE (kW>? 14.345

9 . . TIME (SEC) ? 40

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 18.737

o • 9

sH TIME! (SEC) ? 45

HEAT RELEASE (kW) ? 23.71

11 . . TIME: (SEC) ? 50

HEAT RELEASE (kW) ? 29.28

12 . . TIME: (SEC) ? 55

HEAT RELEASE (kW) ? 35.42

13 . . TIME: (SEC) ? 60

HEAT RELEASE (kW) ? 42.16

34
14 .

15 6

IS „

17 .

IS c

19 .

20 .

21 .

22 .

23 .

24 .

TIME (SEC) ? 65

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 49.48

TIME (SEC) ? 70

HEAT RELEASE (kW>? 57.38

TIME (SEC) ? 75

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 65.87

TIME (SEC) ? 80

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 74.95

TIME (SEC) ? 85

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 84.61

TIME (SEC) ? 90

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 94.86

TIME (SEC) ? 95

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 105.69

TIME (SEC) ? 100

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 117.11

TIME (SEC) ? 105

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 129.11

TIME (SEC) ? 110

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 141.70

TIME (SEC) ? 115

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 154.87

35
25 .

26 .

27 .

28 .

29 .

30 .

31 .

32 .

33 .

34 .

35 .

TIME (SEC) ? 120

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 168.63

TIME (SEC) ? 125

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 182.98

TIME (SEC) ? 130

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 197.91

TIME (SEC) ? 135

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 213.4

TIME (SEC) ? 140

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 229.5

TIME (SEC) ? 145

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 246.2

TIME (SEC) ? 150

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 263.5

TIME (SEC) ? 155

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 281.3

TIME (SEC) ? 160

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 299.8

TIME (SEC) ? 165

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 318.8

TIME (SEC) ? 170

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 338.4

36
36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

TIME (SEC) ? 175

HEAT RELEASE

TIME (SEC)

HEAT RELEASE

TIME (SEC)

HEAT RELEASE

TIME (SEC)

HEAT RELEASE

TIME (SEC)

HEAT RELEASE

TIME (SEC)

HEAT RELEASE

TIME (SEC)

HEAT RELEASE

TIME (SEC)

HEAT RELEASE

TIME (SEC)

HEAT RELEASE

TIME (SEC)

HEAT RELEASE

TIME (SEC)

HEAT RELEASE

(kW)? 358 e 6

? 180

CkW)? 379 o

? 185

(kW)? 400.8

? ISO

(kW)? 422.7

? 195

(kW )

445 e

? 200

(kW)? 468 . 4

? 205

( kW ) ? 492.1

? 210

CkW)? 516 .

? 215

(kW)? 541.3

? 220

(kW)? 556.8

? 225

CkW)? 592.8

37
TIME (SEC) ? 230

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 619.5

TIME (SEC) ? 235

HEAT RELEASE ( kW)

?

646.7

TIME (SEC) ? 240

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 674.5

TIME (SEC) ? 245

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 702.9

TIME (SEC) ? 250

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 731.9

TIME (SEC) ? 255

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 761.5

TIME (SEC) ? 260

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 791.6

TIME (SEC) ? 265

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 822.4

TIME (SEC) ? 270

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 835.7

TIME (SEC) ? 275

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 885.6

TIME (SEC) ? 280

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 918.1

38
TIME (SEC) ? 285

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 951.2

TIME (SEC) ? 290

HEAT RELEASE CkW)? 984 0 9

TIME (SEC) ? 295

HEAT RELEASE (kW)

1019.1

TIME (SEC) ? 300

HEAT RELEASE CkW)? 1053 .

a Je n \ ^ # ? 305

HEAT RELEASE (kW)1089 o

TIME (SEC) ? 310

HEAT RELEASE (kW)

1125.4

TIME (SEC) ? 315

HEAT RELEASE (kW)

1182.0

TIME (SEC) ? 320

HEAT RELEASE CkW)? 1199 .

TIME (SEC) ? 325

HEAT RELEASE (kW>? 1238.

TIME (SEC) ? 330

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 1275.3

TIME (SEC) ? 335

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 1314.2
69 . . TIME ( SEC ) ? 340

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 1353.7

70 . . TIME (SEC) ? 345

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 1393.8

71 . . TIME (SEC) ? 350

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 1434.5

72 . . TIME (SEC) ? 355

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 1475.8

73 . . TIME (SEC) ? 360

HEAT RELEASE (kW)? 1517.7

74 . . TIME (SEC) ? -1

SEND OUTPUT TO PRINTER (Y OR N) ? N

CEILING HEIGHT* 3.6576 RADIUS* 2.155 DET ACT TEMP* 54.444 RTI * 370.34

TIME FIRE GAS TEMP DET TEMP

sec kW C C

0.0 0.0 21.1 21.1

10.0 1.2 22.0 21.1

20.0 4.7 23.4 21.1

30.0 10.5 25.2 21.2

40.0 18.7 27.1 21.3

50.0 29.3 29.3 21.4

60.0 42.2 31.6 21.6

70.0 57.4 34.0 21.9

80.0 75.0 36.5 22.2

90.0 94.9 39.2 22.6

100.0 117.1 41.9 23.1

110.0 141.7 44.8 23.6

120.0 168.6 47.7 24.2

130.0 197.9 50.8 24.9

140.0 229.5 53.8 25.7

150.0 263.5 57.0 26.6

160.0 299.8 60.3 27.6

170.0 338.4 63.6 28.7

180.0 379.4 67.0 29.8

190.0 422.7 70.4 31.1

200.0 468.4 73.9 32.4

40
210.0 SIS.

77.5 33.9

220.0 556.8 80.6 35.4

230.0 619.5 84.8 37.1

240.0 674.5 88.5 38.8

250.0 731.9 92.3 40.6

260 o 0 791.6 96 .

42.6

270.0 835.7 99.2 44.6

280.0 918.1 104.0 46.7

290.0 984 .

108.0 48.9

300.0 1053 .

112.0 51.2

310.0 1125.4 116.1 53.6

**** DETECTOR ACTUATION AT 313.4 SECONDS **** TYPE A CARRIAGE RETURN TO CONTINUE?

ANALYZE SAME FIRE WITH DIFFERENT DETECTOR (Y OR N) ? N
DETACT-QS Code Listing

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

180

190

200

210

220

230

240

250

260

270

280

290

300

310

320

330

340

350

360

370

380

390

400

410

420

430

440

450

460

470

480

490

500

510

520

530

540

550

DIM 3(101) , Q ( 101

)

K.« 10

“DETACT-QS VERSION 1.1 WRITTEN BY D . D

.

EVANS 1985"

“CONTRIBUTION OF THE NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS (U.S.)

“NOT SUBJECT TO COPYRIGHT.

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT

INPUT

PRINT

PRINT

INPUT

PRINT

PRINT

INPUT

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT

INPUT

PRINT

PRINT

INPUT

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT

’QUASI-STEADY FIRE CALCULATION OF DETECTOR ACTUATION TIME"

'BELOW AN UNCONFINED CEILING BASED ON ALPERT' S EQUATIONS’*

’AS PUBLISHED IN FIRE TECHNOLOGY AUGUST 1972.“

“HEIGHT

H

USER SUPPLIED INPUT”

OF CEILING ABOVE FUEL (METERS)

“DISTANCE

R

• • It “INITIAL

T1

• 0 It “DETECTOR

“(140 F = T9

• t it “DETECTOR

L

OF DETECTOR FROM AXIS OF FIRE (METERS)

ROOM TEMPERATURE (CELSIUS)

ACTUATION TEMPERATURE

60 C 160 F = 71 C

(CELSIUS)”

165 F = 74 C)

RESPONSE TIME INDEX (RTI) (m»s)~(l/2)

“NEXT A DESCRIPTION OF THE FIRE HEAT RELEASE RATE AS A“

“AS A FUNCTION OF TIME MUST BE CONSTRUCTED. THIS WILL BE"

“DONE BY THE USER ENTERING KEY HEAT RELEASE RATES ALONG"

“THE DESIRED FIRE CURVE. FOR THE USERS INFORMATION THE"

“MINIMUM HEAT RELEASE RATE NECESSARY TO ACTUATE THE”

“DETECTOR AT THE LOCATION GIVEN IS”;

X = ( (T9-T1 ) *H/5.38*R~ (2/3) ) ~ (3/2)

IF R/H>.18 THEN 390

X = ( ( T9-T1 ) *H~ (5/3) / 16.9) ~ (3/2)

X = X* .5

X s INT ( X

)

PRINT X;

PRINT “ kW . " PRINT “ “ PRINT “ " PRINT

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT

PRINT

N = 1

“ENTER KEY HEAT -RELEASE RATES THAT DETERMINE THE SHAPE OF THE"

“DESIRED FIRE DEVELOPMENT CURVE. USUALLY THE FIRST DATA"

"PAIR WILL BE ( TIME 0 HEAT RELEASE 0 ) . UP TO 100"

“PAIRS CAN BE ENTERED. TO STOP ENTERING DATA ENTER ANY"

“NEGATIVE TIME VALUE. THE PROGRAM WILL GENERATE HEAT"

"RELEASE RATE VALUES BETWEEN THE VALUES

“BASED ON A STRAIGHT LINE INTERPOLATION

"ONE SECOND INTERVALS”

ENTERED

BETWEEN

AS NEEDED’

POINTS AT’

42
560 FOR 1=1 TO 101

570 S<I)*1.701412E-38

580 Q ( I ) =0

590 NEXT I

600 PRINT N i 610 PRINT "o. TIME (SEC)

620 INPUT SCN)

630 IF S(N)<0 THEN 710

640 PRINT 88 66 650 PRINT 80 HEAT RELEASE (kW) c0 ? 660 INPUT QCN)

670 PRINT 88 68 680 N=N^1

690 PRINT ** ** 700 GOTO 600

710 S(N) =S(N-1> *1

720 PR =0

730 PRINT " 740 PRINT "SEND OUTPUT TO PRINTER <Y OR N) 80 ; 750 INPUT AS

760 IF AS = "Y" OR AS- 8, y" THEN PR^l

770 PRINT 66 " 780 PRINT "CEILING HEIGHT ""“Hi" RADIUS^ 80 ; R i

80 DET ACT TEMP

790 PRINT 88 88 800 PRINT 80 TIME FIRE GAS TEMP DET TEMP68 810 PRINT " sec kW C C"

820 IF PR “O THEN 920

830 LPRINT

840 LPRINT

850 LPRINT

860 LPRINT

870 LPRINT

880 LPRINT

890 LPRINT

900 LPRINT

910 LPRINT

920 I*N-1

930 P -

940 N-0

950 T4=T1

960 T5=T1

970 T6=T1

980 J=1

990 IF N<S(J~1) THEN 1020

1000 J=J^1

1010 GOTO 990

1020 0=(N-S(J))/(S(J-=1)-S(J))*(Q(J<=1)-Q(J))*G(J)

1030 T4=T5

1040 S6=T6

1050 T6=16.9*0~(2/3)/H>'<5/3)+’Tl

1060 IF R/H<=.18 THEN 1080

1070 T6=5 .38* (0/R) ~ (2/3) /H-Tl

1080 V6 = .95* (0/H) ~ (1/3)

1090 IF R/H < = . 15 THEN 1110

1100 V6 = .2*0^ (1/3) *H~ (1/2) /R~ (5/6)

"DETACT-OS VERSION Ll,e

«• ii "CEILING HEIGHT' 88

; H ; m

88 "DETECTOR DISTANCE FROM AXIS OF FIRE= 88 ;R;" m"

"DETECTOR ACTUTATION TEMP- 68

f T9?" C”

"RTI = " ; L? 88 <m*s) ~ ( 1/2) 88

10 ie " TIME FIRE GAS TEMP DET TEMP 88 " see kW C C"
iiiO IF V6> . i THEN 1130

1120 V6 = . 1

1130 L1*L/V6*.5

1140 B=T6-56

1150 T5=T4* (S6-T4) *< 1-EXP ( -1/Ll) ) +B*L1* (EXP ( -1/Ll ) *1/L1-1>

1160 IF P<K THEN 1200

1170 PRINT USING •*########.#••; N , 0 „ S6 , T4

1180 IF PR= 1 THEN LPRINT USING "######## . ; N , 0 , S6

„

T4

1190 P=0

1200 N=N*1

1210 P = P + 1

1220 IF T5<T9 THEN 990

1230 GOSUB 1680

1240 PRINT " •* 1250 PRINT " **** DETECTOR ACTUATION AT”;

1260 PRINT USING "######.#•*;£;

1270 PRINT " SECONDS *»**"

1280 PRINT M ** 1290 IF PR=0 THEN 1350

1300 LPRINT " " 1310 LPRINT "   DETECTOR ACTUATION AT”;

1320 LPRINT USING ”######.#”;£;

1330 LPRINT ” SECONDS »** *"

1340 LPRINT ” ” 1350 PRINT "TYPE A CARRIAGE RETURN TO CONTINUE”;

1360 INPUT AS

1370 PRINT ” ” 1380 PRINT "ANALYZE SAME FIRE WITH DIFFERENT DETECTOR (Y OR N)

1390 INPUT AS

1400 IF AS= ” Y” OR AS="yTHEN 1420

1410 END

1420 PRINT "CHANGE RTI VALUE (Y OR N) ";

1430 INPUT AS

1440 IF ASO"Y” AND ASO”y” THEN 1470

1450 PRINT "NEW VALUE = 1460 INPUT L

1470 PRINT "CHANGE ACTUATION TEMPERATURE <Y OR N) ";

1480 INPUT AS

1490 IF ASO"Y" AND ASO"y" THEN 1520

1500 PRINT "NEW VALUE = ";

1510 INPUT T9

1520 PRINT "CHANGE FUEL TO CEILING HEIGHT <Y OR N) ";

1530 INPUT AS

1540 IF ASO "Y" AND ASO"y" THEN 1570

1550 PRINT "NEW VALUE* ";

1560 INPUT H

1570 PRINT "CHANGE RADIUS OF DETECTOR FROM FIRE AXIS <Y OR N) " 1580 INPUT AS

1590 IF AS < >

" Y" AND ASO"y" THEN 1620

1600 PRINT "NEW VALUE= ";

1610 INPUT R

1620 PRINT "CHANGE PRINTOUT INTERVAL (Y OR N) "

;

1630 INPUT AS

1640 IF ASO"Y" AND ASO"y" THEN 1670

1650 PRINT "NEW VALUE = ";

44
1660 INPUT K

1670 GOTO 770

1680 E=N-1*(T9-T4)/<T5-T4)

1690 E=E* 100* « 5

1700 EsINTCE)

1710 E~E/ 100

1720 RETURN

45
NBS-114A <REV. 2-80

U.S. DEPT. OF COMM.

BIBLIOGRAPHIC DATA

SHEET (See instructions)

1. PUBLICATION OR

REPORT NO.

NBSIR-85/3167

2. Performing Organ. Report No. 3. Publication Date July 1985

4. TITLE AND SUBTITLE

Methods to Calculate the Response Time of Heat and Smoke Detectors

Installed Below Large Unobstructed Ceilings

5. AUTHOR(S)

David D. Evans, David W. Stroup

6. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION (If joint or other than NBS, see instructions)

national bureau of standards

DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

WASHINGTON, D.C* 20234

7. Contract/Grant No.

8. Type of Report & Period Covered

9. SPONSORING ORGANIZATION NAME AND COMPLETE ADDRESS ( Street. City . State, ZIP)

U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission

Washington, D.C. 20555

10c SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES

1~~~1 Document describes a computer program; SF-185, FIPS Software Summary, is attached.

lie ABSTRACT (A 200-word or less factual summary of most si gnificant information. If document includes a significant

bibliography or literature survey, mention it here)

Recently developed methods to calculate the time required for ceiling mounted

heat and smoke detectors to respond to growing fires are reviewed. A computer program, that calculates activation times for both fixed temperatures and rate of

rise heat detectors in response to fires that increase in heat release rate

proportionally with the square of time from ignition is given. This program produces

equivalent results to the tables published in Appendix C, Guide for Automatic

Fire Detector Spacing, (NFPA 72E, 1984). A separate method and corresponding program are provided to calculate response time for fires having arbitrary heat release

rate histories. This method is based on quasi—steady ceiling layer gas flow

assumptions. Assuming a constant proportionality between smoke and heat release

from burning materials, a method is described to calculate smoke detector response

time modeling the smoke detector as a low temperature heat detector in either of the

two response time models.

12. KEY WORDS (Six to twelve entries ; alphabetical order; capitalize only proper names; and separate key words by semicolon s) ceilings; computer program; egress; escape; fire alarms; fire detection; fire

suppression; heat detectors; smoke detectors; sprinkler systems

13. AVAILABILITY

jc' '

)

Unl imited

1 j For Official Distribution. Do Not Release to NTIS

j j Order From Suoerintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.

20402.

Order From National Technical Information Service (NTIS), Springfield, VA. 22161

14. NO. OF

PRINTED PAGES

49

15. Price

$ 8.50

USCOMM-OC 8043-P80
APPENDIX D
'
Three Proposed Typical House Designs

for Energy Conservation Research

August 10

Sc Robert Hastings

Architectural Research Section

Technical Evaluation and Application Division

Center for Building Technology

Institute for Applied Technology

National Bureau of Standards

Prepared for:

Department of Housing and Urban Development

and

Energy Research and Development Administration
FOREWORD

This is one of a series of working reports documenting NBS research

efforts to develop energy and cost data. The work described in this

report was jointly funded through ERDA/NBS Mod. No. 2 of Contract

E (49-1) 3800 and Task Order No. EA-77-A-01-6010 and through HUD/NBS

Contract No. RT193-12.

The background work for this report was completed in support of two

other reports "Geographic Variation in the Heating and Cooling

Requirements of a Typical Single-Family House", and "Determination

of Optimal Energy Conservation Designs in Single-Family Housing:

Preliminary Results".

The house designs presented in this report are not intended as "model

houses which should be copied for any particular design qualities.

Their purpose is merely to typify a large percentage of new house

construction being built in the U.S. today. They are presented to

provide a basis for comment with suggested revisions to improve their

representativeness welcome.

ii
ABSTRACT

The ability of various energy conservation design features to reduce

residential energy consumption can only be judged by comparing houses

with and without such features. Comparisons can be made based on measuring energy consumption of actual houses, or by computer modeling

energy consumption. With either approach, if the houses being evaluated

are the basis for estimating regional or national energy savings

possible with a given change from current construction practice, it is

important that the houses be typical of the given population of houses.

For that purpose this report contains three house designs typical of

new house construction for much of the nation.

iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Foreword

Abstract

SI Conversion

1. Introduction

2 . Drawings

Ranch

Townhouse

Two-Story

3. Materials Specifications

4. Thermal Resistance of Materials

Used in the Three Houses

5. Suggested Applications for the

Three Typical Designs

6 Conclusion
SI Conversion

In view ©f present accepted practice by the building industry in the

United States , common U.S. units of measurement have been used throughout this paper. In recognition of the position of the U.S.A. as a signatory to the General Conference on Weights and Measures, which gave

official status to the Metric SI System of units in 1960, the following

conversion factors are provided to assist readers who use the SI units.

Length

1

Inch (

et ) « 0.0254 meter

1 foot C) * 0.3048

Area

2

2

1 square foot (ft ) K 0.0929 meter

Volume

3 3

1 cubic foot (ft ) 0.0283 meter

Thermal Resistance

1 °F h ft

2

/Btu * 0.1761m2 e C/W

v
'

.
1. INTRODUCTION

House designs typical of today's construction practices are needed as a

basis for comparing the effectiveness of various energy conservation

strategies. This report proposes three typical houses as follows;

1) a compact "ranch style" house

2) a townhouse

3) a larger two story detached house

These are not intended to be "model" houses which should be copied

because of any particular design qualities. Instead, they are intended

to be typical of housing now being built in the U.S.A.

The design of the three houses was based upon the judgment of the

author (an architect experienced in residential design) and upon a 1974

report by the National Association of Home Builders (NAHB) titled,

"A National Survey of Characteristics and Construction Practices for All

Types of One Family Houses." The survey data represented 84,000 homes

built by 1600 builders selected randomly from the 27,000 builder members

of NAHB.

The decision to present three house designs was based on the NAHB

statistics on the frequency of various house configurations. Out of the

total number of houses constructed by builders in the survey, 73 percent

were detached, 19 percent were townhouses, and 8 percent were duplexes,

quadruplexes , or "other." Given these percentages it was decided to

present designs for the detached and townhouse categories but not for

1-1
the duplex , quadruplex, and other category since the latter represented

a small percentage comprised of diverse configurations. The decision to

present two detached designs was based on the fact that of all detached

houses in the survey, 52 percent were one-story and 17 percent were

two-story. Since detached houses constituted such a large percentage

of the houses, separate designs for one and two-story houses were deemed

necessary. Separate designs were not presented for "split level" houses

(bedroom area half a flight up from living area) nor for "bi-level" or

"raised ranch" houses (ranch plan above a half out of the ground

basement) because these configurations are merely a variation of the

ranch design and can easily be derived, given the information for the

ranch design.

Each of the three house designs presented varies slightly from the

national average for all houses. The basementless ranch house, with

1176 sq.ft, of floor area, is smaller than the national average detached

house of 1684 sq.ft. The smaller size was based on two judgment

factors: First, the three-bedroom, one-story houses would tend to be

smaller than the overall average floor area of all single-family detached

houses which include two-story houses and houses with basements.

Second, since 1974, the trend has been for new houses to be more compact

and it is expected that this trend will continue. A final note regarding

the ranch design, windows have been excluded from the side elevations.

This is a common practice due to closeness of neighboring houses.

Window areas for the front and rear elevations were selected as the

minimum desirable for the room areas, given that orientation is unknown.

1-2
The ranch houae design, as veil as the other tvo house designs, is

meant to be typical of today's home building practices and is not a house specifically designed for energy conservation.

The townhouse, with a floor area of 1315 sq.ft.

,

is also smaller than

the national average of 1393 sq.ft., again reflecting the trend towards

more compact houses. Also, three bedrooms were included, rather than

the national average of 2.2 bedrooms, because it was felt that this

configuration has become prevalent as townhouses have become increasingly

common.

The two-story house, with 1994 sq.ft, of finished floor area plus

a basement, is slightly larger than the national average of 1684 sq.ft.

This house design is included to represent a high-priced category of

large houses.

1-3

2 . Drawings

Schedule of Drawings

Ranch plan

elevations

section

schedule of component

surface areas

elevations

section

schedule of component

surface areas

2nd floor plan

front elevation

rear elevation

section

schedule of component

surface areas

Key to Symbols Used in Drawings

2850 - 2

f -8" W x 5f -0" H

TW * twin windows

DH * doublehung

SL GL DR * sliding glass door

FG * fixed glass

HT * height

O.C. * on center

Townhouse plans

Two-Story 1st floor plan

2-1
42'0'

LU

00Dox

.xuz<

OtL <yQ. >h—<U. oz<

CXL oo 5

,. 0.82

2-2
FRONT

ELEVATION

OF

A

TYPICAL

RANCH

HOUSE
SJIOMHS

iTVBciSV

i

2-4

i

SECTION

THRU

TYPICAL

RANCH
SCHEDULE

OF

COMPONENT

SURFACE

AREAS

i

hi

<fc3

ce

v£> N© m m © NO 06 NO CM NO © •>3 00 «

on vO in CM m OH NO <n ON en CM n pH

pH pH cn pH pH CM © pH pH

pH fH pH

pH pH pH

ce eg ce 4J U hi hi © O Q ©

O H H

as ce © ©

U M ©

© eg OB

ce pH pH p-;>- pH •>*=*> »=h © ?H © 00 ©

© © as © 1 © ©

© }-! 3 © © u © © © pH u ©

3 4H= •IH 00 ©

© © pH © pH 3 u

33 3 pH 3 pH pH o

<p=*, © © © f=H © ©

<& © 4H 3 © © pH

© © © © 00 5 u <H M 4^ hi 3 ©

5 « 8«€ © 8*S © «pH 8-3 8^ m 3 m 3 "3 m pH O

•M r*> 3 ao pH ON © W NH w NtH pH w ©

© © © © 5 U © © 3 © © c © 8-€ © 8“4 © 8^ © o n U in •w u in U

© •< CM < CM < pH <

© w/ ©

•© 3 © 3 © 3 3

3 o © © © © O © ©

3 © •H © © © < •pH © H

o © hi M U hi W) hi M © © < < « < « < 00 ©

00 pH © pH © pH 3 pH w C u 3 •o -a u 3 ’O "0 © 3 •H 3

3 © 3 3 © © 3 3 © © 3 pH ©

JO pH o 3 hi •H o © 3 u •H •3 3 4-1 H 3

© pH >-) w C/3 3 o © w C/3 3 •H M C/3 © H

pH © oe C/3 O

C/3 3

iH©

u

oH

©

©

u©

2-5

Truss

Cord

Area

(10%

floor
..o-.zc 2-6

LOWER

FLOOR

PLAN

OF

A

TYPICAL

TOWNHOUSE

UPPER

FLOOR

PLAN

OF

A

TYPICAL

TOWNHOUSE
2-7

FRONT

&

REAR

ELEVATIONS

OF

A

TYPICAL

TOWNHOUSE
ASPHALT

SHHGLES

‘/a

”

PLYWOOD

SHEATHING

2-8

SECTION

THRU

TYPICAL

TOWNHOUSE
SCHEDULE

OF

COMPONENT

SURFACE

AREAS

4*^

c

S3

^=4

© en © © CM ee © © ia v© f=4 m vO m a* CM en in © an Os V© V© s© *< m *=

pH m cn S©

4>as3

OM

§

oH

C/3 aj 3

F=>! as *—

C8 a> as 03 © fed u d“*y <<~y <M 0 <e o as ee o H ° H as as h

pH c°*y pH ee fed fed fH ee pH as “3 as as 0! as fed 3 ee o fed as pH © © id f=4 00 ©

as f*4 01 r=*4 r-4 e F”4 3 ee o fe*d ee 3 pH

S<’ 00 as m m id ©

as r^ © r*«. a) « /—

y

©

u Vo' as Vsd s r-H US w

as c a fH

as ee 5^ c *H ee id a

}

as m ee as

CJ m fed fM v»/ 3 fed ee << esi < <

u w a{ C0 >y 3 s as 3 a> id 3

O 0 ee fed es 0 3 fed © u «*4 as < Hi •»=4 a) < as

4=) fed u id fed Pd id 3 ee < 3 < as < 3 •w 3

3 »=1 0 r=4 o

3 OS 3 *3 3 fed 3 •3 3 1 3 o as as 3 c 0 OS 3 C 03

fed as © 3 id *H o 3 id •H as 3

00 fed 3 w C/3 3 a fed M 3 as 00 M

0 ee 3 3

fed Hi =H © iH fe erg C/3 f=4

(U ©

2-9

Cord

Area

(10%

floor
2846

TW

2234

IW

6068

SL

GL

Di

U

CL

9T8C 9T8Z

I L. ,_J _ J

..8-.8J *

2-10

LOWER

FLOOR

PLAN

OF

A

TYPICAL

2

STORY

HOUSE
34-0

..o°.oe

UPPER

FLOOR

PLAN

OFA

TYPICAL 2

STORY

HOUSE
2-12ml
4J**"

• * * ‘

, • •.

1 * '

v t

I %

1

\ ' ' \

i /

^ !

'

V

, » i

‘ N

' f 'x '

-

' *

, f

'V

?

1 •

' L

f h I ! ; ;i I

2-13

REAR

ELEVATION

OF

A

TYPICAL

2

STORY

HOUSE

0

4

8

AUG.

10.1977

IT!

F

1

N8S
ASPHALT

SHMG

'/j"

PLYWOOD

If MiU JOT. [

SECTION

THRU

TYPICAL

2

STORY

HOUSE
SCHEDULE

OF

COMPONENT

SURFACE

AREAS

43c

03 m e©

m o ee Cl ee 0S CSj C3 Cl c* r* <N v© <N 00 N© en ee pH r-* CN

cr> pH

m cs «=h WH

hi pH

•H3A

pH H C3 rH

eg <m cc ce 45 hj pH hi 0 0 cu 0 H H 03 H UH

4H

0)CO3O

pH3co

f?H JHao 0

hi CO1o3H

as UH 3

0) pH 03 h in

as

U 3 • as pH Li pH pH /p\ fH as *3 •H pH 3

as 03 e C6 03 3 U • 3 H

as pH 03 as u ee 4H

03 pH 05 03 pH e pH • 03 C pH

as pH *3 3

s^s 3 03 pH 5>S 3 m 03 m

HI

© 00 hi a rH H 3 3 U <HI C

as ce 3 0) 3

03 03 5^ 03 H pH 03 5^5 fH u in w U m

pH < CN c HS < pH

as

w as 3 as 3 c 03 c 3 H C 3 0 as u 3 0 CO H 0 3 H a iH o> < 03 •H 03 < 00 •H 3 < o hi n U H U pH HI H

•H 03 as < 3 < 3 < 3 H 3 < 3

H! as rH O rH O w rH o a <v 3 "3 *3 u 3 *3 *3 3 "3 *3

T5 u hi 03 3 C 0 03 3 C 03 03 3 C 3 < s C ni •H 0 c H H 03 3 Hi pH 3 o w cn 2 Q as M C/3 *3 M CO S O cH u 3 H

in rH Cn c* CO

as 5

ooc

0) u

2-15

Insulation

Area

(90%

floor

area)

918

Truss

Cord

Area

(10%

floor

area)

102

Total

1020

3c MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS

The following is a list of the materials noted on the drawings for the

ranch and two-story houses (detached) and for the townhouse, along with

the percentage of houses in the NAHB survey which were built using these

materials. Also, included are design features incorporated in the three

house designs with associated NAHB reported percentages from the same

survey. In a few instances the material specified or the design

feature included in the typical house designs do not represent the

highest percentage reported in the NAHB survey. The basis for such

deviation is the author's judgment of changes in building practice

since the 1974 NAHB survey. In these cases, both the selected material

or design feature and its associated percentage as well as the material

or design feature with the highest survey percentage (shown in parentheses)

are reported. In some instances the majority of responding builders did

not answer a question regarding use of a material. This is indicated

by "no answer" in the percentage column

3-1
MATERIALS SPECIFIED

NAHB Reported

Percent of Total

First Floor (on grade)

Detached Townhouses

1 inch perimeter insulation no answer

Carpet 85 89

First floor (above basement)

no insulation no answer

5/8” plywood underlayment 17 40

Carpet 85 89

Exterior Walls

Aluminum siding 15 24

(Brick) (34) (24)

1/2" intermed. density insul. bd. 27 35

2x4 framing 16" o.c. 78 95

3 1/2" R-ll Batt insul. 71 81

Kraft paper vapor barrier 35 30

1/2" gypsum wallboard 82 78

Windows

_ Aluminum 64 78

Double-hung 33 —

Horizontal sliders — 35

Single glazing 70 66

No storm sash 75 72

Doors

Solid wood (front entry) 67 43

No storm door 75 72

Sliding glass door (dining area) not reported

3-2
NAHB Reported

Percent of Total

Detached Tewnhouses

Roof /Ceiling 0

. Asphalt Shingle S5 77

1/2 inch plywood sheathing 55 51

2x4 (or 6) trusses 24 inches o.c. 63 72

R-19 loose fill (+6") insulation 41 29

R-19 batt (6") insulation ~ (39)

1/2 inch dryvall 80 89

Plumbing/Mechanical

Warm air, ducted heating 79 80

Electric furnace not reported

Natural gas furnace (49) (40)

Central air conditioning 67 86

Electric domestic water heater 51 55

3-3

:
NAHB Reported

Percent of Total

Detached Townhouse

8

DESIGN FEATURES

Foundation:

Slab-on-grade 34 70

(Full basement) (34) (25)

Number of floors:

One-story 52 —

Two-story 17 73

Finished Floor Area:

1200-1599 31 57

1600-2399 43 —

Garages

none not reported

one-car — 29

two-car (70) —

Number of bedrooms

three 68 66

four 25

Number of bathrooms

(one and one half) — (38)

two 50.1 —

two and one half 22 36.7

Roof form - gable 75 76

(Fireplace) (57) (50)

3-4
4. THERMAL RESISTANCE OF MATERIALS USED IN THE THREE HOUSES

COMPONENT R (for thlcknesa listsd)

First Floor (on grade)

Expanded polystyrene extruded (1”) 5 e Q0

Poured concrete slab (4") 0*32

Carpet and fibrous pad 2 O 08

Horizontal air film (still , heat flow down) 0,92

Total 8.32

First Floor (above basement)

The basement is assumed to be unheated. However, transient heat

from the heating plant (located in the basement) warms the air near

the basement ceiling sufficiently to make it unnecessary t©

calculate downward heat loss through the first floor according

to the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals , page 378, (see note 5).

Walls (insulation area)

Vertical air film (15 mph wind) 0.17

Aluminum siding 8 0.60

Intermediate density insulating sheathing (1/2") 1.22

Cavity insulation 11.00

Gypsum wallboard (1/2") 0.45

Vertical air film (still) 0.68

Total 14.12

Walls (stud area)

Vertical air film (15 mph wind) 0.17

Aluminum siding 0,60

Intermediate density insulating sheathing 1.22

2x4 wooden studs 4.35

Gypsum wallboard (1/2") 0,45

Vertical air film 0.68

Total 7.47

4-1
Windows

Vertical air film (15 mph wind) 0.17

Architectural glass 0.03

Vertical air film (still) 0.68

Total 0.88

Doors - (front entry)

Vertical air film (15 mph wind) 0.17

Solid Hardwood (1 3/4”) 1.59

Vertical air film (still) 0.68

Total 2.44

Ceiling (insulation area)

Horizontal air film (still, heat flow up) 0.61

Gypsum drywall (1/2") 0.45

Insulation 19.00

Horizontal air film (still, heat flow up) 0.61

Total 20.67

Ceiling (truss cord area)

Horizontal air film (still, heat flow up) 0.61

Gypsum drywall (1/2") * 0.45

2 z 4 wooden truss cords 4.35

Horizontal air film (still, heat flow up) 0.61

Total 6.02

Notes

1. The resistances in the above table are calculated from tables given

in Chapter 20 of the 1972 edition of the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals

published by the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air*

Conditioning Engineers, Inc., New York.

2. It could be Inferred that since R-values were given for the

ceiling and insulation only, the attic temperature is assumed to be

4-2
at the outside air temperature. This may or may not be true depending

on the amount of attic ventilation. An ongoing national Bureau of

Standards project recording attic temperatures for various attic

ventilation conditions will provide more data to help quantify the

extent the attic serves as a buffer In winter and a heat trap in summer

3. Since the windows are specified to be aluminum* the Revalue can be applied to the entire window area. It is unreasonable* however* to

assert that the windows are typically left uncovered at night given the

privacy concern in urban or suburban environments. A tight-weave

drapery hanging to the floor and in loose contact with the walls at the

sides of the windows could be expected to increase the resistance to

heatflow of the window by 10 to 15 percent. This is substantial as the reduction occurs at night when winter outside-inside temperature

differences are greatest.

4. In calculating the downward heatflow through the slab a resistance

must be assigned to the earth immediately below the slab. The perimeter

insulation isolates the earth below the slab from the earth beyond to

the extent of the insulation's R-value. To calculate how much heat

is lost laterally out of the sides of the slab see Table 2 * page 378

of the 1972 ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals .

c 5. In calculating summer heat gain the resistance of the air film is

considered to be 0.25 rather than 0.17 as a 7 1/2 mph wind is

conventionally assumed rather than the 15 mph wind for winter.

Similarly, the value for the air film at the attic surfaces would

be slightly better (0.92) in the summer as the direction of heat flow

is downward as apposed to upward is winter (0.61).

4-3
, I
5, SUGGESTED APPLICATIONS TOR THE THREE TYPICAL DESIGNS

This report provides s bests for research is the trees of energy

conservation, fire safety, security, end environmental behavior.

As example research project is the area of energy conservation

would be to model the energy consumption of the houses in

each of 10 different locations (selected to represent a sampling of the various climates in the U.S.) and quantify

the effects of various climate variables on the energy consumption

of typical new houses. Such a study has been completed for the

ranch house (publication is expected is the near future) , but

needs to be done for the townhouse and the twe«=ft©ry house. Once

these data have been calculated and tabulated they will provide a comparative basis for many energy conservation modifications . For

example, the houses could be reanalyged with the glass areas greatly

increased on the elevation facing south and decreased to HUB

minimum property standards on the elevation facing north. At the

* same time, double glazing could be substituted for single glaging.

Included in the reports of these data could be illustrations of how

energy efficient fenestration and orientation can be achieved while

actually enhancing privacy through landscape planning. Examples include

the use of trees and shrubs, definition of court spaces, and

open space planning. Similar studies could be made to document

the energy and cost effectiveness of builders providing external

un protection for the glazed areas of houses, be it sun screens,

deciduous trees, awnings, or roof overhangs. Such a study.

5-1
especially in conjunction with a study of the effectiveness of

whole-house-fan ventilation, would document surprising energy

savings as a result of the dramatic reduction In the dependence

on mechanical air conditioning.

In the area of fire safety, the three house designs and material

specification provide a standard basis to study rates of flame

and smoke propagation, rates of release of toxic substances,

containment of heat, air movement patterns, and egress behavior

in conjunction with models of human decision making in fire

situations

.

t

Security Issues need to be Investigated concurrent with research

of various energy conservation measures such as adding storm windows

and storm doors. Increasing glass area on the south-facing side

(e.g., replacing a window with a sliding glass door) , orientating houses

away from the street when necessary to maximize south exposure, and

landscaping to shade windows (which may reduce street surveillance

# of windows and doors)

.

Finally, In the area of environmental behavior, these three designs

provide the starting point to study how trends In new house

construction (such as reducing house size) necessitate rethinking

the way Interior and exterior spaces are divided and defined relative

to life styles. As land costs, material costs, and labor costs Increase

first cost8 , and as energy costs Increase operating costs, future new

5-2
house design will change, A study is needed, starting, with the three

house designss to forecast various design and construction changes as

a result of these pressures and suggest the best alternatives c Such

a study would help assure that houses of the future are affordable,

energy conserving, and accomodate behavioral needs.

Each of these examples of further research benefits from using the

same three house designs as a baseline. The designs provide the common

denominator for evaluating how design modifications for one objective

such as energy conservation may help or hinder the achievement of

other objectives such as improved fire safety, security, or habitability.

5-3
‘
6. CONCLUSION

The three typical houce designs and material specifications

described in this report provide a statistically documented

basis from which energy savings for various improvements can

be calculated.

Of the three houses , the ranch is the most easily typified.

There are a limited number of permutations such as the

"raised ranch" and the "split level? In the case of the townhouse,

there are slightly mere variations in design, including the substitution

of the upstairs bath with a walk-in-closet, the placement of the kitchen

to the front of the townhouse with the previous location of the kitchen

becoming a dining area, and the front facade being flush with no overhangs and no sliding glass door off the breakfast area or upstairs

master bedroom.

Two-story houses, larger in size and higher in price than the

former two examples, are least easily typified. Typical variations from the design shown includes the location of the stair

in the center of the house and either parallel or perpendicular

to the run as shown, and the location of the upstairs baths in

the location of the bedroom number 3 as shown. The interior

partitioning in this design, as in the other two designs, is * not presently a concern in modeling energy consumption, however.

For both the two-story and the ranch it is coimnen to see an attached

one or two-car garage , sometimes with a family room to the rear of

the garage.

It is apparent, is each of the three designs, that common

cosmetic facade elements such as applied vinyl window shutters

have not been shown. It should not be concluded that this reflects the commonness or rarity of such features. Father, they

6-1
have been omitted merely because they typically have no significant effect on energy performance.

Finally, any conclusions based on these designs must be qualified

to reflect the fact that the designs are representative of new

house construction at the time of this publication. These designs are not representative of the whole housing stock (pre

World War XI houses differ substantially) » nor do the designs

anticipate changes In future house construction. The author invites

suggested modifications to the designs from the readers based on their experience of what is typical.

6—2
Acknowledgments

Graphic Assistances Andre Tanner

Statistical Data: NAHB Research Foundation* InCc

Rockville* Maryland 20850

Thermal Data: American Society ©f Heating* Refrigeration

and Air “Conditioning Engineers

345 East 47th Street

New York, N 0 Y«

/

k?7

& S'/

6-3
U.S. DEPT. OF COMM. 1. PUBLICATION OR 2. Performing Organ. Report NoJ 3. Publication Date

BIBLIOGRAPHIC DATA

SHEET (See instructions)

REPORT NO.

NBSIR 87-3602 JULY 1987

4. TITLE AND SUBTITLE

HAZARD I - Volume 1: Fire Hazard Assessment Method

5 author(S) ^- w - tfuicowstci , w.W. Jones, s.M. Levin, u.l. irorney, 5 . vJ . scierei

,

V. Babrauskas , E. Braun, and A. J. Fowell

6 . PERFORMING ORGANIZATION (If joint or other than NBS. see instructions) 7. Contract/Grant No. national bureau of standards

DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

WASHINGTON, D.C. 20234

8.

Type of Report & Period Covered

9.

SPONSORING ORGANIZATION NAME AND COMPLETE ADDRESS (Street. City. State, ZIP)

Partial Funding by: U. S. Consumer Product Safety Commission

Washington, D. C. 20207

10.

SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES

| | Document describes a computer program; SF-185, FIPS Software Summary, is attached.

11.

ABSTRACT (A 200-word or less factual summary of most si gnificant information. If document includes a si gnificant

bi bliography or literature survey, mention it here)

This report describes the first version of a method for predicting the hazards

to the occupants of a building involved in a fire. To implement this method, a software package called HAZARD I is provided. It includes a scenario

development utility (PRODUCT . ONE) ; an interactive program for inputting data to

the fire model (FINPUT) ; a data base program (FIREDATA) with files of

thermophysical, thermochemical, and reference toxicity data; the FAST model for

multi -compartment energy and mass transport; a graphics utility for plotting

data (FASTPLOT) ; a detector/sprinkler activation model (DETACT) ; an evacuation

model which includes human behavior (EXITT) ; and a tenability model (TENAB)

which evaluates the impact of the predicted exposure of the occupants in terms

of incapacitation or lethality from temperature or toxicity, or incapacitation

by burns. All of the software operates on a personal computer. Volume 2

contains complete documentation of a set of worked example cases and Volume 3 contains a complete copy of the data in the data base.

12.

KEY WORDS (Six to twelve entries; alphabetical order; capitalize only proper names; and separate key words by semicolons)

computer models; evacuation; fire models; hazard assessment; human behavior;

toxicity

13. AVAILABILITY

Uni imited

! ; For Official Distribution. Do Not Release to NTIS

|

! Order From Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington,

20402.

14. NO. OF

PRINTED PAGES

D.C. 420'

15. Price

Order From National Technical Information Service (NTIS), Springfield, VA. 22161 $36.95

USCOMM-OC 8043-090
I

I